DC30-011 Odyssey_Q-Vision HF Generator Service Manual_Rev W

™

ODYSSEY, Q-VISION HF Series™ X-ray Generators

Service Manual

Manual Part No. DC30-011 Revision W

EU Authorized Representative: Medizintechnik Berlin GmbH Altentreptower, Strasse 59 12683 Berlin - Germany Phone: +49-302-82 4726 Fax: +49-302-82 6382 E-mail: [email protected]

This manual is copyrighted and all rights are reserved. No portion of this document may be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without prior consent in writing from Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC. (QMI) This Service Manual is incomplete without Operator’s Manual part number DC30-010.

Copyright© 2010 QMI

Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC 2002-B Orville Drive North Ronkonkoma, NY 11779-7661 USA Phone: (631) 567-5800 Fax: (631) 567-5074 E-mail: [email protected] www.quantummedical.net

Made in U.S.A.

Revision History

REVISION

DATE

TYPE OF MODIFICATION

E

1/12/02

Incorporated ECO 0647, 0651, 0687

F

2/25/02

Incorporated ECO 0714, 0718, 0738, 0742

G

5/15/02

Incorporated ECO 0642, 0748, 0753, 0770, 0787, 0803, 0809, 0821, 0827, 0829, 0830, 0847, 0859, 0881, 0888

H

9/26/02

Incorporated ECO 0787

J

11/11/02

Incorporated ECO 0936, 1003, 1009, 1010, 1017, 1028, 1030

K

3/31/03

Incorporated ECO 1093, 1102, 1103, 1107, 1115, 1124, 1146

L

7/11/03

Incorporated ECO 1255, 1256

M

7/29/03


N

12/19/03

Incorporated ECO 1144, 1216, 1347, 1359, 1362, 1380, 1383, 1400

P

9/10/04

Incorporated ECO 1346, 1438, 1485, 1518

Q

4/22/05

Incorporated ECO 1565, 1570, 1600, 1606, 1607

R

12/20/05


S

5/22/07

Assigned new part number to Non-QMI HSS version manual; Incorporated ECO 1697, 1715, 1757, 1794, 1890

T

5/8/2008

Incorporate ECO 1895, 1920, 1932, 1977, 1985

U

11/21/2008

Incorporate ECO 2045, 2050, 2068, 2093, 2105

V

9/1/2009

Incorporate ECO 1980, 2160, 2166, 2169

W

1/15/2010

Incorporate ECO 2220, 2228, 2276

Page Number

Rev

i thru xii

W

1-1 thru 1-22

Page Number

Rev

Page Number

Rev

4-1 thru 4-20

W

B-1 thru B-56

W

W

5-1 thru 5-96

W

C-1 thru C-7

W

2-1 thru 2-56

W

6-1 thru 6-67

W

D-1 thru D-66

W

3-1 thru 3-72

W

A-1 thru A-16

W

HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging

Revision W

i

Revision History

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Revision W

ii


Table of Contents

CHAPTER 1 - SPECIFICATIONS SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS ................................................................. 1-3 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................. 1-5 GENERATOR CABINET SPECIFICATIONS ......................................... 1-5 OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL SPECIFICATIONS ............................... 1-5 ODYSSEY HF Control Panel: ..................................................... 1-5 Q-VISION HF Control Panel: .................................................... 1-5 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 1-5 POWER REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................... 1-6 SINGLE-PHASE X-RAY GENERATORS ............................................... 1-7 25 kW Single Phase (Model QG-25) ........................................... 1-7 25 kW Single Phase (Model QG-25-5)* ...................................... 1-7 32 kW Single Phase (Model QG-32) ........................................... 1-7 32 kW Single Phase (Model QG-32-5)* ...................................... 1-7 40 kW Single Phase (Model QG-40) ........................................... 1-8 40 kW Single Phase (Model QG-40-5)* ...................................... 1-8 32 kW Single Phase, Stored Energy ........................................... 1-8 40 kW Single Phase, Stored Energy ........................................... 1-8 50 kW Single Phase, Stored Energy ........................................... 1-8 THREE-PHASE X-RAY GENERATORS ................................................ 1-9 32 kW Three Phase (Model QG-32-2) ........................................ 1-9 32 kW Three Phase (Model QG-32-3) ........................................ 1-9 40 kW Three Phase (Model QG-40-2) ........................................ 1-9 40 kW Three Phase (Model QG-40-3) ........................................ 1-9 50 kW Three Phase (Model QG-50-2) ........................................ 1-9 50 kW Three Phase (Model QG-50-3) ........................................ 1-9 65 kW Three Phase (Model QG-65) ..........................................1-10 80 kW Three Phase (Model QG-80) ..........................................1-10 HIGH-SPEED STARTER POWER REQUIREMENTS ............................1-10 GENERATOR AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES ..........................................1-15 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................1-15 SYSTEM OPTIONS ..............................................................................1-19 SYSTEM OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ...................................................1-19 NON-OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ........................................................1-20

CHAPTER 2 - ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION OVERVIEW .......................................................................................... 2-3 PRE-INSTALLATION GUIDELINES ................................................... 2-3 Verify Equipment Location ........................................................ 2-3 Electrical Requirements ............................................................ 2-5 UNPACKING .................................................................................. 2-5 INSTALLATION .................................................................................... 2-6 REQUIRED TOOLS AND MATERIALS ............................................... 2-6


Revision W

iii

Table of Contents

CHAPTER 2 - ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION (CONT’D) GENERATOR CABINET SETUP ......................................................... 2-6 Transformer Line Tap Adjustment (Single Phase Non-SE Systems) 2-8 Transformer Line Tap Adjustment (Single Phase SE Systems) ....2-10 AC Input (Mains) Connection ...................................................2-12 High Voltage (H.V.) Tank ........................................................2-15 High Voltage Cables ................................................................2-18 INTERFACE BOARD SETTINGS & CONNECTIONS ............................2-21 Door Interlock Switch Connection ............................................2-22 "In Use" Light Switch Connection .............................................2-22 Collimator Connections ............................................................2-23 Tube Stand/Peripheral Equipment Connections .........................2-23 Internal +28 VDC Power Supply Option (QG-28VPS) .................2-23 Tube Rotor Boost Voltage Verification (Systems without High (Dual) Speed Starter Option) ..........................................2-24 RADIOGRAPHIC SYSTEM EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS ....................2-25 Tube Rotor Cable (Systems without High (Dual) Speed Starter Option) ......................................................................2-25 Tube Rotor Cable (Systems with AID External High Speed Starter QG-HSS Option Only) ........................................2-27 Tube Rotor Cable (Systems with Internal High Speed Starter Q-HSS Option Only) ....................................................2-30 Table/Wall Bucky Connections .................................................2-34 Table/Wall Ion Chamber Connections (AEC Option Only) ...........2-34 Interfacing to Canon Digital Radiographic Receptor (When Applicable) .................................................................2-35 Interfacing to CMT Digital Radiographic Receptor (When Applicable) .................................................................2-36 Interfacing to Siemens Ion Chambers (When Applicable) ...........2-36 Interfacing to Pausch Tomography System (When Applicable) ...2-39 OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL SETUP ..............................................2-41 ODYSSEY Operator Control Panel ............................................2-41 OCP Pedestal Mounting (QG-PDL Option) .................................2-41 OCP Wall Mounting (QG-WM Option) .......................................2-43 Q-VISION Operator Control Panel ............................................2-44 Integrated Workstation Operator Control Panel .........................2-46 Optional Remote Expose Switch Connection .............................2-47 INITIAL POWER UP ......................................................................2-47 TRANSFORMER TAP VALIDATION ..................................................2-48 Q-VISION OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL - NETWORK SETTINGS VERIFICATION ............................................................2-49 ROTOR DRIVE BOARD A10 (AY40-013T) PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION ............................................................................2-55

CHAPTER 3 - CALIBRATION OVERVIEW .......................................................................................... 3-3 REQUIRED TOOLS AND MATERIALS ............................................... 3-3

Revision W

iv


Table of Contents

CHAPTER 3 - CALIBRATION (CONT’D) SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CALIBRATION .............................................. 3-3 ACCESSING SERVICE MODE ........................................................... 3-4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .............................................................. 3-6 Printer On/Off Setting ............................................................... 3-7 Generator Configuration/Derating Settings ................................. 3-8 AEC Setting ............................................................................. 3-9 Rotor Drive Setting ................................................................. 3-10 Edit Facility/Welcome Facility Utility ......................................... 3-11 Tube Type Setting .................................................................. 3-12 Edit Digital Settings ................................................................ 3-13 Ion Chamber/Receptor Configuration ....................................... 3-14 Tomo Setting ......................................................................... 3-18 SYSTEM SETTINGS ...................................................................... 3-21 Set Date Screen ..................................................................... 3-22 Set Time Screen ..................................................................... 3-23 Film/Screen Defaults Screen ................................................... 3-23 APR Format Setting ................................................................ 3-25 Language Setting ................................................................... 3-26 Back Up MAS Setting .............................................................. 3-27 Generator Timeout Setting ...................................................... 3-28 Date/Time Format Setting ...................................................... 3-28 SYSTEM CALIBRATION ................................................................. 3-29 GENERAL CALIBRATION PROCEDURE NOTES ................................ 3-32 Film Speed Setting on non-AEC Systems .................................. 3-33 A/D Calibration ...................................................................... 3-34 kV Calibration Function ........................................................... 3-37 Filament Offset Calibration ...................................................... 3-39 MA Calibration ....................................................................... 3-43 AEC CALIBRATION ....................................................................... 3-46 AEC Calibration Procedures ..................................................... 3-48 NON-AEC REPRODUCIBILITY VERIFICATION ................................. 3-66 AEC REPRODUCIBILITY VERIFICATION (ONLY PERFORM ON UNITS EQUIPPED WITH QG-AEC OPTION) .............................. 3-67 NON-AEC LINEARITY VERIFICATION ............................................. 3-67 AEC LINEARITY VERIFICATION (ONLY PERFORM ON UNITS EQUIPPED WITH QG-AEC OPTION) ................................... 3-68 MAXIMUM DEVIATION: KVP, TIME, MA, MAS ................................. 3-68

CHAPTER 4 - THEORY OF OPERATION OVERVIEW .......................................................................................... 4-3 OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT ............................................ 4-3 Microcontroller U3 Operation ..................................................... 4-3 Flash Memory U2 ..................................................................... 4-3 EEPROM U17 Operation ............................................................ 4-4 LCD Controller U12 Operation ................................................... 4-4


Revision W

v

Table of Contents

CHAPTER 4 - THEORY OF OPERATION (CONT’D) Switching Power Supply Circuit ................................................. 4-5 Front Panel Key Activation Detection Circuit ............................... 4-5 Jumpers Installation ................................................................. 4-5 TechVision Compatibility .......................................................... 4-5 GENERATOR LOGIC CIRCUIT ......................................................... 4-5 Generator/OCP Communication ................................................ 4-6 Master and Slave Microcontroller Operation ............................... 4-6 FILAMENT CONTROL REGULATOR CIRCUIT .................................... 4-7 KVP & FILAMENT CONTROL CIRCUIT .............................................. 4-7 LINE MONITOR CIRCUIT (NON-SE SINGLE-PHASE AND THREE-PHASE SYSTEMS) .............................................................. 4-8 Input Line Monitor Circuit ......................................................... 4-8 Capacitor Discharge Circuit ....................................................... 4-9 Auto-Shutoff Circuit ................................................................. 4-9 Three-Phase Line Monitor Circuit .............................................4-10 LINE MONITOR CIRCUIT (STORED ENERGY SYSTEMS) ...................4-10 Battery Monitor Circuit ............................................................4-10 Storage Capacitor Discharge Circuit .........................................4-10 Generator Auto-Shutoff Circuit .................................................4-11 Battery Charger Circuit ............................................................4-11 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT ..............................................................4-12 +48 VDC Power Supply ...........................................................4-12 +15 VDC Power Supply ...........................................................4-12 +24 VDC Power Supply ...........................................................4-12 ROTOR BOARD CIRCUIT (NON-HIGH SPEED STARTER SYSTEMS) ...4-13 ROTOR BOARD CIRCUIT (QUANTUM INTERNAL HIGH SPEED STARTER SYSTEMS) .........................................................4-13 HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S) ....................................4-14 HSS Drive Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) .......................................4-15 AEC BOARD CIRCUIT ....................................................................4-16 Standard Type AEC .................................................................4-16 Universal Type AEC .................................................................4-17 +300 VDC Power Supply .........................................................4-18 AEC Control Circuitry ...............................................................4-18 Tomography Circuitry ..............................................................4-20

CHAPTER 5 - SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS OVERVIEW .......................................................................................... 5-3 DISPOSAL OF BATTERIES AND ACCUMULATORS (DIRECTIVE 2006/66/EC) .............................................................. 5-3 SERVICE MAINTENANCE ................................................................ 5-4 Visual Inspection ..................................................................... 5-4 TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................... 5-5 Warning Messages ................................................................... 5-5 Error Codes ............................................................................. 5-5 Optional +28 VDC Power Supply Troubleshooting .....................5-48

Revision W

vi


Table of Contents

CHAPTER 5 - SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS (CONT’D) SERVICE REPORTS ....................................................................... 5-49 Accessing Service Reports - ODYSSEY X-ray Generators ............ 5-49 Accessing Service Reports - Q-VISION Operator Control Panel ... 5-56 Accessing Service Reports - Integrated X-ray Generators .......... 5-63 REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ........................................ 5-72 Generator Cabinet Cover Removal ........................................... 5-72 Generator Cabinet Cover Replacement ..................................... 5-72 High Voltage (H.V.) A17 Tank Removal .................................... 5-73 High Voltage (H.V.) Tank A17 Installation ................................ 5-74 Power Modules A18 and A19 (P/N AY20-047) Removal ............ 5-75 Power Modules A18 and A19 (P/N AY20-047) Replacement ....... 5-77 Logic Board A1 (P/N AY40-006S) Removal ............................... 5-78 Logic Board A1 (P/N AY40-006S) Replacement ......................... 5-78 KVP Control Board A2 (P/N AY40-003S) Removal ..................... 5-80 KVP Control Board A2 (P/N AY40-003S) Replacement ............... 5-80 Filament Control Board A5 (P/N AY40-007T) Removal ............... 5-82 Filament Control Board A5 (P/N AY40-007T) Replacement ........ 5-82 Power Supply Board A6 (P/N AY40-005T) Removal ................... 5-83 Power Supply Board A6 (P/N AY40-005T) Replacement ............. 5-83 Line Monitor Board A8 Removal .............................................. 5-84 Line Monitor Board A8 Replacement ........................................ 5-84 Stored Energy Systems Line Monitor/Charger Board A8 (AY40-028T) Removal ........................................................... 5-85 Stored Energy Systems Line Monitor/Charger Board (AY40-028T) A8 Replacement ................................................ 5-86 Rotor Drive Board A10 (P/N AY40-013T) Removal .................... 5-87 Rotor Drive Board A10 (P/N AY40-013T) Replacement .............. 5-87 Standard AEC Control Board A11 (P/N AY40-031S) Removal ..... 5-88 Standard AEC Control Board A11 (P/N AY40-031S) Replacement 5-88 Universal AEC Control Board A11 (P/N AY40-027S) Removal ..... 5-89 Universal AEC Control Board A11 (P/N AY40-027S) Replacement 5-89 OCP Microprocessor Board A16 (P/N AY40-004S1) Removal (Not Applicable on Q-VISION or Integrated Generators) .......... 5-90 OCP Microprocessor Board A16 (P/N AY40-004S1) Replacement (Not Applicable on Q-VISION or Integrated Generators) .......... 5-90 Q-HSS Equipped Systems Only: High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1 (P/N AY40-035S) Removal ................................. 5-91 Q-HSS Equipped Systems Only: High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1 (P/N AY40-035S) Replacement ........................... 5-91 Q-HSS Equipped Systems Only: High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2 (P/N AY40-036S) Removal ................................. 5-92 Q-HSS Equipped Systems Only: High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2 (P/N AY40-036S) Replacement ........................... 5-92 Stored Energy System - Battery Tray Removal ......................... 5-93 Stored Energy System - Battery Tray Replacement ................... 5-95


Revision W

vii

Table of Contents

CHAPTER 5 - SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS (CONT’D) REPLACEMENT PARTS AND ORDERING INFORMATION ...................5-96 ORDERING INFORMATION ............................................................5-96

CHAPTER 6 - DIAGRAMS Single-Phase (Non-STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 25, 32 and 40 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2) ....................................... 6-3 Single-Phase (Non-STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 25, 32 and 40 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2) ................................. 6-4 Single-Phase (STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 20, 32 40 and 50 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2) ....................................... 6- 5 Single-Phase (STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 20, 32, 40 and 50 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2) ....................................... 6-6 Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 32 and 40 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2) .......................................................... 6-7 Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 32 and 40 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2) ....................................................................... 6-8 Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 50, 65 and 80 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2) ....................................................................... 6-9 Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 50, 65 and 80 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2) ......................................................................6-10 Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 50, 65 and 80 kW (with QMI-HSS) Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2) .................................................6-11 Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 50, 65 and 80 kW (with QMI-HSS) Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2) .................................................6-12 Generator System Cabling Diagram (Internal High-Speed Starter) ..........6-13 Generator System Cabling Diagram (External High-Speed Starter Systems) 6-14 System Cabling Diagram (with Q-Connect Option) ................................6-15 HF Generator to Canon/TechVision System Interconnection Diagram (Non-Widescreen) .............................................................................6-16 HF Generator to Canon/TechVision System Interconnection Diagram (Widescreen) .......................................................................6-17 17 x 17 Midwest Bucky Interconnection Diagram ..................................6-18 17 x 17 Progeny and L-F Bucky Interconnection Diagram ......................6-19 14 x 36 Midwest Bucky Interconnection Diagram ..................................6-20 Single-Phase 208 - 260 VAC Input (Non-STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 25, 32 and 40 kW Interconnection Diagram .......................6-21 Single-Phase 380 - 480 VAC Input (Non-STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 25, 32 and 40 kW Interconnection Diagram .......................6-22 Single-Phase (STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generator, 20 kW Interconnection Diagram ....................................................................6-23 Single-Phase (STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 32, 40 and 50 kW Interconnection Diagram .........................................................6-24 Three-Phase (380-480) Input (32, 40 and 50 kW without High Speed Starter) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram ....................6-25

Revision W

viii


Table of Contents

CHAPTER 6 - DIAGRAMS (CONT’D) Three-Phase (208-240) Input (32, 40 and 50 kW without High Speed Starter) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram ................... 6-26 Three-Phase (50, 65 and 80 kW with AID High Speed Starter) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram .................................................. 6-27 Three-Phase (32, 40 and 50 kW without High Speed Starter, with Universal AEC Board) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram ......... 6-28 Three-Phase (65 and 80 kW with AID High Speed Starter, Universal AEC Board) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram ........................ 6-29 Three-Phase (208-240) Input (32, 40 and 50 kW without High Speed Starter, with Universal AEC Board) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram AEC6-30 Three-Phase (208-240) Input (50 kW with QMI High Speed Starter) X-ray Generator Interconnection Diagram .................................................................... 6-31 Three-Phase (208-240) Input (50 kW with QMI High Speed Starter and Tomography Interface) X-ray Generator Interconnection Diagram ........ 6-32 Three-Phase (65 and 80 kW with QMI High Speed Starter) X-ray Generator Interconnection Diagram .................................................... 6-33 Three-Phase (65 and 80 kW with QMI High Speed Starter and Tomography Interface) X-ray Generator Interconnection Diagram ........................... 6-34 Operator Control Panel - ODYSSEY/QUEST Wiring Diagram ................... 6-35 Q-Connect Option System Interconnection Diagram ............................. 6-36 Operator Control Panel Circuit Block Diagram (Non-Q-VISION OCP) ....... 6-37 Generator Logic Circuit Block Diagram ................................................. 6-38 Filament Regulator Control Circuit Block Diagram ................................. 6-39 KVP & Filament Control Circuit Block Diagram ...................................... 6-40 Single-Phase (Non-STORED ENERGY) and Three-Phase Line Monitor Circuit Block Diagram ........................................................................ 6-41 Single-Phase STORED ENERGY Line Monitor Circuit Block Diagram ........ 6-42 Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T/AY40-023T1) Schematic Diagram ......... 6-43 Interface Board, Digital Receptor A9 (AY40-034T) Interface Diagram ..... 6-44 Interface Board, Digital Receptor A9 (AY40-061T) Interface Diagram ..... 6-45 Power Supply Board A6 (AY40-005T) Schematic Diagram 46 Rotor Circuit Block Diagram ................................................................ 6-47 QMI High-Speed Starter Circuit Block Diagram ..................................... 6-48 Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S) Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ......... 6-49 KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S) Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram 6-50 Filament Control Board A5 (AY40-007T) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ........................................................................................... 6-51 Power Supply Board A6 (AY40-005T) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ........................................................................................... 6-52 Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-022T1), Single-Phase Systems - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ......................................................... 6-53 Line Monitor/Battery Charger Board A8 (AY40-028T), Stored-Energy Systems - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ................................... 6-54 Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-022T2/T3), Three-Phase Systems - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ......................................................... 6-55 Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-053S2/AY40-053S3), Three-Phase QMI High-Speed Starter Systems - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ...... 6-56


Revision W

ix

Table of Contents

CHAPTER 6 - DIAGRAMS (CONT’D) Interface Board (No HSS Non-Digital) A9 (AY40-023T) - Terminal Block/Jumper Location Diagram ..........................................................6-57 Digital Interface Board (No HSS with Digital Receptor) A9 (AY40-034T) Terminal Block/Jumper Location Diagram ............................................6-58 Interface Board (HSS Non-Digital) A9 (AY40-061T) Terminal Block/Jumper Location Diagram ..............................................................................6-59 Digital Interface Board (HSS with Digital Receptor) A9 (AY40-062T) Terminal Block/Jumper Location Diagram ............................................6-60 Rotor Drive Board A10 (AY40-013T) - Terminal Block Location Diagram .6-61 Standard AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ...........................................................................................6-62 Universal AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ...........................................................................................6-63 OCP Control Board A16A1 (AY40-004S1) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ..............................................................................6-64 OCP Interface Board A1A1 (AY40-073S) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ...........................................................................................6-65 QMI High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S) - Test Point/Potentiometer Location Diagram ................................................6-66 QMI High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) - Test Point/Fuse Location Diagram ..............................................................6-67

APPENDIX A - AEC CALIBRATION WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR OR CR FILM PLATE OVERVIEW .......................................................................................... A-3 SPECIAL CANON DR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION INSTRUCTIONS ....... A-3 AEC CALIBRATION WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR OR CR FILM PLATE INSTALLED .................................................................................. A-4 AEC Calibration Instructions - One Ion Chamber Per Panel ......... A-8 AEC Calibration Instructions - Single Panel, Dual Ion Chambers A-13

APPENDIX B - CALIBRATION (AGFA DIREX) OVERVIEW .......................................................................................... B-3 REQUIRED TOOLS AND MATERIALS ............................................... B-4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CALIBRATION ............................................. B-4 ACCESSING SERVICE MODE ........................................................... B-4 FACTORY RESET ........................................................................... B-8 Factory Reset .......................................................................... B-8 Backup Configuration Utility ...................................................... B-9 GENERATOR CONFIGURATION ..................................................... B-10 Generator Settings ................................................................. B-13 Tube Settings ........................................................................ B-15 Ion Chamber Configuration .................................................... B-17 Film/Screen Default Settings ................................................... B-21

Revision W

x


Table of Contents

APPENDIX B - CALIBRATION (AGFA DIREX) (CONT’D) Copy Film Screen Utility .......................................................... B-23 GENERATOR CALIBRATION .......................................................... B-25 General Calibration Procedure Notes ........................................ B-26 A/D Calibration ...................................................................... B-27 kV Calibration ........................................................................ B-30 Filament Offset Calibration ...................................................... B-32 MA Calibration ...................................................................... B-37 AEC CALIBRATION ....................................................................... B-40 Ion Chamber Balancing (Three-field Chambers) ....................... B-43 AEC MAS Balance Verification .................................................. B-45 Film Screen Selection ............................................................. B-47 The AEC Calibration Menu ...................................................... B-50 Optical Density Calibration ...................................................... B-51 AEC Optical Density Calibration ............................................... B-52 AEC KV Calibration Procedure ................................................. B-55

APPENDIX C - LOG4VIEW ERROR LOGGER APPENDIX D - (QG-DIG-CXDI CANON/QUANTUM INTEGRATION) CALIBRATION OVERVIEW ......................................................................................... D-3 REQUIRED TOOLS AND MATERIALS ............................................... D-4 ACCESSING GENERATOR SERVICE TOOLS ...................................... D-4 Accessing Generator Service Tools - Q-VISION Operator Control Panel ......................................................................... D-5 Accessing Generator Service Tools - Workstation-Based Operator Control Panel ........................................................... D-7 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CALIBRATION ............................................D-10 GENERATOR CONFIGURATION .....................................................D-12 Generator Settings Tab ...........................................................D-12 Generator Calibrations Tab .....................................................D-13 Tube Settings Tab ..................................................................D-13 Physical Receptors Tab ...........................................................D-15 Receptors Tab .......................................................................D-16 Ion Chambers Tab .................................................................D-18 Licensing Tab ........................................................................D-20 GENERATOR CALIBRATION ..........................................................D-21 A/D Tab ................................................................................D-24 kVp Calibration Tab ................................................................D-28 Filament Offset Calibration ......................................................D-31 MA Calibration Tab .................................................................D-41 AEC CALIBRATION .......................................................................D-45 Ion Chamber Balancing (Three-field Chambers) .......................D-47 AEC MAS Balance Verification ..................................................D-50 The AEC Calibration Tab .........................................................D-52


Revision W

xi

Table of Contents

APPENDIX D - (QG-DIG-CXDI CANON/QUANTUM INTEGRATION) CALIBRATION (CONT’D) Base OD Calibration Procedure ............................................... D-56 AEC kVp Calibration Procedure ............................................... D-58 Copy Receptor Calibration Tab ................................................ D-62

Revision W

xii


Chapter

1

SPECIFICATIONS

1-1

1-2

Chapter 1 Specifications

SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS The tables below show model numbers of components in each type of HF SeriesTM X-ray Generator system (hereinafter referred to as the "HF Series X-ray Generators").

Note: The X-Ray Control Models shown in the following tables are not used if the HF generator system is integrated with computed radiographic (CR) or digital radiographic (DR) workstation computer (e.g., Agfa NX, Canon CXDI, etc.). Single-Phase Model Generators SYSTEM TYPE

CATALOG NO.

ODYSSEY HF 32 kW

SYSTEM MODEL

GENERATOR CABINET MODEL

X-RAY CONTROL MODEL*

QG-32

QG-32G

QG-3200

ODYSSEY HF 32 kW

QG-32-5

QG-32G-5

QG-3200

ODYSSEY HF 40 kW

QG-40

QG-40G

QG-4000

QG-40-5

QG-40G-5

QG-4000

QG-3200

QG-4000 ODYSSEY HF 40 kW Q-VISION HF 32 kW

QGV-32

QG-32

QG-32G

QGV-32-5

QG-32-5

QG-32G-5

Q-VISION HF 40 kW

QGV-40

QG-40

QG-40G

QGV-40-5

QG-40-5

QG-40G-5

QGV-32

QGV-40 Three-Phase Model Generators

SYSTEM TYPE

CATALOG NO.

ODYSSEY HF 32 kW

QG-3200

ODYSSEY HF 40 kW

QG-4000

ODYSSEY HF 50 kW

QG-5000

SYSTEM MODEL


QG-32-2

QG-32G-2

QG-32-3

QG-32G-3

QG-40-2

QG-40G-2

QG-40-3

QG-40G-3

QG-50-2

QG-50G-2

QG-50

QG-50G

X-RAY CONTROL MODEL QG-3200

QG-4000

QG-5000


Revision W

1-3


Three-Phase Model Generators SYSTEM TYPE

CATALOG NO.

SYSTEM MODEL


X-RAY CONTROL MODEL

ODYSSEY HF 65 kW

QG-6500

QG-65

QG-65G

QG-6500

ODYSSEY HF 80 kW

QG-8000

QG-80

QG-80G

QG-8000

QGV-32-2

QG-32-2

QG-32G-2

QGV-32-3

QG-32-3

QG-32G-3

Q-VISION HF 40 kW

QGV-40-2

QG-40-2

QG-40G-2

QGV-40-3

QG-40-3

QG-40G-3

Q-VISION HF 50 kW

QGV-50-2

QG-50-2

QG-50G-2

QGV-50

QG-50

QG-50G

Q-VISION HF 65 kW

QGV-65

QG-65

QG-65G

QGV-65

Q-VISION HF 80 kW

QGV-80

QG-80

QG-80G

QGV-80

Q-VISION HF 32 kW

QGV-32

QGV-40

QGV-50

STORED ENERGY (SE) Model Generators SYSTEM TYPE

SYSTEM MODEL


X-RAY CONTROL MODEL

ODYSSEY HF 32 kW

QG-3200-SE

QG-32-SE

QG-32G-SE

QG-3200

ODYSSEY HF 40 kW

QG-4000-SE

QG-40-SE

QG-40G-SE

QG-4000

ODYSSEY HF 50 kW

QG-5000-SE

QG-50-SE

QG-50G-SE

QG-5000

Q-VISION HF 32 kW

QGV-32-SE

QG-32-SE

QG-32G-SE

QGV-32-SE

Q-VISION HF 40 kW

QGV-40-SE

QG-40-SE

QG-40G-SE

QGV-40-SE

Q-VISION HF 50 kW

QGV-50-SE

QG-50-SE

QG-50G-SE

QGV-50-SE

Revision W

1-4

CATALOG NO.



PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS The following are physical specifications of the HF Series X-ray Generators: GENERATOR CABINET SPECIFICATIONS Width: Depth: Height: Weights: Single-Phase (non-SE units): 32, 40 and 50 kW Stored Energy (SE) units: 50, 65, 80 kW Three-Phase units):

24.0 inches (609.6 mm) 20.0 inches (508.0 mm) 34.7 inches (881.4 mm) 298 lbs. (135.2 kg) 431 lbs. (195.5 kg) 380 lbs. (712.4 kg) w/o internal HSS 388 lbs. (176.0 kg) w/internal HSS

OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL SPECIFICATIONS

Note: X-Ray Control Panels below are utilized with HF generator systems integrated with computed radiographic (CR) or digital radiographic (DR) workstation computers (e.g., Agfa NX, Canon CXDI, etc.).

The Q-VISION all-in-one operator control is not powered from the generator cabinet; it requires a separate 100-240 VAC, 3A power input. ODYSSEY HF Control Panel: Width: Depth: Height (without pedestal): Height (with pedestal): Weight (without pedestal): Weight (with pedestal):

17.9 inches (454.7 mm) 12.25 inches (311.2 mm) 3.3 inches (83.8 mm) 36.5 inches (927.4 mm) 5 lbs. (2.3 kg) 25 lbs. (11.3 kg)

Q-VISION HF Control Panel: Width: Depth (without stand): Depth (with stand): Height: Weight:

18.7 inches (476.0 mm) 1.9 inches (49.0 mm) 7.125 inches (181.0 mm) 14.4 inches (365.0 mm) 13 lbs. (5.9 kg)

SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS System Compatibility: Tube Compatibility:


Compatible with all Quantum Medical Imaging tube stands, overhead tube cranes, radiographic tables and wall stands Toshiba Models E7239X, E7242X, E7252X, E7254X, E7255X, E7813X, E7869X Varian Models RAD-8, RAD-13, RAD-14, RAD-21, RAD-44, RAD-56, RAD-60, RAD-68, RAD-74, RAD-92, A192, A272, A292

Revision W

1-5


Collimators:

Dunlee Models PX 1302, PX 1429, PX 1436, PX 1312, DU 309, DA 1092, MX100 replacement tube for GE Radiographic Systems (For tube types not listed, consult factory.) Huestis Manual, Model 150MC Huestis Automatic, Model 150PBL Huestis Selectable, Model 150A, Progeny Linear MC150 (Manual) Progeny Linear II and Linear IV (Automatic)

Note: The HF Series radiographic systems are compatible with any automatic collimating system that provides an isolated normally open switch that closes when the Automatic Collimation System presents an “EXPOSURE READY” mode to the control; they are also compatible with any beam limiting device that complies with 21 CFR Subchapter J intended for radiographic equipment.

POWER REQUIREMENTS In order to assure the proper operation of our equipment and subsequently, the production of high-quality radiographs, it is essential that all power requirements, as specified in the tables that follow, are suitably met by the facility in which the equipment is installed. This includes usage of the proper size conductor between distribution transformer and disconnect switch, connection to a supply transformer of sufficient capacity (specified in terms of KVA), insuring the AC input voltage tolerance meets specification (±5% or ±10% depending on model), and voltage regulation of 5% at full load is maintained. All wiring and grounding at the installation site must be in accordance with applicable National Electric Code (NEC) and/or local electrical codes. THe generator requires a 3-phase "Y" connection, measured line-to-line, balanced to earth or neutral. The "Y" connection can be 4-wire (L1, L2, L3, Neutral) and GND or 3-wire (L1, L2, L3) and GND. The 4-wire connection may be required by local electrical code and in connection where a roughly balanced 3-phase source exists (e.g., when using a delta-to-Y transformer). Note that failure to comply with the above requirements not only may result in improper generator operation and/or performance, but it will also void the warranty, as the warranty is exclusive of the following conditions: •

"Failure of customer to prepare the site or provide power requirements or operating environmental conditions in compliance with any applicable instructions or recommendations of QMI.

•

"Failure of customer to provide the proper incoming power required to support the equipment in accordance with the recommendation of QMI.

•

"Improper or extraordinary use of the Product, improper maintenance of the Product, or failure to comply with any applicable instructions or recommendations of Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC.

Revision W

1-6



NOTE: All single-phase x-ray generator input ratings assume the use of a single-phase distribution transformer. When utilizing two legs of a 3phase transformer, review the National Electrical Code and any applicable local electrical code(s) to ensure the correct rating distribution transformer (in terms of KVA) is used to assure line stability. This configuration would require an increase in the overall power (KVA) of the distribution transformer, depending on whether the input line transformer is Wye or Delta type. Under no circumstances should a Delta type transformer be used for input power to a 3-phase generator. SINGLE-PHASE X-RAY GENERATORS Non-Stored Energy Single-phase x-ray generators require three-wire line inputs in either of the following two configurations: •

one hot wire, one neutral wire, and one earth ground wire

•

two hot wires and one earth ground.

Refer to Table 1-1 for power requirements of single-phase (non-stored energy) HF Series Generators. 25 kW Single Phase (Model QG-25) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:

208-260 VAC (±5%), 100 Amps, 50/60 Hz 200 Amps (@208VAC) less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation

25 kW Single Phase (Model QG-25-5)* Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:

380 - 480 VAC (±10%), 60 Amps, 50/60 Hz 110 Amps @ 415 VAC less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation

32 kW Single Phase (Model QG-32) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:




380 - 480 VAC (±10%), 75 Amps, 50/60 Hz 140 Amps @ 415 VAC less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation

Revision W

1-7


40 kW Single Phase (Model QG-40) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:



380-480 VAC (±10%), 100 Amps, 50/60 Hz 170 Amps @ 415 VAC less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation

32 kW Single Phase, Stored Energy Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:

105-130 (±10%), 10 Amps, 50/60 Hz 210-250 VAC (±10%), 10 Amps, 50/60 Hz 13 Amps @ 115 VAC 7 Amps @ 230 VAC less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation





Note: Models QG-25-5, QG-32-5, and QG-40-5 are not UL classified.

Revision W

1-8



THREE-PHASE X-RAY GENERATORS Three-phase x-ray generators require three "hot" wires and one earth ground wire. Refer to Tables 1-2 and 1-3 for power requirements of three-phase HF Series Generators. 32 kW Three Phase (Model QG-32-2) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:

208-240 VAC (±5%), 70 Amps, 50/60 Hz 140 Amps (@220 VAC) less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation

32 kW Three Phase (Model QG-32-3) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:











Revision W

1-9


65 kW Three Phase (Model QG-65) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:


80 kW Three Phase (Model QG-80) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:


HIGH-SPEED STARTER POWER REQUIREMENTS A High-Speed Starter (HSS) unit is optional on Models QG-40 and QG-50, and is standard equipment on Models QG-65 and QG-80. The external HSS (QG-HSS) configuration requires a separate 200 - 240 VAC, 20A line input. Note that a separate 200- 240 VAC line input is not required on generators equipped with Internal High Speed Starter (Q-HSS) configuration.

Revision W

1-10



Table 1-1. HF Series Generators Electrical Wiring Requirements (208 - 260 VAC Single-Phase Input Units)

QG-40

MAX. INPUT LINE RESISTANCE (AT FULL-LOAD RMS)

QG-400, QG-4000, QGV-40

QG-32

*RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER CAPACITY

QG-320, QG-3200, QGV-32

*SERVICE RATING

MAX. POWER OUTPUT (kW) 25

DISCONNECT TO GENERATOR 15 FT. (5 M) MAX.

GENERATOR MODEL NO. QG-25

NOMINAL LINE VOLTAGE (VAC)

GENERATOR CATALOG NO. QG-250

208

#4 AWG

100 AMPS

30 KVA

0.06 OHMS

240

#4 AWG

80 AMPS

30 KVA

0.08 OHMS

208

#2 AWG

120 AMPS

40 KVA

0.04 OHMS

240

#2 AWG

100 AMPS

40 KVA

0.05 OHMS

208

#1 AWG

150 AMPS

50 KVA

0.035 OHMS

240

#1 AWG

120 AMPS

50 KVA

0.04 OHMS

32

40

*

NOTE: All installations must meet the requirements of local electrical codes. The above values are recommended as typical (unless otherwise specified).

1. All wire must be copper. 2. Actual wire size depends on power quality and distance between mains power and the generator. 3. All wiring and grounding must be in accordance with National Electric Code (NFPA #70) or local electrical codes. 4. The disconnect switch must be located within reach of the operator. 5. Input Voltage: 208-257 (±5%) VAC 50/60 Hz (configured at time of installation). 6. Line Regulation: 5% at full load. 7. Ground wire size is 4 AWG. 8. Specifications are subject to change. 9. Specifications for single-phase “stored energy” Models QG-20-SE, QG-32-SE, QG-40-SE and QG-50-SE are as follows: 105-130 VAC (±10%), 10 Amps, 50/60 Hz 210-250 VAC (±10%), 10 Amps, 50/60 Hz


Revision W

1-11


Table 1-2. HF Series Generators Electrical Wiring Requirements (380 - 480 VAC Single-Phase Input Units)

MAX. INPUT LINE

RESISTANCE

RMS)

(AT FULL-LOAD

DISTRIBUTION

*RECOMMENDED

TRANSFORMER

CAPACITY

RATING

*SERVICE

DISCONNECT

TO GENERATOR

40

15 FT. (5 M) MAX.

32

NOMINAL LINE

QG-400-5, QG-40-5 QG-4000-5, QGV-40-5

25

VOLTAGE (VAC)

QG-320-5, QG-32-5 QG-3200-5, QGV-32-5

MAX. POWER

QG-25-5

OUTPUT (kW)

MODEL NO.

GENERATOR

GENERATOR

CATALOG NO.

QG-250-5

380

#6 AWG

60 AMPS

32 KVA

0.028 OHMS

415

#6 AWG

55 AMPS

32 KVA

0.028 OHMS

480

#6 AWG

40 AMPS

32 KVA

0.032 OHMS

380

#6 AWG

75 AMPS

40 KVA

0.024 OHMS

415

#6 AWG

70 AMPS

40 KVA

0.024 OHMS

480

#6 AWG

60 AMPS

40 KVA

0.028 OHMS

380

#4 AWG

100 AMPS

50 KVA

0.015 OHMS

415

#4 AWG

90 AMPS

50 KVA

0.020 OHMS

480

#6 AWG

70 AMPS

50 KVA

0.024 OHMS

*

*NOTE: All installations must meet the requirements of local electrical codes. The above values are recommended as typical (unless otherwise specified).

1. All wire must be copper. 2. Actual wire size depends on power quality and distance between mains power and the generator. 3. All wiring and grounding must be in accordance with National Electric Code (NFPA #70) or local electrical codes. 4. The disconnect switch must be located within reach of the operator. 5. Input Voltage: 380-480 (±10%) VAC 50/60 Hz (configured at time of installation). 6. Ground wire size is 4 AWG. 7. Specifications are subject to change.

Revision W

1-12



Table 1-3. HF Series Generators - Electrical Wiring Requirements (380-480 VAC Three-Phase Input Units) MAX. INPUT LINE RESISTANCE

80

(AT FULL-LOAD RMS)

65


QG-80

50

*SERVICE RATING

QG-8000, QGV-80

QG-65

40 (QG-40-3)


QG-6500, QGV-65

QG-50

32 (QG-32-3)


QG-500, QG-5000, QGV-50

MAX. POWER OUTPUT (kW)

GENERATOR MODEL NO.

GENERATOR CATALOG NO.

QG-320, QG-3200, QG-32-3, QGV-32-3, QG-400, QG-4000, QG-40-3 QGV-40-3

380

#6 AWG

60 AMPS

50 KVA

0.23 OHMS

440

#6 AWG

60 AMPS

50 KVA

0.33 OHMS

480

#6 AWG

50 AMPS

50 KVA

0.4 OHMS

380

#4 AWG

80 AMPS

65 KVA

0.17 OHMS

440

#6 AWG

80 AMPS

65 KVA

0.20 OHMS

480

#6 AWG

75 AMPS

65 KVA

0.24 OHMS

380

#4 AWG

90 AMPS

80 KVA

0.12 OHMS

440

#4 AWG

90 AMPS

80 KVA

0.17 OHMS

480

#4 AWG

90 AMPS

80 KVA

0.19 OHMS

380

#4 AWG

100 AMPS

100 KVA

0.10 OHMS

440

#4 AWG

100 AMPS

100 KVA

0.14 OHMS

480

#4 AWG

100 AMPS

100 KVA

0.16 OHMS

*


1. All wire must be copper. 2. Actual wire size depends on power quality and distance between mains power and the generator. 3. All wiring and grounding must be in accordance with National Electric Code (NFPA #70) or local electrical codes. 4. The disconnect switch must be located within reach of the operator. 5. Input Voltage: 380-480 (±10%) VAC 50/60 Hz (configured at time of installation). 6. Voltage is three-phase Y-configuration, measured line-to-line, balanced to earth ground. (Note: Additional Neutral wire may be used if required by local electrical code.) 7. Ground wire size is 4 AWG. 8. Specifications are subject to change.


Revision W

1-13


Table 1-4. HF Series Generators Electrical Wiring Requirements (208-240 VAC Three-Phase Input Units)

MAX. INPUT LINE RESISTANCE (AT FULL-LOAD RMS)

QG-500, QG-5000, QG-50-2 QGV-50-2


40

*SERVICE RATING

QG-400, QG-4000, QG-40-2 QGV-40-2


32


MAX. POWER OUTPUT (kW)

GENERATOR MODEL NO.

GENERATOR CATALOG NO.

QG-320, QG-3200, QG-32-2 QGV-32-2

208

#6 AWG

70 AMPS

40 KVA

0.026 OHMS

240

#6 AWG

60 AMPS

40 KVA

0.023 OHMS

208

#4 AWG

90 AMPS

50 KVA

0.017 OHMS

240

#6 AWG

70 AMPS

50 KVA

0.024 OHMS

208

#4 AWG

110 AMPS

65 KVA

0.014 OHMS

240

#4 AWG

90 AMPS

65 KVA

0.016 OHMS

50

*


1. All wire must be copper. 2. Actual wire size depends on power quality and distance between mains power and the generator. 3. All wiring and grounding must be in accordance with National Electric Code (NFPA #70) or local electrical codes. 4. The disconnect switch must be located within reach of the operator. 5. Input Voltage: 208-257 (±5%) VAC 50/60 Hz (configured at time of installation). 6. Voltage is three-phase Y-configuration, measured line-to-line, balanced to earth ground. (Note: Additional Neutral wire may be used if required by local electrical code.) 7. Line Regulation: 5% at full load. 8. Ground wire size is 4 AWG. 9. Specifications are subject to change.

Revision W

1-14



GENERATOR AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES The HF Series X-ray Generator supplies the following supply voltages for powering X-ray room equipment: • • •

24 VDC, 1.5A 24 VAC, 150W (collimator lamp not to exceed 150W) 115 VAC, 3A

NOTE: The above voltage outputs are not to be used as power sources for collimator lamps or for inductive loads (e.g., motorized tables, solenoids, etc.)

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Table 1-5 provides performance specifications of single-phase (non-stored energy) HF Series Generators. Table 1-5. HF Series Single-Phase Generator Performance Specifications

N/A

Cat. No. QG-3200, QGV-32


N/A

Models QG-32, QG-32-5

Models QG-40, QG-40-5

Maximum kW mA Stations; Small Focus (S) Large Focus (L)

N/A

32

N/A

25S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 250L, 320L, 400L, 500L

kVp Range (kVp) kVp increments (kVp/step) 150 kVp option Time Range (sec.)* Minimum Exposure Time (sec.)

N/A N/A N/A N/A

40-125 1.0 Yes 0.001 - 6.3

40 25S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 250L, 320L, 400L, 500L 40-125 1.0 Yes 0.001 - 6.3

N/A

0.001

0.001

mAs Range† High-SpeedStarter Ripple Voltage (output)

N/A

0.025-600

0.025-600

N/A N/A

No 5%

No 5%

* †

Time measured at 75% of the peak kVp waveform NOTE: AEC TECHNIQUES SHOULD HAVE EXPOSURE TIMES EXCEEDING 8 MILLISECONDS. mAs is tube dependent


Revision W

1-15


Refer to Table 1-6 for performance specifications of single-phase stored energy (SE) HF Series Generators. Table 1-6. HF Series Single-Phase STORED ENERGY Generator Performance Specifications

N/A

Cat. No. QG-3200-SE, QGV-32-SE



N/A

Model QG-32-SE (STORED ENERGY)



N/A

32

40

50

mA Stations; Small Focus (S) Large Focus (L)

N/A

25S, 50S, 75S, 150S 100L, 160L, 200L, 250L, 320L, 400L

25S, 50S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 250L, 320L, 400L, 500L

25S, 50S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 250L, 320L, 400L, 500L, 600L

kVp Range (kVp)

N/A

40-125

40-125

40-125

kVp increments (kVp/step)

N/A

1.0

1.0

1.0

150 kVp optional?

N/A

No

No

No

Time Range (sec.)*

N/A

0.001 - 6.3

0.001 - 6.3

0.001 - 6.3

Minimum Exposure Time (sec.)*

N/A

0.001

0.001

0.001

mAs Range

N/A

0.025-400

0.025-500

0.025-500

High-SpeedStarter

N/A

No

No

No

Ripple Voltage (output)

N/A

5%

5%

5%

Maximum kW

*

Maximum exposure time is a function of kV and mAs settings and the age of the batteries; Time measured at 75% of the peak kVp waveform NOTE: AEC TECHNIQUES SHOULD HAVE EXPOSURE TIMES EXCEEDING 8 MILLISECONDS.

 mAs is tube dependent; the generator may not reach maximum mAs due to tube type. In AEC mode, the mAs is limited to 600.

Revision W

1-16



Refer to Table 1-7 for performance specifications of three-phase HF Series Generators. Table 1-7. HF Series Three-Phase Generator Performance Specifications

Maximum kW mA Stations; Small Focus (S) Large Focus (L)

kVp Range (kVp) kVp increments (kVp/step) 150 kVp optional? Time Range (sec.)* Minimum Exposure Time (sec.) mAs Range† High-Speed Starter Ripple Voltage (output)

Cat. No. QG-3200-2, QG-3200-3 QGV-32-2, QGV-32-3

Cat. No. QG-4000-2, QG-4000-3 QGV-40-2, QGV-40-3

Cat. No. QG-5000-2, QG-5000-3 QGV-50, QGV-50-2

Model Model QG-32-2, QG-32-3 32

Model Model QG-40-2, QG-40-3 40

Model QG-50-2, QG-50 50

25S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 250L, 320L, 400L, 500L

25S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 250L, 320L, 400L, 500L

25S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 320L, 400L, 500L, 650L

25S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 320L, 400L, 500L, 650L, 800

40-125

40-125 (40-150 with QG-150 option)

40-125 (40-150 with QG-150 option)

40-150

40-150

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

Yes

Yes

Yes

Standard

Standard

0.001 - 6.3

0.001 - 6.3

0.001 - 6.3

0.001 - 6.3

0.001 - 6.3

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.025-600

0.025-600

0.025-800

0.025-800

0.025-800

No

Option

Option

Yes

Yes

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

* †



Model Model QG-65

Model Model QG-80

65

80 25S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 320L, 400L, 500L, 650L, 800

Time measured at 75% of the peak kVp waveform NOTE: AEC TECHNIQUES SHOULD HAVE EXPOSURE TIMES EXCEEDING 8 MILLISECONDS. mAs is tube dependent; the generator may not reach maximum mAs due to tube type. In AEC mode, the mAs is limited to 600.

 High-Speed Starter Duty Cycle: do not to exceed two activations within any one minute period


Revision W

1-17


Table 1-8. Accuracy Specifications

Accuracy Specifications kVp Accuracy:

kVp = ± ( 4.0% kV )

mA Accuracy:

mA = ± ( 5.0% mA + 1 mA )

Time Accuracy:

mAs Accuracy:

Revision W

1-18

time = ± ( 2.0% time + 1 msec. ) time = ± ( 1.0% time + 1 msec. ) time = ± ( 0.5% time + 1 msec. )

mAs = ± ( 5.0% mAs + 0.5 mAs )



SYSTEM OPTIONS The following lists the available options for HF Series X-Ray Generators. Note that some options, such as QG-150 and Q-HSS, may only be used on certain generator models (refer to Tables 1-5 through 1-7 for compatibility): •

R80-HS: Exposure Hand Switch and R80-FS Foot Switch

•

QG-PDL: Operator Control Panel Pedestal Mount (used with ODYSSEY control panel)

•

QG-WM: Operator Control Panel Wall Mount (used with ODYSSEY control panel)

•

QGV-WM: Operator Control Panel Wall Mount (used with Q-VISION control panel)

•

QG-150: 150 kV High Voltage Transformer (standard equipment on Models QG-65 and QG-80)

•

Q-HSS: Internal High (Dual) Speed Starter Unit (standard equipment on Models QG-65 and QG-80

•

Q-Connect: Enables ethernet connection to a PC computer using Quantum’s "QBus" network integration software; required on systems utilizing a touchscreen operator control panel

•

QG-28VPS: Internally mounted Auxiliary +28 VDC/8A Power Supply (only available with three-phase input generators)

•

QG-TOMO: Provides interface for operation with Siemens and Pausch tomographic systems (not available with Q-VISION HF Series OCP’s)

•

TechVision: Supplementary x-ray control panel, mounts on tube support device. Refer to the TechVision Remote Control Panel Service and Operator’s Manuals for complete installation and operation instructions.

NOTE: The use of ACCESSORY equipment not complying with the equivalent safety requirements of this equipment may lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting system. Consideration relating to the choice shall include: -use of the accessory in the PATIENT VICINITY -evidence that the safety certification of the ACCESSORY has been performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC 601-1 and/or IEC 601-1-1 harmonized national standard.

SYSTEM OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Ambient Temperature: +10°C to +40°C Relative Humidity: 30 to 75%, non-condensing Atmospheric Pressure: 700 hPa to 1060 hPa Typical Heat Output of Generator Cabinet: 3600 BTU per hour Typical Heat Output of operator control panel (OCP): 130 BTU per hour


Revision W

1-19


NOTE: The above calculations are typical, based upon average usage. Air circulation around the electronic cabinet must be provided. This includes the sides, back, front and top of cabinet.

NON-OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Ambient Temperature: Relative Humidity: Atmospheric Pressure:

-18°C to +70°C 20 to 95%, non-condensing 500 hPa to 1060 hPa

Figure 1-1. HF Series X-ray Generator Cabinet Dimensions

Revision W

1-20



Figure 1-2.

Odyssey HF Series X-ray Generator Operator Control Panel Dimensions


Revision W

1-21


7.125 (181.0)

14.4 (365.0)

18.7 (476.0)

Figure 1-3. Q-VISION HF Series X-Ray Generator Operator Control Panel Dimensions

Revision W

1-22


Chapter

2

ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION

2-1

2-2

Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation

OVERVIEW This chapter provides procedures for installing the HF Series x-ray generator, from pre-installation guidelines to final system inspection prior to operational readiness. These procedures should be reviewed carefully before beginning the actual installation. Preparing the X-ray generator for operation requires completion of the following tasks: •

Installing the X-ray generator cabinet

•

Installing the Operator Control Panel (OCP)

•

Making the Electrical Cable Connections

•

Power-up

•

Calibrating the generator

•

Inspecting the system

•

Verifying programmed techniques WARNING! Equipment installation and servicing procedures should be performed by properly trained and qualified service personnel only.

PRE-INSTALLATION GUIDELINES While site planning is the customer's responsibility, the following are recommended guidelines. Verify Equipment Location In radiology site preparation, it is essential to verify the location and space allocated for the equipment is sufficient. See Figures 1-1 through 1-3 for HF Series x-ray generator dimensions. The room plan should show the following for the equipment: •

All working and parked positions

•

Overall dimensions

•

Total equipment weights and power outputs

•

Structural mounting and attachment methods

Ensure sufficient air circulation space is provided between the rear side of Generator Cabinet and wall (4.0" min.). The floor where the generator is installed should be flat and approximately level (minor shimming is acceptable) and capable of supporting a load of 500 lbs. (226.8 kg). If the generator is equipped with the "Q-Connect option" (ethernet adapter for connection to Q-VISION or for integration with a Digital Radiographic System), the associated computer monitor functions as the generator operator control panel (OCP). If the workstation is qualified to standard UL 60950/IEC


Revision W

2-3


60950 for Information Technology Equipment, the workstation must be placed outside the radius of the patient environment, shown in Figure 2-1. Only devices conforming to UL 60601-1/IEC 60601-1 may be placed within this environment. Consult with the user of the system when determining the location for the workstation computer; consider all areas the patient may access, including the room entrance and/or exit, when establishing the patient environment.

2.5 m

1.5 m

1.5 m

1.5 m

Figure 2-1. Patient Environment

Revision W

2-4



Electrical Requirements

NOTE Examine all cartons and crates carefully at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have delivery driver write a "Damaged Shipment Note" on copies of freight bill, sign it, and file appropriate carrier claim. Should you discover concealed damage, immediately notify the transporting agent and ask for an "Inspection of Damage". Carrier will not accept concealed damage claim if filed after 15 days from date of receipt of merchandise.

In addition to providing for the physical requirements of the equipment, it is also vital to prepare for the power requirements. Refer to Chapter 1, SPECIFICATIONS for model-dependent power specifications. This information should be used to prepare system wiring and cabling. UNPACKING The HF Series x-ray generator is shipped in a single crate. To unpack, proceed as follows: 1. Remove packing list and use it as a guide to open the remaining cartons. Do not dispose of packing material until packing list is matched with actual parts received. Should there be a shortage or damage, notify Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC.’s customer service department immediately. The manufacturer is relieved of any responsibility for damage during shipment after unit is picked up by the carrier. WARNING! The X-ray generator cabinet can weigh as much as 430 lbs. (195 kg), depending on configuration. Use lifting straps and hoist or other suitable lifting device to transport generator. The H.V. Tank weighs approximately 100 lbs. and requires two persons to lift. 2. Remove the Generator Cabinet from its crate (lifting straps and hoist or other suitable lifting device is recommended). 3. Using a hand truck from the rear side of the cabinet, lift the generator and place it as close to its final installation location as possible. WARNING! When unpacking the generator; keep upright at all times. Verify there is no damage caused during shipping, with no apparent oil leakage from H.V. Tank; check that the tank lid and oil plug (in tank lid) are secure. 4. Locate the OCP and Pedestal (optional) or Wall Mount Bracket (optional) and place on the side (not applicable on Q-VISION equipped systems or with integrated systems (e.g., Agfa, Canon, etc.).


Revision W

2-5


INSTALLATION The following paragraphs provide information necessary for installing the Generator Cabinet and Operator Control Panel (OCP), including all required external equipment cable connections with the X-ray generator. CAUTION! This equipment contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling components or printed circuit boards. REQUIRED TOOLS AND MATERIALS The following lists the tools and materials required to perform the procedures included in this chapter: •

Hoist with lifting straps (or other suitable lifting device)

•

Tape measure

•

Standard hand tools

•

Drill bit, suitable size for installing floor mounting hardware

•

Bubble level

•

Various wiring connectors and cable ties

GENERATOR CABINET SETUP 1. Loosen six (6) phillips head screws (3 each on left and right sides of cabinet) and remove three (3) phillips head screws (in lower front side) securing generator cabinet cover to generator chassis (see Figure 2-1a). Grasp cover on each side, lift up slightly and remove.

Figure 2-1a. Generator Cabinet Cover Screw Locations

Revision W

2-6



WARNING! Approximately 200 VDC is present on each battery tray. This voltage is live even when generator cabinet power switch is set to OFF. Use extreme caution when servicing battery tray(s). 2. On stored energy (SE) units, open the two (2) modular fuse holders located on the front of each battery tray. Note that there are two pairs of fuses on 32 kW and 40 kW units, one pair for each battery tray. 3. If mounting generator to floor, mark locations of the four mounting holes on floor in accordance with dimensions given in Figure 2-2. Drill four holes using proper diameter drill bit (depending on mounting hardware used).

Figure 2-2. Generator Cabinet Mounting Hole Locations 4. Position the generator chassis in its mounting location and place a level on flat horizontal surface of chassis. If chassis is not level, add shim(s) below generator as required until level. 5. After all cable connections that require access to the rear of the generator are complete, secure cabinet to floor using 3/8" diameter mounting hardware suitable for floor construction type.


Revision W

2-7


Transformer Line Tap Adjustment (Single Phase Non-SE Systems) WARNING! Extreme care MUST be exercised to ensure the safety of service or other personnel in the area when working with live AC mains. Proceed as follows: 1. Using a calibrated DVM, measure the AC input (mains) voltage (i.e., lineto-line or line-to-neutral, when applicable). 2. Verify that power to x-ray generator is disconnected. 3. Adjust transformer taps by relocating the leads on the top side of transformer terminal block TB2 to match the input line voltage as closely as possible. Refer to Figure 2-3 for 208 - 260 VAC single-phase input line tap configurations, and Figure 2-4 for 380 - 480 VAC single-phase input line tap configurations.

NOTE STORED ENERGY (SE) models can operate between 105 and 130 VAC and non-SE, single-phase models between 200 and 270 VAC. Refer to Chapter 1, SPECIFICATIONS.

Figure 2-3. Single-Phase 208 - 260 VAC Single-Phase Input AC Transformer Line Tap Connections

Revision W

2-8



Figure 2-4. Single-Phase 380 - 480 VAC Single-Phase Input AC Transformer Line Tap Connections 4. For single-phase non-SE models, it is necessary to insure that the line resistance meets the maximum allowed as stated in Chapter 1, SPECIFICATIONS. If line resistance exceeds the specification, the generator must be derated. Refer to Chapter 3, CALIBRATION for derating instructions. 5. Verify Line Monitor Board A8 "line input jumper" is configured correctly based on the installation site’s measured line input voltage as follows: a. For 208 - 260 VAC input models (QG-25, QG-32 and QG-40), refer to Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-022T1) Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS and, if necessary, set "line input" jumpers to match the line input supply voltage (i.e., 208 - 260 VAC, three "240" jumpers are installed). Also, for 208 - 260 VAC line input configurations, fuses A8F1 and A8F3 should be 1/2A. b. For 380 - 480 VAC input models (QG-25-5, QG-32-5 and QG-40-5), refer to Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-022T2) Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS and, if necessary, set "line input" jumpers to match the line input supply voltage (i.e., for 342403 VAC input, install jumper"380"; for 404-459 VAC input, install jumper "430"; for 460-528 VAC input, install jumper "480"). Also, for 380 - 480 VAC line input configurations, fuses A8F1 and A8F3 should be 1/4A.


Revision W

2-9


Transformer Line Tap Adjustment (Single Phase SE Systems) WARNING! Extreme care MUST be exercised to ensure the safety of service or other personnel in the area when working with live AC mains. 1. Using a calibrated DVM, measure the AC input (mains) voltage (i.e., lineto-line or line-to-neutral, when applicable). 2. Verify that power to x-ray generator is disconnected. 3. Adjust transformer taps by relocating the leads on the left side of transformer terminal block TB1 to match the input line voltage as closely as possible. Refer to Figure 2-5 for STORED ENERGY (SE) input line tap configurations. 6. Refer to Line Monitor/Battery Charger Board A8 (AY40-028T) Test Point/ Jumper Location Diagram in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS and verify "line input" jumpers are configured to match the line input supply voltage (115 or 230 VAC). Also, for 115 VAC line input configurations, fuses A8F5 and A8F7 should be 2A; for 230 VAC line input configurations, these fuses should be 1A.

Figure 2-5. STORED ENERGY Input AC Transformer Line Tap Connections

Revision W

2-10



WARNING! Extreme care MUST be exercised to ensure the safety of service or other personnel in the area when working with live AC mains. Proceed as follows: 1. Using a calibrated DVM, measure the AC input (mains) voltage (i.e., lineto-line). 2. Verify that power to x-ray generator is disconnected. 3. Adjust transformer taps by relocating the leads on the top side of transformer terminal block TB2 to match the input line voltage as closely as possible. Refer to Figure 2-6 for input line tap configurations.

TAP ADJUSTMENT LEADS

5

5

6

7

8

5

6

7

8

5

6

208-240 VAC LINE INPUT CONFIGURATION

480 VAC

415 VAC

4 LA40-056 REV. C

440 VAC

380 VAC

3

480 VAC

2

440 VAC

5

415 VAC

208 VAC

4

380 VAC

198 VAC

3

480 VAC

240 VAC

2

440 VAC

220 VAC

5

415 VAC

208 VAC

4

380 VAC

198 VAC

3

240 VAC

240 VAC

2

PHASE B

220 VAC

220 VAC

PHASE A

208 VAC

PHASE B

198 VAC

PHASE A

7

8

LA40-033 REV. F

380-480 VAC LINE INPUT CONFIGURATION

Figure 2-6. Three-Phase Input AC Transformer Line Tap Connections 4. For three-phase models, it is necessary to insure that the line resistance meets maximum allowed as stated in Chapter 1, SPECIFICATIONS. If line resistance exceeds the specification, the generator must be derated. Refer to Chapter 3, CALIBRATION for derating instructions.


Revision W

2-11


5. On Line Monitor Board A8 (part number AY40-053S2 used on 380-480 VAC line input configuration, part number AY40-053S3 used on 208-240 VAC line input configuration), verify 380/430/480 jumper is configured correctly based on incoming line voltage measurement as follows (see Line Monitor Board A8 Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS): AC INPUT VOLTAGE (MEASURED)

JUMPER POSITION

342-403 VAC

380

404-459 VAC

430

460-528 VAC

480

198-252 VAC

240 (3 jumpers)

AC Input (Mains) Connection WARNING! Verify incoming power supply (mains disconnect) is turned OFF and all mains cables are de-energized before connecting to the generator. All electrical connections must be made in compliance with local and/or NEC requirements. The generator is factory configured to accept line input specified when the order was placed. However, if it is necessary to change the generator line input configuration, refer to the previous procedure entitled "Transformer Line Tap Adjustment". Non-STORED ENERGY (SE) version generators require a mains disconnect box (with switch) before the x-ray generator (refer to your local code). This switch should be within reach of the operator. A separate earth ground, #6 AWG insulated wire, must be installed. This wire must be the only wire connected to the generator ground terminal.

Revision W

2-12



For non-SE generators, connect AC input cable as follows: 1. Mount cable clamp (included with system) to the hole on the lower right or left side of generator cabinet chassis (see Figure 2-7). LINE INPUT CABLE CLAMP (TYPICAL)

GENERATOR CHASSIS

Figure 2-7. Line Input Cable Clamp Installation 2. Route the AC input cable through cable clamp to Terminal Block TB1 and tighten cable clamp. 3. On single-phase systems: a. Connect ground wire to ground lug mounted on rear wall of generator chassis, to the left of terminal block TB1 (see Figure 2-8). TERMINAL BLOCK TB1 GROUND LUG

Figure 2-8. Single-Phase Systems - Ground Lug and Terminal Block TB1 Locations


Revision W

2-13


b. Connect mains line and neutral wires to TB1 terminals L1 and L2, respectively. Do not turn mains power on at this time. 4. On three-phase systems: a. Connect Phase A, B and C wires to TB1 terminals L1 through L3, respectively. Do not turn mains power on at this time. (See Figure 2-9). TERMINAL BLOCK TB1

GROUND LUG

Figure 2-9. Ground Lug and Terminal Block TB1 Locations b. If available, connect Neutral wire to TB1 terminal L4 (N). (Neutral connection may be required; check local electrical code.) 5. On STORED ENERGY (SE) type generators, the battery tray fuse(s) are shipped in the non-inserted position to minimize battery discharge and high voltage hazards. With fuse in holder, close the fuse holder(s). The SE system can be plugged into a standard switched 115/230 VAC grounded receptacle. The switch controlling the receptacle should be within reach of the operator control console. For 115 VAC installations, a 25-foot power cord with a hospital-grade plug is factory pre-wired to the generator. For 230 VAC installations, a 25-foot "HAR" power cord is factory pre-wired to the generator. If power cord is replaced, ensure that impedance between the protective contact in the mains plug and any accessible metal part which is protectively earthed does not exceed 0.1 Ohms.

Revision W

2-14



High Voltage (H.V.) Tank The HF Series X-ray Generator is shipped with the H.V. Tank installed at the factory. Locate the Pressure Relief Screw on the top side of the H.V. Tank near the front right corner (see Figure 2-10). To permit venting, loosen screw two (2) turns (counterclockwise) and leave in this position.

PRESSURE RELIEF SCREW: AT TIME OF INSTALLATION, TURN SCREW COUNTERCLOCKWISE TWO (2) TURNS AND LEAVE IN THIS POSITION.

HV TANK (TOP VIEW)

Figure 2-10. H.V. Tank (Top View) The following instructions are provided should it be necessary to install the H.V. Tank. When installing the H.V. Tank, keep it upright at all times. See Figure 2-11 and proceed as follows: WARNING! After completing the following procedure, double-check the H.V. Tank wiring connections to make sure they are correctly connected. Incorrect wiring can cause damage to the generator. Ensure that ground wires are connected.


Revision W

2-15


CAUTION! The H.V. Tank weighs approximately 92 lbs. (41.7 kg). Lift with proper assistance. 1. Loosen four (4) screws securing the clear plastic high-voltage acrylic protection panel from the generator chassis and remove panel. 2. Position H.V. Tank on Tank Mounting Brackets so mounting holes in tank align with those in mounting brackets. Secure tank to brackets using four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/4" hex head screws, flat washers and lock washers. 3. Connect H.V. Tank cable terminal PC1 to Power Module A19 IGBT lower right terminal. Tighten screw securely. 4. Connect H.V. Tank cable terminal PC2 to right terminal lug on Capacitor C7. Tighten nut securely. 5. Connect H.V. Tank cable terminal PA1 to left terminal lug on Capacitor C4. Tighten nut securely. 6. Connect H.V. Tank cable terminal PA2 to Power Module A18 lower left IGBT terminal. Tighten screw securely. 7.

Locate ground wires for H.V. Tank (yellow/green) and securely fasten to H.V. Tank ground stud (GND) using 8/32 kep nut (provided on stud).

8. Insert plug A17P1 (16-pin plug on Cable Assembly AY51-017) into connector A17J1 on the H.V. Tank and tighten plug securely. 9. Re-install the clear plastic high-voltage protection panel on the generator chassis and re-tighten four (4) mounting screws.

Revision W

2-16



Figure 2-11. H.V. Tank Connections


Revision W

2-17


High Voltage Cables It is important that these instructions be followed for the proper installation of the High Voltage Cable terminals into the tube housing and H.V. Tank receptacles. Use proper handling to ensure cable terminals and receptacles are clean and free of moisture. Connect High Voltage Cables, respecting proper anode and cathode polarity, as follows: 1 BEFORE INSERTING CABLE, LOOSEN SET SCREW COAT WITH INSULATING COMPOUND BEFORE INSERTING

2 TIGHTEN RING NUT ONTO RECEPTACLE

3 FULLY TIGHTEN SET SCREW

Figure 2-12. High Voltage Cable Connection to H.V. Tank

Revision W

2-18



CAUTION! When routing the High Voltage Cables into the generator cabinet through the access openings, the anode and cathode cable must each be routed separate from all other system cables, except the Tube Rotor Cable, as shown in Figure 2-13. Doing so will reduce the possibility of electromagnetic noise coupling and subsequent degradation of system performance.

ALL OTHER CABLES

ROTOR CABLE

HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES

GENERATOR CABINET (VIEWED FROM REAR)

Figure 2-13. Routing High Voltage Cables into the Generator Cabinet


Revision W

2-19


1. If not already done so, assemble onto the High Voltage Cable end a cable retaining nut, grounding washer and strain relief (see Figure 2-14). Ensure the 10-32 x 1/4" locking screw is turned out so as not to interfere with engagement.

Figure 2-14. High Voltage Cable Assembly (Typical) 2. The High Voltage Cable terminals and tube housing and H.V. Tank receptacles must be clean and dry. Be sure compression gaskets are in place on the cable terminal. 3. To insure proper locking and grounding of the cable sheath, do not omit the compression gasket on the cable terminal, as it is necessary for proper contact between cable nut and flare. 4. Insert the cable terminal into the receptacle socket (watch the nipple on the terminal to ensure correct positioning of the contact pins). Coat the entire surface of the cable terminal insulator with insulating compound (supplied with cables) using clean, dry plastic spoon or wooden stick. Do not use fingers. Fully cover the entire surface with a heavy coat (approximately 1/16" to 1/8"). Build a pyramid at the tip of the terminal with the height of the compound even with the contact ends. 5. With terminal key aligned with receptacle key way, insert the cable terminal into receptacle until all excess compound has oozed out. Make sure the contact pins are engaged in the holes in the socket insulator. Wipe off any excess compound. 6. Tighten the cable nut while holding the cable firmly in place. Re-tighten after calibration as some loosening may take place after the housing has been heated and cooled. With cable nut properly tightened, secure with 10-32 x 1/4" locking screw.

Revision W

2-20



INTERFACE BOARD SETTINGS & CONNECTIONS The generator’s Interface Board A9 provides the means for electrically connecting external system components, such as collimators, tube stands, buckies, etc., and verifying the correct Rotor Boost Voltage setting (non-high speed starter systems only). Figure 2-15 shows connection locations on a typical non-digital (filmbased) system Interface Board; Figure 2-16 shows connection locations on a typical digital imaging system Interface Board. COLLIMATOR CONNECTIONS TERMINAL BLOCK TB1

DOOR INTERLOCK TERMINAL BLOCK TB6

JP1 INSTALLED ON SYSTEMS WITH MANUAL COLLIMATOR JP2 INSTALLED ON SYSTEMS WITH NON-BUCKY TABLE RECEPTOR

24VDC

SPARE

CO L R D Y

MIDWEST BUCKY SWITCHES (SEE TABLE/WALL BUCKY CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS) 24V RTN

15V RTN

GN D.

15 VDC

24VAC

C H ASSIS

24 VAC

C HASSIS G ND.

TUBESTAND TERMINAL BLOCK TB2

JP3 INSTALLED ON SYSTEMS WITH NON-BUCKY WALL RECEPTOR

250 VAC SLO-BLO 8 AM P

220VAC

110VAC

EXPOSURE HOLD CONNECTIONS (AUTO COLL.)

X-RAY ON LIGHT TERMINAL BLOCK TB5

WALL STAND BUCKY POWER TERMINAL BLOCK TB4

TUBE ROTOR BOOST VOLTAGE JUMPER (REV. R AND HIGHER BOARDS ONLY)

TABLE BUCKY POWER TERMINAL BLOCK TB3

Figure 2-15. Non-Digital System Interface Board A9 - Connection Locations


Revision W

2-21


COLLIMATOR CONNECTIONS TERMINAL BLOCK TB1

TUBESTAND TERMINAL BLOCK TB2

DOOR INTERLOCK TERMINAL BLOCK TB6

TUBE ROTOR BOOST VOLTAGE JUMPER (REV. J AND HIGHER BOARDS ONLY)

24V

SPARE

24V RTN

15V

15V RTN

COLL RDY

GND

24VAC

24VAC

CH GND

D8

D12

R19 R16

F13

F18

F19

D7

D13

D20

D19

D2

EXPOSURE HOLD CONNECTIONS (AUTO COLL.)

D4

R17 D14

K3

R12

R11

1 TB5

TABLE BUCKY POWER TERMINAL BLOCK TB3

WALL STAND BUCKY POWER TERMINAL BLOCK TB7

X-RAY ON LIGHT TERMINAL BLOCK TB5

Figure 2-16. Digital System Interface Board A9 - Connection Locations Door Interlock Switch Connection To wire a door interlock circuit, remove jumper and connect door interlock wires (supplied by installer) to terminal block TB6 pins 1 and 2 on Interface Board A9 [(P/N AY40-023T/or AY40-061T on internal high-speed starter systems) or (AY40-034T/or AY40-062T on internal high-speed starter systems)]. See Figures 2-15 or 2-16 for terminal board TB6 location. When the door is closed, the circuit will be continuous (contacts closed). "In Use" Light Switch Connection To wire an "X-ray On" or "In-Use light", connect wires from light circuit (supplied by installer) to terminal board TB5 pins 1 and 2 on Interface Board A9 [(P/N AY40-023T/or AY40-061T on internal high-speed starter systems) or (AY40-034T/or AY40-062T on internal high-speed starter systems)] (On AY40-062T boards, pin 3 is not used). See Figures 2-15 or 2-16 for terminal block TB5 location. When the X-ray generator is in either PREP or EXPOSE states, the circuit will be continuous (contacts closed).

Revision W

2-22



Collimator Connections Terminal block TB1 (see Figures 2-15 or 2-16 for terminal block TB1 location) provides 24 VAC (TB1-1 and TB1-2) and chassis ground (TB1-3) outputs for connection to a collimator. On systems equipped with a manual collimator, verify jumper A9JP1 is installed; remove A9JP1 if system is equipped with an automatic collimator. Also available on terminal block TB2 is the COL RDY terminal (at TB2-4) for connection to automatic collimator with "exposure hold" interlock (use CHASSIS GND terminal TB2-7 for return). Refer to collimator manual for specific connection details. Tube Stand/Peripheral Equipment Connections Interface Board A9 Terminal block TB2 (see Figures 2-15 or 2-16 for terminal board TB2 location) provides +28 VDC (TB2-1) and +28 VDC RTN (TB2-2) terminals for connection of a tube stand power input cable, when applicable. Maximum load current is 1.5A at these terminals. Internal +28 VDC Power Supply Option (QG-28VPS) If generator is equipped with +28 VDC Internal Power Supply Option (QG-28VPS), see Figure 2-16a and connect the tubestand/wallstand’s power supply input leads as follows: 1. Positive lead to terminal P2-1 (+) on power supply 2. Negative lead to terminal P2-2 (-) on power supply OUTPUT VOLTAGE ADJ. POT.

P2-2 (-)

P2-1 (+)

Figure 2-16a. Internal +28 VDC Power Supply Option (QG-28VPS) Location


Revision W

2-23


The output of the +28 VDC Power Supply is adjusted depending on the type of Quantum product it will supply power to, as indicated below: Table 2-1a: Internal +28 VDC Power Supply Option (QG-28VPS) Adjustment Quantum Product Type

Adjust Power Supply Output To:

Model RS-580 Overhead Tube Crane

+30 VDC

Model QV-800 Universal System

+28 VDC

Model QW-420-T, QW-420-T-D Vertical Tilting Wall Stand

+28 VDC

When using the +28 VDC Power Supply Option to provide power for a Model RS-580 Overhead Tube Crane, the +30 VDC output is intended for operating the tube crane’s transverse and longitudinal electromagnetic locks (brakes). Refer to the RS-580 Service Manual for connection instructions. CAUTION! The Internal +28 VDC Power Supply Option (QG-28VPS) is only available with 3-phase generators, and is intended to supply power to a single, external device. Tube Rotor Boost Voltage Verification (Systems without High (Dual) Speed Starter Option) Ensure Interface Board A9 [P/N AY40-023T (non-digital systems, revision R or later boards only)/AY40-023T1 (non-digital stored energy systems, revision K or later boards only)/AY40-034T (digital systems, revision J or later boards only)] Tube Rotor Boost Voltage Jumper is configured correctly depending on the type of tube the generator is being interfaced with according to table below: Table 2-1: Tube Rotor Boost Voltage Jumper Setting TUBE TYPE

JUMPER POSITION

ROTOR BOOST VOLTAGE SETTING

Toshiba E7252X, E7813X, E7242X, E7239X

Pins 1-2

100 VAC Stator

All others (220 VAC stator)

Pins 2-3

220 VAC Stator

Revision W

2-24



RADIOGRAPHIC SYSTEM EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS The following paragraphs provide instructions for cable connections between the HF Series x-ray generator and the x-ray tube, table, and wall bucky, as necessary. Refer to Generator Interconnection Diagrams in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS for additional guidance. Ensure the generator is configured with the correct value rotor phase capacitor C1 (on the Generator door) for tube installed in the system (refer to Table 2-2). Table 2-2: Standard Single-Speed Rotor Phase Capacitor Configuration Tube Type

Rotor Phase Capacitors

E7239X, E7242X

25 uF

E7254X, E7255X, ALL VARIAN, ALL DUNLEE (including MX100 Replacement for GE Radiographic System)

30 uF

E7813X, E7252X

45 uF

Tube Rotor Cable (Systems without High (Dual) Speed Starter Option) Route the X-ray Tube Rotor Cable AY51-014 through the middle cable access opening located in the top rear wall of the generator chassis. Connect one end of the cable to the appropriate terminals on Terminal Block TB1 on Rotor Drive Board A10 (P/N AY40-013T) as shown in Figure 2-17. Connect the opposite end to the X-ray tube’s terminal strip (refer to appropriate interconnection diagram in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS for tube connections).


Revision W

2-25


2

TEST POINT 7 ROTOR RUN

10 1

PD1

U6

TP10 R45 R22

TP7

1

TP6

9

D17 + C7

C16

D8 C15

B

C E

R41

+

R46

D15

TP15

Q6

C E

R11

B

D1

C E

B

C

TP11 C4

R30

R33 R4 R5 R7 D2 R8

U1 C3

R3 D14

R27 R19

C

R6

TP8

Q9 U5 7 8

R17 R16 R32

TP9

R26 Q3

B

B

D3

R12

D6

Q5

C E

R29 TP14

Q10

R15

C1 D11 D10

Q7

Q8

E

PD4 TP5

D9

D7 D12

TEST POINT 10 +15 VDC

9

J3

J4

Q2

R9

E B

R10

R36

U2

U3 U4

R25 Q4

R20 D4

Q1

D5

R24

MOV4 T1

POTENTIOMETER R20 TUBE CURRENT ADJ. POTENTIOMETER R24 TUBE CURRENT ADJ.

G

T1

G

T2

T2

MOV1

TEST POINT 3 AC RETURN

TP4

J5 3

TP3

1

C6

TEST POINT 4 PHASE

R14 10W

MOV3

C2

R2 10W

J1 4

TP2

1

TP13

K2 R37

D18

TP12

C8

TERMINAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

SIGNAL MAIN PHASE COMMON NOT USED NOT USED GROUND

TEST POINT 12 200 VAC

MOV2 R35 C14 1

PD3

PD2 TB1

TP1


7

TEMP

TERMINAL BLOCK TB1

TEST POINT 1 COMMON

TEST POINT 2 MAIN

Figure 2-17. Rotor Board AY40-013T Tube Rotor Cable Connections

Revision W

2-26



Tube Rotor Cable (Systems with AID External High Speed Starter QG-HSS Option Only) Refer to Figure 2-18, the AID High Speed Starter installation manual and/or the appropriate interconnection diagram in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS for high speed starter connections. Note: This procedure applies only to sys-

tems equipped with the externally-connected AID High Speed Starter option.

1. Connect one end of X-ray Tube Rotor Cable AY51-032T to the appropriate connector/terminals on AID High Speed Starter LC102 terminal block TS2 (see Figure 2-18). 2. Connect the opposite end to the X-ray tube’s terminal strip. 3. Route the X-ray Tube Rotor Cable AY51-033 (Toshiba tubes) through the middle cable access opening located in the top rear wall of the generator chassis. 4. Connect one end of the High Speed Starter Cable AY51-033 to the appropriate connector/terminals on AID High Speed Starter terminal strips TB1 and TB2 and connect to Cable Assembly AY51-032T (temperature sense connector). 5. Connect the opposite end of the High Speed Starter Cable AY51-033 to connector J8 on Logic Board A1, AY40-006S. 6. Connect 220 VAC power input to High Speed Starter. 7.

The AID High Speed Starter was factory pre-configured for the x-ray tube supplied with the generator. Verify boost and brake settings are correct according tube manufacturer’s data sheets (refer to Table 2-3). Verify the high speed starter is configured with the correct capacitors for the tube used with the system: Toshiba E7252X and E7813X should be configured for 45 uF. All other tube types require 30 uF.


Revision W

2-27


Table 2-3: AID High Speed Starter DIP Switch Settings TUBE TYPE

RUN VOLTAGE (180 HZ)

HSS SWITCH SW1 (BOOST TIME)

HSS SWITCH SW2 (BRAKE TIME)

TOSHIBA E7813X, E7252X

220 VAC (#6 tap*)

60 VAC (75 VAC #3 tap*)

1.2 seconds: SW1-1 = OFF SW1-2 = ON SW1-3 = ON SW1-4 = OFF SW1-5 = OFF

2.0 seconds: SW2-1 = OFF SW2-2 = ON SW2-3 = OFF SW2-4 = ON SW2-5 = OFF

TOSHIBA E7254X, E7255X

490 VAC (use 370 VAC tap #10*)

165 VAC (75 VAC #3 tap*)



VARIAN (ALL 3 INCH DIA.)


100 VAC (75 VAC #3 tap*)

1.0 seconds SW1-1 = ON SW1-2 = OFF SW1-3 = ON SW1-4 = OFF SW1-5 = OFF


VARIAN (ALL 4 INCH DIA.)


100 VAC (75 VAC #3 tap*)

2.2 seconds SW1-1 = ON SW1-2 = ON SW1-3 = OFF SW1-4 = ON SW1-5 = OFF


Revision W

2-28

START VOLTAGE (180 HZ)



Figure 2-18. AID High Speed Starter Connections


Revision W

2-29


Tube Rotor Cable (Systems with Internal High Speed Starter QHSS Option Only) The Q-HSS High Speed Starter is factory pre-configured for the x-ray tube supplied with the generator and, with the exception of the Rotor Cable, does not require any field connections or adjustments. Tables 2-3a and 2-3b are provided in the event tube replacement is necessary or if the HSS Power Driver Board AY40-036S needs replacement. The table indicates the proper connections of the various transformer voltage inputs (380, 220, 120, 80, 60 and 0 VAC) to the HSS Driver Board at Terminal Block TB1 for each of the compatible tubes used with the generator. Also, ensure the generator is configured with the correct value rotor capacitors for the installed tube as indicated in Table 2-3a. Table 2-3a: Quantum High-Speed Starter Rotor Phase Capacitor Configuration Tube Type

Rotor Phase Capacitors

E7813X, E7252X, E7869X

Install one (1) 40 uF cap (low speed), two (2) 12 uF in series (high speed)

E7254X, all Varian, all Dunlee (except MX100 GE replacement, see below)


Dunlee MX100 Replacement for GE Radiographic System


If not already connected, connect transformer input wires to HSS Driver Board AY40-036S terminal block TB1 plug for correct tube type in accordance with table below: Table 2-3b: HSS Driver Board AY40-036S Boost and Run Voltage Requirements: Transformer Input Wires to Terminal Block Plug TB1 TB1-1

TB1-3

TB1-5

TB1-6

TB1-7

HIGH SPEED BOOST VOLTAGE

LOW SPEED BOOST VOLTAGE

HIGH SPEED RUN VOLTAGE

LOW SPEED RUN VOLTAGE

COMMON

TOSHIBA E7255, E7254

WIRE #5 (380 VAC)

WIRE #4 (220 VAC)

WIRE #3 (120 VAC)

WIRE #2A (80 VAC)

WIRE #1 (0 VAC)

TOSHIBA E7252, E7813

WIRE #4 (220 VAC)

WIRE #3 (120 VAC)

WIRE #2A (80 VAC)

WIRE #2 (60 VAC)

WIRE #1 (0 VAC)

TUBE MODEL

Revision W

2-30



Table 2-3b: HSS Driver Board AY40-036S Boost and Run Voltage Requirements: Transformer Input Wires to Terminal Block Plug TB1 TB1-1

TB1-3

TB1-5

TB1-6

TB1-7

HIGH SPEED BOOST VOLTAGE

LOW SPEED BOOST VOLTAGE

HIGH SPEED RUN VOLTAGE

LOW SPEED RUN VOLTAGE

COMMON

VARIAN RAD 92, RAD 60, RAD 56, RAD 44, A292, A272; DUNLEE DA 1092, DU309, PX 1302, PX 1312, PX 1429, PX 1436

WIRE #5 (380 VAC)

WIRE #4 (220 VAC)

WIRE #3 (120 VAC)

WIRE #2 (60 VAC)

WIRE #1 (0 VAC)

VARIAN RAD 21, RAD 14, RAD 13, A192; TOSHIBA E7869X DUNLEE MX100 Replacement for GE

WIRE #5 (380 VAC)

WIRE #4 (220 VAC)

WIRE #2A (80 VAC)

WIRE #2 (60 VAC)

WIRE #1 (0 VAC)

TUBE MODEL

NOTE 1: Stow unused WIRE #2 (60 VAC) or WIRE #2A (80 VAC) in unused terminal block TB1-2 location. NOTE 2: Terminal block location TB1-4 is not used. Non-Overhead Tube Crane Rotor Cable Wiring Instructions Refer to Figure 2-18a and the steps below to connect the Rotor Cable to the HSS Driver Board x-ray tube on a system not using an Overhead Tube Crane. 1. Route the X-ray Tube Rotor Cable from the tube through the middle cable access opening located in the top rear wall of the generator chassis. 2. Connect the MAIN (BLK) conductor to terminal 1 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB2. 3. Connect the PHASE (RED) conductor to terminal 3 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB2. 4. Connect the COMMON (WHT) conductor to terminal 6 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB2. 5. Connect the TEMP SENSE (ORN) conductor to terminal 1 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB4. 6. Connect the TEMP SENSE (GRN) conductor to terminal 2 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB4.


Revision W

2-31


7.

Connect the opposite end to the X-ray tube’s terminal strip.

ROTOR CABLE

WHT

RED

BLK

A20A2TB2

L5A

GRN L4A

TB1 L5B

L4

L5

R28

D31

D4

ORN

R11C17

L4B

R16

A20A2TB4 TP2

R5

D6

ROTOR CABLE CONNECTIONS:

BE

R68

R15

B E

R71

PHASE (RED) TO A20A2TB2-3 R67

DANGER

R73 R72

C2

HIGH VOLTAGE

R13

COMMON (WHT) TO A20A2TB2-6

D12 J1

BE

R18

R17

D11

R2

DANGERC21

TP1

HIGH VOLTAGE

MAIN (BLK) TO A20A2TB2-1

C7

C33

C6

D14

TEMP SENSE (ORN) TO A20A2TB4-1

R64

R66

R26

R20

TEMP SENSE (GRN) TO A20A2TB4-2

R50

R43

C28

C42 R58 J3

C47

R54

C37

U9

TP10

1 C30

C27

C29

R42

R47

R63

C51

20

C49

R55 R60

D22

TP6

TP8

HSS DRIVER BOARD A20A2 (AY40-036S) Figure 2-18a. Non-Overhead Tube Crane System Rotor Cable Connections Overhead Rotor Cable Wiring Instructions Refer to Figure 2-18b and the steps below to connect the Rotor Cable to the x-ray tube on a system using an Overhead Tube Cranes: 1. Route the X-ray Tube Rotor Cable from the tube through the middle cable access opening located in the top rear wall of the generator chassis. 2. Connect the MAIN (BLK 0) conductor to terminal 1 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB2. 3. Connect the PHASE (BLK 1) conductor to terminal 3 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB2. 4. Connect the COMMON (BLK 2) conductor to terminal 6 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB2.

Revision W

2-32



5. Connect the TEMP SENSE (BLK) conductor to terminal 1 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB4. 6. Connect the TEMP SENSE (WHT) conductor to terminal 2 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB4. 7.

Connect the opposite end to the X-ray tube’s terminal strip. ROTOR CABLE

TUBE TEMP CABLE LX1-D160 X6.1sw;3ws

BLK 2

BLK 1

BLK 0

A20A2TB2

L5A

WHT L4A

TB1 L5B

L4

L5

R28

D31

D4

BLK

R11C17

L4B

R16

A20A2TB4 TP2

R5

D6

ROTOR/TEMP CABLE CONNECTIONS:

BE

R68

B E

R71

R73 R72

PHASE (BLK 1) TO A20A2TB2-3 R67

DANGER

R15

HIGH VOLTAGE

C2

R13

COMMON (BLK 2) TO A20A2TB2-6

D12 J1

BE

R18

R17

D11

R2

DANGERC21

TP1

HIGH VOLTAGE

MAIN (BLK 0) TO A20A2TB2-1

C7

C33

C6

D14

TEMP SENSE (BLK) TO A20A2TB4-1

R64

R66

R26

R20

TEMP SENSE (WHT) TO A20A2TB4-2

R50

R43

C28

C42 R58 J3

C47

R54

C37

U9

TP10

1 C30

C27

C29

R42

R47

R63

C51

20

C49

R55 R60

D22

TP6

TP8

HSS DRIVER BOARD A20A2 (AY40-036S) Figure 2-18b. Overhead Tube Crane System Rotor Cable Connections


Revision W

2-33


Table/Wall Bucky Connections Wall stand and/or table buckies are interconnected to the HF Series x-ray generator via Interface Board A9, P/N AY40-023T terminal blocks A9TB4 (Wall Stand) and A9TB3 (Table) or Digital Interface Board AY40-034T terminal blocks A9TB7 (Wall Stand) and A9TB3 (Table) using 5-conductor, 18AWG cable (P/N EL75-025), which is provided with the table and/or wall stand. IMPORTANT! When interfacing to a 14" x 17" Midwest table or wall bucky, switches A9SW1 or A9SW2, respectively, must be set to the "M" position. For 14" x 36" Midwest, Progeny, or LF type buckies, switches A9SW1 or A9SW2 must not be set to the "M" position. Refer to bucky manufacturer’s installation manual (provided with system) for specific bucky wiring information and to Figures 2-15, 2-16, and in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS, Figures 6-6 through 6-9. Bucky cable entrance/exit is provided through the access opening in the top rear panel of the generator chassis. DO NOT route cables through an opening containing a High Voltage Cable (see Figure 2-13). When connecting a table bucky, remove jumper JP2 on Interface Board A9. When connecting a wall bucky, remove jumper JP3 on Interface Board A9. Table/Wall Ion Chamber Connections (AEC Option Only) Systems equipped with standard type AEC (AEC Board AY40-031S): If using a wall ion chamber, connect wall ion chamber cable to AEC Board A11, P/N AY40-031S connector J2. If using a table ion chamber, connect table ion chamber cable to AEC Board A11 connector J4. Table 2-4 shows AID type ion chamber connector pin assignments. Route the ion chamber cable(s) as necessary to exit through the access opening in top rear side of generator chassis, and secure as required. DO NOT route through an opening containing a High Voltage Cable (see Figure 2-13). Table 2-4: AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 Ion Chamber 9-Pin Sub-D Connector Pin-Outs

Revision W

2-34

9-PIN SUB-D CONNECTOR PIN

FUNCTION

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

NONE FIELD 2 SELECT FIELD 1 SELECT RESET OUTPUT FIELD 3 SELECT NEGATIVE SUPPLY POSITIVE SUPPLY GROUND



(Note: Perform ion chamber balance procedure in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions provided with chamber.) Typically, when the HF Series x-ray generator is shipped with an AID ICX ion chamber, the chamber jumpers are pre-set in the following configuration: Table 2-5: AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 Ion Chamber Jumper Configuration JUMPER

POSITION

FUNCTION

61135A W1

1-2 & 3-4

LOW ACTIVE RESET

61135A W2, W3, W4

1-2 & 3-4

LOW ACTIVE FIELD SELECT

61135A W5, W6

1-2 & 3-4

A-B-C = 2-1-3

61135A W7

2-3

POSITIVE OUTPUT SIGNAL

CAUTION! The ion chamber must be electrically isolated from the bucky to ensure proper AEC system performance. For systems equipped with universal type AEC (AEC Board AY40-027S): Up to four ion chambers can be used. Connect ion chambers as follows: •

Wall#1 ion chamber to A11J8

•

Wall#2 ion chamber to A11J12

•

Table ion chamber to A11J10

•

Auxiliary ion chamber to A11J13

Note that to connect a Siemens ion chamber AEC cable to universal AEC Board A11 requires an interface cable assembly AY51-061 for each chamber. This cable assembly adapts the ion chamber connector to 9-pin D-Sub type used on the AEC Board, and provides a separate 300 VDC wire for connection to A11TB1. Route the ion chamber cable(s) as necessary to exit through the access opening in top rear side of generator chassis, and secure as required. DO NOT route through an opening containing a High Voltage Cable (see Figure 2-13). Interfacing to Canon Digital Radiographic Receptor (When Applicable) The digital radiographic receptor is interconnected to the HF Series x-ray generator via Interface Board A9, P/N AY40-034T terminal blocks A9TB7 (Wall Stand) and A9TB3 (Table), respectively, using 4-conductor, 18AWG cable. Refer to the digital receptor manufacturer’s installation manual for more detailed wiring instructions.


Revision W

2-35


Digital receptor cable entrance/exit is provided through the access opening in the top rear panel of the generator chassis. DO NOT route signal cables through an opening containing a High Voltage Cable (see Figure 2-13). When connecting to a table digital receptor, remove jumper JP2 on Interface Board A9. When connecting to wall digital receptor, remove jumper JP3 on Interface Board A9. Interfacing to CMT Digital Radiographic Receptor (When Applicable) Refer to CMT digital receptor installation manual for detailed wiring instructions. Interfacing to Siemens Ion Chambers (When Applicable)

Note: When interfacing the generator to a Siemens table/wall ion chamber and a Quantum table/wall ion chamber (AID type), only the Siemens ion chambers require the use of cable assembly AY51-061. The Quantum table/wall ion chamber can be connected directly to AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) connector J10 (TABLE) or J8 (WALL). Interfacing of the HF Series x-ray generator to Siemens table and/or wall ion chambers, such as in Siemens Tomography System, is facilitated using the "universal" type AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) located on the front side of the generator cabinet PCB door. The VERTIX wall stand and MULTIX table ion chambers are connected as shown in Figure 2-19. Note that cable assemblies AY51-061 shown in the illustration should already be connected to both the MULTIX table AEC cable EK14 and the VERTIX wall stand AEC cable. Any additional ion chambers used with the system are connected as described in "Table/Wall Ion Chamber Connections (AEC Option Only)" procedure included in this chapter.

Figure 2-19. AEC Ion Chamber Connections (Siemens Tomography System)

Revision W

2-36



Secure the ion chamber cables to the PCB Door using cable ties as shown in Figure 2-20.

SECURE ONE ION CHAMBER CABLE CONNECTOR HERE

SECURE OTHER ION CHAMBER CABLE CONNECTOR HERE

Figure 2-20. Siemens Ion Chamber Cable Management Interfacing to Siemens Tomography System (When Applicable) The Siemens tomo interface cable (supplied with the Siemens system) has attached to it at one end three plugs identified as "KK1B G1,G2 X10", "KK1B G1,G2 X11" and "KK1B G1,G2 X12". Plugs "X10" (TABLE), "X11" (WALL) and "X12" (TOMO SWEEP TIME) will need to be cut off and the wire ends stripped to allow connection to the universal AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) pluggable


Revision W

2-37


terminal blocks A11TB10, A11TB12 and A11TB11, respectively. Refer to Figure 2-21 for Siemens tomo interface cable wire connections. Secure the tomo interface cable securely using cable ties.

Figure 2-21. Siemens Tomo/Ion Chamber Interface Cable Interconnection Diagram Check that jumper JP1 is installed on Universal AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S). If not, install a jumper.

Revision W

2-38



Interfacing to Pausch Tomography System (When Applicable) To interface the HF Series generator to Pausch tomo system, two lengths of 10-conductor shielded cable is required (supplied with the HF Series generator). No wire terminations are required for interconnecting the cables. Refer to Figure 2-22 for Pausch tomo/generator interface wiring. After interfacing, secure the tomo interface cable securely using cable ties as required. Check that jumper JP1 is not installed on Universal AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S). If installed, remove this jumper. IMPORTANT! Be sure to re-program the tomo sweep times on the Pausch tomography system to correspond with available time settings selectable at the HF Series generator Operator Control Panel.


Revision W

2-39


Figure 2-22. Pausch Tomography System Interconnection Diagram

Revision W

2-40



OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL SETUP The HF Series X-ray Generator is available with several different types of operator control panel (OCP) configurations. These include: •

ODYSSEY Operator Control Panel

•

Q-VISION Touch-Screen Operator Control Panel

•

Integrated Workstation Control Panel (e.g., Canon DR Workstation, Agfa NX Workstation, etc.)

The paragraphs that follow describe the installation and setup procedures for each type control panel. ODYSSEY Operator Control Panel The ODYSSEY Operator Control Panel (OCP) is provided with a 50-ft. interconnect cable. Extended length OCP cables are available; part number QGCBL65 is 65-ft. length, and part number QG-CBL85 is 85-ft. length. The OCP can be placed directly on a shelf, table top, or on top of the Generator Cabinet, resting on its rubber-tipped feet. It may also be mounted on a pedestal (requires QG-PDL option) or on a wall-mounted bracket (requires QG-WM option). The following are installation instructions for each option. OCP Pedestal Mounting (QG-PDL Option) 1. On systems equipped with Pedestal Mount option QG-PDL, mount the OCP on the pedestal as follows: Turn the OCP over and rest it on a surface covered with soft material. 2. Remove four (4) OCP front panel screws. 3. Turn over the OCP. Lift up OCP front panel to access OCP mounting holes (if necessary, insert a small flat blade screwdriver under the edge of the panel, in the upper left side, and lift up panel). 4. Position the OCP on the pedestal aligning the pedestal mounting holes in the bottom of OCP with the mounting holes in the top flange of the pedestal. 5. Secure the OCP to the pedestal using four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/4" pan head phillips screws, flat washers and nuts. 6. Re-install four (4) OCP front panel screws. CAUTION! The OCP serial cable shield (yellow/ green wire) provides a protective earth ground from the OCP to the generator cabinet. Verify both ends of the OCP serial cable are properly secured to grounded mounting screws as described in the following step. 7.

Connect OCP serial cable (P/N AY51-018) between connector A16J1 on the OCP and connector J5 on CPU Board A1 (P/N AY40-006T).


Revision W

2-41


8. Connect the yellow/green ground wires at each end of OCP serial cable to the nearest mounting screw on OCP Control Board A16A1 (AY40-004S) and Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S). 9. Ensure the connector screws and PCB mounting screws are fully tightened. CAUTION! The OCP serial cable shield is electrically connected to the connector shells at either end of the cable. It is recommended the OCP serial cable connectors not be removed so as not to compromise integrity of cable shield connections. If necessary to remove connector, verify that after the connectors are re-installed, there is less than 0.1 ohm resistance between connector shell at one end of cable and the connector shell at opposite end of the cable. 10. If mounting OCP to floor, either transfer drill four mounting holes in floor using the OCP base plate as a guide or mark the floor in accordance with dimensions given in Figure 2-23, and then drill holes where marked. Drill holes using a #W drill bit (0.390" diameter). After OCP cable connection is complete, secure OCP to floor using 3/8" hardware suitable for floor type.

Figure 2-23. OCP Mounting Hole Locations

Revision W

2-42



OCP Wall Mounting (QG-WM Option) (DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN INCHES) 1.00

10.25

11.01

.44 2X 1.00

MOUNTING CONFIGURATION A (SIDE VIEW)

6.50

6.50

O.203 THRU 6X

(REAR VIEW)

15.00

MOUNTING CONFIGURATION B (SIDE VIEW)

(TOP VIEW)

Figure 2-24. QG-WM Wall Mount Option Installation Configurations On systems equipped with Wall Mounting option QG-WM, mount the OCP to the wall as follows: 1. Secure the Wall Mount to the wall using hardware suitable for wall construction type (each screw capable of supporting 15 lbs. pull load). 2. Turn the OCP over and rest it on a surface covered with soft material. 3. Remove four (4) OCP front panel screws. 4. Turn over the OCP. Lift up OCP front panel (if necessary, insert a small flat blade screwdriver under the edge of the panel, in the upper left side, and lift up panel) to access OCP mounting holes.


Revision W

2-43


5. Position the OCP on the Wall Mount bracket aligning the mounting holes in the bottom of OCP with the mounting holes in the wall bracket. 6. Secure the OCP to the Wall Mount Bracket using four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/4" pan head phillips screws, flat washers and nuts. 7.

Re-install four (4) OCP front panel screws.

8. Connect one end of the OCP serial cable (P/N AY51-018) to connector J3 on the OCP. Route the OCP serial cable through the access opening in the Wall Mount Bracket and connect to connector J5 on CPU Board A1 (P/N AY40-006T). Ensure the connector screws are fully tightened. DO NOT route serial cable through an opening containing a High Voltage Cable (see Figure 2-13). Q-VISION Operator Control Panel The Q-VISION Operator Control Panel (OCP) is an all-in-one PC, with the computer integrated with the touch-screen monitor in a single case. The QVISION OCP is provided with a Power/Expose Control Box (AY20-271), which contains a two-stage, hand-held PREP/EXPOSE switch and a built-in generator ON/STANDBY rocker switch for remotely powering on/off the Generator. Cables for interconnection of the Q-VISION OCP and Power/Expose Control Box to the generator are available in either 50-ft. or a 100-ft. interconnect lengths, as specified at the time of order. In order to interface Q-VISION with the generator, the generator must be equipped with the "Q-Connect" option, which provides an OCP Interface Board (AY40-073S) that enables Ethernet connectivity to the generator’s Logic Board AY40-006S. The Q-VISION OCP monitor is intended for use as a "touch-screen" input device; however, a keyboard and mouse are provided for use by field service technicians if and when it becomes necessary to perform operations external to the Q-VISION program environment (such as when performing operating system functions). The Q-VISION OCP can be placed directly on a flat surface such as a table top or desk, or on can be wall-mounted using Wall Mount option QGV-WM. Refer to the Q-Connect Option System Interconnection Diagram in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS and proceed as follows: 1.

Connect AC power adapter plug to power jack on the All-in-One PC (Q-VISION) in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions (provided with PC).

2. If optional keyboard and/or mouse are provided, connect these in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions (provided with PC). 3. Connect Ethernet cable from All-in-One PC (Q-VISION) to an Ethernet Switch provided with Q-VISION OCP. 4. Connect Ethernet cable EL75-058-XXX between Ethernet Switch and Generator OCP Interface Board (AY40-073S) connector J1 (see Figure 2-24a). 5. Install the Ethernet Switch Power Supply connector, and plug transformer into 110 VAC, 60Hz electric outlet (220 VAC, 50Hz power source applica-

Revision W

2-44



tions are compatible with the supplied dual voltage power adaptor). See Figure 2-24b.

ETHERNET CABLE CONNECTION

GENERATOR LOGIC BOARD (AY40-006S)

OCP INTERFACE BOARD (AY40-073S)

Figure 2-24a. OCP Interface Board - AY40-073S (Ethernet Connection)

Figure 2-24b. Ethernet Switch Box (Grounded)


Revision W

2-45


6. The Power/Expose Control Box (AY20-271) must be installed between the Generator and the "Non-patient Area" in which the Q-VISION OCP and the Operator will be positioned. The Power/Expose Control Box should be securely mounted in close proximity to the Operator’s position for easy access to the ON/ STANDBY Switch, and in clear view of the Q-VISION OCP. A 30-inch expansion cable for the 2-stage Expose Switch is hardwired to the Power/Expose Control Box.

6-PIN MODULAR PLUG

Figure 2-24c. Power/Expose Control Box 7.

A prefabricated 50-ft. or 100 ft. cable with 6-pin modular plugs (AY51243-XXX), is supplied for connecting the Power/Expose Control Box to the generator OCP Interface Board (AY40-073S). See Figure 2-24c. DO NOT route cable through an opening in the generator containing a High Voltage Cable (see Figure 2-13).

8. On systems provided with a Wall Mount Kit (option QGV-WM), install the wall mount components (VESA Mount Adapter, VESA Mount Plate, and Wall Mount Bracket) in accordance with instructions provided with the Wall Mount Kit. 9. Ensure wall attachment hardware is suitable for wall construction type (each screw capable of supporting 25 lbs. pull load). Integrated Workstation Operator Control Panel If the generator is to be integrated with an external digital imaging workstation computer for operation as a generator control panel, the "Q-Connect" option must be installed in the generator. This option provides an Ethernet adapter to enable connection of the generator to the workstation personal computer (PC). Typically, this adapter is factory installed, and is ready for use when the unit is shipped. If the Q-Connect Ethernet adapter is needed,

Revision W

2-46



upgrade kits are available (contact Quantum Technical Support for more information). Refer to the Integration System Service Manual provided, depending on the the type system integration, for system interconnection and software installation instructions. A general Q-Connect Option System Interconnection Diagram is provided in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS in this manual for reference. Optional Remote Expose Switch Connection

1 4

TP10 C43 R23

1

TP9

R37 JP12

R18C41

1

C27

U19 R34 R35

1

1

COMM

RS-232

D19

1

JP6

EXPOSE PREP

GND

11

JP7

R16 R11

R13 R12

1

D2 D3 D4

10

JP16 20

TP1

RESET

1

U10

JP11

D16

1

PD6 PD7

DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE

This option is not applicable on generators equipped with Q-Connect option. Optional remote expose switch (R80-HS) is wired into the OCP Board A16A1 (P/N AY40-004S) at TB1 as shown in Figure 2-25, below. If desired, removing jumpers JP6 and JP7 on OCP Control Board A16A1 (AY40004S1) disables the operation of the PREP and EXPOSE buttons on the operator control panel (see figure below).

TB1

Figure 2-25. Operator Control Panel (OCP) Control Board Terminal Block TB1 Connections for Remote Expose Switch INITIAL POWER UP With the generator completely assembled and when electrical checks are complete, the system is ready for initial power up. Proceed as follows:


Revision W

2-47


1. Set ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 2. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel or Power/ Expose Control Box on Q-VISION equipped generators to the on ( ) position. 3. The system begins the start up sequence (the "Welcome Screen" is displayed and "Testing. Standby." is flashing). After a few seconds, the normal operation screen will display. IMPORTANT! If the system is a STORED ENERGY (SE) type, and it has been longer than one month since being shipped from factory, allow the system approximately four hours to re-charge the batteries before taking any exposures. The system must be turned on with auto-shutoff disabled to re-charge. Refer to "Generator Time-out Setting" paragraph in Chapter 3, CALIBRATION for detailed instructions. 4. If necessary, the operator control panel LCD display intensity can be increased or decreased by adjusting the rotary potentiometer on the rear side of the operator console. TRANSFORMER TAP VALIDATION 1. On single-phase non-SE versions, using a DMM, measure the DC voltage across the (+) and (-) terminals of the Anode DC capacitor bank (i.e., C13C16). The voltage should be 400 (±20) VDC. If not, re-check line voltage and adjust transformer taps as required. (Refer to "Transformer Line Adjustment" procedure in this chapter for detailed instructions.) 2. On SE versions, verify that 220VAC (±10%) exists between A8P1-4 and A8J1-7. If these voltages are out of range, test the incoming AC line and confirm the correct taps have been selected at TB1. Monitor the charger output voltages at A8TP2 (positive supply) and A8TP3 (negative supply) while allowing the chargers to recharge the battery tray(s) until each test point rises to ±205 (±1.0) VDC. Note: Charging to these levels may take up to 2 hours. If these levels cannot be achieved, check the integrity of the batteries in the affected side of each tray. 3. On three-phase models (see Figures 6-49 and 6-50), correct transformer tap connections will yield 220 VAC measured between phases A, B and C as follows: a. Phase A located on Line Monitor Board A8 Fuse F4. b. Phase B located on Line Monitor Board A8 Fuse F5. c. Phase C located on Line Monitor Board A8 Fuse F6. d. In addition, using a DMM, measure 265 VAC between terminal block TB1 (neutral) and each Phase A, B and C.

Revision W

2-48



DC voltage measurement should be made across the (+) and (-) terminals of the anode DC capacitor bank (i.e., capacitors C13 - C16). The measured voltage should be +400 (±20) VDC. If not, re-check line voltage and adjust transformer taps as required to achieve as close to +400 VDC as possible. Q-VISION OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL - NETWORK SETTINGS VERIFICATION NOTE! Both the generator cabinet and Q-VISION network IP addresses are set at the factory to assure initial communication between the two components. If the generator will be conncetred to the internet (such as when utilizing the remote servicing feature), the factory default IP addresses must be changed in accordance with facility Inoformation Technology (IT) administrator’s requirements. If system is equipped with a Q-VISION operator control panel, verify Generator Network Settings as follows: 1. Set ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 2. Set the power on/standby switch on the Power/Expose Control Box to the on ( ) position. 3. The system begins the start up sequence. After a few seconds, the Q-VISION control panel screen will display.


Revision W

2-49


4. Touch the Help button located on the lower right corner of the QVISION screen (shown on right). The Generator Help Services Screen (Figure 2-25a) appears:

Figure 2-25a. Generator Help Services Screen 5. Touch the Login button at the lower left corner of the screen. A password entry keypad displays.

Figure 2-25b. Enter Password Screen 6. In the Enter Password screen, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the keypad, then select Enter. The word "Login" is replaced with "FieldTech" on the Generator Help Services screen to indicate successful login.

Revision W

2-50



7. On the Generator Help Services screen, select Service option. The General Service Options Menu appears:

Figure 2-25c. General Service Options Menu 8. Select Network Settings. The following screen appears:

Figure 2-25d. Network Settings Screen 9. The Network Settings Screen displays the network configuration settings of the personal computer housed within the all-in-one Q-VISION operator control panel. Verify the fields are set as follows:


Revision W

2-51


•

DHCP = Off

•

IP Address = 10.0.0.71

•

Subnet mask = 255.255.255.1

•

Default gateway = 10.0.0.1

•

Preferred DNS server = 10.0.0.3

10. If necessary, each of these fields can be modified by selecting the field, and then entering the correct information using the data input Touch Pad that appears. Note that the touch pad display includes numerical input buttons 0 through 9, including a decimal point, a plus sign (+), a minus sign (-), a clear (Clr) button, a delete (Del), a Cancel button and an Enter button; however, erroneous input via the numbers buttons will cause the displayed address to turn red, indicating that an error has been made either in acceptable value or entry format. Should an input error occur, it can be corrected by touching the Del button, followed by touching the correct key. The Clr button clears the Address window, and allows immediate re-entry of Address values. 11. Touch the Apply button to save new settings. 12. Return to the Generator Help Services Screen by touching the Back to Service button at lower left corner of screen. 13. On the Generator Help Services screen, select Generator Service. The Generator Service Options Menu appears:

ONLY PRESS THESE BUTTONS WHEN DIRECTED TO DO SO BY TECHNICAL SUPPORT

Figure 2-25e. General Service Options Menu

Revision W

2-52



14. Select Service Configuration. The following screen appears:

CURRENT IP ADDRESS OF GENERATOR Q-NODE

Figure 2-25f. Service Configuration Screen 15. The Service configuration Screen displays the network configuration settings of the generator cabinet, specifically of the Q-Node board (located on the Logic Board A1), which is a component of the Q-Connect generator option. The current Generator IP Address appears in the Generator IP Address field as shown in Figure 2-25f (10.0.0.175 is assigned at the factory as the default address). 16. Touch the Identify button. An audible tone will be emitted by the Power/ Expose Control Box if the Q-VISION OCP and the generator cabinet IP are communicating properly via the ethernet network connection.


Revision W

2-53


17. If the generator IP address needs to be changed, press the Load button to causes the lower portion of the "Service Configuration" screen to populate with data relevant to the Generator with the IP Address shown in the top portion of the screen, as shown below:

Figure 2-25g. Service Configuration Screen 18. To change the IP Address, SubnetMask, or DefaultGateway field, touch the ... button to the right of the field to open a data input Touch Pad, which operates in the same manner as described previously on the Network Settings Screen. 19. After all changes are made, touch Save button. This saves the new IP Address settings for the Generator.

Note: The Generator Q-Node and Q-VISION Subnet Addresses must match in order for the Service Configuration program to become operational. Once communication between the QVISION OCP Computer and the Generator has been established, the technician may then set the Generator IP Address in accordance with instructions provided by the cognizant IT professional for the facility at which the System is installed.

Revision W

2-54



ROTOR DRIVE BOARD A10 (AY40-013T) PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

Note: This procedure is not required on systems equipped with high speed starter option. Refer to Rotor Drive Board A10 (AY40-013T) Terminal Block Location Diagram in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS and verify Rotor Drive Board adjustments as follows: 1. Set A10R20 to approximately mid range. 2. Connect one channel of oscilloscope to A10TP15 and second channel to A10TP14. 3. Press and hold the PREP key for approximately 3 seconds. Verify that during the run cycle, the amplitude of the phase and main pulses are +14 VDC to +15 VDC and waveforms are as shown in Figure 2-26 (i.e., the peaks of waveforms at TP15 and TP14 should be between 2.5 and 3.0 milliseconds apart). 2.5 - 3.0 ms

14.0 to 15.0V(peak) A10TP15 Waveform 14.0 to 15.0V(peak) A10TP14 Waveform

Figure 2-26. Rotor Board Phase and Main Pulses 4. Press and hold PREP key for approximately 3 seconds. 5. Verify the peak voltage at A10TP14 after PREP has been pressed for at least 2 seconds (rotor in boost mode) is greater than 14 VPEAK. If necessary, adjust A10R20 to achieve the correct voltage. 6. Set A10R24 to approximately midrange. 7. Press and hold PREP key for approximately 3 seconds.


Revision W

2-55


8. Verify the peak voltage at A10TP15 after PREP key has been pressed for at least 2 seconds (rotor in boost mode) is greater than 14 VPEAK. If necessary, adjust A10R24 to achieve the correct voltage. 9. Connect a DMM between A10TB1-1 and A10TB1-3. 10. Press the PREP key and verify the voltages as follows: • For 110 VAC stator tubes (Toshiba E7242X, E7813X, E7252X, E7239X) 96 - 140 VAC during boost, 54 - 66 VAC during run • For 220 VAC stator tubes (all others tubes not listed above) 183 - 227 VAC during boost, 54 - 66 VAC during run 11. Install cabinet cover. 12. Proceed with system calibration procedure described in Chapter 3, CALIBRATION.

Revision W

2-56


Chapter

3

CALIBRATION

3-1

3-2

Chapter 3 Calibration

OVERVIEW This chapter provides instructions for configuring and calibrating the HF Series X-ray generator following installation. For additional information, NEMA Standards Publication/No. XR8-1979(R1994), Test Methods for Diagnostic X-ray Machines for Use During Initial Installation is recommended as a reference.

IMPORTANT NOTE: If the generator is equipped with the Q-Connect option" (Ethernet Adapter) for Agfa DiRex Integration (i.e., the Agfa NX workstation computer functions as the operator control panel), proceed to Appendix B, CALIBRATION (Agfa DiRex) for generator configuration and calibration instructions. If the generator is equipped with the "Q-Connect option" (Ethernet Adapter) for use with a Q-VISION operator control panel (OCP), or it is integrated with a workstation computer other than an Agfa DiRex Integration (e.g., the Canon DR Integration System, Agfa NX-DR Series Integration), refer to Appendix D, CALIBRATION (Insight - Canon) for generator configuration and calibration instructions. REQUIRED TOOLS AND MATERIALS The following lists the tools and materials required to perform the procedures contained in this chapter: •

Digital Voltmeter: Fluke Model 87 (or equivalent)

•

kV and mAs meter: Radcal Dynalyzer III (or equivalent)

•

Radiation meter (0-1000 mR)

•

Oscilloscope, 50 Mhz storage: Tek 2210 (or equivalent)

•

5 CM, 10 CM, 15 CM, 25 and 30 CM acrylic phantoms (required for calibrating systems equipped with QG-AEC option).

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CALIBRATION The HF Series x-ray generator has been factory configured and calibrated. It is necessary, however, to perform the following procedures to validate system compliance. Perform the procedures in the sequence presented, unless otherwise instructed.

HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC

Revision W

3-3


ACCESSING SERVICE MODE Calibration and configuration can only be performed by accessing the X-ray generator’s Service Mode. To gain access to the Service Mode, password entry is required. This is to prevent unintended and/or unauthorized changes to system settings. To access the Service Menu, proceed as follows: 1. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 2. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position, then to the on (

) position.

3. The "Welcome Screen" appears with "Testing. Stand by." displayed in the lower portion of screen (see Figure 3-1.).

PRESS TO ACCESS PASSWORD MENU

Figure 3-1. Welcome Screen 4. Within five seconds of start up, press the upper left field select key as shown in Figure 3-1). The Password menu displays:

FIELD SELECT KEYS

Figure 3-2. Password Menu

Revision W

3-4



5. In the Password menu, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the field select keys next to the corresponding numbers. (This password enables access to Service Mode for modification of system configuration, calibration and settings and for access to the APR Edit utility.) 6. Upon validation of the password, the Service Mode Menu displays:

Figure 3-3. Service Menu The Service Menu offers a selection of service-oriented system utilities, each of which is described briefly below: •

Configuration utility: Provides access to system configuration settings, such as AEC type, rotor drive settings, tube type, etc.

•

Calibration utility: Provides access to system calibration functions, such as filament, mA, kVp calibration and, if equipped with QG-AEC option, AEC and film/screen calibrations.

•

Reports utility: Provides access to Service Reports menu, which provides Generator, Tube, Error Warnings, and Diagnostic reports (refer to Chapter 5, SERVICE MAINTENANCE for more information).

•

Self-Test utility: Currently not accessible.

•

Last Calibration Date: Currently not accessible.

•

Settings utility: Provides access to system settings, such as the language, date, time, date format (international or U.S.) and backup time/mAs settings.

•

APR Edit utility: Used to edit existing APR screens or use to create new screens (refer to Chapter 4, APR EDITOR in the operator’s manual for more information).

Pressing the key next to the Exit field returns the system to the Start Up screen (see Figure 3-1).


Revision W

3-5


SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Press the key next to the Configuration field to access system configuration functions. The Service Configuration Menu displays:

Figure 3-4. Service Configuration Menu The Service Configuration Menu provides access to the system's configuration settings. For proper operation of the generator, the settings must accurately reflect the actual configuration of both the generator and the components to which it is interfaced. Typically, these settings are made at the factory in accordance with sales order specifications. However, it is recommended that you review the current configuration settings for accuracy. The following briefly describes the various Service Configuration Menu selections:

Revision W

3-6

•

Printer: Enables data output to an external label printer when one is interfaced to the generator

•

Generator Model setting: Accesses the generator maximum power output derating setting (from 80% to 100%). Access to other functions is restricted to authorized QMI factory personnel only

•

AEC setting: displays AEC option setting (i.e., AEC "Standard", AEC "Universal", AEC OFF)

•

Rotor Drive setting: Accesses the rotor drive settings - 60 Hz (no high speed starter), 50 Hz (no high speed starter), Quantum internal highspeed starter (QMI HSS), or AID external high-speed starter (AID HSS)

•

Edit Welcome/Facility: Accesses the facility name text editing and, on ODYSSEY systems, the dealer name text editing utilities, which provide functions necessary to edit the information appearing on the "Welcome Screen" displayed during start-up

•

Main: returns the system to the Service Menu (see Figure 3-3)

•

Tube Type setting: Accesses the Tube Type Setting screen, for selection of x-ray tube model used with system

•

Edit Digital: Accesses the digital receptor settings including digital receptor type (i.e., Canon, Konica, CMT, Generic, or NONE), Universal system type (i.e., Quantum QV-800, Pausch COSMOS-2, or NONE), and PREP HOLD setting (on or off).



•

Ion Chamber Configuration setting: Accesses the Ion Chamber Configuration screen, which is used to configure each ion chamber interfaced with the system (two separate ion chambers, of either slope or level type, can be interfaced to the generator)

•

Tomo setting - Accesses the Tomo configuration screens for setting up the system for interfacing with the Siemens or Pausch tomography systems (available settings are Siemens, Pausch, or OFF (none))

To change a configuration setting, press the key next to the configuration selection to be changed. After all configuration settings are set appropriately, press the key next to the Main field. The configuration settings are saved in non-volatile read-only memory (NVROM) and the system returns to the main Service Menu (see Figure 3-3). The following paragraphs provide specific instructions for setting each of the available configuration selections. Printer On/Off Setting When configured to do so, the HF Series X-ray generator will print post-exposure factors (kVp, mA, time, mAs, etc.) to an externally interfaced device such as a label printer. The label printer must comply with the following serial communication protocol: 9600 baud rate, no handshake, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit, no parity. To connect a printer, attach an RS-232 serial cable between the printer and the RS-232 A16J2 9-pin connector on the rear panel of the Operator Control Panel. The Service Configuration Screen displays the current printer setting. When set to On, the generator will provide serial output data to an externally connected printer. When set to Off, serial data output for a printer is disabled. Note: The printer setting has no affect on upload or download functionality using Q-Ware software.


Revision W

3-7


Generator Configuration/Derating Settings The Generator Configuration Screen, shown below, displays the generator model and the power output derating setting (presented as a percentage of total power output (kW) capacity).

PRESS THIS KEY TO SET THE POWER OUTPUT DERATING PERCENTAGE

Figure 3-5. Generator Configuration Screen The power output derating function is used to limit the power output of the system to a percentage of the maximum power capacity. For example, on a 50 kW system, setting the "KW%" to 90% will limit the maximum power output to 45 kW (50kW x .9 = 45kW). To set the power output derating, proceed as follows: 1. Press the key next to the KW% field to choose a derating percentage (choices are 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% [i.e., no derating]). 2. Press the key located next to the Save field. The derating percentage setting is saved in non-volatile read-only memory (NVROM) and the system returns to the Service Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-4).

Revision W

3-8



AEC Setting The Service Configuration menu, shown below, displays the generator’s current AEC setting.

PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT AEC SETTING

Figure 3-6. Choosing AEC Setting 1. Verify the AEC setting is correct as follows: •

Select "AEC Standard" if generator is equipped with standard type AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S)

•

Select "AEC Universal" if generator is equipped with universal type AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S)

•

Select "AEC OFF" if generator is not equipped with optional AEC

2. Press the key located next to the AEC field to select the appropriate AEC setting. 3. To exit the screen and return to the Service Menu, press the key next to the Main field.


Revision W

3-9


Rotor Drive Setting The Service Configuration Menu, shown below, displays the current tube rotor drive setting. The tube rotor drive setting is pre-set at the factory and normally should not be changed (unless replacement of tube with different type). If you need to change the tube rotor drive setting, proceed as follows:

PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT ROTOR DRIVE

Figure 3-7. Rotor Drive Configuration Menu 1. Press the key located next to the Rotor field to scroll through the available rotor drive settings (60 Hz, 50 Hz, QMI HSS, or AID HSS). 2. To exit the screen and return to the Service Menu, press the key next to the Main field. NOTE: On systems equipped with high-speed starter option (HSS), tube "high-speed" mode will only be activated when selected exposure factors exceed the limits used for low-speed operation.

Revision W

3-10



Edit Facility/Welcome Facility Utility The Edit Facility/Edit Welcome utility allows editing of the Facility and Dealer names as they appear on the Welcome Screen, which displays when the system is first turned on (see Figure 3-1). Selecting Edit Welcome from the Service Configuration menu opens the Edit Welcome menu, which offers a choice of editing either the facility name or the dealer name. Either choice will open the Edit Sentence screen (see Figure 3-8).The editing functions available in the Edit Facility and Edit Dealer screens are identical to those used in the Edit Sentence screen described in Chapter 4, APR EDITOR of the operator’s manual. (Note: The maximum number of characters for the facility nameor dealer name field is 48.)

Figure 3-8. Edit Facility/Edit Welcome Screen


Revision W

3-11


Tube Type Setting The Tube Configuration Screen, shown below, displays the current tube model setting. Also provided are the Heat Alarm (Heat % Limit) and Tube Derating (Tube%) functions. The tube model setting is preset at the factory and normally should not be changed, except after replacing the existing tube with a different type tube. (Note: Consult Quantum Service Department

before attempting to re-configure generator with a tube type that is different than the factory-configured tube type.)

PRESS THIS KEY TO RESET ALL TUBE CALIBRATION VALUES

PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT TUBE

Figure 3-9. Tube Configuration Screen CAUTION! Pressing the Save Tube key will require system re-calibration, including AEC calibration. In addition, tube statistics will be cleared. Proceed only if necessary. 1. Press the key located next to the Model field until the correct tube model is displayed. 2. The Tube Derating key provides derating of the generator’s maximum mAs output in percentages of 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% (i.e., no derating). For example, if at a particular kV and mA the tube normally allows a 10 mAs exposure, then at 80% derating, the tube would permit only an 8 mAs exposure. Derating the tube can extend the life of the tube. Press the key next to the Tube % Derating field to choose a derating percentage. 3. The Heat Alarm (Heat % Limit) key provides a heat protection function for the x-ray tube. For example, setting the Heat Alarm for 80% will cause the generator to produce an audible alarm and a visual "Heat Alarm" indication on the OCP when the tube has reached 80% of its total heat unit capacity. The total tube heat unit capacity is dependent on the tube type. The Heat Alarm setting has an adjustment range of anywhere between 50% up to 100% in 10% increments. Note: At 100% setting, the heat alarm is effectively disabled. Press the key next to the Heat % Limit field to select the percentage of the total tube heat capacity at which alarm activation will occur.

Revision W

3-12



4. If the tube type has been changed, press the Save Tube key. The tube model setting is saved in non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) and the system returns to the Service Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-4). Note that if the Previous, No Save key is pressed when the tube type is changed, any changes made in the Tube Configuration Screen will not be saved (i.e., the previous tube’s calibration values will be retained). Edit Digital Settings The Edit Digital Screen, shown below, contains the Digital Receptor settings, including the digital receptor type, Universal System type, and "Prep Hold" settings for the generator. To make these settings, proceed as follows: PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT DIGITAL RECEPTOR PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT UNIVERSAL SYSTEM TYPE PRESS THIS KEY TO ENABLE OR DISABLE PREP HOLD FUNCTION

Figure 3-10. Edit Digital Screen 1. To set the Digital Receptor type, press the key located next to the Digital Receptor field until the correct digital receptor setting is displayed (Canon = Canon digital receptor installed, Konica = Konica digital receptor installed, CMT = CMT digital receptor installed, NONE = nondigital receptor installed, including all CR systems). 2. The Universal setting is used to enable or disable operator selection of a table receptor when the generator is used with a "Universal" C-arm x-ray system, such as the Quantum QV-800 or Pausch COSMOS-2 system or with a Canon CXDI-50G portable DR receptor using two ion chambers (wall and table). When set to NONE, the table receptor is selectable by the operator. 3. Setting the Prep Hold setting to ON configures the generator to send a "Prep Hold" signal to the DR system (notifies the DR system that a Prep cycle has been initiated; the generator must receive a "Prep Hold Release" signal from the DR system to proceed with the Expose cycle). Setting the Prep Hold setting to Off configures the generator for "normal" operation (i.e., non-interrupted Prep cycle). 4. To exit the screen and return to the Service Menu, press the key next to the Previous Screen field.


Revision W

3-13


Ion Chamber/Receptor Configuration The Ion Chamber Configuration Screen, shown below, displays available ion chambers that can be interfaced to the HF Series X-ray generator. This screen also provides relay on/off settings for activating either the table and/or wall receptor when the receptor keys on the OCP are pressed. Note: On systems equipped with a "Standard" type AEC (i.e., the generator is equipped with standard type AEC Board A11, AY40-031S), the "Ion Chamber Wall 2" and "Ion Chamber Auxilliary" selections are not used. These choices are only effective if the generator is configured with "Universal" type AEC (i.e., if generator is equipped with universal type AEC Board A11, AY40-027S").

PRESS THESE KEYS TO SELECT ION CHAMBER TO CONFIGURE

NOT USED ON "STANDARD" AEC SYSTEMS

Figure 3-11. Ion Chamber Configuration Screen 1. Press the key located next to the ion chamber you want to configure: Wall Ion Chamber, Table Ion Chamber, Ion Chamber Wall 2, or Ion Chamber Auxilliary (Ion Chamber Wall 2 and Ion Chamber Auxilliary only used on systems equipped with AEC Board A11, AY40027S). Be sure that the selected ion chamber is properly interfaced to the AEC Board A11 as described in Chapter 2, ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION.)

Revision W

3-14



2. The system displays the ION CHAMBER Configuration Screen, as shown in the example below: INDICATES SELECTED RECEPTOR (WALL/TABLE/ WALL 2/ AUXILLIARY)

PRESS THESE KEYS TO SELECT ION CHAMBER DETECTOR

NOTE: AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 RIGHT LOAD USES THIS CONFIGURATION. FOR AID ICX153 or ICX-1153 LEFT LOAD, SET A=3 AND C=2.

ACTIVATES OR DISABLES WALL/TABLE RECEPTOR WHEN SELECTED RECEPTOR KEY IS PRESSED

Figure 3-12. ION CHAMBER Configuration Screen (AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 Right Hand Load Configuration Shown) The ION CHAMBER Configuration Screen displays the assignment of ion chamber detectors (detector A, B, or C) with respect to the generator’s ion chamber detector select signals (i.e., FIELD SELECT 1, FIELD SELECT 2 and FIELD SELECT 3) output from AEC Control Board A11 (AY40-031S/ AY40-027S). In other words, assigning "1" to field "A" will enable ion chamber detector "1" when the UPPER LEFT chamber detector field is selected on the Operator Control Panel (OCP). The ION CHAMBER Configuration Screen also provides settings that facilitate proper interfacing of the generator with different ion chamber and receptor types. These include Polarity, Wall Relay ON/OFF, Table Relay ON/OFF, Invert, and Slope/Level settings.


Revision W

3-15


Ion Chamber Configuration Configure the Wall and/or Table ion chamber as follows: IMPORTANT: The AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 ion chamber, which is the default chamber type shipped with standard AEC type generators, requires that detector "A" = 2, "B" = 1, and "C" = 3. The factory default orientation of the ion chamber mounting in the bucky is with the front side toward the tube. However, it may be necessary to mount the chamber with the back side forward (e.g., for left side loading wall stands). In this case, in the ION CHAMBER Configuration screen, simply switch assignment of chamber detector A to "3" and detector C to "2". No wiring modifications are necessary. Table 3-1. Ion Chamber Configuration Settings for Generator with Standard AEC (AEC Board AY40-031S is Installed) Standard AEC Systems Setting

Wall Ion Chamber Settings

Table Ion Chamber Settings

Polarity

+

+

Wall Relay

Off

Off

Table Relay

Off

Off

Invert

No

No

Slope/Lvl

Slope

Slope

Table 3-2. Ion Chamber Configuration Settings for Generator with Universal AEC Option (Requires AEC Board AY40-027S) Universal AEC Systems Ion Chamber Type Siemens (Level)

AID (Slope) Tomo Systems

AID (Slope) Non-Tomo Systems

Setting







Polarity

+

+

+

+

+

+

Wall Relay

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

Table Relay

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Invert

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

Slope/Lvl

Level

Level

Slope

Slope

Slope

Slope

Revision W

3-16



Table 3-3. Ion Chamber Configuration Settings for Generator with Digital Interface Option (Requires Digital Interface Board AY40-034T) Digital Receptor Systems (w/AY40-031S) Setting



Polarity

+

+

Wall Relay

On

Off

Table Relay

Off

On

Invert

No

No

Slope/Lvl

Slope

Slope

Table 3-1 shows the ion chamber and receptor settings for the generator when equipped with standard AEC (i.e., Standard AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S) is installed). Table 3-2 shows the ion chamber and receptor settings for the generator when equipped with universal AEC (i.e., Universal AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) is installed). Table 3-3 shows the ion chamber and receptor settings for the generator when equipped with standard AEC and "Digital Interface" option (i.e., Standard AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S) and Digital Interface Board A9 (AY40-034T) are installed). Detailed instructions are as follows: 1. Press the key located next to the ion chamber detector (Field A, Field B or Field C) until the desired detector setting (1, 2, 3 or Off) is indicated in corresponding box of ion chamber graphic on the right side of the ION CHAMBER Configuration screen (see Figure 3-12). 2. The "Polarity" setting (+ or -) controls whether the ion chamber on the selected receptor port is a (+) positive logic (i.e., active high) or (-) negative logic (i.e., active low) model. The positive logic model presents a DC voltage or ramp ranging from 0 to some positive voltage to indicate exposure value. The negative logic model presents a DC voltage or ramp ranging from 0 to a negative voltage. This setting is ignored unless the "Universal AEC" selection is chosen. The "Standard AEC" board is always "positive". 3. The "Invert" setting controls the sense of the signals that select the individual field for the chamber. If "Invert" is set to No, the idle (non-PREP/EXPOSE) state of the individual field selection is "1" and the state during PREP/EXPOSE is "0" if the field is selected (called "Low Active"). If "Invert" is set to Yes the idle (non-PREP/EXPOSE) state of the field selection is "0" and the state during PREP/EXPOSE is "1" if the field is selected (called "High Active"). This setting is ignored unless the "Universal AEC" selection is chosen. The "Standard AEC" board is always "Not Inverted".


Revision W

3-17


4. The "Slope/Lvl" setting determines if the ion chamber connected to the selected receptor AEC output is of the "slope/ramp" (Slope) or a DC Level (Level) type. This setting is ignored unless the "Universal AEC" selection is chosen. The "Standard AEC" board is always "Slope". 5. When all ion chamber settings are appropriately configured, press the key located next to the Previous Screen field. 6. Repeat above steps for each of the other ion chambers interfaced with the generator. Receptor Relay Configuration The "Wall Relay" setting controls whether the "Wall Relay" on the Universal AEC Board A11 AY40-027S is energized. Similarly, the "Table Relay" setting controls whether the "Table Relay" on the Universal AEC Board A11 AY40-027S is energized. These settings provide +28 VDC output for operation of a Siemens bucky. If this field is set to ON, the relay is asserted when: • The receptor switch that accesses this receptor is depressed on the OCP panel or • When an APR Technique requests this receptor. The wall or table relay will remain energized until a receptor with "Wall Relay" OFF or "Table Relay" OFF, respectively, is selected. Depending on the configuration of the generator, set the receptor relays as indicated in Table 3-1, 3-2, or 3-3. Tomo Setting Important! On generators that will be interfaced to a tomography system; Set Tomo Mode to "Off" prior to performing generator calibration, then set Tomo Mode back to "On" following calibration. The generator may be interfaced to operate with either a Siemens or Pausch tomography system (refer to Chapter 2, ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION for wiring instructions). The generator must be equipped with a "Universal" type AEC Board (i.e., AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) must be installed). To configure the generator for tomo operation, proceed as follows:

Revision W

3-18



1. Select Tomo from the Service Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-4). The system displays the Tomo menu (see Figure 3-13).

PRESS THIS KEY TO SET TOMO MODE PRESS THIS KEY TO SET TOMO TIME SELECTIONS

Figure 3-13. Setting Tomography System Interface Configuration 2. Press the key next to the Tomo field until the desired tomography system interface setting (Siemens, Pausch, or OFF (none)) is displayed. If no tomography option is interfaced, set to OFF. Otherwise, set to either Siemens or Pausch as required. 3. Press the key next to Tomo Times field. Depending on whether "Siemens" or "Pausch" tomo was selected, the appropriate Tomo Times screen (see Figure 3-14 or 3-15) is displayed:

ON SIEMENS TOMO SYSTEMS, DO NOT CHANGE ANY TOMO TIME SETTINGS

Figure 3-14. Tomo Times Screen - Siemens Tomo Selected


Revision W

3-19


8°, TIME 1

8°, TIME 2

20°, TIME 1

20°, TIME 2

30°, TIME 1

30°, TIME 2

40°, TIME 1

40°, TIME 2

Figure 3-15. Tomo Times Screen - Pausch Tomo Selected 4. Press the Factory Reset key. All tomo sweep time settings will be set to factory default values as shown in the sample screens above (the time values shown are in milliseconds). Depending on the type tomography system, proceed as follows: a. If interfacing to a Siemens tomography system, do not change any of the default tomo sweep time settings. The settings must reflect the values shown in Figure 3-14. Press the key next to Previous Screen field to exit Tomo Times screen. b. If interfacing to a Pausch tomography system, the default tomo sweep times for each key on the tomo system are shown in Figure 315. These values may be changed as desired by the user. The time range for each key is from 0.4 seconds (400 milliseconds) up to 4.0 seconds (4000 milliseconds). Please note that the last key (40°, TIME 2) is non-configurable in the current generator design; this output is parallel connected to (and therefore will have the same time setting) as the 40°, TIME 1 output. IMPORTANT: When interfacing the generator to a Pausch tomography system, be sure to set the tomo sweep times on the generator, as described above, to correspond exactly with the tomo sweep times programmed on the Pausch system. c.

Revision W

3-20

Verify all tomo times are correct and then press the key next to the Previous Screen field to save and exit.



SYSTEM SETTINGS In the Service Menu (see Figure 3-3), press the key next to the Settings field to access the Service Settings Menu, shown below:

Figure 3-16. Service Settings Menu The Service Settings Menu provides access to various system settings. The following briefly describes the various Service Settings Menu selections: •

Set Date setting: Accesses the Set Date Screen for setting current date

•

Set Time setting: Accesses the Set Time Screen for setting current time

•

Film/Screen Defaults: Sets the film/screen combination that is used as the default for each of the available receptors used with the generator (i.e., Wall 40", Wall 72", Table 40", Wall2, and/or Auxilliary receptor). This setting applies to AEC and APR AEC mode exposures only. Each receptor used with the system requires that AEC calibration be performed using the selected film/screen combination.

•

APR Format: Configures the APR Procedure Screens to display or not display the Film Speed and/or CM (thickness) screen fields when the generator is operated in APR mode.

•

Main: returns the system to the Service Menu (see Figure 3-3)

•

Language setting: Sets language used for operator control panel display screens/menus (i.e., English, French, Spanish, German, or Italian).

•

Back Up Time/MAS setting: Displays current, system-wide, AEC exposure back up mAs setting (only functions on systems equipped with QG-AEC option). The system allows for selection of a mAs setting between 10 and 600 mAs (in 10 mAs increments). Note: APR procedures have a separately configurable back up time/mAs setting which, when lower in value, will override the system back up time/mAs setting. Refer to APR Edit chapter in the Operator’s Manual for APR procedure back up time/mAs settings.


Revision W

3-21


•

Generator Timeout: Sets the delay time for generator to automatically shut down if no keys are pressed on operator control panel (selectable in 30 minute increments between 0 minutes up to 180 minutes). If "0" is

selected, the generator will not timeout, however, the filament will turn off if one hour of inactivity. •

Date Format setting: Sets date/time format (options are "US" or "International)

To change a setting, press the key next to the system setting you want to change. After all system settings are set appropriately, press the key next to the Main field. The system settings are saved in non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) and the system returns to the main Service Menu (see Figure 3-3). The following paragraphs provide specific instructions for configuring each of the above system settings. Set Date Screen The Set Date screen, shown below, displays the current date setting. To change the date setting, proceed as follows:

USE THESE KEYS TO SET DAY

USE THESE KEYS TO SET MONTH

USE THESE KEYS TO SET YEAR

Figure 3-17. Setting the Date 1. Adjust the month, date or year setting using the appropriate keys as shown in Figure 3-17, above, until desired date is displayed. 2. To exit the screen and return to the Start Up Screen, press the key next to the Main field.

Revision W

3-22



Set Time Screen The Set Time screen, shown below, displays the current time setting. To change the time setting, proceed as follows:

USE THESE KEYS TO SET HOURS

USE THESE KEYS TO SET MINUTES

Figure 3-18. Setting the Time 1. Adjust the hours or minutes setting using the appropriate keys as shown in Figure 3-18, above, until desired time is displayed. 2. To exit the screen and return to the Start Up Screen, press the key next to the Main field. Film/Screen Defaults Screen The Film/Screen Default Screen (see Figure 3-19) is used to configure the default film/screen combination for the various image receptors used with the generator. This setting applies to AEC and APR AEC mode exposures only. If the selected film/screen combination has not already been calibrated, it must be calibrated according to the AEC Calibration procedures later in this chapter using the selected film/screen combination setting. The generator has been pre-configured with seven different film/screen combination selections designated "Wall 40"", "Wall 72"", "Table 40"", "100 Speed", "200 Speed", "800 Speed", and "Film/Screen7". If the Digital Receptor setting in Service Configuration Menu is enabled, an eighth option entitled "Digital" will be also be selectable. Note that the factory default film/screen combination names may be changed using the film/screen combination name edit utility as described in Service Manual.


Revision W

3-23


The Film/Screen Defaults screen, shown below, displays the current receptor film/screen combination settings. To change the default film/screen settings, proceed as follows USE THESE KEYS TO SET FILM/SCREEN COMBINATION

THESE KEYS ONLY USED ON UNIVERSAL TYPE AEC SYSTEMS

Figure 3-19. Film/Screen Defaults Screen 1. Wall 40 FS setting: Press the key next to the Wall 40 FS: field until the desired film/screen combination name appears. The selected film/screen combination is now the film/screen combination used when "WALL 40" image receptor is selected for exposures using AEC and APR AEC mode exposures. 2. Wall 72 FS setting: Press the key next to the Wall 72 FS: field until the desired film/screen combination name appears. The selected film/screen combination is now the film/screen combination used when "WALL 72" image receptor is selected for exposures using AEC and APR AEC mode exposures. 3. Table 40 FS setting: Press the key next to the Table 40 FS: field until the desired film/screen combination name appears. The selected film/ screen combination is now the film/screen combination used when "TABLE" image receptor is selected for exposures using AEC and APR AEC mode exposures. 4. Wall2 FS setting (enabled only generators equipped with "Universal" type AEC [i.e., AEC Board A11 AY40-027S is installed]): Press the key next to the Wall2 FS: field until the desired film/screen combination name appears. The selected film/screen combination is now the film/ screen combination used when "WALL2" (AUX) image receptor is selected for exposures using AEC and APR AEC mode exposures. 5. Auxilliary FS setting (enabled only generators equipped with "Universal" type AEC [i.e., AEC Board A11 AY40-027S is installed]): Press the key next to the Auxilliary FS: field until the desired film/screen combination name appears. The selected film/screen combination is now the film/ screen combination used when "AUX" image receptor is selected for exposures using AEC and APR AEC mode exposures.

Revision W

3-24

NOTE

The "default" film/screen combination settings automatically link specific calibrated film/ screen combinations used in non-APR and APR exposures using AEC. However, the operator may choose any available calibrated film/ screen combination using the Film/Screen selection keys provided in the AEC and APR mode screens.



APR Format Setting The APR Format Setting key (shown below) permits the operator to configure the APR Procedure Screens to display or not display the Film Speed and/or CM (thickness) screen fields when the generator is operated in APR mode. To change the APR Format setting, proceed as follows:

PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT APR FORMAT SETTING

Figure 3-20. Choosing Language and Date Format Settings Press the key next to the APR Format field to scroll through available APR Format options: •

All Windows - APR Procedure Screens will display both Film Speed and CM (thickness) screen fields

•

No CM - APR Procedure Screens will not display the CM (thickness) screen field

•

No FS - APR Procedure Screens will not display the film speed screen field

•

No FS, No CM - APR Procedure Screens will not display the film speed nor the CM (thickness) screen fields


Revision W

3-25


Language Setting The Service Settings Menu, shown below, displays the current language setting. The default language setting is English. To change the language setting, proceed as follows:

PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT LANGUAGE

Figure 3-21. Choosing Language and Date Format Settings

NOTE

It may be preferable to set the Language to "English" prior to performing calibration procedures, then reset to the desired language after calibration is completed.

Press the key next to the Language field to scroll through available languages (English, French, Spanish, German, Italian, etc.) until desired language is displayed.

Revision W

3-26



Back Up MAS Setting The AEC Backup Setting screen, shown below, displays the current AEC backup mAs setting. Note that this is the system-wide backup mAs setting, and as such, will be effective on all AEC exposures. The procedure-specific back up time is set using the APR Edit function (refer to APR Edit chapter in the Operator Manual for instructions on setting individual procedure backup mAs). Note: The lower of the two backup settings will take precedence when

set to unequal values.

To change the system-wide backup mAs setting, proceed as follows:

USE THESE KEYS TO SET BACK UP MAS

Figure 3-22. Choosing an AEC Backup MAS Setting 1. Adjust the backup mAs setting using the appropriate keys as shown in Figure 3-22 above until desired backup mAs is displayed. The maximum back up mAs setting is 600; note that on certain model generators, such as the Stored Energy models, the maximum mAs capability of the generator is less than 600 mAs. Therefore, the backup mAs setting should not exceed the maximum MAS output of the generator. Refer to Chapter 1, SPECIFICATIONS for a list of the mAs ratings by model number. 2. To save the indicated backup mAs setting and return to the Service Settings Menu, press the key next to the Save field or the Previous Screen field.


Revision W

3-27


Generator Timeout Setting The Service Settings Menu, shown below, displays the current automatic generator power shutdown setting. The time period selected represents the amount of delay time, after which if no user activity is detected, the system automatically enters Automatic Power Stand By mode. This mode is entered to help reduce power consumption while protecting system electronics. To set the generator time-out setting, proceed as follows: PRESS PRESS THIS THIS KEY KEY TO TO SELECT SELECT GENERATOR GENERATOR TIMEOUT TIMEOUT SETTING SETTING

PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT DATE FORMAT

Figure 3-23. Setting Generator Timeout Setting Press the key next to the Generator Timeout field to scroll through available time period settings (0, 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 minutes) until desired setting is displayed. Note: Selecting "0" disables automatic timeout function. Date/Time Format Setting The Date Format field (see Figure 3-23) displays the current date/time format setting. To change the date/time format setting, proceed as follows: 1. Press the key next to the Date Format field to select either "US" (e.g., JUN 11,01 2:00 pm) or Int’l (e.g., 11 JUN 01 14:00) date/time format used for display of date and time on all applicable system screens. 2. To exit the screen and return to the Start Up Screen, press the key next to the Main field

Revision W

3-28



SYSTEM CALIBRATION CAUTION! Before calibrating unit, perform warm-up procedures recommended by tube manufacturer or the warm-up procedure described in Chapter 3 of the Operator’s Manual. Important! On generators that will be interfaced to a tomography system; Set Tomo Mode to "Off" during prior to performing generator calibration, then set Tomo Mode back to "On" following calibration. To access the system calibration functions, press the key next to the Calibration field in the Service Menu (see Figure 3-3). The Service Calibration menu displays, shown below:

Figure 3-24. Service Calibration Menu The Service Calibration menu provides access to the system's various calibration functions. The generator was pre-calibrated at the factory, however, the system will need to be re-calibrated to assure proper operation, verify compliance and set AEC optical density. These procedures should be performed in the order presented in this chapter. The following is a brief description of each of the Service Calibration Menu selections: •

Factory Reset: Accesses the Factory Reset Menu, which provides a list of resettable system calibration and configuration parameters including: » Apr (user-customized APR procedures) » Tube curves » AEC (AEC calibration values) » Sentence (Modified Sentences) » History (Error Log) » Objects (all other of the program variables and subroutines excluding the above parameters; includes kV, mA, and filament calibration values)


Revision W

3-29


» All (all of the above) » Ship (Reserved for factory use only)

Figure 3-25. Factory Reset Menu When reset, the selected parameter(s) are returned to factory preset (default) values. Table 3-4 shows the system configuration default values. Factory Reset may be necessary following NVRAM replacement (on OCP Control Board AY40-004S1), following tube replacement, or when abnormal values or unusual text appear in any of the system’s screens. Note: The "Q-WARE" generator software application can be

used to make a back-up copy of the generator’s calibration values and edited APR techniques before performing a Factory Reset. This data can later be downloaded back to the generator following reset thereby eliminating the need to re-calibrate or re-program the generator, however, re-verification is required. Table 3-4. Factory Default System Settings Setting

Default

AEC

On

ROTOR TYPE

Rotor 60 Hz

DIGITAL RECEPTOR

None

NOTE

Following a Factory Reset, the KV, filament and MA Calibration procedures, described in this chapter, must be performed before using the system.

ION CHAMBERS (TABLE, WALL, WALL2, AUXILLIARY)

Revision W

3-30

DETECTORS

A=2 B=1 C=3

POLARITY

+

WALL RELAY

OFF

TABLE RELAY

OFF

INVERT

NO

SLOPE/LVL

SLOPE

WALL 40 FILM SCREEN

Wall 40"



Table 3-4. Factory Default System Settings Setting

Default

WALL 72 FILM SCREEN

Wall 72"

TABLE 40 FILM SCREEN

Table 40"

WALL2 40 FILM SCREEN

Wall 40"

AUXILLIARY FILM SCREEN

800 Speed

LANGUAGE

English

BACKUP MAS

600

GENERATOR TIMEOUT

60

DATE FORMAT

US

APR TECHNIQUES

Factory Values

•

KV Calibration: Accesses KV calibration function

•

Filament Offset: Accesses tube filament offset calibration function

•

MA Calibration: Accesses mA calibration function

•

AEC Calibration: Accesses the AEC optical density, Reciprocity, and AEC kVp calibration functions (active on systems equipped with AEC option only). Note that all of the AEC Calibrations must be performed for each table and/or film/screen combination used with the x-ray system. Selection of each film/screen type used with the system is explained in "SYSTEM SETTINGS" paragraph contained in this chapter.

•

Main: Returns to the Service Menu. This function is also provided in each of the calibration screens accessed from the Service Calibration

•

A/D Calibration: Accesses the analog-to-digital (A-D) converters calibration function

To enter any of the factory default settings, press the key next to the calibration function you want to access. The Next Calibrate and Previous Calibrate fields are provided in each of the calibration screens accessed from the Service Calibration menu. Pressing the key next to the Next Calibrate field advances the system to the next calibration function (menu). Pressing the key next to the Previous Calibrate field returns the system to the Service Calibration menu. The paragraphs that follow describe the procedures for performing each of the above calibration functions. Following initial system installation, these procedures should be performed in the order presented in this chapter.


Revision W

3-31


GENERAL CALIBRATION PROCEDURE NOTES WARNING! The following calibration procedures involve taking x-ray exposures. All personnel should be behind the protective barriers. X-rays can be dangerous unless proper precautions and procedures are adhered to. The following notes apply in general to all calibration procedures, including AEC calibration procedures. Please review these notes prior to performing calibration. •

The top right button typically is used to advance to the next step of a particular calibration procedure.

•

Use the button next to the Next Calibrate field to advance to the next calibration procedure.

•

Use the button next to the Prev Calibrate field to return to the previous calibration procedure.

•

In calibration procedures having multiple "steps", the last step is indicated when "Measure, Calibrate" appears in the top right screen field. Pressing the key next to "Measure, Calibrate" field saves the calibration values. After saving the calibration values, press either the Next Calibrate key to proceed with the next calibration procedure or Prev Calibrate key to return to the previous calibrate procedure. IMPORTANT! Following a calibration procedure, unless the "Measure, Calibrate" key is pressed, no change is made to the currently saved calibration value(s).

•

The screen always displays the correct KV, MA, time and thickness (in CM) value required for performing each calibration procedural step. Ensure the correct values are set prior to performing each procedural step.

•

Throughout AEC calibration, the film/screen being calibrated is displayed on every AEC calibration screen in the top left field.

•

When calibrating AEC using a wall stand mounted receptor, ensure that the x-ray beam is perpendicular to image receptor and that the correct ion chamber detector(s) is selected.

•

Upon completing calibration procedures, it is recommended that Q-Ware program be used to upload calibration data (and APR technique data if editing was performed) as a backup in case a problem occurs requiring recalibration of the generator. To obtain a copy of the Q-Ware program, contact Quantum Medical Imaging’s Customer Service Department. IMPORTANT! Use the same configuration of bucky, grid, ion chamber and film cassette/screen that will be used with the "Film/Screen" being calibrated.

Revision W

3-32



IMPORTANT! Always place a cassette in the holder when taking any measurements or when calibrating, even if the calibration step does not require a film to be exposed. Film Speed Setting on non-AEC Systems The following procedure applies only to generators not equipped with automatic exposure control (AEC) option. The factory default film speed setting for the wall 72", wall 40" and table 40" receptors is 400. If the facility uses a film with speed other than 400, it is necessary to set the generator for the appropriate film speed. Proceed as follows: 1. From the Service Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-24), press the key next to AEC Calibration field. The AEC Calibration Menu screen is displayed: FILM/ SCREEN COMBINATION SELECTION KEY

EDIT FILM SCREEN NAME KEY FILM SPEED ADJUSTMENT KEYS

Figure 3-26. AEC Calibration Menu 2. Using the up and down keys next to the film speed field, set the film speed to the desired value. 3. If desired, the film/screen combination name can be edited. For example, the system default "Wall 40" film/screen combination name may be changed to "Kodak", "AGFA", or to whatever text is required. For instructions on film/screen combination name editing, refer to "Editing a Film/ Screen Combination Name" procedure in the AEC calibration section of this chapter. 4. Repeat above steps for both wall and table receptors, as necessary.


Revision W

3-33


A/D Calibration The A/D (analog/digital converter) calibration utility is used to adjust and calibrate specific operating voltages within the x-ray generator against a traceable calibrated voltage measurement instrument, such as a DMM. Once A/D calibration has been performed, the A/D calibration utility may then be used as a diagnostic tool allowing the technician to "read" these voltage measurements without having to remove the cover from the generator cabinet and without connecting a meter. Table 3-5 shows the various voltage levels (with tolerances) that can be adjusted and calibrated using this utility, and it provides the location of the test point to which a calibrated voltmeter must be connected for measuring the actual voltage level: Table 3-5. A/D Calibration Voltages Voltage Level

Calibration Accuracy

Test Point Measurement Location

+400V Cathode

±8 VDC

+/- bus bars on Capacitor Bank next to Power Module A19 (left side looking into generator cabinet)

+400V Anode

±8 VDC

+/- bus bars on Capacitor Bank next to Power Module A18 (right side looking into generator cabinet)

+5VDC

±0.1 VDC

TP1 on Logic Board AY40-006S

+15VDC

±0.2 VDC

TP3 on KVP Control Board AY40-003S

-15VDC

±0.2 VDC


+24VDC

±0.3 VDC

TP8 on Power Supply Board AY40-005T

+24V Brake

±0.3 VDC

Terminal TB2-1 on Interface Board AY40-023T (or AY40-034T)

The following procedure adjusts and calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of selected operating voltages. The same procedure applies to any of the voltage levels available for selection. Voltage measurement accuracy is verified using your pre-calibrated voltmeter (traceable to NIST standard) as the benchmark. Once calibrated, the generator’s CPU continuously monitors these internal voltages and will terminate or not allow exposure if certain tolerances are exceeded.

Revision W

3-34



Proceed as follows:

VOLTAGE SELECTIONS VOLTAGE SELECTIONS

Figure 3-27. A/D Calibration Menu WARNING! The following procedure requires that power be applied to the generator. Extreme care must be exercised to ensure the safety of service or other personnel in the area. 1. In the A/D Calibration menu, shown in Figure 3-27, select a voltage level to calibrate (choices are 400V Cathode, +5 VDC, +15 VDC, -15 VDC, 400V Anode, +24 VDC, or +24 V Brake). The A/D calibration screen, such as the sample +15 VDC calibration screen shown in Figure 3-28, is displayed: VOLTAGE LEVEL READ BY GENERATOR INCREASE/ DECREASE VOLTAGE KEYS SAVE A/D CALIBRATION

Figure 3-28. Sample A/D Voltage Calibration Screen (+15 VDC is shown) 2. Verify the voltage displayed in the top center of the screen is the correct voltage level to calibrate. 3. Refer to Table 3-5 and connect a voltmeter to the test point corresponding to the voltage level selected for calibration.


Revision W

3-35


4. On the voltmeter, observe the measured voltage value. Ideally, the value appearing in the Value in Gen (top right field) will match the reading on the voltmeter. If not, adjust the value in the Measure #1 field up or down by pressing the key next to the up or down arrow, respectively, until the Measure #1 field is set to the value displayed on the voltmeter (to within Calibration Accuracy ranges shown in Table 3-5). Each time the key is pressed changes the voltage value up/down in one-tenth volt increments. 5. Press key next to the Save Calibrate field to save the calibration entry. 6. Press the key next to Previous Screen to return to the A/D Calibration menu.

Revision W

3-36



kV Calibration Function This procedure calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of peak tube potential (kVp). The generator’s ability to measure peak tube potential accurately is verified using a pre-calibrated kVp meter (Dynalyzer or equivalent) as a benchmark. Access the KV Calibration Screen, shown below, and proceed as follows: CENTER DISPLAY BOX

PRESS TO PROCEED TO 100 KV CAL. 50 KV INCREASE/ DECREASE KEYS

Figure 3-29. KV Calibration Screen (50 kV Calibration) WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure that system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 1. Connect a kVp bleeder tank in series between X-ray tube and the generator’s H.V. Transformer (A17), or use a non-invasive kVp meter. 2. Verify 50 KVP appears in the center display box of the KV Calibration Screen and First Measure appears in the top right field. 3. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, 100 mS). 4. On the kVp meter, observe the measured kV value. (Ideally, this value should be 50 kVp.) 5. If not 50 kVp, adjust the value in the Measure KVP#1 field up or down by pressing the key next to the up or down arrow, respectively, until the Measure KVP#1 field is set to the value displayed on the kVp meter. Each time the key is pressed changes the kV value up/down in one-tenth increments.


Revision W

3-37


6. Press key next to the First Measure field to proceed to 100 kV calibration setting. The following screen should be displayed: SAVE KV CALIBRATION

100 KV INCREASE/ DECREASE KEYS

Figure 3-30. KV Calibration Screen (100 kV Calibration) 7.

Verify 100 KVP appears in the center display box and Measure, Calibrate appears in the top right field.

8. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 100 kVp, 200L mA, 100 mS). 9. On the kVp meter, observe the measured kV value. (Ideally, this value should be 100 kVp.) 10. If not 100 kVp, adjust value in Measure KVP#2 field up or down by pressing the key next to the up or down arrow, respectively, until Measure KVP#2 field is set to value displayed on kVp meter. Each time the key is pressed changes the KV value up/down in one-tenth increments. 11. Press key next to the Save Calibrate field to save the 50 and 100 kV calibration entries. The KV Calibration Screen (First Measure) should be displayed. 12. To proceed to filament calibration, press the key next to the Next Calibration field.

Revision W

3-38



Filament Offset Calibration This procedure establishes the filament current offset and gain corrections. Filament current measurement accuracy is verified using a pre-calibrated Dynalyzer (or equivalent), non-invasive kV meter, or mAs meter as a benchmark. Ensure precision of the measurement instrument is sufficient enough to assure generator accuracy requirements can be met. The Filament Offset Calibration procedure may be performed using an oscilloscope, however, it is not the preferred method. Using this method, the objective is to achieve the "flattest" possible large and small filament waveforms, with no spikes or peaks as shown in Figure 3-31 below.

Small Filament Before

After

FLAT CURVE, NO PEAKS

Large Filament Before

After


Figure 3-31. Filament Offset Current Measurement (Using an Oscilloscope) Access the Filament Calibration Menu (shown in Figure 3-31) and proceed as follows:


Revision W

3-39


WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 1. If using a Dynalyzer, a kVp bleeder tank should be connected in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. 2. If using a mAs meter, remove two (2) green/yellow wires marked "MAS METER", connected to A17P1-9 and A17P1-10, from the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure 3-32). Connect the mAs meter in series between removed wires. The MAS meter should remain connected throughout calibration. (Important: These wires must be re-connected when finished calibration.) MAS METER CONNECTION

MAS METER HOOK-UP WIRES (NORMAL POSITION) H.V. TANK (TOP VIEW)

MAS METER

GROUND STUD

MAS METER LEADS

GREEN/YELLOW WIRES (2X)

GREEN/YELLOW WIRES (2X) CONNECTOR A17P1

HIGH VOLTAGE TANK A17 (AY20-031 or AY20-032)

GENERATOR CABINET (PCB DOOR OPEN)

Figure 3-32. MAS Meter Connection

Revision W

3-40



3. If using an oscilloscope, connect the scope leads between test point TP7 on KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S) and ground. Set scope for 1.0 volt/ division, and 50 ms/division time base. This will give a 100 mA/volt equivalent for filament current measurement as shown in the sample waveforms in Figure 3-31. 4. Access the Small Filament Calibration Screen: SAVE SMALL FILAMENT CALIBRATION INCREASE/ DECREASE FILAMENT CURRENT KEYS

Figure 3-33. Filament Calibration Screen (Small Filament) 5. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box of the Filament Calibration Screen (i.e., 70 kVp, 75S mA, 15 msec). If using an oscilloscope, set time to 50 msec. 6. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, observe the measured current value. (Ideally, this value should be 75 mA or 1.125 mAs.) If using an oscilloscope, observe the small filament current pulse waveform for "flatness" (see Figure 3-31). 7.

If not 75 mA, or if waveform is not flat, (adjust the small filament offset value in the Small Filament field up or down (pressing up arrow increases mAs, pressing down arrow decreases mAs). Note: The DAC value displayed in the field adjacent to the up/down arrows increases as the mAs value decreases, and decreases as the mAs value increases. Retake exposure at same settings and adjust small filament offset value if necessary. Repeat this step until measured mA is 75, or until waveform is relatively flat.


Revision W

3-41


8. When measured mA is 75, or when waveform is sufficiently flat, press the key next to the Small Filament field. The large filament calibration screen is displayed: SAVE LARGE FILAMENT CALIBRATION

INCREASE/ DECREASE FILAMENT CURRENT KEYS

Figure 3-34. Filament Calibration Screen (Large Filament) 9. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box of the Filament Calibration Screen (i.e., 70 kVp, 300L mA, 15 msec). If using an oscilloscope, set time to 50 msec. 10. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, observe the measured current value. (Ideally, this value should be 300 mA or 4.5 mAs.) 11. If not 300 mA, or if waveform is not flat, adjust the large filament offset value in the Large Filament field up or down (up increases mA, down decreases mA). 12. Re-take exposure at same settings and adjust large filament offset value if necessary. Repeat this step until measured mA is 300, or until waveform is relatively flat. 13. When measured mA is 300, filament calibration is complete. 14. To proceed to mA calibration, press the key next to the Next Calibration field. Note: An error message appears if the filament current is set too low, which indicates the filament offset value for the filament being calibrated is set too high. If this occurs, increase the filament current by lowering the filament offset value (i.e., by pressing the Filament Small or Filament Large up arrow key).

Revision W

3-42



MA Calibration This procedure calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of tube current (mA). Current measurement accuracy is verified using a pre-calibrated mAs meter (Dynalyzer or equivalent) as a benchmark. Ensure precision of the measurement instrument is sufficient enough to assure generator accuracy requirements can be met. An oscilloscope may be used for mA measurement, however, it will likely not be precise enough to assure generator mA accuracy. To use an oscilloscope for mA measurement, connect scope leads between test point TP7 on KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S1) and ground. Set scope for 1.0 volt/division, and 50 ms/division time base. This will give a 100 mA/volt equivalent for mA measurement (see Figure 3-35a for sample mA measurements using scope).

Figure 3-35a. Filament Offset Current Measurement Using an Oscilloscope Proceed as follows: WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 1. If not already done so, connect a kVp bleeder tank in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter leads between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. This connection is made by removing the two green/yellow wires connecting A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure 3-21) and connecting the removed wires to the mAs meter. (Note: The MAS meter should remain

connected throughout calibration. These wires must be re-connected when finished calibration.)


Revision W

3-43


2. Verify 75S MA appears in the center display box of the MA Calibration menu and First Measure appears in the top right field. PROCEED TO 400L CALIBRATION

CENTER DISPLAY BOX

INCREASE/ DECREASE 75S MA KEYS

Figure 3-35. MA Calibration Screen (First Measure) 3. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 60 kVp, 75S mA, 100 mS). 4. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or on mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. (Ideally, this value should be 75 or 7.5 mAs.) 5. If not 75 mA, adjust the value in the Measure MA#1 field up or down by pressing the key next to the up or down arrow, respectively, until the Measure MA#1 field is set to the value displayed on the mAs meter. Each time the key is pressed changes the MA value up/down in one-tenth increments. 6. Press key next to the First Measure field to proceed to 400L mA calibration setting. The following menu should be displayed: SAVE MA CALIBRATION

INCREASE/ DECREASE 400L MA KEYS

Figure 3-36. MA Calibration Menu (Second Measure)

Revision W

3-44



7.

Verify 400L MA appears in the center display box and Measure, Calibrate appears in the top right field.

8. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 60 kVp, 400L mA, 100.0 mS). 9. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or on mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. (Ideally, this value should be 400 mA or 40 mAs.) 10. If not 400 mA, adjust the value in the Measure MA#2 field up or down by pressing the key next to the up or down arrow, respectively, until the Measure MA#2 field is set to the value displayed on the kVp meter. Each time the key is pressed changes the MA value up/down in one-tenth increments. 11. Press key next to the Save Calibrate field to save the 75S and 400L mA calibration entries. The MA Calibration Menu (First Measure) should be displayed. 12. Take 60 kVp, 75S mA, 100 ms and 60 kVp, 400L mA, 100 ms exposures. The measured kVp values should correspond with the indicated kVp settings within 3% tolerance; and the measured mA values should correspond with the indicated mA settings at least within 4%+1 mA. If not, repeat kVp and/or mA calibration as described in the previous paragraphs. Note: The Power Supply Board’s +48 VDC output may require adjusting (using potentiometer A6R17) up to +55 VDC (max.) in cases where long-length high tension cables are used and/or a heavy duty x-ray tube is installed. This can be determined by measuring the mA output (using a Dynalyzer or mAs meter), of an exposure taken at 40 - 50 kVp and the highest mA station available. The mA measured should be the same as the indicated mA (within specified tolerance). If mA output is too low, increase the +48 VDC voltage output as required, but do not exceed +55 VDC. 13. If the system is equipped with QG-AEC option, perform AEC Calibration procedures. Otherwise, calibration is complete. To return to the Service Calibration screen, press the key next to the Main field. CAUTION! If using a mAs meter, re-connect the green/yellow wire marked "MAS METER" to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure 3-32).


Revision W

3-45


AEC CALIBRATION IMPORTANT! Before performing each AEC calibration procedure, verify the correct Film/Screen is displayed on the calibration screen (shown in top left field). The Film/Screen setting is selected in the AEC Calibration Menu. Refer to Appendix A for instructions on AEC calibration of systems using a digital receptor (DR) or a computed radiographic (CR) film plate. The following calibration procedures must be performed on systems equipped with QG-AEC option (automatic exposure control). Each film/screen combination used with the system requires calibration for AEC in order to ensure that when a given film/screen combination is selected by the user, it produces films having a preset optical density, referred to as the "base optical density". The HF Series X-ray generator provides for calibration of up to seven different film/screen combinations (eight including "Digital" on systems with digital receptor enabled). Each of the image receptors used with the system can be configured to use a particular film/screen combination using the Service Settings Menu (see Figure 3-16). (Refer to SYSTEM SETTINGS paragraph in this chapter for instructions on system settings.) For example, when the operator presses the WALL key on the operator control panel and selects the WALL 72" receptor, the system can be programmed to use the "Wall 72"" designated film/screen combination (i.e., the film/screen type used with the wall stand at 72" SID). On the same system, a different film/screen type, designated as "Table 40" for example, could be configured for use with the TABLE receptor. Typically, on a system using a wall stand and radiographic table, three separate film/screen combinations are used: • • •

Wall 72" - Used when the operator selects wall receptor at 72 inch source-to-image distance (SID) Wall 40" - Used when the operator selects wall receptor at 40 inch source-to-image distance (SID) Table 40" - Used when the operator selects table receptor at 40 inch source-to-image distance (SID)

NOTE

The factory default Wall 72", Wall 40" and Table 40" film/screen combination names can be changed, if desired, using the Edit F/S Name utility provided on the AEC Calibration Menu. This applies to the factory default "100 Speed", "200 Speed", "800 Speed", and "Film/Screen 7" film/screen combination names as well.

On generators equipped with "Universal" type AEC (AEC Board A11 AY40-027S installed), two additional image receptors and their corresponding film/screens (default names are "WALL2" and "AUXILLIARY") can also be configured similar to those listed above. It is important to note that each different type of film/screen combination used with the receptors be calibrated in accordance with the AEC Calibration procedures described in this chapter. The design of the HF Series x-ray generator assumes that a limited number of films and screens are used in a facility (up to seven). Whether or not AEC is used, the only method of specifying film speed is in the AEC Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-40). With seven available film/screens, the operator should have a sufficient selection of film/screen options for use with the system.

Revision W

3-46



The AEC Calibration Menu To access the AEC Calibration function, press the key next to the AEC Calibration field in the Service Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-24). The AEC Calibration menu displays: COPY FILM SCREEN KEY

FILM/ SCREEN COMBINATION SELECTION KEY

EDIT FILM SCREEN NAME KEY FILM SPEED ADJUSTMENT KEYS

Figure 3-37. AEC Calibration Menu NOTE: In normal AEC mode, select the appropriate receptor (Wall 72", Wall 40", or Table 40") prior to selection of a film/screen combination for AEC calibration. The AEC Calibration menu provides access to the system's various AEC calibration functions, briefly described as follows: • Film Screen/Combination Selection Key - Selects the film/ screen combination you want to calibrate (system default choices are Wall 72", Wall 40", Table 40", 100 Speed, 200 Speed, 800 Speed, Film/Screen 7, and DIGITAL (if "Digital Receptor" is enabled in the Service Configuration Menu) • AEC OD Calibration - Calibrates the optical density for the currently selected film/screen and ion chamber combination • Reciprocity Calibration - Calibrates the reciprocity failure law correction factor for the currently selected film/screen and ion chamber combination • AEC KV Calibration - Calibrates the tube voltage settings used in conjunction with the currently selected film/screen and ion chamber combination • Main - Returns to the Service Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-27) • Copy Film/Screen - Accesses the Copy Film/Screen Menu. The Copy Film/Screen Menu is a utility that enables AEC calibration data to be copied from one calibrated film/screen combination


Revision W

3-47


setting to another (for example, it is useful for copying "Wall 40" to "Table 40 " film/screen combination on systems configured with both a wall stand and table). • Edit F/S Name - Provides editing utilities for modifying the name of a film/screen combination • FILM SPEED - Selects the film speed of the currently selected film screen combination. True speed may be set from "50" to "1600" in increments of 10. AEC Calibration Procedures Calibration of film/screen combinations should be performed in the following sequence, assuming a typical radiographic system having one ion chamber in the wall stand (72" and 40" SID), and a second ion chamber used in a radiographic table (40" SID). If the system is using a wall stand and 200 and 400 speed films, calibrate the Wall 72" film screen combination using 200 speed film first, followed by Wall 72" using 400 speed film. If the system only has a table receptor, perform all AEC calibrations (i.e., ion chamber balance, AEC MAS balance, AEC optical density, Reciprocity, and AEC KVP procedures). If the generator is interfaced with a digital receptor (DR system) or computed radiography system (CR System), refer to Appendix A, AEC CALIBRATION WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR OR CR FILM PLATE for AEC calibration procedures. IMPORTANT NOTE: Typically, the AEC calibration parameters for each of the various receptors used with the generator are quite similar. Therefore, the HF Series generator’s calibration data "COPY" function can be used to copy the calibration parameters from one receptor (i.e., a calibrated receptor) to the other receptors. For example, after completing AEC calibration of 72" Wall film/screen, the "COPY" function can be used to copy the 72" film/screen calibration data to 40" Wall film/screen.

NOTE

The film speed setting affects the mAs setting used with non-AEC APR techniques. With the film speed set for 400, for example, assume an APR technique is programmed to use 10 mAs. If the film speed is changed to 100, the system automatically adjusts the same APR technique to now use 40 mAs (4 x 10 mAs = 40 mAs).

After copying AEC data, the only further AEC calibration usually required for the 40" film/screen is performing AEC OD Calibration to set the "AEC Ref" value. Similarly, the 40" Wall film/screen calibration data can be copied to the 40" Table, however, the table ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer must be adjusted as required. Be sure to verify the AEC films for each SID/receptor meet applicable regulatory agency requirements. If required, further optical density accuracy can be attained by performing the "AEC KV Calibration" procedure.

Revision W

3-48



AEC Ion Chamber Balancing (Three-field Chambers) On systems using a three-field ion chamber, the chamber detectors must be balanced prior to performing AEC calibration (refer to the ion chamber manufacturer’s instruction manual). When balanced, the mAs will be approximately the same (±5%) for exposures taken using any of the three chambers, or with two or more chambers selected simultaneously. This procedure must be performed on each ion chamber used in the system (for example, both table and wall ion chambers when equipped with two). Before proceeding, check that the ion chamber detectors have been correctly configured so when the chamber select keys on the operator control panel are pressed, the appropriate ion chamber detector is enabled. If not, refer to "Table/Wall Ion Chamber Configuration Screens" procedure described previously in this chapter and re-configure. Proceed as follows: 1. If not already done so, a kVp bleeder tank should be connected in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. 2. Access Service Settings Menu (see Figure 3-16) and select Back Up Time/MAS. 3.

In AEC Backup Setting screen (see Figure 3-22), make a note of the Backup mAs setting, then change the Backup MAS to "40".

4. Press the AEC Mode key on the operator control panel to enter AEC mode. 5. Using a lead sheet, cover the UPPER RIGHT and CENTER ion chamber detectors. 6. Place 20 CM acrylic over UPPER LEFT ion chamber detector. 7. Set OCP for 100 KV, 200L MA, select the UPPER LEFT ion chamber detector and take an exposure. Note the measured mAs reading. 8. Repeat above steps with the CENTER ion chamber detector selected and UPPER LEFT and UPPER RIGHT detectors covered with lead. The measured mAs reading should be within 5% of the mAs reading noted in the previous step. If not, adjust the CENTER detector gain potentiometer located on the ion chamber amplifier (refer to ion chamber manufacturer’s documentation for details), re-take exposure and verify it is within tolerance. Repeat as necessary. 9. Access the Service Settings Menu and reset Backup mAs to original setting noted previously.


Revision W

3-49


NOTE: If the system is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "level" type (i.e., Siemens), adjust the appropriate detector gain potentiometer on AY40-027S in accordance with the table below: Table 3-6. Universal AEC Board A11 Detector Gain Adjustment Potentiometers (Siemens Ion Chamber Only) ION CHAMBER

DETECTOR

AEC BOARD A11 (AY40-027S) POTENTIOMETER

TABLE

1

R61

TABLE

2

R63

TABLE

3

R66

WALL#1

1

R54

WALL#1

2

R55

WALL#1

3

R56

WALL#2

1

R53

WALL#2

2

R58

WALL#2

3

R57

10. Repeat above steps with UPPER RIGHT ion chamber detector selected and UPPER LEFT and UPPER CENTER detectors covered with lead. The measured mAs reading should be within 5% of the mAs reading noted in the previous step. If not, adjust the UPPER RIGHT detector gain potentiometer, re-take exposure and verify it is within tolerance. Repeat as necessary. 11. Access Service Settings Menu and select Back Up Time/MAS. Return the AEC Backup Setting to desired back up mAs.

Revision W

3-50



AEC MAS Balance Verification

NOTE

To avoid reciprocity compensation, the exposures for mAs balance verification ideally should not exceed 100 ms.

The generator AEC mAs balance was pre-calibrated at the factory. However, verification of AEC mAs balance assures AEC calibration accuracy. When balanced, the mAs at the specified exposures will be approximately the same (±6%). This procedure only needs to be performed once prior to AEC calibration of the film/screen combination(s) used with the system. Proceed as follows: 1. If not already done so, connect a kVp bleeder tank in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. This connection is made by removing the two green/yellow wires connecting A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure 3-32) and connecting the removed wires to the mAs meter. (Note: These wires must be reconnected when finished calibration.) 2. Place 20 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam. (Where practical, adjust acrylic thickness to obtain approximately 100 millisecond exposures.) 3. If calibrating a" level" type ion chamber, ensure all three ion chamber detectors are selected. 4. Press the AEC mode key on the operator control panel. 5. Set the operator control panel for 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber - requires AY40-027S AEC board), 75S mA and take an exposure. 6. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, note the measured mAs value. 7. Set the operator control panel for 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber - requires AY40-027S AEC board) and the highest available mA station. Take an exposure. 8. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, note the measured mAs value. 9. The mAs values noted must be within ±5%. If not, adjustment of the dV/dt potentiometer on AEC Board A11 is necessary: • If the generator is equipped with "standard" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-031S), adjust potentiometer A11R12 to increase or decrease the mAs value.


Revision W

3-51


• If the generator is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "level" type (i.e., Siemens) , adjust potentiometer A11R82 to increase or decrease the mAs value. • If the generator is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "slope" type (i.e., AID), adjust potentiometer A11R87 to increase or decrease the mAs value. 10. Re-take exposure at the above settings. Repeat until the two measured values are within range. 11. Take an exposure at 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber), 75S mA, 10 cm. Verify mAs value is within ±5% of previous measurements. 12. Take an exposure at 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber), a mid-range mA value, 10 cm. Verify mAs value is within ±5% of previous measurements. CAUTION! If using a mAs meter, re-connect the green/yellow wire marked "MAS METER" to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure 3-32). Editing a Film/Screen Combination Name The system default Film/Screen Combination names are: Wall 72", Wall 40", Table 40", 100 Speed, 200 Speed, 800 Speed, Film/Screen7, and DIGITAL (if "Digital Receptor" is enabled in the Service Configuration Menu). These names, however, can be changed to suit individual requirements. The following procedure describes the steps necessary to edit the name of a film/screen combination using the "Edit F/S Name" utility. Proceed as follows: 1. If not already done so, access the AEC Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-37). 2. Press the key next to the "Film/Screen" field (top left key) until the desired film/screen combination is displayed. The possible default selections are "Wall 72", "Wall 40"", "Table 40", "100 Speed", "200 Speed", "800 Speed", "Film 7", and "Digital" (if "Digital Receptor" is enabled in the Service Configuration Menu).

Revision W

3-52



3. Press the key adjacent to the Edit F/S Name field. The film/screen name Edit Sentence screen appears: USE THIS KEY TO INSERT SELECTED CHARACTER

USE THESE KEYS TO SELECT CHARACTER

USE THESE KEYS TO SELECT CHARACTER POSITION USE THIS KEY TO DELETE SELECTED CHARACTER

CENTER DISPLAY BOX (SHOWS CURRENT FILM/SCREEN NAME)

Figure 3-38. Sample Film/Screen Name Edit Sentence Screen 4. Use the up and down keys next to the Sentence Position field to select the location to insert, replace or delete a character. For example, if the text string "Wall 40" is displayed in the center display box as shown in the sample screen above, choosing character location "0" selects the letter "W", location "1" selects the letter "a", and so on. Note that the character in the selected location appears in the Character field. 5. To delete the selected character, press the key next to the Delete Character field. To insert a new character or to replace the selected character with a new character, use the up and down keys next to the Character field to scroll through all available alphanumeric characters (begins with a "no character" or blank space) until the character you want appears in the Character field window. To insert the selected character in the position chosen, press the key next to the Insert Character field. To replace the character in the selected location with the new character, press the key next to the Replace Character field. 6. When done editing the film/screen name, select Previous, Save to save the new settings and return to the AEC Calibration Menu or select Previous, No Save to ignore the changes and return to the AEC Calibration Menu. To restore film/screen name to the factory default name, press the key next to the Factory Reset field.


Revision W

3-53


AEC Optical Density Calibration Procedure This procedure calibrates the generator’s AEC system to a user-selectable optical density setting (e.g., 1.3). When calibrating the first film/screen combination, which should be the slowest speed film and/or largest SID, set "AEC Ref" to 2000, and adjust the MASTER GAIN potentiometer on the ion chamber for desired optical density. Proceed as follows: An AEC Calibration Worksheet is provided in Table 3-8 for recording calibration data. Table 3-7. AEC Calibration Procedure Sequence

Revision W

3-54

FILM/SCREENS TO BE CALIBRATED

REQUIRED AEC CALIBRATION PROCEDURES/SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

WALL STAND 72" SID FILM/SCREEN (SLOWEST SPEED, LARGEST SID)

1. Perform "Ion Chamber Balancing" procedure. 2. Perform "AEC MAS Balance" procedure for wall stand ion chamber. 3. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration": a. Set desired "base" optical density b. Set "AEC Ref" to 2000. c. Adjust ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until base optical density is achieved in developed films. 4. Perform "Reciprocity Calibration". 5. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".

WALL STAND 40" SID FILM/SCREEN

1. Copy "Wall 72" film/screen to "Wall 40". 2. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration", however, DO NOT re-adjust the ion chamber MASTER GAIN potentiometer. Adjust "AEC Ref" to obtain desired (set) optical density. 3. Perform "Reciprocity Calibration". 4. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".

TABLE 40" SID FILM/ SCREEN

1. If system includes a wall stand, copy "Wall 40" film/screen to "Table 40". 2. Perform "Ion Chamber Balancing" procedure for table ion chamber. 3. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration": a. Set desired "base" optical density b. Set "AEC Ref" to 2000. c. Adjust ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until base optical density is achieved in developed films. 4. Perform "Reciprocity Calibration". 5. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".



Table 3-8. AEC Calibration Worksheet Film/Screen Combination:

Table 40

Wall 40

Wall 72

Other1

Other2

AEC OD CALIBRATION Setting:

50 kVp, 200L mA, 5 cm

Optical Density: AEC Ref. RECIPROCITY Setting:

First Cal. - 50 kVp, 400L mA, 15 cm

Optical Density: Setting:

Middle Cal. - 50 kVp, 75S mA, 15 cm


Save Cal. - 50 kVp, 25S mA, 15 cm

Optical Density: AEC KV CALIBRATION Setting:

Step 1 - 50 kVp, 200L mA, 5 cm

Optical Density: Step 2 - 60 kVp, 200L mA, 10 cm

Setting: Optical Density: Setting:

Step 3 - 80 kVp, 200L mA, 15 cm


Step 4 - 100 kVp, 200L mA, 20 cm


Step 5 - 110 kVp, 200L mA, 25 cm


Step 6 - 120 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm


*Step 7 - 130 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm


*Step 8 - 140 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm

Optical Density: * Only required on 150 kVp systems


Revision W

3-55


1. Place a film cassette in the tray and collimate down to film size. 2. If not already done so, access the AEC Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-37). 3. Press the key next to the Film/Screen Combination field (upper left field) to select a film/screen combination to calibrate. Verify the receptor in which the film cassette is inserted is selected as indicated on the AEC Calibration Menu screen. 4. The FILM SPEED field shows the current film speed setting for the selected film/screen combination. To select a different film speed, press the up or down keys next to the FILM SPEED field until the desired film speed setting is displayed. 5. When film/screen combination name and film speed settings are correct, press the key next to the AEC OD Calibration field to proceed with AEC Calibration. The AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen, shown below, is displayed:

AEC REF ADJUSTMENT KEYS

BASE OPTICAL DENSITY SELECT KEYS

Figure 3-39. AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen 6. This screen is used to calibrate the selected film/screen combination to a user defined optical density setting (e.g., 1.30). Set the receptor and ion chamber detector selections to those that will be used with this film/screen combination and ensure x-ray tube is at correct SID. Ensure the ion chamber has been balanced. 7. Press the up or down key located next to the Optical Density field until the desired "base" optical density setting is displayed. (Note: The "base optical density" setting establishes the optical density of the films produced when the operator selects this film/screen combination in either APR AEC or AEC mode.)

Revision W

3-56



8. If the selected film/screen combination is the first one to be calibrated with the system (if so, it should be combination having slowest speed and/or largest SID), perform the following steps: a. Verify the AEC Ref field is set to 2000. If not, use the up and down keys next to the AEC Ref field to set the AEC Ref value to "2000". b. If not already done so, set the Optical Density value to the desired film optical density value (for example, 1.30). c. Place 5 CM of acrylic in the X-ray beam. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA). d. Develop film and measure optical density using a calibrated densitometer. e. If the system is equipped with AEC Board A11 part number AY40-031S, proceed as follows: i. If the measured optical density corresponds with base optical density setting, press the Next Calibrate key to save the setting and proceed to Reciprocity Calibration. If not, adjust potentiometer A11R22 (if calibrating the table receptor) or A11R23 (if calibrating the wall receptor), and repeat exposure. Continue until the measured optical density equals the base optical density setting (at least to within 5% of base optical density setting). ii. If the measured optical density still does not equal the Base Optical Density setting, set A11R22 or A11R23 to mid-range, then adjust the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until roughly the desired optical density of film is obtained. Further fine-tuning can then be achieved by adjusting potentiometer A11R22 (table) or A11R23 (wall) as described in the previous step. NOTE: If the measured optical density still does not equal the Base Optical Density setting even with the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer set to maximum gain position, increase each chamber detector gain and perform the "AEC MAS Balance Verification" procedure. Repeat AEC Optical Density calibration. If the measured optical density still does not equal the Base Optical Density setting after adjusting the MASTER GAIN and gain of individual detectors, reduce the AEC Reference until you obtain the desired optical density. f.

If the system is equipped with AEC Board A11 part number AY40-027S, proceed as follows:


Revision W

3-57


i. If the measured optical density corresponds with base optical density setting, press the Next Calibrate key to save the setting and proceed to Reciprocity Calibration. If not, adjust potentiometer A11R77 (if calibrating the table receptor) or A11R79 (if calibrating the wall receptor), and repeat exposure. Continue until the measured optical density equals the base optical density setting (at least to within 5% of base optical density setting). ii. If the measured optical density still does not equal the Base Optical Density setting, set A11R77 or A11R79 to mid-range, then adjust the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until roughly the desired optical density of film is obtained. Further fine-tuning can then be achieved by adjusting potentiometer A11R77 (table) or A11R79 (wall) as described in the previous step. NOTE: If the measured optical density still does not equal the Base Optical Density setting even with the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer set to maximum gain position, increase each chamber detector gain and perform the "AEC MAS Balance Verification" procedure. Repeat AEC Optical Density calibration. If the measured optical density still does not equal the Base Optical Density setting after adjusting the MASTER GAIN and gain of individual detectors, reduce the AEC Reference until you obtain the desired optical density. 9. If the selected film/screen combination is not the first one to be calibrated with the system, perform the following steps: a. Using the up and down keys next to the Optical Density field, set the optical density value to the desired film optical density value (for example, 1.30). This is referred to as the "base optical density" for this film/screen combination. b. Place 5 CM of acrylic in the X-ray beam. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA). c. Develop film and measure optical density using a calibrated densitometer. d. If the measured optical density corresponds with base optical density setting, press the Next Calibrate key to save the setting and proceed to Reciprocity Calibration. If film density is too low, press the AEC Ref up arrow key and increase AEC Ref value, then repeat exposure. If density is too high, press the AEC Ref down arrow key and decrease AEC Ref value, then repeat expo-

Revision W

3-58

NOTE

The series of AEC optical density measurements should be repeated as many times as required until optical density is sufficiently accurate to meet regulatory and facility requirements.



sure. Continue until the measured optical density equals the base optical density setting (at least to within 5% of base optical density setting). 10. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field to advance to Reciprocity Calibration. IMPORTANT! To ensure AEC optical density is correctly calibrated to the desired "base" optical density setting, either the AEC Ref value must be adjusted to obtain the desired base optical density (which is verified in the exposed film using a densitometer) or the Optical Density setting in the AEC Optical Density Calibration Menu must be set to the actual measured film density. For example, the calibrator would like the system AEC optical density setting to be "1.30". The calibrator must then adjust the "AEC Ref" value until the actual measured optical density of the film is 1.30. However, if the actual measured optical density is 1.29 and you decide not to continue to adjust the AEC Ref to achieve exactly 1.30 film optical density, then change the Optical Density setting in the AEC Optical Density Calibration Menu to "1.29". Note that 1.29 is now the "base" AEC optical density for the film/screen being calibrated.


Revision W

3-59


Reciprocity Calibration Procedure The Reciprocity Calibration Screen, shown below, is used to establish reciprocity failure compensation. The image receptor and chamber field settings remain the same as those used in the AEC Optical Density procedure. This procedure requires three exposures; the first at approximately 100200 milliseconds, the second at approximately one second and the third at approximately three seconds. The amount of acrylic specified in the following steps (i.e., 15 CM) should give appropriate exposure times for 40 inch SID, 400 speed film. However, the amount of acrylic may need to be adjusted for other film/screen combinations to compensate for differences in SID and/or film speed. For example, to calibrate at 72 inch SID, the amount of acrylic would be reduced to 10 CM.

NOTE

Reciprocity Calibration must be performed for each film/ screen combination used with system.

ENTER OD MEASUREMENT KEY MEASURED OPTICAL DENSITY KEYS BASE OPTICAL DENSITY SETTING

Figure 3-40. Reciprocity Calibration Screen Proceed as follows: 1. Place a film cassette in the tray and collimate down to film size. 2. Place 15 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam. 3. Verify the receptor in which the film cassette is inserted is selected as indicated on the AEC Reciprocity Calibration screen. 4. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 400L mA). 5. Develop the film and measure the optical density using a calibrated densitometer. 6. Press the up or down key located next to the Measured OD field until the optical density value displayed equals the measured optical density value (the Measured OD up arrow key increases the optical density value and the Measured OD down arrow key decreases the optical density value).

Revision W

3-60



7. Press the key next to the First Cal field to save the first (50 kVp, 400L mA) reciprocity calibration point entry. The Reciprocity Calibration screen is updated for the middle reciprocity calibration point. 8. Place a film cassette in the tray. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 75S mA). 9. Press the up or down key located next to the Measured OD field until the optical density value displayed equals the measured optical density value. 10. Press the key next to the Middle Cal field to save the middle (50 kVp, 75S mA) reciprocity calibration point entry. The Reciprocity Calibration screen is updated for the final reciprocity calibration point. 11. Place a film cassette in the tray. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 25S mA). 12. Press the up or down key located next to the Measured OD field until the optical density value displayed equals the measured optical density value. 13. Press the key next to the Save Calibrate field to save the calibration data for the 50 kVp, 25S mA reciprocity calibration point. 14. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field.


Revision W

3-61


AEC KV Calibration Procedure The AEC KV Calibration screen, shown below, is used to calibrate the tube voltage to the "base optical density" setting. There are a total of six kV calibration points for a 125 kV system (50, 60, 80, 100, 110, and 120 kV); 150 kV systems require an additional two kV calibration points (130 and 140 kV). The image receptor and chamber field settings remain the same as those used in the Reciprocity Calibration procedure. KVP MEASURE SELECT FIELD MEASURED OPTICAL DENSITY KEYS BASE OPTICAL DENSITY SETTING

Figure 3-41. AEC KV Calibration Screen Proceed as follows: 1. Place indicated thickness of acrylic (5 CM for first calibration point) in the X-ray beam. 2. Place a film cassette in the tray and collimate down to film size. 3. Verify the receptor in which the film cassette is inserted is selected as indicated on the AEC KV Calibration screen. 4. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA). 5. Develop the film and measure the optical density using a calibrated densitometer. 6. Press the up or down key located next to the Measured OD field until the optical density value displayed equals the measured optical density value (the Measured OD up arrow key increases the optical density value and the Measured OD down arrow key decreases the optical density value). DO NOT TAKE ANY FURTHER EXPOSURES AT THIS SETTING.

NOTE Calibration of the first step (50 kVp) is not required as long as AEC Optical Density Calibration procedure in the previous steps was performed prior to AEC KV Calibration. A verification that the "Measured OD" is the same as the "Optical Density" setting is all that is required.

7. Press the key next to the Measure OD field to save the first kV calibration point entry (50 kV, 5 CM). The AEC KV Calibration screen is updated for the next kV calibration point (60 kV, 10 CM).

Revision W

3-62



NOTE

The series of AEC kV calibration exposures and optical density measurements may be repeated as many times as desired to improve calibration precision.

8. Repeat the previous steps for the 60, 80, 100, 110, 120, and, if 150 kV system, 130 and 140 kV calibration points, placing the specified thickness of acrylic in the x-ray beam as indicated on the AEC KV Calibration screen for each kV calibration point. 9. Upon completion of final kV calibration point (i.e., 120 kV on 125 kV systems, 140 kV on 150 kV systems), press key next to the Measure OD field. The field will now display Save Calibrate. Press this key again to save the calibration data for the final kV calibration point.

IMPORTANT! Data will be lost if Save Calibrate is not pressed! 10. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field to return to the AEC Calibration menu (see Figure 3-37). 11. The series of six AEC KV calibration exposures (with optical density measurements) may be repeated as many times as desired to improve calibration accuracy. Repeating is recommended if the desired and measured optical densities differ significantly. 12. This completes AEC calibration for this particular film/screen combination. Repeat AEC calibration procedures for all additional film/ screen combinations that will be used with the system.


Revision W

3-63


Optical Density Accuracy Verification Take several sample AEC films to verify optical density meets facility and/ or applicable statutory or regulatory requirements (or at least within ±10% of desired (base) optical density). If not repeat AEC Optical Density and KV calibrations. Copy Film/Screen Utility On the AEC Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-37), an AEC calibration data copy utility is provided (Copy Film/Screen key). Following calibration of the first film/screen combination, stored AEC calibration data, such as the kV curves and AEC reference data, can be copied from the first film/ screen combination to other film/screen combinations used with the system to reduce calibration time. For example, if the preceding calibration was done for the wall stand 40 inch SID film/screen combination (i.e., Wall 40"), calibration data can be copied to the radiographic table’s 40 inch SID film/screen combination (i.e., Table 40") using the Copy Film/Screen utility. Although all required AEC Calibration procedures must still be performed, this will set the calibration values for the Table 40" film/screen combination to fairly accurate settings, thereby reducing the number of exposures required for calibration. The Copy Film/Screen utility is most beneficial when the film screen combination being copied to has the same cassette screen, film speed, ion chamber and grid as the film/screen combination it is being copied from. Nevertheless, calibration is likely to be expedited even when one or more of these elements differ. Proceed as follows: 1. If not displayed, access the AEC Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-37). 2. Press the key next to the Film/Screen field (upper left field) until the the film/screen combination you want to copy calibration data to is displayed. 3. Press the key next to the Copy Film/Screen field.

Revision W

3-64



4. The Copy/Film Screen screen appears: DISPLAYS DESTINATION FILM/SCREEN NAME PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT THE FILM/SCREEN TO COPY CALIBRATION DATA FROM

Figure 3-42. Copy Film/Screen Screen 5. Press the key next to the "From" field until the name of the film/ screen combination from which calibration data will be copied appears. CAUTION! Before proceeding, check to make sure the "from" and "to" film/screen copy selections are correct. Selecting Copy Film/Screen as directed in the next step causes existing calibration data for the film/screen being copied "to" to be overwritten with calibration data of the "from" film/screen. 6. Press the key next to the Copy Film/Screen field. All AEC calibration data is now copied from the Wall 40" film/screen combination to the Table 40" film/screen combination. To abort without copying, press the key next to the MAIN field. The AEC Calibration Menu is displayed. IMPORTANT NOTES: 1. Upon completing calibration procedures, it is recommended that the Q-Ware program be used to upload calibration data (and APR technique data, if APR editing was performed) as a backup in case a problem occurs that requires re-calibration of the generator. To obtain a copy of the QWare program, contact Quantum Medical Imaging’s Customer Service Department. 2. Be sure to only use calibrated film/screens in all programmed APR procedures. If the APR default film screen is different than the calibrated film screen, the procedure must be edited to use the calibrated film screen.


Revision W

3-65


NON-AEC REPRODUCIBILITY VERIFICATION 1. Set the Dynalyzer (or equivalent) for 75% trigger level on kVp. Ensure that the meter is set to measure mR. 2. Set the generator Operator Control Panel to Manual mode, 45 kV, 100 milliseconds exposure time, Normal Density. 3. Using Table 3-9 below, locate the model number of this generator and set the Operator Control Panel to the maximum mA setting shown in "SAMPLE 1 mA" column (large filament), then take 10 consecutive exposures recording the measured mR values in Non-AEC Reproducibility Data Sheet Table 3-10. Table 3-9. Reproducibility Verification - mA Setting by Model SAMPLE 1 mA

SAMPLE 2 mA

SAMPLE 1 mA

SAMPLE 2 mA

QG-20-SE

250

200

QG-40-2

500

400

QG-25

400

320

QG-40-3

500

400

QG-25-5

400

320

QG-40-SE

450

400

QG-32

500

400

QG-40-5

500

400

QG-32-2

500

400

QG-50

650

500

QG-32-3

500

400

QG-50-2

650

500

QG-32-SE

400

320

QG-50-SE

500

600

QG-32-5

500

400

QG-65

800

650

QG-40

500

400

QG-80

800

650

MODEL

MODEL

4. After the tenth exposure, select (coefficient of variation) COEFF VAR on Dynalyzer; reading must be less than or equal to 0.05. If a Dynalyzer is not used, calculate the C.O.V. (coefficient of variation) according to the following: C=

s X

=

1 X

n

i=1

(xi - x)2 n-1

1/2

Where C= Coefficient of Variation s = standard deviation x = Mean value of mR readings xi = ith observation sampled n = number of observations sampled

Revision W

3-66



AEC REPRODUCIBILITY VERIFICATION (ONLY PERFORM ON UNITS EQUIPPED WITH QG-AEC OPTION) 1. Set the Dynalyzer (or equivalent) for 75% trigger level on kVp. Ensure that the meter is set to measure mR. 2. Place 10 CM of acrylic in the X-ray field, and set the generator Operator Control Panel to AEC mode, 45 kV, Normal Density. 3. Using Table 3-9, locate the model number of this generator and set the Operator Control Panel to the maximum mA setting shown in "SAMPLE 1 mA" column (large filament), then take 10 consecutive exposures recording the measured mR values in AEC Reproducibility Data Sheet Table 3-11. 4. After the tenth exposure, select (coefficient of variation) COEFF VAR on Dynalyzer; reading must be less than or equal to 0.05. If a Dynalyzer is not used, calculate the C.O.V. (coefficient of variation) as above. NON-AEC LINEARITY VERIFICATION 1. Set the Dynalyzer (or equivalent) for 75% trigger level on kVp. Ensure that the meter is set to measure mR. 2. Set the generator Operator Control Panel to Manual mode, 50 kV (60kV if 150kV, max output Generator), 100 milliseconds exposure time, Normal Density. 3. Using Table 3-9, locate the model number of the generator and set the Operator Control Panel to the mA setting shown in "SAMPLE 1 mA" column (large filament), then take 10 consecutive exposures recording the measured mR and mAs values in Non-AEC Linearity Data Table 3-12. 4. Set the Operator Control Panel to adjacent mA station (indicated in the "SAMPLE 2 mA" column of Table 3-9) and take 10 consecutive exposures recording measured mR and mAs values in Non-AEC Linearity Data Table 3-12. 5. Calculate the linearity using the worksheet provided in Table 3-12, and confirm it meets the required limit (< 0.1).


Revision W

3-67


AEC LINEARITY VERIFICATION (ONLY PERFORM ON UNITS EQUIPPED WITH QGAEC OPTION) 1. Set the Dynalyzer (or equivalent) for 75% trigger level on kVp. Ensure that the meter is set to measure mR. 2. Place 10 CM of acrylic in the X-ray field, and set the generator Operator Control Panel to AEC mode, 50 kV (60kV if 150kV, max output Generator), Normal Density. 3. Using Table 3-9, locate the model number of the generator and set the Operator Control Panel to the mA setting shown in "SAMPLE 1 mA" column (large filament), then take 10 consecutive exposures recording the measured mR and mAs values in AEC Linearity Data Table 3-13. 4. Set the Operator Control Panel to adjacent mA station (indicated in the "SAMPLE 2 mA" column of Table 3-9) and take 10 consecutive exposures recording the measured mR and mAs values in AEC Linearity Data Table 3-13. 5. Calculate the linearity using the worksheet provided in Table 3-13, and confirm it meets the required limit (<0.1). MAXIMUM DEVIATION: KVP, TIME, MA, MAS 1. Set the Dynalyzer (or equivalent) for 75% trigger level on kVp. 2. Refer to Table 3-14 and take exposures at the required settings and record the measured values in the data sheet.

NOTE Time is measured at 75% of the peak kVp waveform. Exposure times must be greater than 100 milliseconds.

3. Verify the following are within tolerance:

Accuracy Specifications kVp Accuracy:

kVp = ± ( 4.0% kV )

mA Accuracy:

mA = ± ( 5.0% mA + 1 mA )

Time Accuracy:

mAs Accuracy:

Revision W

3-68

time = ± ( 2.0% time + 1 msec. ) time = ± ( 1.0% time + 1 msec. ) time = ± ( 0.5% time + 1 msec. )

mAs = ± ( 5.0% mAs + 0.5 mAs )



Page 1 of 4

FACILITY: ____________________________________ ROOM#: _________________ GENERATOR S/N: _____________________________ TUBE MODEL:_____________ ASSEMBLER: _________________________________ TEST DATE: _______________

Table 3-10. Non-AEC Reproducibility Data Exposure Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MEAN VALUE (x) C.O.V.

mR

Table 3-11. AEC Reproducibility Data Exposure Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MEAN VALUE (x) C.O.V.


mR

Revision W

3-69


Page 2 of 4

Table 3-12. Non-AEC Linearity Data SAMPLE 1 mA (From Table 3-9) EXPOSURE

mR

= _______ mAs

SAMPLE 2 mA (From Table 3-9) EXPOSURE

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

7

8

8

9

9

10

10

SUM

SUM

MEAN VALUES = SUM ÷ 10


mR

= _______ mAs

X1 = mR ÷ mAs

_______ ÷ _______

X2 = mR ÷ mAs

_______ ÷ _______

X1

= _______

X2

= _______

X1 - X 2

= _______

X1 + X2

= _______

LINEARITY =

Revision W

3-70

=

________________ must be < 0.1



Page 3 o f 4

Table 3-13. AEC Linearity Data SAMPLE 1 mA (From Table 3-9) EXPOSURE

mR

= _______ mAs

SAMPLE 2 mA (From Table 3-9) EXPOSURE

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

7

8

8

9

9

10

10

SUM

SUM



mR

= _______ mAs

X1 = mR ÷ mAs

_______ ÷ _______

X2 = mR ÷ mAs

_______ ÷ _______

X1

= _______

X2

= _______

X1 - X 2

= _______

X1 + X 2

= _______

LINEARITY =

=


________________ must be < 0.1

Revision W

3-71


Page 4 of 4

Table 3-14. Maximum Deviation Data Sheet

SETTING

kVp

mA

Time**

mAs

45

200L

50 mS

10

45

25S

5000 mS

125

60

200L

2000 mS

400

80

100L

3200 mS

320

100

200L

25 mS

5

100

75S

2000 mS

150

125

100L

100 mS

10

140

500L

100 mS

50

Initials

1 MEASURED SETTING 2 MEASURED SETTING 3 MEASURED SETTING 4 MEASURED SETTING 5 MEASURED SETTING 6 MEASURED SETTING 7 MEASURED 8*

SETTING MEASURED

* Only required when generator is equipped with 150 kV option. ** If indicated time setting is not allowed based on installed tube, use highest time setting available. IMPORTANT NOTE: Upon completing verification procedures, it is recommended that the Q-Ware program be used to upload calibration data and APR technique data (if APR editing was performed) to backup to your laptop the generator data in case a problem occurs that requires a factory reset and/or re-calibration of the generator. To obtain a copy of the Q-Ware program, contact Quantum Medical Imaging’s Customer Service Department.

Revision W

3-72


Chapter

4

THEORY OF OPERATION

4-1

4-2

Chapter 4 Theory of Operation

OVERVIEW The following paragraphs provide theory of operation for ODYSSEY HF SeriesTM Generators. Each circuit description references a functional block diagram contained in Chapter 6, Diagrams. OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT NOTE: If the generator is configured with the "QConnect option" as in a Q-VISION equipped system, or if the generator is integrated to an external imaging system’s workstation computer for operation as the generator’s operator control panel - refer to Appendix B, CALIBRATION (Agfa DiRex) or Appendix D, CALIBRATION (Using Insight) for configuration and calibration instructions. The following circuit description does not apply to generators equipped with Q-Connect option. The Operator Control Panel Circuit controls the X-ray generator’s exposure settings and exposure sequence, and controls the display of settings on the Front Panel liquid crystal display (LCD). Exposure setting data is input to the Operator Control Panel Circuit through the Front Panel key switches. The READY, PREP, and EXPOSE LEDs located on the Front Panel are used to indicate the status of the exposure sequence. The Operator Control Panel Circuit includes an RS-232 service connection, which allows service personnel to download data to Flash Memory, perform X-ray generator diagnostics, and to upload non-volatile randomaccess memory (NVRAM) settings. Microcontroller U3 Operation Microcontroller U3 is the primary controller of Operator Control Panel Circuit functions. It has it own internal read-only memory (ROM) and randomaccess memory (RAM). The 32 MHZ output from Oscillator U18 provides the clocking input to drive Microcontroller U3. The Reset Circuit U1 monitors the +5 VDC supply voltage; when it falls below +4.5 VDC, Microcontroller U3 is placed in the "reset state". When the voltage returns to a level above 4.5 VDC, the Microcontroller restarts. Data is sent to the generator via a 9-pin connector and cable connected to the generator Logic Board. The 9-pin cable includes RS-485 communication, hardware control lines, and power supply voltage from the generator. PREP and EXPOSE hardware lines are routed from Open Collector Driver U16 to the generator to indicate the state of the system to the generator. Flash Memory U2 Flash Memory U2 holds part of the main program and all of the tables for the LCD display screens. Flash Memory is accessed by Microcontroller U3 through the DATA/ADDRESS bus and Control Signals. On the first memory


Revision W

4-3


read/write clock cycle, the Flash Memory address is stored in Latches U4 and U5. On the second clock state, Microcontroller U3 reads or writes the data to Flash Memory U2. The Flash Memory is programmable using a personal computer via the RS232 port (connector J4). EEPROM U17 Operation Non-volatile random-access memory (EEPROM) U17 stores all data changes that occur during X-ray generator operation, and contains configuration settings, calibration data, and Anatomical Programmed Regions (APR) technique data. This data is retained even when power to the generator is shut down. NVRAM data is accessed in two steps: • The memory address is stored in 8-Bit Latches U11 and U13. • Microcontroller U3 reads or writes to EEPROM U17 by generation the appropriate Control Signals. Note: In the event of a failure of OCP Microprocessor Board A16A1 (part number AY40-004S) resulting in the replacement of A16A1, remove EEPROM U17 from the old OCP Microprocessor Board and install it in the replacement OCP Microprocessor Board (U17 is socket-mounted). By doing so, all configuration and calibration settings and customized APR screens will be retained. In the unlikely event EEPROM U17 is damaged and must be replaced, the X-ray generator must be recalibrated, and the edited APR screens reentered. LCD Controller U12 Operation LCD Controller U12 controls the Odyssey HF Series LCD display (the LCD on Quest systems has the LCD Controller built in). The microcontroller U3 stores the data that will be displayed on the current screen in the RAM of LCD Controller U12. Microcontroller U3 sends the memory address of U12 it wants to access to 8-Bit Latches U11 and U13, then, through a handshake sequence, U3 writes or reads the data to/from U12 memory. LCD Controller U12 then processes the data stored in its RAM memory, and generates the appropriate signals to the LCD display to display the data stored by U3. Counter U19 provides the 16 MHZ and 8 MHZ inputs to LCD Controller U12. The CFL Driver provides AC voltage required for the LCD’s fluorescent backlighting through connector J7. Buffer U23 and Latch U14 are used on Quest systems to send/receive data from the LCD.

Revision W

4-4



Switching Power Supply Circuit The Switching Power Supply circuit converts unregulated 28VDC to several regulated voltages that are required by the Operator Control Panel Circuit. Pulse-Width Modulator (PWM) U21 chops DC to AC. Transformer T1 steps down the AC voltage, which is then rectified and filtered. The regulated +5 VDC provides voltage for logic IC’s in the Operator Control Panel Circuit. The voltage +3.3 VDC is required for operation of LCD Controller U12. +12 VDC is needed for the CFL Driver, and input to the coil of relay K1. Adjustable voltage -7 VDC to -24 VDC is needed for the LCD displays. Potentiometer R17 adjusts the intensity of the LCD display. There is a different operating voltage range between the two LCD displays. The Odyssey LCD voltage range is -16V to -24V, and the Quest -8V to 16V. In order to set the Quest voltage range JP12 must be install. Front Panel Key Activation Detection Circuit The detection of a pressed key on the Front Panel of the Operator Control Panel is sensed by 8-Bit Driver U7 and 8-Bit Latch U8. 8-Bit Driver U7 scans the matrix arrangement of the key switches set by 8-Bit Latch U8. Microcontroller U3 controls the scanning timing of the key switches. The data sent for scanning and reading is transferred over the DATA/ADDRESS bus. Jumpers Installation The following jumpers must be installed for proper operation of the OCP: JP1, JP6, JP7, JP10, JP11, JP12 (only on Quest). If EXPOSE and PREP will be input through remote hand switch only (i.e., connected to TB1), then JP6 and JP7 should be removed. This prevents operation of the Expose and PREP Front Panel key switches. TechVision Compatibility To interface the generator with an optional "TechVision" supplementary operator control panel on Q-VISION equipped systems or integrated CR/DR imaging systems, the generator must be equipped with an optional OCP Interface Board AY40-073S ("Q-Connect option"). The Q-Connect option enables bidirectional Ethernet communication between Q-VISION OCP or the DR/CR system’s computer workstation and the x-ray generator. In the case of an integration system, the exposure technique settings can be set either from the DR/CR workstation computer’s screen, which functions as the generator’s operator control panel, or from a TechVision operator control panel. GENERATOR LOGIC CIRCUIT The Logic Circuit controls the exposure sequence, based on settings and control signals received from the Operator Control Panel Circuit. In Standby, PREP, and Expose states, the Logic Circuit controls and monitors the Filament Regulator Control Circuit, KVP & Filament Control Circuit, Rotor board, Interface board, Line Monitor Circuit, and the AEC Circuit (when equipped).


Revision W

4-5


Generator/OCP Communication Communication with the Operator Control Panel Circuit is established via a 9pin connector and cable connected between the OCP and generator cabinet. The 9-pin cable provides RS-485 serial communication, Operator Control Panel Circuit hardware control lines and power supply lines. There are two RS-232 service connections for connection to a personal computer for diagnostics, and for future interfacing with other systems. Master and Slave Microcontroller Operation Microcontroller U9 is the master microcontroller that controls the main functions of the generator, based on states and settings set at the Operator Control Panel. Microcontroller U9 has it own internal ROM and RAM. It is driven by a crystal oscillator at a clock speed of 32 MHz. Microcontroller U14 is configured as a slave microcontroller that controls the auxiliary functions of the generator, based on states and settings set by the master Microcontroller U9. Microcontroller U14 has it own internal ROM and RAM. It is driven by a crystal oscillator at a clock speed of 32 MHz. There is a communication link between the master and slave for data and status exchange. The Reset Circuit U8 monitors the +5 VDC supply voltage; when it falls below +4.5 VDC, Microcontrollers U9 and U14 enter a reset state. When the +5 VDC supply voltage returns to a level above +4.5 VDC, the microcontrollers restart. The master Microcontroller U9 has external Flash memory. The EPROM holds part of the main program. The EPROM is accessed by U9 through the DATA/ ADDRESS bus of Microcontroller U9, with required Control Signals. On the first clock cycle, the Flash memory address is stored in Latches U12 and U13. On the second clock cycle, Microcontroller U9 reads data from Flash memory. Microcontroller U9 communicates with the KVP & Filament Control Circuit to set the digital-to-analog (D-A) converters and to read analog signals from analog-to-digital (A-D) converters. In addition, there are hardware signals that control the Filament Regulator Control Circuit and KVP & Filament Control Circuit. Some of the key signals are isolated using opto-couplers. On systems utilizing the AEC option, the same connector (J1) is connected to the AEC board in parallel. The interface board controls all external signals needed to interface to the tube stand, wall stand, and table. Some of the signals coming are isolated by opto-couplers. J2 interfaces to the line monitor board. The line monitor board supplies the 24VDC for the brakes. The line monitor supplies a sample of the 400 VDC bus for monitoring by Microcontroller U14, which uses an internal AD converter to monitor key voltages including the +5V, 15V, 24V, 24V brake supply voltages. U16 is the 4.8V voltage reference for Microcontroller U14 internal A-D. Microcontroller U14 controls the Rotor Board; it provides the necessary signals for boost and run, and it monitors the tube rotation signal and rotor temperature.

Revision W

4-6



FILAMENT CONTROL REGULATOR CIRCUIT The Filament Control Regulator circuit is a high frequency, pulse-width-modulated-based system. The circuit receives signals from the KVP & Filament Control circuit and outputs filament current to the High-voltage Tank, which then produces the small or large filament currents for the X-ray tube. The detailed operation of the Filament Control Regulator circuit (see Filament Regulator Control Circuit Block Diagram in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS) is as follows: A signal from the KVP & Filament Control circuit that controls filament current is input to Filament Current Opto-isolator U2A. Varying the voltage of this signal will cause the output of U2A to vary between 0 and 5 volts. This varying voltage is fed to the input of Pulse Width Modulator U1. The output of the Pulse Width Modulator is input to Transformer Driver U3. The Transformer Driver buffers the output of the Pulse Width Modulator in order to supply enough current to drive Transformer T1. Transformer T1 drives an H-bridge circuit consisting of Q1-Q4. The output of the H-bridge is a 20 kHz signal that is output through Filament Select K1 and Q5 to drive the filament transformer in the High-voltage Tank. The duty cycle of the 20 kHz signal is varied by the Pulse Width Modulator depending on the amount of filament current required by the particular exposure. In order to complete the filament current control loop, the 20 kHz signal is run through the primary of Current Sample Transformer T2. The Current Sample Transformer's turn ratio is configured such that 1 amp flowing through its primary will result in 1 volt at its secondary. The output of Current Sample Transformer T2 is fed to the input of RMS-to-DC Converter U4. The output from RMS-to-DC Converter U4 is a dc signal that is proportional to the RMS current flowing through the primary of the filament transformer (in the High-voltage Tank). The RMS-to-DC Converter's output is buffered and amplified by Amplifier/Buffer U5A before being sent to the KVP & Filament Control circuit. U5B is configured as a full-wave rectifier whose output is filtered by R19, R32 and C14. The resulting voltage is input to U1 as a filament current limit signal. R25 can be adjusted to limit the maximum filament current. The large or small filament is selected by the FIL SIZE signal from the KVP & Filament Control circuit. A high level FIL SIZE signal applied to the Filament Select circuit turns on transistor Q5, which energizes relay K1. When K1 is energized, the small filament is selected. A low level FIL SIZE signal will keep K1 turned off and the large filament will be selected. KVP & FILAMENT CONTROL CIRCUIT The KVP & Filament Control circuit controls the high voltage and tube current supplied to the x-ray tube. The x-ray tube current is a function of its filament current. The filament current is controlled by a feedback loop consisting of the KVP & Filament Control circuit and the Filament Control Regulator circuit. The KVP & Filament Control Circuit operates as follows: The output of the kVp divider within the High Voltage (H.V.) Transformer is input to Anode Amplifiers U1A, U1B and Cathode Amplifiers U2A, U2B as the ANODE FDBK and CATHODE FDBK signals, respectively. The outputs of the Anode and


Revision W

4-7


Cathode Amplifiers are compared with the KV PROGRAM (from voltage at Comparators U1C, U2C) and are also sent to the Logic Circuit via Parallel to Serial A/D U13. Comparator U1C's output varies the output frequency of Pulse-Width Modulator U3, depending on the desired kVp voltage. The output of Pulse-Width Modulator U3 is sent to the anode IGBT Driver Board (part of Power Module Assembly). This board drives the IGBT's, which in turn drive the H.V. Transformer, thus producing the high voltage for the x-ray tube. The cathode Amplifiers (U2A, U2B), Comparators (U1C U2C) and Pulse-Width Modulator U4 work in a similar manner. In lower-power systems, Pulse-Width Modulator U4 is not used, and the outputs of Amplifiers U1B and U2B are summed together to control U4. Comparators (U6A, U6B), Amplifiers (U1D, U2D) and Comparator U6C monitor the high voltage to check for an over-voltage condition. A watchdog timer (Retriggerable One-Shot U7A) must be triggered every 50 msec. by the TRIGGER input from the Logic Circuit (via Address Decoder U15) in order for an x-ray to occur. If this pulse stream were missing, it would signal a failure condition thus terminating the x-ray and the ERROR signal is output through D-Flip-Flop U12A and Logic Inverter U21A to the Logic Circuit. The 7 TRIGGER signal from the Logic Circuit (generated at the beginning of exposure cycle) is applied to 7-Second One-Shot U7B, which produces a seven-second positive-going pulse. If the exposure is not terminated within seven seconds, D-Flip-Flop U12A and Logic Inverter U21A generate the ERROR signal. Amplifiers (U10A, U10B), Amplifiers (U10C, U10D) and Driver Q3 monitor the xray tube current via an mA sense resistor in the High Voltage Tank and compare this value to the mA Program and Filament Program values (received from the Logic Circuit via Serial to Parallel D/A U16. The FIL CURRENT output from this circuit is a voltage that is sent to the Filament Control Regulator Circuit to vary the filament voltage based on the selected x-ray tube current. Address Decoder U15, Parallel to Serial A/D U13, and Serial to Parallel D/A U16 enable communication between the Logic Circuit and the KVP & Filament Control Circuit. Parallel to Serial A/D U13 converts analog signals from the KVP & Filament Control Circuit to digital signals for input to the Logic Circuit. Serial to Parallel D/A U16 converts digital signals from the Logic Circuit to analog signals for use by the KVP & Filament Control Circuit. LINE MONITOR CIRCUIT (NON-SE SINGLE-PHASE AND THREE-PHASE SYSTEMS) The Line Monitor Circuit consists of three circuits: an input line monitor circuit, a circuit that bleeds off the high voltage from the IGBT capacitor banks and an auto-shutoff circuit that turns off the generator after 1 hour of inactivity. The auto-shutoff circuit also allows the microprocessor to turn off the generator in the event a fault occurs in the system. The operation of the Line Monitor Circuit is as follows: Input Line Monitor Circuit The Input Line Monitor Circuit monitors the incoming line voltage to ensure it is at the correct voltage level required for taking an exposure. This circuit is configurable for either single-phase systems (anode capacitor bank only) or

Revision W

4-8



two identical voltage-monitoring circuits (anode and cathode capacitor banks) for three-phase systems. On three-phase systems, each circuit produces a VSENSE voltage that is proportional to the voltage of the anode or cathode capacitor bank. (The ratio of the voltage across either capacitor bank to the voltage at the output of the line monitor circuit is 100:1). The VSENSE (ANODE) and VSENSE (CATHODE) voltages are sent to the Logic Circuit to determine if the line voltage is within acceptable limits for proper system operation. On single-phase systems, there is one capacitor bank each for the anode and cathode. In this case, the capacitor bank is connected to the anode circuit only (JP1-2 is connected to JP1-3) on the Line Monitor circuit board. The result will be that the microprocessor will read the same capacitor bank voltage at VSENSE (ANODE) and VSENSE (CATHODE). Capacitor Discharge Circuit The Capacitor Discharge Circuit connects bleeder resistors across the storage capacitor banks to discharge the capacitors when power is shut off. When the generator on/off switch is turned off, the normally closed contacts of relays K1 and K2 close and each relay connects two 1.2K, 50-watt resistors in series across each capacitor bank, discharging the capacitors to a safe voltage below 24 VDC within two minutes. When the generator on/off switch is turned on, the relay contacts open, disconnecting the resistors from the capacitor banks. A 0.1 uF capacitor in series with a 220 ohm resistor is connected across the normally closed contacts of each relay to prevent arcing whenever the relay contacts open. In addition to the above, the Line Monitor circuit controls the turn-on in-rush current of the system by shunting the 2 ohm resistors in series with the input transformers of the system only after the +24V LVPS is energized. This permits the transformers to slowly change before the contactor is energized, preventing arcing of the contactor's contacts and over-current conditions on turn-on. Auto-Shutoff Circuit The Auto-Shutoff Circuit turns off the system after one hour of non-usage via a command from the Logic Circuit. The Operator Control Panel Circuit contains a microprocessor that monitors the Operator Control Panel (OCP) for any key activation. If no key is pressed on the OCP for a user-selectable period (30-180 mins.), the microprocessor generated AUTO SHUTOFF signal energizes Auto-Shutoff Relay K4. This opens a ground, deactivating System On/Off Relay K4, which turns off the generator via Contactor K1. In order to turn on the generator, the system ON/OFF switch on the OCP has to be set to the OFF position. This turns off Auto-Shutoff Relay K4. When the system ON/OFF switch (on the OCP) is set back to the ON position, a ground signal is sent via Auto-Shutoff Relay K4 to System On/Off Relay K4, thus turning on the generator.


Revision W

4-9


Three-Phase Line Monitor Circuit When the Line Monitor circuit is configured for three-phase operation, a circuit is present on the Line Monitor circuit board that monitors all three phases of incoming power to detect any phase(s) missing. If one or more phases are missing, Phase A, Phase B or Phase C Optocoupler U4, U5 or U6 turns off immediately for the time period when the phase is not present. As soon as one of the optocouplers turns off, a signal is sent to the Logic Circuit to indicate a fault condition, and prevents an exposure from being taken and stops any exposure in progress. When the three phases are again present, the Logic Circuit resets turns on Reset Transistor Q1, which returns the MISSING PHASE output to an inactive level. LINE MONITOR CIRCUIT (STORED ENERGY SYSTEMS) The Line Monitor Circuit consists of four distinct circuits: • The Battery Monitor Circuit • The Storage Capacitor Discharge Circuit • The Generator Auto Shutoff Circuit • The Battery Charger Circuit Their operation is as follows: Battery Monitor Circuit The Battery Monitor Circuit is composed of four independent voltage monitor circuits that track the two positive (+) and two negative (-) battery arrays, one each of which comprise the independent Anode Tray #1 (lower), and the Cathode Tray #2 (upper) DC Battery Power Supplies. The sum of each (+) and (-) pair produces a Voltage Sense (VSENSE) signal proportional to the total output voltage present on each tray. The divider ratio is 100:1. The V_SENSE ANODE (TP9) and V_SENSE CATHODE (TP10) analogs are routed to Logic Board A1, which performs an A/D conversion, and via software, monitors and determines if the battery power supply voltages are within acceptable limits for proper system operation. Additionally, a hardware Over-voltage Fault Detector protects the batteries by forcing a charger shutdown if triggered. Storage Capacitor Discharge Circuit The Storage Capacitor Discharge Circuit exists to bleed-off the High Voltage DC Charge on the Anode and Cathode Storage Capacitor Banks once the generator is turned off. Upon turn-off, the generator’s internally switched +24VDC Low Volts Power Supply collapses, allowing the normally closed contacts of Relays K7 and K8 to insert two 1.2 Kohm, 50-watt external bleeder resistors R1A and R1B in parallel with the Anode and Cathode Storage Capacitor Banks. These resistors discharge the capacitors to below 24 VDC within two minutes. When the

Revision W

4-10



generator is turned ON, the relays are again energized, disconnecting the bleeder resistors. Generator Auto-Shutoff Circuit The Operator Control Panel’s (OCP) microprocessor, located on the OCP Control Board, monitors the OCP keypad for button activity. If no button is depressed on the OCP for a user-defined period, ranging between 30 and 180 minutes, the microprocessor energizes the Auto-shutoff relay K6. This opens the System-ON signal ground path (normally low-true), deactivating relay K5 and turning OFF the generator. To restore the generator to the ON state, the system’s ON/Standby switch on the OCP must first be set to the Standby (

) position to release relay K6.

The Auto-shutoff circuit also provides the microprocessor the ability to turn OFF the generator should a critical fault develop in the system. Battery Charger Circuit Warning! Be aware high voltage DC is constantly present within the battery arrays and on the Line Monitor/Source Charger Board A8, even when the AC line input power is disconnected. The Battery Charger consists of two similar power supplies, one positive (+) and one negative (-), both of which are necessary to charge a single battery tray. 220VAC is fed from two independent secondary windings of the AC Mains Power Transformer (T1) to two full-wave bridge rectifiers. The unfiltered +/-283VDC outputs are fed to twin Triacs controlled by Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) switching circuits that simultaneously and continuously direct charging current to the weakest of the two trays (when two are present). Together, these two power supplies provide the needed charging current to each half of both battery arrays. This arrangement permits the creation of dual, center-grounded, 410VDC Anode and Cathode Stored Energy Power Supplies using just two 205VDC regulated battery chargers. Each charger keeps its half of each battery tray at precisely 205VDC by varying the duty-cycle of its Triac switch from 0% to 100%. If the Battery Monitor circuit senses an over-voltage condition, it will turn off relays K1 and K3, disconnecting the Triacs from the output of the bridge rectifiers. The charging current will remain interrupted until the over-voltage condition is corrected. An Over-voltage Fault signal is also sent to Logic Board A1, which will return a separate shutdown command to the PWMs for redundant safety.


Revision W

4-11


POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT The power supply circuit (see Power Supply Board A6 (AY40-005T) Schematic Diagram in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS) consists of four power supplies that provide the power needed to the control circuits. Two power supplies (+15VDC and +48VDC) are switching power supplies. The other two power supplies (+24VDC and -15VDC) are linear. +48 VDC Power Supply The +48 VDC and +15 VDC power supplies work with the same boost concept design, but some of the components are different between the power supplies. The +48 VDC Power Supply consists of Bridge Rectifier DB1 that produces a 43 VDC (approximately) output (TP2), which is filtered by capacitor C2. The 43 VDC is chopped by transistor Q1 with inductor L1 in series. When Q1 turns off, the inductor and the DC voltage across C2 supplies voltage to the output. The output is the sum of both voltages. Therefore, the output voltage will never be lower than +43 VDC (neglecting the voltages across components). The time that transistor Q1 is on depends on the input DC voltage and the output load. Pulse-Width Modulator (PWM) U1 samples the output voltage, and it controls Q1 on time to maintain constant output voltage. The output voltage is adjusted to +48 VDC (TP3) with R17 in case there is a problem supplying the filament current as a result of long length high-voltage (H.V.) cables. The +48 VDC output can be adjusted to supply adequate filament current. The maximum adjusted voltage should not exceed +52 VDC. +15 VDC Power Supply The +15 VDC power supply works using the same boost concept design as the +48 VDC power supply. The +15 VDC Power Supply bridge rectifier DB4 produces a DC voltage output, which is filtered by capacitor C18. The DC voltage should be approximately +13 VDC (TP10). The DC voltage is chopped by transistor Q2 with inductor L2 in series. When the transistor turns off, the inductor and the DC voltage across C18 supplies voltage to the output. The time that transistor Q1 is on depends on the input DC voltage and the output load. PWM U2 samples the output voltage, and it controls Q2 on time to maintain constant output voltage. The output of the +15 VDC supply has a resettable fuse (F2). When the load exceeds the limit of the fuse, the output shuts off until the overload is removed. +24 VDC Power Supply The +24 VDC power supply uses a linear adjustable regulator that produces regulated 24VDC (at TP8). The input DC voltage (approximately 35V) to the regulator comes from bridge rectifier DB4 and filter capacitor C15. The power supply that produces the -15VDC uses a linear fix output regulator that produces the regulated -15VDC (TP8). The input negative DC voltage (TP7 approximately -21V) to the regulator comes from the bridge rectifier DB2 and filter capacitor C13.

Revision W

4-12



ROTOR BOARD CIRCUIT (NON-HIGH SPEED STARTER SYSTEMS) The Rotor Circuit (see Rotor Circuit Block Diagram in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS) supplies the power needed for the tube rotor running at 50/60 Hz. The 50/60 Hz running frequency depends on the input AC line. The power consumption varies depending on the tube. Different tubes need different phase shift capacitor (C1) as recommended by the tube manufacturer. Changing the tube to a different type may require changing the phase shift capacitor connected to J5 (check manufacturer’s tube data sheet). The boost and the run voltages are constant; boost is 220VAC and run is 60VAC. The operation of the rotor starts during PREP. The ROTOR ON signal comes from the Logic Circuit at J3-1, which is input to Control Circuits. This RELAY ON signal from the Control Circuits turns on relay K2 generating the COM output, which connects the common to the rotor (TP1). The BOOST ON signal (TP6) starts the Boost state by generating the Q1 DRIVE signal to Q1 through the Control Circuits. When the boost period is finished, the BOOST ON signal turns off and the RUN ON signal turns on (J3-3). By turning on the RUN ON signal (TP7) and turning BOOST ON off, Q1 turns off and Q2 turns On. The RUN ON signal will remain on throughout the PREP and Expose states. In case the tube's thermal switch is activated (indicated by active TEMP. FAULT signal), Relay K2 will open removing power to the rotor, and the Control Circuit will turn off either Q1 or Q2. A "Rotor Thermal Error" will be displayed on the OCP. The Main (TP2) and Phase (TP4) currents are sampled by the Control Circuits to determine whether the rotor is rotating (when rotating, the ROTOR ROTATING signal at J3-4 is active). If the ROTOR ROTATING signal is inactive, an error will be displayed on the OCP. Power needed for operation of the Control Circuits and Relay K2 is supplied through connector J4. ROTOR BOARD CIRCUIT (QUANTUM INTERNAL HIGH SPEED STARTER SYSTEMS) The following applies only to systems equipped with a Quantum-manufactured High Speed Starter (Q-HSS). The Q-HSS functions to drive the rotating anode of many types of 3" or 4" x-ray tubes. The tube anode rotates at either of two distinct speeds/frequencies; low speed operation (60 Hz) or high speed operation (180 Hz). All necessary settings for the high speed starter are configurable by accessing the generator’s Service Configuration screen (refer to Chapter 3, CALIBRATION). The Q-HSS consists of two circuit board assemblies: HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S) and HSS Drive Board A20A2 (AY40-036S). All required settings needed for high speed starter timing and control are known to Logic Board A1, The BOOST RUN/ BRAKE voltages are set based on tube model. Refer to Chapter 2, ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION for HSS Driver Board AY40-036S transformer input wire connections to terminal block TB1 plug and for wiring configuration of rotor phase capacitor.


Revision W

4-13


HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S) The HSS Control Board A20A1 receives operating handshake commands (such as SYSTEM ON/OFF) from the generator Logic Board A1 (AY40-004S) through connector J2. The signals coming and going to the Logic board via J2 are optically isolated. The handshake signals control the high speed starter’s Rotor On, Boost, Run and Brake sequence. The Boost and brake time settings are based of the tube model selected for the generator. CAUTION! It is important that the proper tube is selected otherwise damage may be caused to the tube rotor due to incorrect Boost and/or Brake timing. Oscillator A20A1U11 generates a 36 kHz square wave output, which is then divided by counters to create 180 Hz (High Speed) and 60 Hz (Low Speed) reference frequencies required to synchronize all control events. The 60 Hz and 180 Hz drive outputs each consisting of two, 180° out-ofphase signals, DRIVE 1 and DRIVE 2 (available for monitoring at A20A2TP5, A20A2TP6). These outputs are buffered and then sent as drive signals to IGBTs on HSS Drive Board A20A2. Under the control of the generator Logic Board A1 and HSS Control Board A20A1, relays on the HSS Drive Board output a sequence of AC voltages (High/Low Speed Boost and Run) to the x-ray tube based on the tube type configured in the generator. Redundant hardware protection is provided to limit maximum Boost and Run times. For High Speed (180 Hz) operation, following the end of the Run phase, a Brake phase is initiated. During this phase, one output phase is On while the other is Off. The DC braking voltage is generated through rectification of the Run AC voltage. The duration of the Brake phase is dependent on the tube type selected. The high speed starter voltage and current on HSS Drive Board A20A2 are monitored continually by circuits on HSS Control Board A20A1. If an overvoltage or over-current condition occurs, the HSS Control Board terminates operation of the high speed starter. Test point A20A1TP10 provides the indication of over-voltage or over-current (i.e., TTL-low signal indicates FAULT condition). The HSS Control Board A20A1 also monitors whether or not the tube is rotating (ROTATING signal at A20A1TP19), and whether it is rotating at High Speed 180 Hz or Low Speed 60 Hz (HIGH/LOW SPEED signal at A20A1TP8). If the ROTATING signal at A20A1TP19 is not logic low during operation of the high speed rotor, a "Not Rotating" error appears on the Operator Control Panel display. The available test points on HSS Control Board A20A1 are: • TP1: GND • TP2: +15V

Revision W

4-14



• TP3: -15V • TP4: +5V • TP5: Drive one side of the bridge (TTL) • TP6: Drive second side of the bridge. • TP7: Boost On (High TTL) • TP8: High/Low Speed • TP9: Rotor Run • TP10: Over Voltage or Over Current (TTL Low = Fault) • TP15: 36 kHz Clock • TP17: +5V Reference • TP19: Rotating Signal (Low = Tube Rotor rotating) HSS Drive Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) The main function of the HSS Drive Board A20A2 is to deliver AC drive voltages to the rotor at 60 Hz and 180 Hz frequencies using a bridge driver circuit. To protect the bridge driver circuit, the HSS Drive Board contains fault detection and overload protection circuits. The DC voltage for the bridge is provided by Bridge Rectifier A20A2BD30. A set of relays located on HSS Control Board A20A1 control the AC voltage supply to Bridge Rectifier A20A2BD30 based on the operational state of the high speed starter (i.e., High/Low Speed Boost, Run, or Brake). Capacitors A20A2C4, -C5, -C8, and -C9 filter the rectified DC voltage. The drive for the bridge driver is input from HSS Control Board connector J1 into HSS Drive Board A20A2 connector J3. The drive is monitored on test points A20A2TP5 and A20A2TP1. Relay A20A2K1 sets the value of the rotor phase capacitors in accordance with the speed at which the high speed starter is operating. The values phase capacitors will be set based on the tube type. A triple-output floating power supply provides power to the HSS Drive Board IGBT drivers. The switching power supply pulse-width modulated (PWM) output provides a pulse that is a function of the voltage. The output of the PWM can be monitored at test point is A20A2TP12. The feedback test point is A20A2TP13. The voltage at this point is 18 VDC. For protection against overload of the bridge circuit output, current sensors monitor output current (available at test points A20A2TP2 and A20A2TP6). If current exceeds maximum threshold level, the high speed starter shuts down the rotor and an Over Current/Voltage signal is output to HSS Control Board A20A1. Similarly, the Main to Common voltage is monitored at test point A20A2TP14 (sample of the output voltage). If the voltage exceeds a preset voltage threshold, the high speed starter shuts down the rotor and an Over


Revision W

4-15


Current/Voltage signal is output to HSS Control Board A20A1. In response to the Over Voltage/Current signal, the HSS Control Board A20A1 monitors the signal and sends a Fault signal to the generator Logic Board A1, and a "Rotor Current" error appears on the Operator Control Panel display. The x-ray Tube Temperature input signal is applied through terminal block A20A2TB4. The Tube Temperature input is protected with Fuse A20A2F5. If the voltage on A20A2TB4-1 is above one volt, a Temp error signal is generated. The TEMP signal is output through connector A20A2J2 to HSS Control Board A20A1, which then activates a temperature signal to generator Logic Board A1. In response, a "Rotor Temp" error is indicated on the Operator Control Panel display. The following are the ratings of the various fuses located on HSS Drive Board A20A2: • F1, F3: AC Input voltage - 15A/500VAC • F4: Rotor output drive - 15A/500VAC • F5: Temperature sense input - 0.1A/250V AEC BOARD CIRCUIT The automatic exposure control (AEC) option is available in either of two types: Standard or Universal. The standard type provides for connection of up to two ion chambers, one for a wall mounted image receptor and one for a table mounted receptor. Both ion chambers must be of the same type, i.e., either "slope" or "level". The universal type provides for connection of up to four separate ion chambers, each one can be either type (slope or level). The following paragraphs describe general circuit functions of each AEC type. Standard Type AEC The standard type AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S) controls the exposure time to maintain uniform optical density (O.D.) with respect to various kV and mA settings. Using AEC, the operator sets the desired kV and mA; the exposure time is determined by the AEC circuit. AEC calibration is required in order establish a desired or optimal optical density (refer to Chapter 3, AEC Calibration). The AEC Board is designed for use with ion chambers having the following characteristics: • Positive slope • Ion chamber selection signal: active low • Ion chamber on signal: active low The AEC Board can control two separate ion chambers; each of the ion chamber connectors is a D-type connector (A11J2 = Wall 1 and A11J5 = Table). The ion chamber is selected from the operator control console via the TABLE and WALL receptor keys. These selections are input to control logic contained on Logic Board A1 AY40-006S, which controls the selection of the ion

Revision W

4-16



chamber and the detectors within the selected ion chamber. The AEC board receives the voltage input from selected ion chamber, and processes the signal. The processed signal is compared continuously with a set reference voltage produced by KVP Board A2 AY40-003S. The reference voltage is a function of kVp and the film/screen combination type. When the processed signal is equal to the reference voltage, the exposure is terminated. The AEC Board A11 AY40-031S "fine" gain adjustment potentiometers are as follows: • A11R22 Table gain adjustment • A11R23 Wall 1 gain adjustment • A11R24 Wall 2 gain adjustment (currently not used) The above potentiometers provide fine gain adjustments for each of the ion chamber detectors, coarse gain adjustment is performed by adjusting the MASTER GAIN potentiometer located on the ion chamber. A11R12 provides AEC dV/dT adjustment as described in the AEC calibration instructions in Chapter 3. The following major test points and a brief description are: • TP1- Wall 1 input from ion chamber • TP2- Wall 2 input from ion chamber • TP5- +15V supply to ion camber • TP6- -15V supply to ion camber • TP7- Table input from ion chamber • TP9- Inverted polarity slope of selected ion chamber signal • TP12- AEC output to KVP board Universal Type AEC The "universal" AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) has the capability to work with two ion chambers (four in the future), and provides necessary interface to connect to the Siemens tomography system (or any other tomography system having similar hand-shake protocol as Siemens). The universal AEC Board is capable of working with ion cambers that have different type of outputs (Slop / Level), polarity (Positive / Negative), or logic levels. (active low, active high.) The ion chamber configuration/ setting can be set through setup menus in the calibration setup mode. The settings options to ion chamber type that can be programmed are: • Ion chamber cell selection • Type of the ion chamber output slope/level • Polarity of the AEC output signal • The level of ion detectors selection signal (active low/active high). The ion chamber ON (Reset) is always active low.


Revision W

4-17


The board is divided into three major functions described in the following paragraphs: • +300 VDC power supply • AEC Control Circuit • Tomography Interface Circuit +300 VDC Power Supply The universal board has an adjustable +300 VDC power supply for ion chambers that require +300 VDC for the detector operation (e.g., Siemens ion chamber). The power supply is a DC-to-DC converter that converts +50 VDC (input through A11J1) to +300 VDC. The power supply is regulated with closed-loop circuitry. A11R10 adjusts the power supply output on connector A11TB1. The power supply has a thermal fuse (A11F1) and current limit protection against short circuits (A11U1). AEC Control Circuitry The AEC control circuitry can accept one out of two ion chamber inputs (either wall or table) based on selection from the OCP. (In the future, four inputs will be available.) The ion chambers input connectors are 9-pin D-type connectors, configured as follows: • A11J10 - Table ion chamber, selected from the OCP as TABLE receptor. • A11J8 - Wall #1 ion chamber, selected from the OCP as WALL receptor. • A11J12 - Currently not available for use. • A11J13 - Currently not available for use. Different types of ion chamber can be connected to each input. Each ion chamber is configured independently using the Ion Chamber Configuration menu to set the characteristics of the ion chamber. These settings enable the AEC Control circuitry on the Universal Board to generate the appropriate signal. The information is sent via serial communication from the OCP Control Board to the Logic board, then to the Universal AEC Board. The selected ion chamber outputs a signal that is processed by the AEC Control circuit and is sent to the KVP Control Board. The KVP Control Board compares the processed signal with a reference voltage. When the processed signal is equal to the reference voltage, the exposure is terminated. The AEC Control circuitry requires adjustment using potentiometers. The potentiometers are adjusted during AEC calibration based on the ion chamber type and film/screen combination. The circuits are divided into two sections: one for a level type ion chamber, and one for a slope type ion chamber.

Revision W

4-18



The adjustment potentiometers functionality: Table 4-1. Universal AEC Board Ion Chamber Adjustments Table Ion Chamber Type Slope

Level

dV/dt adjustment: A11R87 - Adjust once for either the table or wall ion chamber (both must be "slope" type ion chambers)

Ion chamber output balance: A11R61 - Field 1 (Center), A11R63 - Field 2 (Left)*, A11R66 - Field 3 (Right)* dv/dt adjustment: A11R82 - Adjust once for either table or wall ion chamber (both must be "level" type ion chambers) Fine gain adjustment: A11R77 - table ion chamber gain adjustment All other potentiometers are for future use.

Wall Ion Chamber Type Slope dV/dt adjustment: A11R87 - Adjust once for either the table or wall ion chamber (both must be "slope" type ion chambers)

Level Ion chamber output balance: A11R61 - Field 1 (Center), A11R63 - Field 2 (Left)*, A11R66 - Field 3 (Right)* dv/dt adjustment: A11R82 - Adjust once for either table or wall ion chamber (both must be "level" type ion chambers) Fine gain adjustment: A11R79 - wall ion chamber gain adjustment All other potentiometers are for future use.

*Note: Settings indicated are for right hand load side; for left hand load, use A11R63 to adjust right field and A11R66 for left field.


Revision W

4-19


Tomography Circuitry The universal AEC Board provides interfacing circuitry to the Siemens tomography system (and to other tomography systems that have similar handshake interface). The Tomography circuitry contains the signal sequence needed to take an exposure using a Siemens table (including a Tomo table) or a Siemens wall stand. In addition, it includes the sweep time detection circuitry that detects tomography mode of operation. When Tomo Mode is detected, the operator control panel automatically displays Tomo Mode screen. The Tomo Mode screen displays an icon indicating Tomo Mode, and the exposure "time" is changed to "sweep time". The exposure hand-shake control signals are received from the Logic Board and Interface Board. These signals are activated during PREP and EXPOSE states, and are sent and received from either the tomo table or wall stand. The Tomo Mode detection circuitry receives the tomo sweep time from the tomo table. The Universal AEC Board detects the selected tomo sweep time, and sends it to the Logic Board. The Logic Board sends the data to the OCP via serial communication protocol.

Revision W

4-20


Chapter

5

SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS

5-1

5-2

Chapter 5 Service Instructions

OVERVIEW The HF Series X-ray Generator will function reliably when maintained according to the instructions provided in this chapter. Only properly trained service personnel should service or maintain this equipment. Safe equipment performance requires the attention of service/support personnel who are specifically trained and experienced with medical x-ray apparatus. Applicable preventive maintenance or any repair service should be performed by these skilled individuals. Failure to follow manufacturer’s or service personnel’s recommendations may result in serious injury. This chapter also includes a detailed component listing of the generator’s replaceable parts. WARNING! Before removing or opening any electrical power panels or covers, verify that the incoming power supply is turned OFF. In the event maintenance procedures require power to be supplied to the unit, extreme care MUST be exercised to insure the safety of service or other personnel in the area. Verify that the equipment is properly grounded before attempting any electrical operation. WARNING! Service/Support personnel must be qualified, having been trained in understanding and avoiding the electrical hazards of working on or near exposed energized parts. CAUTION! This equipment contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling components or printed circuit boards. DISPOSAL OF BATTERIES AND ACCUMULATORS (DIRECTIVE 2006/66/EC) In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end of life. The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury and Cd for cadmium). Users of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return, recycling, and treatment of batteries and accumulators. Participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances.


Revision W

5-3


SERVICE MAINTENANCE WARNING! Always disconnect the equipment from the main power supply prior to any cleaning. WARNING! STORED ENERGY (SE) systems have live high voltage present even with system powered off. Areas where high voltage is present includes the battery tray fuse holders, contactor K1, rectifier DB1, and Line Monitor/Battery Charger Board A8. To keep the HF Series X-ray Generator operating properly, it must be inspected and calibrated at regular intervals, depending on the age and use of the equipment. When there is a problem, call a Quantum Medical Imaging-recognized service technician. Do not operate equipment until all repairs are complete. Periodic planned maintenance is required to maintain the system in good working order and to insure operational reliability. It is recommended that the Service/ Support Technician be prepared with the standard tools and equipment required for the service call. Visual Inspection A complete series of inspections and functional checks was conducted at installation to insure proper operation of the system. The following inspection and adjustment procedures are recommended to maintain the system in its original operating condition. Perform Every Six Months: •

Check for evidence of loose hardware or loose wires

•

Conduct a general inspection for worn or damaged parts

•

Verify that all ground conductors are properly and securely installed and free of corrosion or damage

•

Check all electrical cabling and wiring for wear and fraying

•

Check for any indications of oil leaking from the H.V. Tank

Perform Every Twelve Months: •

Verify accuracy of kVp, mA, and filament calibrations and, if equipped, check AEC calibration (refer to Chapter 3, CALIBRATION)

Use the Reproducibility, Linearity, and Maximum Deviation data test procedures and Calibration Data Sheets provided at the end of Chapter 3, and verify that all calibrations are within specified tolerances as stated in Chapter 2, SPECIFICATIONS; this is required to demonstrate compliance. If the generator is interfaced to an external imaging system that is used as the generator’s operator control panel, (e.g., an Agfa NX Workstation

Revision W

5-4



integration or Canon DR Integration System), refer to accompanying service documentation provided with integration system for operator control panel FDA certification instructions. TROUBLESHOOTING This section is provided for technicians to assist in locating and correcting minor system faults, should they occur. When the unit will not expose, an audible alert will sound and one or more “warning" or “error code” message(s) will appear on the Operator Control Panel display. In the event the READY indicator on the operator control panel is not lit following an audible alert, pressing the PREP key will display an error message indicating the reason the system is not responding. Warning Messages Refer to the Operator’s manual for a list of system warning messages that do not require the attention of a service representative. These messages can be cleared by correcting the indicated problem (e.g., x-ray room door open) and then pressing any key on the operator control panel. Error Codes IMPORTANT NOTE: If the generator is interfaced to an external imaging system that is used as the generator’s operator control panel, (e.g., an Agfa NX Workstation integration or Canon DR Integration System), refer to accompanying service documentation provided with the integration system for a list of applicable error codes and remedial actions relevant to integration issues. Refer to the following descriptions for assistance in interpreting the error


Revision W

5-5


code displayed on the Operator Control Panel: Table 5-1. Error Messages and Possible Cause(s)

Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

READY LED blinking

Note: A brief period of blinking is normal when the unit is first turned on or following an exposure. 1. 400 V Not ready for exposure. 2. On stored energy (SE) units, batteries not ready for exposure (i.e., in charging mode). 3. Heat units are exceeded.

1. If blinking is continuous, verify the line voltage is high enough. (Check voltage across capacitor bank (C9C12 and C13-C16 on single-phase units, C1-C4 on SE units, or C9C12 and C13-C16 on three-phase units) to see if it is out of range (i.e., 380-420 VDC).) 2. Check AC input transformer tap adjustment for correct line voltage tapping. 3. Check for 24 VDC at Power Supply Board A6 (AY40-005T) +24 VDC test point. If +24 VDC not present, turn off generator and remove plug from Power Supply Board A6 (AY40-005T) connector J2 and re-check +24 VDC test point. If +24 VDC is present, something is loading down voltage.

Revision W

5-6



Table 5-1. Error Messages and Possible Cause(s)

Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

READY LED not illuminated

1. Generator Cabinet ON/OFF Circuit Breakre is OFF. 2. ON/STDBY Rocker Switch on OCP (non-Q-Connect Systems) or Power/Expose Control Box (Q-Connect Systems) is set to STDBY. 3. Facility electrical has been interrupted. 4. Filament automatically shuts off after 60 minutes of inactivity. 4. The exposure setting(s) exceed the tube or model limits. 5. Faulty communications between generator and OCP. 6. Incorrect generator program or generator is not working. 7. Lost communication between OCP and generator cabinet.

1.Verify that the ON/OFF Circuit Breaker on Generator is ON. 2. Set ON/STDBY Rocker Switch on OCP (non-Q-Connect Systems) or Power/Expose Control Box (QConnect Systems) to ON.

400 Volt Anode

See "Line/400V Anode" message

See "Line/400V Anode" message

400 Volt Cathode

See "Line/400V Cathode" message

See "Line/400V Cathode" message

AC Volt Diff

Output by Logic board, indicating a hardware failure when a significant difference between Anode and Cathode voltage is detected. Note: This error applicable on QConnect Systems only.

Proceed to "KVP Error" and troubleshoot accordingly.

ADC Negative 15

See "Minus 15V" message

See "Minus 15V" message

ADC Negative Reference

See "Vref-" message

See "Vref-" message


3. Check, and if possible, reset Facility electrical service. 4. Press PREP key. An error message displays on the operator control panel. Refer to appropriate error message listed in this table for error details. Press any key to clear error. System should now be ready for exposure. 5. Non-Q-Connect Systems only: Check serial cable connection between OCP and generator cabinet and jumper settings on OCP Control Board (AY40-004S1).

Revision W

5-7



Error Message

Remedial Action

ADC Positive 15

See "Plus 15V" message


ADC Positive 5



ADC Positive Reference

See "Vref+" message

See "Vref+" message

ADC Regulated Positive 24



ADC Unregulated Positive 24

See "V24 Brake" message

See "V24 Brake" message

AEC Not Installed

No AEC hardware present.

Check AEC cable is connected and/ or is not defective. Verify AEC Board is installed.

AEC No Bucky

AEC chamber not selected, or is not functioning properly.

Check operation of selected ion chamber.

Anode Heat or Housing Heat

Indicates that the tube maximum heat load capacity will be exceeded if exposure is taken at current exposure factors.

Reduce technique factor(s) and/or wait until tube cools sufficiently. Retake exposure.

Anode Volt

Indicates that there is a problem with the anode kVp circuit, high voltage transformer, or Power Driver Module. (Note: If the remedial actions given do not correct fault, refer to the "Cathode Volt" error message and perform applicable remedial actions.)

1. Visually inspect the Anode Power Driver Module A18 (on right side) for damage. 2. Check for output drive signal from KVP Control Board A2 as follows: Disconnect plug from A2J7 and A2J8. Connect oscilloscope probe (CHAN 1) to A2TP21 and CHAN 2 probe to A2TP22. Set oscilloscope time base to 5 µsec./div. and the vertical amplitude to 5V/div. Take an exposure. An "Anode Volt" error will display and the following waveform should be obtained:

Revision W

5-8

Possible Cause(s)




Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

APPROX. 1.2 MS DELAY

Anode Volt (Cont’d)


3. If waveform is correct, go to step 4. If not, replace KVP Control Board A2 and re-check drive signal as described in the previous step. If problem persists, replace Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S) and recheck. If still not corrected, check wiring.

Revision W

5-9



Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action 4. Re-connect cable plugs to connectors J7 and J8 on KVP Control Board A2. 5. On KVP Control Board A2, connect oscilloscope probe to A2TP1 (Anode Sense) and take an exposure. A short exposure and error message will occur. Waveform should be as shown below: The equivalent kV value should be approximately half the indicated kV value on OCP (e.g., 25 kV for 50 kV setting on OCP). If kV value is acceptable, check H.V. Transformer. If value is not correct, replace KVP Control Board A2 (may be faulty A/D Converter). If problem still exists, replace Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S).

Sample waveform above is with operator control panel set for 50 kVp, 200L mA, 100 ms. (Each volt measured represents 8.2 kV.) If spikes are present, this indicates arcing in either the x-ray tube or high voltage transformer.

Revision W

5-10




Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Anode Volt (Cont’d)

Remedial Action 6. Verify AC line voltage meets specification during an exposure: Check capacitor voltage (C9-C12 and C13-C16 on single-phase units, C1-C4 on SE units, or C9-C12 and C13-C16 on three-phase units) is between +350 and +440 VDC. The power must be sufficient to support the exposure (i.e., check for weak AC Line). 7. Verify that all grounds are good (JP2-JP9 installed or shorted on Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S)).

APR Tree Load Error {text string}

An error occurred while loading the APR tree. Note: {text string} will contain additional details.

Call Technical Service/Support.

Backup

Backup time was reached based on current technique factors.

1. Reduce technique factor(s). Retake exposure. 2. Verify ion chamber cable connections are correct and secure. 3. On AEC Control Board A11 (AY40-031S or AY40-027S), check +15 VDC and -15 VDC outputs are not loaded down. If so, remove ion chamber cable connection and recheck voltages. If +15 VDC and /or -15 VDC outputs are now good, ion chamber is at fault. If still loaded down, replace AEC Control Board. 4. Verify the Backup Time/mAs settings in APR view (if caused during APR mode) and/or Backup Time/ mAs in Service Settings configuration screen are set correctly (i.e., not too low).


Revision W

5-11



Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Battery Discharged

Faulty stored energy cell in top battery tray (Cathode on two tray systems) or Line Monitor/Charger board not adjusted correctly.

Battery 2 Discharged

Faulty stored energy cell in bottom battery tray (Anode on two tray systems) or Line Monitor/Charger board not adjusted correctly.

1.. Connect a DMM to Line Monitor/ Charger Board A8 AY40-028T test point TP2 and ground. Verify voltage is +204 to +206 VDC. If not, adjust A8R70 to obtain correct voltage. If voltage cannot be adjusted to correct value, replace Line Monitor/Charger Board A8. 2. Connect a DMM between Line Monitor/Charger Board A8 test point TP3 and ground. Verify voltage is -204 to -206 VDC. If not, adjust A8R66 to obtain correct voltage. If voltage cannot be adjusted to correct value, replace Line Monitor/Charger Board A8. 3. Check each stored energy cell in battery tray. Voltage of each cell should be 12.5 VDC minimum. If not, replace cell. 4. Check A8K1 and A8K3 operation as follows: Turn A8R19 and A8R60 fully counterclockwise. Verify voltages between A8TP20 and GND and A8TP21 and GND are less than 1.0 VAC. Turn A8R19 and A8R60 fully clockwise. Verify voltage between A8TP15 and GND and A8TP16 and GND are +283 VDC and -283 VDC, respectively. 5. Connect a DMM between A8TP21 and GND. Adjust A8R19 to measure +2.10 - +2.14 VDC. 6. Connect a DMM between A8TP20 and GND. Adjust A8R60 to measure +2.10 - +2.14 VDC.

Revision W

5-12




Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Line Monitor/Charger board not adjusted correctly.

1. Connect a DMM between Line Monitor/Charger Board AY40028T test point TP2 and ground. Verify voltage is +204 to +206 VDC. If not, adjust A8R70 to obtain correct voltage. If voltage cannot be adjusted to correct value, replace Line Monitor/ Charger Board A8. 2. Connect a DMM between test point TP3 and ground. Verify voltage is -204 to -206 VDC. If not, adjust A8R66 to obtain correct voltage. If voltage cannot be adjusted to correct value, replace Line Monitor/Charger Board A8.

Battery NotRdy

Battery voltage is too low. (This warning message applies only to stored energy generators.)

Wait until READY light on Operator Control Panel is steady before taking exposure.

Calibration

Generator kV, mA, and/or filament calibration settings are outside of acceptable limits for normal system operation.

Access Service Mode and perform kV, mA, and/or filament calibration.

Battery OverCharged Battery 2 OverCharged


Revision W

5-13



Error Message Cathode Volt

Revision W

5-14

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

The filtered cathode volts are outside of preset limits at any time. (Note: If the remedial actions given do not correct fault, refer to the "Anode Volt" error message and perform applicable remedial actions.)

1. Visually inspect the Cathode Power Driver Module A19 (on left side of cabinet) for damage. 2. Check for output drive signal from KVP Control board A2. Disconnect plug from A2J7 and A2J8. Connect oscilloscope probe (CHAN 1) to A2TP23 and CHAN 2 probe to A2TP24. Set oscilloscope time base to 5 µsec./div. and the vertical amplitude to 5V/div. Take an exposure. An error will occur and the same output drive waveform shown in the "Anode Volt" procedure on previous pages should be obtained. 3. If waveform is correct proceed with step 5. 4. If waveform is not as indicated, replace KVP Control Board A2 and re-check drive signal as described in previous step. If problem persists, replace Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S) and re-check. If still not corrected, check wiring. 5. Re-connect plugs into A2J7 and A2J8. 6. On KVP Control Board A2 (AY40003S), connect oscilloscope probe to TP2 (Cathode Sense) and take exposure. The same voltage output waveform shown in the "Anode Volt" procedure on previous pages should be obtained. 7. The equivalent kV value should be approximately half the indicated kV value on OCP. If kV value is acceptable, check H.V.Transformer. If kV value is not acceptable, perform steps 8 through 10.




Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Cathode Volt (Cont’d)

Remedial Action 8. AC line voltage is out of specification during an exposure. Check the capacitor (C9-C12 and C13C16 on single-phase units, C1-C4 on SE units, or C9-C12 and C13C16 on three-phase units) voltage is within range (i.e., 350 to 440 VDC). 9. Verify that all grounds are good (JP2-JP9 installed or shorted on Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S). 10. Verify that the power is sufficient to support the exposure (i.e., check for weak AC Line).

Collimator

Automatic collimator not responding (only appears on systems using an automatic collimator).

1. Positive beam limitation (PBL) circuit is open; check PBL cable connection between generator and table. 2. Verify jumper JP1 is not installed on Interface Board A9 (AY40023T).

Configuration Load Error {text string}

An error occurred while loading the configuration. Note: {text string} will contain additional details.


Door

Entrance door to x-ray room is open.

Verify x-ray room door is closed and re-take exposure.

Early Term

Exposure terminated prematurely because EXPOSE key was released before exposure was completed.

Press any key/button on Operator Control Panel to clear warning message. Re-take exposure.

Error - An error occured while loading a view. Please check the APR tree.

When trying to load a view's parameters an error occurred. This is typically because of an invalid APR tree (missing value or out-of-range value).

Load APR editor and fix {0} = Location i.e., generator, collimator, etc. {1} = AnatomicalRegion {2} = ViewName {3} More details about this error.


Revision W

5-15



Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Error Could not open file {text string}

There was a problem loading the selected APR tree. Note: {text string} will contain additional details.

1. Wrong file was selected. 2. File is corrupt.

Error Only one instance of the application can be run at a time.

Opening up of a second instance of the same program was attempted by the user.

Only one instance of the application can be run at a time.

Expose WDT

Exposure sequence disabled due to loss of communication with EXPOSE watchdog timer.


Exposure Lock

The CR/DR system is blocking the exposure for: 1. Trying to expose a body part that has already been exposed. 2. The CR/DR system is not in an acquisition mode.

1. Place the system in valid acquisition mode. 2. In case of Emergency, press URGENT button to override exposure lock.

Revision W

5-16




Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Filament Curr

Indicates a problem with the filament control regulator circuit voltage.

1. Access Service Configuration menu and verify the correct tube is selected. 2. Check for +48 VDC on Power Supply Board A6 (AY40-005T) TP3. 3. Check that Fuse F1 on Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T) is not open. If so, replace F1. 4. On Filament Control Board A5 (AY40-007T), verify fuse F1 is not open. If so, replace F1. (If fuse blows again after replacement, replace Filament Control Board A5. 5. Connect DMM to TP11 on Filament Control Board A5 and ground. With system on, the meter should measure +24 VDC. Select a small filament mA station and press PREP. The meter should measure 0 VDC. If either of these tests fail, replace Filament Control Board A5. 6. If none of the above steps solve the problem, replace KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S). 7. If replacing KVP Control Board does not correct problem, replace Filament Control Board A5 (AY40007T). 8. If replacing Filament Control Board does not correct problem, replace Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S).

Filament Prog

The filtered Filament Amps are outside of preset limits at any time. Indicates that there is a problem with either: 1. D-A circuit on the KVP Control Board A2. 2. Filament Control Board A5 (AY40-007T) regulator A-D.

1. Verify -15 VDC at TP5 on Power Supply Board A6 (AY40-005T). 2. Replace KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S). 3. Check fuse F8 on Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T). 4. Check for loose connector A6P2. 5. Replace Filament Control Board A5 (AY40-007T).


Revision W

5-17



Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Filament Too Low

The OCP sent a request to the Generator to set a PREP value that is too low.

1. Verify that the tube selected in the Service / Config / Tube is that which is physically installed in system. 2. Make sure that Filament Calibration has been completed correctly. 3. Verify that "Reset Tube" has been selected when exiting the Select Tube screen. 4. Verify that the filament is working. If it is not, go through the troubleshooting steps of "Filament Curr" error.

Flash

Flash memory returned incorrect checksum.

Check A16U2. Call Technical Service/Support.

Flash Not Loaded

1. Flash Memory (U2) on OCP Control Board A16 (AY40004S1) not loaded with program that corresponds with the version of the Microcontroller program in the OCP. 2. Flash Memory is experiencing a read problem. (The Flash is continuously read during operation and an error displayed if checksums or versions are not correct.)

1. Verify version of the OCP Control Board microcontroller U2 software is correct by looking at the label on U2. A method of checking the installed software versions are accessing service mode menus Service / Reports / Checksums. The "Internal" and "External" versions must be the same and checksums valid or many functions (such as PREP and EXPOSE) are inhibited. 2. A16A1U2 may be damaged replace OCP Control Board.

Revision W

5-18




Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Generator Comms

Operator Control Console lost communication with generator cabinet. Can be caused by: 1. Faulty or improperly installed OCP Serial Cable 2. Non-Q-Connect Systems only: Improperly configured jumpers on OCP Control Board A16 (AY40-004S1) or Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S) 3. Failed transceivers on A1 and/ or A16 boards. 4. Logic Board A1 microprocessor A1U9 faulty, not properly seated in socket, or loaded with incorrect program.

Non-Q-Connect Systems only: On OCP Control Board A16 (AY40004S1), connect oscilloscope to test point TP2. With system turned on and idling, verify waveform is as shown below. There should be a set of two pulses approximately every second. The first pulse is sent from the OCP Control Board to the Logic Board. The second pulse is sent by the Logic Board to the OCP Control Board in response to the first pulse. If only one pulse is present, connect oscilloscope to test point TP8 on Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S). If no pulse is present, OCP Serial Cable is faulty or not connected properly. Note: Verify jumpers A16JP1, A16JP4, A16JP10, and A16JP11 are installed on OCP Control Board.

5. +5 VDC supply to Logic Board A1 too low.

Using DMM, measure dc voltage at test point A1TP1. If less than +5 VDC, check for blown fuse F8 on Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T). Replace fuse if necessary.


Revision W

5-19



Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Generator Limit

PREP was pressed while a combination of the selected parameters is outside of the limits of the generator model or tube type.

1. Verify the KW (kV x mA) does not exceed the rating of the generator. 2. Verify the selected mAs does not exceed the rating of the generator. 3. Verify the tube can support the kV, mA, and/or time selected.

Generator Unhandled

The Error Code from the Generator Logic Board Master was not recognized.

1. Restart the System by cycling the rocker switch mounted to the Power/Expose Control Box. 2. If the error persists, contact Service Department.

Generator Not Ready

1. Generator entered Filament low voltage state due to no operator activity for over 60 minutes. 2. Failed communication between generator cabinet and operator control panel. 3. Wrong program loaded into OCP Control Board A16U3.

1. Press any key other than EXPOSE or PREP, then retry exposure. 2. Check that serial cable between OCP and generator cabinet is properly connected. 3. Verify correct microcontroller program has been loaded into OCP Control Board A16U3. 4. Allow batteries to re-charge.

4. On stored energy (SE) generators, the batteries have not recharged to 400 VDC. Heat Alarm

Preempts exposure when setting will cause tube to overheat.

Allow system to cool until tube heat returns to allowable level.

Heat Limit

Preempts exposure when setting will cause tube to overheat.

Allow system to cool until tube heat returns to allowable level.

Hold Button

Exposure terminated prematurely because the EXPOSE or PREP key was released before exposure was completed.

Re-take exposure making sure EXPOSE/PREP key is pressed continuously throughout entire duration of exposure.

HSS Detected

A High Speed Starter has been detected when none is selected.

If High Speed starter is connected to generator, change setting in Service / Config / Rotor to a HSS setting ("QMI HSS" or "AID HSS").

Revision W

5-20




Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Invalid AEC Exposure Value

Improper AEC calibration.

Re-calibrate AEC.

Invalid AEC License

1. System is not configured with AEC option. 2. The AEC license is not active

1. Check AEC configuration settings are correct. 2. Call Technical Service/Support.

Invalid License Invalid base license. System Key: {text string}

Invalid Q-Vision license. Note: {text string} will contain additional details.


Invalid License File not found. System Key: {text string}

Q-Vision license file missing. Note: {text string} will contain additional details.


Invalid Boost Time Exposure Value

The database is corrupt.


Invalid Break Time Exposure Value

The database is corrupt.


Invalid Digital License

The Digital License is not active.



Revision W

5-21



Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Invalid Filament Exposure Value

Improper Calibration.

Re-calibrate filament.

Invalid Film Screen Selected

The Film Screen is not calibrated.

Calibrate selected Film Screen, or change Film Screen selection.

Invalid Generator button

1. Generator iButton is not installed. 2. Generator improperly read data from iButton.

1. Verify that iButton is installed 2. Restart the System by cycling the rocker switch mounted to the Power/Expose Control Box. Call Technical Service/Support.

Invalid Generator Model License Invalid HSS License

1. System is not configured with high-speed starter. 2. The HSS license is not active.

1. Check rotor configuration settings are correct. 2. Call Technical Service/Support.

Invalid Ion Chamber Selected

The AEC mode of operation is selected, while the NONE receptor is active.

Select the WALL or TABLE receptor.

Invalid KVP Exposure Value

Improper calibration.

Re-calibrate system.

Invalid MA Exposure Value

Improper calibration.


Invalid Receptor

1. Improper calibration. 2. Corrupt database.


Invalid Time Exposure Value

1. Improper calibration. 2. Corrupt database.


Revision W

5-22




Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Keybrd

Indicates a key on the Front Panel is stuck on.

1. Verify a switch on the keyboard was not accidentally depressed during power up. 2.Check connection between OCP Control Board A16A1 (AY40004S1) and Front Panel Overlay (flat green cable). 3. Replace Front Panel. If front panel replacement doesn't correct problem, then replace OCP Control Board A16A1.

KVP Error

1. The anode and cathode KV are sufficiently different to cause an error.

1. On KVP Control Board A2 (AY40003S), check the difference between the Anode (TP1) and Cathode (TP2) to determine if difference exists during an exposure. 2. If anode (A2TP1) or cathode (A2TP2) are above program voltage by 15% (1V=8.2 kVp), replace KVP Control Board A2. If problem persists, replace H.V. Transformer A17, x-ray tube, or high-voltage cables. 3. Refer to "Generator Comms" error message for troubleshooting and correcting communications problems.

2. The anode or cathode voltage sense is exceeding 15% of program voltage.

3. Non-Q-Connect Systems only: Communication between OCP Control Board A16 (AY40004S1) and Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S) was interrupted. 4. Arc in system (H.V. Transformer, x-ray tube, or high-voltage cables). 5. Faulty/missing J1 connection on KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S). 6. Failure of +5V, +15V, -15V or +18V supply voltages.


4. Replace H.V. Transformer A17, xray tube, or high-voltage cables. 5. Check all connections on KVP Control Board A2. 6. Check voltages at A2TP8 (+5V) and A2TP9 (+18V). If not present, replace KVP Control Board A2. Check voltages at A2TP3 (+15V) and A2TP5 (-15V). If not present, replace Power Supply Board A6 (AY40-005T).

Revision W

5-23



Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

KVP Volts

Indicates the exposure kVp voltage is out of range.


LBMast Micro

Logic Board master microprocessor A1U9 returned incorrect checksum.

Check A1U9. Call Technical Service/ Support.

LBSlave Micro

Logic Board slave microprocessor A1U10 returned incorrect checksum.


Revision W

5-24




Error Message Line/400V Anode

Possible Cause(s) Missing or incorrect anode sensing voltage (Vsense A) value returned.


Remedial Action 1. Access Service Mode>Calibration>AD Calibration menu. Verify +400V Anode voltage is within tolerance per Table 3-8 (non-Q-Bus Systems) or Table B-3 (DiRex Systems) or Table D-1 (all other Q-Bus Systems). If not, calibrate in accordance with "A/D Calibration Procedure" in Chapter 3 (non-QBus Systems) or Appendix B (DiRex Systems) or Appendix D (all other Q-Bus Systems). 2. The input voltage is not selected correctly at terminal block TB1 (refer to Chapter 2, Assembly & Installation for details). 3. Using a DMM, measure the dc voltage across the (+) and (-) terminals of the Anode DC capacitor bank (i.e., C13-C16 on non-stored energy (SE) systems, and C9-C11 on SE systems). The voltage should be between 355-440 VDC. If not, check for open fuses F1 and F2 (mounted on inside front edge of generator chassis). 4. If voltage across Anode DC capacitors is within range, measure voltage from (+) terminal to chassis ground, then from (-) terminal to ground. The measured voltage for each should be one-half the value measured in previous step. If not, check incoming line voltage at TB2 (TB1 on SE units).

Revision W

5-25



Error Message Line/400V Anode (Cont’d)

Revision W

5-26

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action 5. Disconnect J2 on Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S). Using DMM, measure voltage across A1J2-1 (VSENSE signal) and A1J2-3 (ground). Voltage should be 0.01 times the voltage across Anode DC capacitor bank (±3%). If not, check voltage at U1-7 on Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-022T). 6. If this voltage is also out of range (i.e., not equal to 0.01 times the voltage across the Anode DC capacitor bank (±5%)), replace the Line Monitor Board. 7. If the voltage at A8U2-7 is within range, plug in A1J2 and check the voltage at A1U14-33 (SLAVE microprocessor), The voltage should be 0.01 times the voltage across the Anode DC capacitor bank (±5%). If the voltage is within range, replace A1U14. If out of range, replace the Line Monitor Board. 8. Rectifier DB1 (and/or DB2 on twopower module systems) is damaged. 9. On SE units, the Line Monitor/ Source Charger board (AY40028T) is not working properly.




Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Line/400V Cathode

Missing or incorrect cathode sensing voltage (Vsense C) value returned.

1. Access Service Mode>Calibration>AD Calibration menu. Verify +400V Cathode voltage is within tolerance per Table 3-8 (non-QBus Systems) or Table B-3 (DiRex Systems) or Table D-1 (all other QBus Systems). If not, calibrate in accordance with "A/D Calibration Procedure" in Chapter 3 (non-QBus Systems) or Appendix B (DiRex Systems) or Appendix D (all other Q-Bus Systems). 2. Using a DMM, measure the dc voltage across the (+) and (-) terminals of the Cathode DC capacitor bank (i.e., C9-C12 on non-stored energy (SE) systems, and C9-C11 on SE systems). The voltage should be between 355-440 VDC. If not, check for open fuses F1 and F2 (mounted on inside front edge of generator chassis). 3. If voltage across Cathode DC capacitors is within range, measure the voltage from the (+) terminal to chassis ground and then from the (-) terminal to ground. The measured voltage for each should be one-half the value measured in the previous step. If not, check incoming line voltage at TB2 (TB1 on SE units).


Revision W

5-27



Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Line/400V Cathode (Cont’d)

Remedial Action 4. Disconnect J2 on Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S). Using a DMM, measure the voltage at A1J2-2 (VSENSE signal) and A1J2-3 (ground). The voltage should be 0.01 times the voltage across the Cathode DC capacitor bank (±3%). If not, check the voltage at U2-7 on Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-022T). 5. If this voltage is also out of range (i.e., not equal to 0.01 times the voltage across the Cathode DC capacitor bank (±5% for single phase units, ±10% for threephase units)), replace the Line Monitor Board. 6. If the voltage at A8U2-7 is within range, plug in A1J2 and check the voltage at A1U14-34 (SLAVE Microprocessor), The voltage should be 0.01 times the voltage across the Cathode DC capacitor bank (±5% for single phase units, ±10% for three-phase units). If the voltage is within range, replace A1U14. If out of range, replace the Line Monitor Board. 7. Rectifier DB1 (and/or DB2 on twopower module systems) is damaged. 8. On SE units, the voltage on second battery tray is not charging properly, and therefore, the voltage is out of range.

Load Configuration

Cable connections with Generator check out, but configuration data is corrupt.

1. Power Generator OFF then ON. 2. Use Backup Configuration.

Long Prep

PREP time exceeded the eighteen-seconds limit.

Press any key on the Operator Control Panel to clear warning message. Re-take exposure.

Revision W

5-28




Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Lost Expose

Exposure sequence disabled due to missing EXPOSE hardware line or the EXPOSE switch was lifted during an exposure.

1. Verify the EXPOSE switch remains pressed throughout entire exposure. 2. On Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S), monitor U4 pin 2 to determine if the expose signal is present during expose (should stay active low during exposure cycle). If not, replace Logic Board. 3. Replace KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S).

Lost Prep

Exposure sequence disabled due to missing PREP hardware line or PREP signal interruption during PREP cycle.

1. Verify PREP button remains depressed during entire PREP cycle. 2. On Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S) test point TP4, check for less than 1 V during PREP and Exposure. If not, replace OCP Control Board A16A1 (AY40-004S1). 3. If problem persists, then replace Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S).


Revision W

5-29



Error Message MA Current

Revision W

5-30

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Indicates the exposure mA current is out of range.

1. Verify that generator is properly calibrated. 2. Check if current on standby is approximately 2.5 amps. If not, replace KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S). If problem persists, replace Filament Control Board A5 (AY40-007T). Replace Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S) if problem is still not corrected. 3. On KVP Control Board A2, connect oscilloscope probe to test point A2TP7 to verify correct tube current waveform. The current waveform should indicate 1V/100 mA. If waveform is close to mA setting, re-calibrate generator. If waveform is zero, replace KVP Control Board A2. If problem persists, replace H.V. Transformer A17 (AY20-031 on 125 kVp system, or AY20-032 on 150 kVp system).




Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Minus 15V

Missing or incorrect -15 VDC supply voltage.

1. Access Service Mode>Calibration>AD Calibration menu. Verify -15VDC voltage is within tolerance per Table 3-8. If not, calibrate in accordance with "A/D Calibration Procedure" in Chapter 3. 2. Check for -15 VDC (±10%) on Power Supply Board A6 (AY40005T) test point TP5. If 0 VDC, check fuse F2 on Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T). If F2 is open, replace fuse. If there still is no -15 VDC at A6TP5, replace Power Supply Board. 3. If voltage at A6TP5 is not 0 VDC, but is too low, check if another board is shorting the -15 VDC output. Disconnect output cable A6J2 and measure voltage at A6TP5. If within range, check other boards for shorts. If not within range, replace Power Supply Board.

Model Limits

PREP was pressed while a combination of the selected parameters is outside of the limits of the generator model or tube type.

1. Verify the KW (kV x mA) does not exceed the rating of the generator. 2. Verify the selected mAs does not exceed the rating of the generator. 3. Verify the tube can support the kV, mA, and/or time selected.

No AEC Field Selected

AEC operating mode is selected, but no AEC Field is Selected.

Select the appropriate AEC Field(s) for the examination.


Revision W

5-31



Error Message No HSS Connected

Possible Cause(s) No High Speed Starter detected when selected

Remedial Action 1. If system is non-high speed starter configuration (i.e., no high speed starter is installed), verify the rotor selected in the Service/Config/ Rotor is not set to "AID HSS" or "QMI HSS". If so, change to correct setting. 2. Verify High Speed Starter is properly connected. If equipped with QMI internal high speed starter, verify following connections are good: • J2-8 on HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S) and J8-8 on Logic Board A1 (AY40006S) • J2-9 on HSS Control Board A20A1 and J8-9 on Logic Board A1

No HV

High-Voltage transformer or Power Module not functioning properly.


No Universal Equipped

AUX receptor selected, but Generator is not equipped with Universal Option.

Select the WALL or TABLE receptor or NONE.

Not Rotating Systems without a high-speed starter:

Revision W

5-32




Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Tube rotor or generator rotor drive not functioning properly.

1. Check boost and run voltages: Connect DVM across Rotor Drive Board A10 (AY40-013T) terminals TB1-1 and TB1-3. Press PREP. Boost voltage should read 183-227 or 110-130 VAC, run voltage should read 54-66 VAC. If not, check for open fuse F7 on Interface Board A9 AY40-023T (or AY40-034T). If F7 is good, replace Rotor Drive Board A10. 2. Check for correct adjustment of Rotor Drive Board A10 potentiometers R20 and R24 as described in in the "Rotor Drive Board A10 (AY40-013T) Adjustment procedure in Chapter 2, ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION.

Not Rotating Systems equipped with AID External High-Speed Starter: Tube rotor or high-speed starter (HSS) unit not functioning properly.


1. Remove HSS cover and check error code display for error indication. Refer to HSS manufacturer’s documentation for error analysis instructions. 2. Verify jumper JP6 is installed on Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S). 3. Check rotor cable connection between tube and high speed starter unit.

Revision W

5-33



Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Not Rotating Systems equipped with a QMI Internal High-Speed Starter: 1. Wrong system configuration.

1. Access the Service Menu>Configuration screen and set the Rotor Type to "QMI HSS". Check if jumper JP1 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) is installed. If not, install it.

2. Faulty HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S).

2. Using oscilloscope, observe the following signals on HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S) (Note: Synchronize the trigger on CH1 when it is falling.): • CH1 - connect to U7-16 and GND • CH2 - connect to TP19 and GND • CH3 - connect to TP14 and GND Press PREP. Verify during PREP the signal on TP19 is 0 Volts (low) and TP14 is oscillating all the time. If TP19 is oscillating, replace HSS Control Board A20A1.

Revision W

5-34




Error Message Not Rotating (Cont’d)

Possible Cause(s) 3. Blown Fuse and/or IGBT on HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S).

Remedial Action 3. Verify blown fuse as follows: a. Power off the Generator. WARNING! Wait at least five minutes for capacitors to discharge. Verify voltage is discharged. b. Unplug TB1 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S). c. Using ohmmeter, check if fuses F1, F3 and F4 are open. If a fuse is blown, do the following: a. On HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S), short TP19 to TP1. b. Connect oscilloscope leads to the following test points on HSS Driver Board A20A2: U4-7 and TP16 U1-7 and TP17 U5-7 and TP16 U3-7 and TP18 c. Turn on the generator. Press PREP and capture waveforms on the oscilloscope. d. The gate pulses should be between 12-14 volts on each channel. If not, replace HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40036S). Otherwise, replace blown fuse(s).


Revision W

5-35



Error Message Not Rotating (Cont’d)

Revision W

5-36

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

4. Faulty connection between HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S) and HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S).

4. Verify following cable connections are good: a. AY51-146 check: On HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40036S), connect oscilloscope leads between test points TP1 and TP10 and between TP5 and TP10. Press PREP and check the signals. If there are no signals, check the AY51-146 cable connection between J3 on HSS Control Board A20A1 and J1 on HSS Driver Board A20A1. If signals are present and cable is good, replace HSS Control Board A20A1. b. AY51-131 check: Verify AY51131 cable between J5 on HSS Control Board A20A1 and J4 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 is good and connectors are properly seated. c. AY51-130 check: Verify AY51130 cable between J4 on HSS Control Board A20A1 and J2 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 is good and connectors are properly seated.

5. Faulty/improper connection at HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) TB1.

5. Verify connection of AC voltages on A20A2TB1 matches the Tube Type used (refer to Chapter 2, ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION for correct configuration). Check TB1 plug to ensure it is properly seated.

6. Faulty connection between HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) and Tube Rotor.

6. Verify wiring between TB4 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 and Tube Rotor is good. Correct if necessary.




Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

7. Faulty connection between HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) and Rotor Phase Capacitors.

7. Verify wiring between TB3 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 and Phase Capacitors is good. Correct if necessary.

8. Incorrect Rotor Phase Capacitor configuration for x-ray tube.

8. Verify Rotor Phase Capacitor configuration is correct (refer to Chapter 2, Assembly & Installation).

NVRam

Non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) returned incorrect checksum.


OCP Micro

Non-Q-Connect Systems only: Operator Control Panel microprocessor (A16U3) returned incorrect checksum.


Phase Missing

Hardware has detected that at least one phase of a three-phase generator is not present.

1. Check the connections to AutoTransformer T1 (settings are at terminal block TB2). 2. Verify the phases are available from the utility service by measuring with volt-meter. 3. If above are satisfactory, replace Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40022T2).

Please Wait

Exposure attempted while System was not ready (no READY Icon displayed).

Allow more time for System to reach its ready state (READY icon displayed on Overlay). Note: Maximum of two high-speed starts per minute are permitted.

Not Rotating (Cont’d)


Revision W

5-37



Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Plus 15V

Missing or incorrect +15 VDC supply voltage.

1. Access Service Mode>Calibration>AD Calibration menu. Verify +15 VDC voltage is within tolerance per Table 3-8. If not, calibrate in accordance with "A/D Calibration Procedure" in Chapter 3. 2. Check for +15 VDC (±10%) on Power Supply Board A6 (AY40005T) test point TP10. If 0 VDC, check fuse F3 on Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T). If F3 is open, replace fuse. If there still is no +15 VDC at A6TP10, replace Power Supply Board. 3. If voltage at A6TP10 is not 0 VDC, but is too low, check if another board is shorting the +15 VDC output. Disconnect output cable A6J2 and measure voltage at A6TP10. If within range, check other boards for shorts. If not within range, replace Power Supply Board.

Plus 24V


1. Access Service Mode>Calibration>AD Calibration menu. Verify +24 VDC voltage is within tolerance per Table 3-8. If not, calibrate in accordance with "A/D Calibration Procedure" in Chapter 3. 2. Check for +24 VDC (±10%) on Power Supply Board A6 (AY40005T) test point TP8. If 0 VDC, check fuse F4 on Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T). If F4 is open, replace fuse. If there still is no +24 VDC at A6TP8, replace Power Supply Board.

Revision W

5-38




Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Plus 24V (Cont’d)

Remedial Action 3. If voltage at A6TP8 is not 0 VDC, but is too low, check if another board is shorting the +24 VDC output. Disconnect output cable A6J2 and measure voltage at A6TP8. If within range, check other boards for shorts. If not within range, replace Power Supply Board.

Plus 5V


1. Access Service Mode>Calibration>AD Calibration menu. Verify +5 VDC voltage is within tolerance per Table 3-8. If not, calibrate in accordance with "A/D Calibration Procedure" in Chapter 3. 2. Check for +5 VDC (±10%) on Power Supply Board A6 (AY40005T) test point TP1. If 0 VDC, check fuse F8 on Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T). If F8 is open, replace fuse. If there still is no +5 VDC at A6TP1, replace Power Supply Board. 3. If voltage at A6TP1 is not 0 VDC, but is too low, check if another board is shorting the +5 VDC output. Disconnect output cable A6J2 and measure voltage at A6TP1. If within range, check other boards for shorts. If not within range, replace Logic Board A1 (AY40006S).

Prep WDT

Exposure sequence disabled due to loss of communication with PREP watchdog timer.



Revision W

5-39



Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Receptor Not Ready

The signal on the Receptor Ready terminal of the Digital Interface Board A9 (AY40-034T) is not ready within 500 ms from the time PREP was initiated. This can be caused by: 1. PREP was initiated before the DR system could complete the image acquisition and processing cycle of the previously acquired image. 2. The DR system has malfunctioned. 3. The Digital Interface Board A9 (AY40-034T) has malfunctioned.

Rotor Current

(Note: This error is only applicable with QMI High-Speed Starter equipped systems) 1. Incorrect/no reference voltage on Control Board.

2. Incorrect overvoltage adjustment.

3. Faulty connection between HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) and Tube Rotor.

Revision W

5-40

Remedial Action

1. Wait until image acquisition and processing cycle is complete before attempting to re-expose. 2. Verify the digital receptor (DR) system is properly connected and is operating normally. 3. Replace the Digital Interface Board A9 (AY40-034T).

1. On HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S), measure voltage between test points TP17 and TP1(GND). Voltage measurement should read +5.00 ±0.02 VDC. If not, replace HSS Control Board A20A1. 2. On HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S), connect DVM between U20-7 and TP1(GND). Adjust potentiometer R48 for voltage measurement of 2.8 - 3.0 volts for small tubes (3") and 4.5 for large tubes (4"). If proper adjustment cannot be achieved, replace HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40035S). If voltage is still incorrect, replace tube. 3. Verify wiring between TB2 and TB4 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 and Tube Rotor is good. Correct if necessary.




Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Rotor Current (Cont’d)

4. Faulty connection between HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) and Rotor Phase Capacitors.

4. Verify wiring between TB3 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 and Phase Capacitors is good. Correct if necessary.

Rotor Overrun

Tube has been rotating for longer than 30 continuous seconds.

Set OCP power on/standby switch to standby; set ON/OFF circuit breaker on generator cabinet to OFF. Call Technical Service/Support.

Rotor Temp

Tube rotor is too hot. Tube thermal switch is activated. Systems equipped with a Standard Rotor (Non-High-Speed Starter): 1. Check if the tube’s temperature switch is open. If so, allow tube to cool for approximately 15-30 minutes. 2. After cooling, press PREP. If the error recurs, check the wiring from the tube to Rotor Drive Board A10 (AY40-013T), In particular, check connections to A10TB1-6 and A10TB1-7. 3. Connect a jumper wire between A10TB1-6 and A10TB1-7 and press PREP. If Rotor Temp error does not appear, check the rotor cable. 4. Check the temperature switch in the tube. The switch should be N.C. 5. Connect DMM to A10TP9. This test point should be logic low. If not, jumper this test point to ground and check if error message does not repeat. If it re-occurs, check connection A10J3-3 (orange wire) to Logic Board A1 connector J10-3. If this is good, replace the Logic Board.


Revision W

5-41



Error Message Rotor Temp (Cont’d)

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Systems equipped with a QMI Internal High-Speed Starter:

1. Check if the tube’s temperature switch is open. If so, allow tube to cool for approximately 15-30 minutes. 2. After cooling, press PREP. If the error recurs, proceed with next step. 3. Turn off generator. 4. On HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S), measure resistance between TB4-1 and TB4-2. If approximately 0 ohms, skip to step 6. If high impedance, wait 15-30 minutes until temperature of tube drops sufficiently. 5. If after cooling the problem persists, check the wiring connection between TB4 and the tube rotor temperature switch. If the connection is correct, verify tube thermal switch operation. 6. If wiring and tube thermal switch are good, check resistance across F5. If approximately 0 ohms, go to next step, otherwise change the fuse and check wiring connection between tube and terminal blocks TB2 and TB4. 7. Check the wiring connection between J4 on HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S) and J2 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40036S) and the connection between J2 on HSS Control Board A20A1 and J8 on Logic Board A1 (AY40006S). If connections are good, call for Technical Service/Support.

Revision W

5-42




Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Save Configuration

Cable connections to Generator check out, but configuration data is corrupt.

1. Power Generator OFF then ON. 2. Use Backup Configuration.

Stuck Button

Button down at power-up.

1. Take finger off button 2. Check keyboard buttons for proper operation.


Revision W

5-43



Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Table Bucky

The table bucky has been selected but did not return the ready signal to start exposure. (This may take up to five seconds after exposure is requested.)

1. Verify the following did not occur: The "TABLE" receptor key on the OCP was selected on a system not equipped with a table receptor. 2. Check the bucky cable connections at both ends (i.e., Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T or AY40034T) terminal block TB3 and the table bucky). Refer to bucky interconnection diagrams contained in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS for proper wire connections. 3. On Interface Board A9, verify 120 VAC bucky power fuse F11 (2A, 250V slow-blow) is not open. 4. On Interface Board A9, check if switch SW1 is in correct position ("M" position if table is equipped with Midwest bucky, non-"M" position for all other type buckies). 5. Verify fuse in bucky is not open. Recycle bucky power by turning generator off, then on. If error still occurs, replace bucky control board. 6. On Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S), check for an active low signal at J4-4 during expose. If not present, replace Logic Board (including firmware). If present, check cable connection between Interface Board A9J6 and Logic Board A1J4. If connection is good, replace Interface Board.

Tube Limits

Backup time was reached based on current AEC technique factors exceeding exposure tube limits.

1. Modify technique factor(s) (e.g., reduce kVp). Re-take exposure. 2. Verify ion chamber cable connections are correct and secure.

Revision W

5-44




Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Uncalibrated Film Screen Selected

Film Screen never calibrated, or calibration data corrupt

Calibrate in accordance with instructions provided in Chapter 3 (non-QBus Systems) or Appendix B (DiRex Systems) or Appendix D (all other QBus Systems).

Unhandled Exception

An unknown error occurred.


V24 Brake

Missing or incorrect +24 VDC supply voltage (supplies voltage for operation of external equipment, e.g., tube stand, wall stand, etc.).

1. Access Service Mode>Calibration>AD Calibration menu. Verify +24V brake voltage is within tolerance per Table 3-8. If not, calibrate in accordance with "A/D Calibration Procedure" in Chapter 3. 2. Check for +24 VDC at TB7 on Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T). 3. Check fuse F9 on Interface Board A9. 4. If the above actions do not correct problem, replace Line Monitor Board A8.

Vref+

Missing or incorrect positive voltage reference (Vref+) value returned.


Vref-

Missing or incorrect positive voltage reference (Vref-) value returned.



Revision W

5-45



Error Message

Possible Cause(s)

Remedial Action

Wall Bucky

The wall bucky has been selected but did not return the READY signal to start exposure. (This may take up to five seconds after exposure is requested.)

1. Verify the following did not occur: The "WALL" receptor key on the OCP was selected on a system not equipped with a wall receptor. 2. Check the bucky cable connections at both ends (i.e., Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T or AY40034T) terminal block TB4 and the table bucky). Refer to bucky interconnection diagrams contained in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS for proper wire connections. 3. On Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T or AY40-034T), verify 120 VAC bucky power fuse F12 (2A, 250V slow-blow) is not open. 4. On Interface Board A9, check if switch SW1 is in correct position ("M" position if wall stand is equipped with Midwest bucky, non"M" position for all other type buckies). 5.Verify fuse in bucky is not open. Recycle bucky power by turning generator off, then on. If error still occurs, replace bucky control board. 6. On Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S), check for an active low signal at J4-5 during expose. If not present, replace Logic Board (including firmware). If present, check cable connection between Interface Board A9J6 and Logic Board A1J4. If connection is good, replace Interface Board.

Warning Using default APR tree

Occurs in conjunction with "APR Tree Load Error".

Because of a load error the default APR tree will be used. This WILL NOT overwrite the current APR tree if it exists. You will get this message until you fix the tree. Load APR editor and fix the tree.

Revision W

5-46




Error Message Warning Using default configuration

Possible Cause(s) Occurs in conjunction with "Configuration Load Error".


Remedial Action Because of a load error the default configration will be used. This overwrites the current configuration, if one exists.

Revision W

5-47


Optional +28 VDC Power Supply Troubleshooting The following steps apply only to systems equipped with the internallymounted +28 VDC Power Supply Option (QG-28VPS). The QG-28VPS provides a regulated +28 VDC output source to power peripheral x-ray equipment such as tube stands, wall stands, etc. If a problem with the power supply is suspected, proceed as follows: 1. Disconnect Power Supply QG-28VPS output wires at pins P2-1 and P2-2. 2. With the generator power turned on, measure the DC output across Power Supply QG-28VPS pins P2-1 and P2-2. It should measure between +26.5 and +27.5 VDC on systems intended for use with Quantum QW-420-T/-D wall stand, and between +29.5 and +30.5 VDC on systems intended for use with RS-580 Overhead Tube Crane. Adjust voltage output if necessary using potentiometer on power supply. 3. If no output exists at terminals P2-1 and P2-2, verify 220 VAC input to power supply at terminals P1-L and P1-N. If 220 VAC is present, replace power supply. 4. If no 220 VAC at power supply input, check for open Fuse F7 on Interface Board A9 (AY40-061T used on non-digital systems/ AY40-062T used on digital systems).

Revision W

5-48



SERVICE REPORTS The HF Series X-ray Generator provides a variety of service reports to assist the Service Technician in maintaining the proper operation of the system, and to help troubleshoot problems when they occur. The way in which Service Reports is accessed and the appearance of the Service Reports screens differ depending on the operator control panel configuration of the HF Series X-ray generator. There are three operator control panel configurations: •

ODYSSEY operator control panel

•

Q-VISION operator control panel

•

Workstation-based operator control panel (generator is integrated with either a digital radiography (DR) or computed radiography (CR) system)

Refer to the appropriate section that follows depending on the type operator control panel your system uses. Accessing Service Reports - ODYSSEY X-ray Generators The following instructions apply to ODYSSEY HF SeriesTM X-ray Generator systems. Service Reports are accessed as follows: 1. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 2. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position, then to the on (

) position.

3. The system begins the start up sequence ("Quantum Medical Imaging" is displayed and "Testing. Standby." is flashing). (See Figure 5-1.) 4. Within five seconds of start up, press the upper left field select key to access the Password menu. 5. In the Password menu, enter the default Service/Support Technician password (58623) using the field select keys next to the corresponding numbers.


Revision W

5-49


6. Upon validation of the password, the Service Mode Menu displays. Press the key next to the Reports field. The Service Reports Menu displays:

THIS KEY FOR FACTORY USE ONLY

Figure 5-1. Service Reports Menu The Service Reports Menu provides access to various types of system information. The following briefly describes the various Service Report Menu selections:

Revision W

5-50

•

Generator Report: Provides total exposure count, average kV and mA exposure settings, and the total time of all exposures taken on generator.

•

Last 100 Exposures Report: Provides a chronological listing of the last 100 exposures. Each exposure (event) can be viewed showing the time and date the exposure occurred, and the exposure settings (i.e., kVp, mA, time, AEC on/off status, and receptor selected). The Next Error and Previous Error keys are used to "scroll" up or down through the exposure report.

•

Tube Report: Provides total exposure count, average kV and mA exposure settings, and the total time of all exposures taken on currently installed x-ray tube.

•

Errors & Warnings Report: Provides a chronological listing of up to 100 error and/or warning messages. Each error or warning message (event) can be viewed showing the event name, the time and date the event occurred, and the exposure settings at the time the event occurred. The Next Error and Previous Error keys are used to "scroll" up or down through the exposure report.

•

Diagnostic: Not functional at time this manual was printed.

•

Checksums: Displays the software revision levels and checksums of OCP Control Board A16A1 (AY40-004S1) Microcontroller U3 (referred to as "Internal" program) and Flash Memory U2 ("External" program and "Database").



To select a report, press the key next to the report you want to view. Otherwise, press the key next to the Main field to return to the main Service Menu (see Figure 3-3). The following paragraphs provide detailed descriptions of each of the various report screen selections.


Revision W

5-51


Generator Reports

Figure 5-2. Generator Reports Screen The Generator Reports screen, shown above, provides the following information:

Revision W

5-52

•

Total Exposure (Expos.) Count - Indicates total number of exposures taken on generator

•

Average (Aver.) KV - Indicates mean KV value averaged over the total exposures taken on generator

•

Average (Aver.) MA - Indicates mean mA value averaged over the total exposures taken on generator

•

Total Expos. TIME - Indicates sum of exposure times (in seconds) of all exposures taken on generator



Tube Reports

Figure 5-3. Tube Reports Screen The Tube Reports screen, shown above, provides the following information: •

Total Exposure Count - Indicates total number of exposures taken with currently installed x-ray tube

•

Average (Aver.) KV - Indicates mean KV value averaged over the total exposures taken with currently installed x-ray tube

•

Average (Aver.) MA - Indicates mean mA value averaged over the total exposures taken with currently installed x-ray tube

•

Total Expos. SECS - Indicates sum of exposure times (in seconds) of all exposures taken with currently installed x-ray tube


Revision W

5-53


Events/Warnings Reports

PRESS THESE KEYS TO SCROLL UP/DOWN THROUGH EVENTS

EVENT TYPE

Figure 5-4. Event Reports Screen The Event Report screen, shown above, displays the most recent error or warning event that occurred on the system. The "event type" is displayed as shown in Figure 5-4 above, along with the exposure factors, time and date the event occurred. Pressing the key adjacent to the Previous Error field displays the Event Report of the event that occurred prior to the one currently displayed. Pressing the key adjacent to the Next Error field displays the Event Report of the error that occurred after the one currently displayed (i.e., the next most recent event). To return back to the main Service Menu, press the key next to Main field. The system retains up to 100 of the most recent Event Reports.

Revision W

5-54



Service Checksum Report INTERNAL/ EXTERNAL PROGRAMMED MEMORY VERSIONS INTERNAL/ EXTERNAL PROGRAMMED MEMORY CHECKSUMS

Figure 5-5. Service Checksum Report Screen The Service Checksum Report screen, shown above, lists the software revision levels and checksum values for the various programmed devices used in the generator and for the database loaded into OCP Data Memory. The OCP Microcontroller Board A16A1 contains flash memory that is loaded with the indicated versions (and checksums) of internal and external programs (in addition to that in the microcontroller) and databases. To return to the main Service Menu, press the key next to Main field.


Revision W

5-55


Accessing Service Reports - Q-VISION Operator Control Panel The following instructions apply to generators utilizing a Q-VISION operator control panel (OCP). The two types of service reports/utilities available on systems equipped with a Q-VISION OCP are: •

Statistics Report

•

Error Log Viewer utility

Below is a description of how each is accessed, and what information is provided in each report. Statistics Report 1. To gain access to the Generator Service programs, touch the Help button located on the lower right corner of the Q-VISION screen (shown on right). The Generator Help Services Screen (Figure 5-5a) appears:

Figure 5-5a. Generator Help Services Screen

Revision W

5-56



2. Touch the Login button at the lower left corner of the screen. A password entry keypad displays.

Figure 5-5b. Enter Password Screen 3. In the Enter Password screen, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the keypad, then select Enter. The word "Login" is replaced with "FieldTech" on the Generator Help Services screen to indicate successful login. 4. On the Generator Help Services screen, select Service option. The General Service Options Menu appears:

Figure 5-5c. General Service Options Menu


Revision W

5-57


5. Select Generator Service. The following screen appears:


Figure 5-5d. Generator Service Options Menu

Revision W

5-58



6. Select the Insight utility option. The "Insight" Service Utility Menu displays:

EXPANDERS

Figure 5-5e. Insight Service Utility Menu


Revision W

5-59


7. The Insight screen features seven expandable service utilities Receptor Info, Exposure Info, Lock Info, Direct Set, A/D Monitor, Statistics, and Exposure log - for viewing and, where applicable, changing settings of the Generator. Press the Statistics expander. The Statistics Screen displays:

Figure 5-5f. Statistics Screen The Statistics Screen provides access to various types of system information. The following briefly describes the various Statistics Screen selections:

Revision W

5-60

•

Exposure Count: Indicates total number of exposures taken on generator

•

Average KVP: provides mean KV value averaged over the total exposures taken on generator

•

Average mA: provides mean mA value averaged over the total exposures taken on generator

•

Average Time: provides the sum of exposure times (in seconds) of all exposures taken on generator



Events/Warnings Log Every time a significant action or event occurs in the generator, its occurrence is recorded in a special location on the Q-VISION computer known as a "log file". This includes normal operations as well as warnings and errors, because all may be useful in viewing normal system operation, as well as viewing abnormal (error) conditions. These errors and events may be useful to help diagnose problems. Hence, an event/warning log viewing utility, referred to as a "Log Viewer" is provided with Q-VISION equipped systems. To access the Log Viewer, proceed as follows: 1. Access the General Service Options menu as described in the previous Statistics Report procedure. In the General Service Options menu, select Log Viewer. The Log Viewer screen appears (see Figure 5-5g):

Figure 5-5g. Log Viewer Screen 2. The left column panes of the Log Viewer screen include filters that can be used to focus the Log Viewer contents by selecting particular programs to view (listed in the AppDomain pane), Log Files to view (items listed in the Logger pane), and/or by selecting particular events types (levels) to view (items listed in the Level pane). 3. To view only generator related error messages, select "Quantum.Generator.Master.MasterGenerator" in the Logger pane and select "ERROR" in the Level pane, then touch Apply Filter button.


Revision W

5-61


4. The Log Viewer displays all generator error messages that have occurred (see Figure 5-5h).

Figure 5-5h. Log Viewer Screen - Filtered for Error Messages (Sample) 5. The Log Viewer lists error messages including the date and time stamp when each occurred. Touching the top of the DateTime column toggles the sorting of messages by date and time, from oldest to newest or newest to oldest; touching the top of the Message column toggles the sorting of messages alpha-numerically from A to Z or Z to A. 6. If the error messages extend out to multiple pages, touch the First button to advance directly to the first page; touch the Last button to advance directly to the last page; use the Last button to advance directly to the last page; touch the Previous button to advance to the previous page; touch the Next button to advance to the next page. 7. Touch the Back to Service button to return to the General Service Options Menu.

Revision W

5-62



Accessing Service Reports - Integrated X-ray Generators The following instructions apply to integrated X-ray generators. On integrated generator systems, as in the Agfa NX Workstation integration or the QG-DIG-CXDI Canon/Quantum Integration, the external imaging system’s workstation computer functions as the generator’s operator control panel. The following instructions describe how to access the Generator Statistics Screen on a DiRex integrated system, followed by instructions describing how to access the Generator Statistics Screen on a QG-DIG-CXDI Canon/ Quantum Integration System or Agfa NX-DR Series Integration System.


Revision W

5-63


DiRex Integrated System - Statistics Screen The Statistics Screen is accessed as follows: 1. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 2. Set the power on/standby switch on the Q-Connect Control Panel (OCP) to the standby ( ) position, then to the on ( The green power LED lamp should illuminate.

) position.

3. From the Main OCP Overlay Menu, double click the generator status icon. The "Enter Password" screen appears. 4. In the Enter Password screen, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the keypad, then press Enter. 5. Upon validation of the password, the Service Options Menu displays. Press the Generator Service button.

Figure 5-5i. Service Options Menu

Revision W

5-64



6. Press the Generator Service button. The Generator Service Menu appears:

Figure 5-5j. Generator Service Menu


Revision W

5-65


7. Press the Statistics button. The Statistics Screen displays:

Figure 5-5k. Statistics Screen The Statistics Screen provides access to various types of system information. The following briefly describes the various Statistics Screen selections:

Revision W

5-66

•


•


•


•




QG-DIG-CXDI Canon/Quantum and Agfa NX-DR Series Integration System - Statistics Screen The Statistics Screen is accessed as follows: 1.

To gain access to the Generator Service programs, right mouse click on the "Q" icon appearing on the Windows Task Bar (shown on right). The Generator Service Menu (Figure 5-5l) is displayed:

Figure 5-5l. Generator Service Options Menu


Revision W

5-67


2. Select the Insight utility option. The "Enter Password" screen appears.

Figure 5-5m. Enter Password Screen 3. In the Enter Password screen, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the keypad, then press Enter.

Revision W

5-68



4. Upon validation of the password, the "Insight" Service Utility Menu displays:

EXPANDERS

Figure 5-5n. Insight Service Utility Menu


Revision W

5-69


5. The Insight screen features seven expandable service utilities Receptor Info, Exposure Info, Lock Info, Direct Set, A/D Monitor, Statistics, and Exposure log - for viewing and, where applicable, changing settings of the Generator. Press the Statistics expander. The Statistics Screen displays:

Figure 5-5o. Statistics Screen The Statistics Screen provides access to various types of system information. The following briefly describes the various Statistics Screen selections:

Revision W

5-70

•


•


•


•




Events/Warnings Log An event/warning log viewing program (Log4View) is used to capture and view errors and other events that occur during use of the integrated X-ray generator (Digital Radiographic System integration), as with the DiRex System or a QG-DIG-CXDI Canon/Quantum Integration System. These errors and events may be useful to help diagnose problems. Log4View is a separate program that is accessible outside of the digital operations. Log4View is installed along with the DiRex, QG-DIG-CXDI Canon/Quantum integration, or NX-DR Quantum/Agfa software installation. It leaves an icon on the desktop that will allow the log to be viewed at any time. Every time any of the interrelated Quantum Programs that form the integration make a significant action, this is recorded in a file. This includes normal operations as well as warnings and errors because all may be useful in both viewing normal system operation, as well as abnormal (error) conditions. Refer to Appendix C, LOG4VIEW USER INSTRUCTIONS for details about using the Log4View application.


Revision W

5-71


REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES The following procedures provide step-by-step instructions for removal and replacement of the repairable components in the generator. WARNING! To prevent electrical shock hazards, make sure power is off and capacitors are discharged before proceeding with any removal/ replacement procedures. Generator Cabinet Cover Removal 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Loosen nine (9) screws that secure the Generator Cabinet Cover to the Generator Chassis. 4. Wait two minutes before removing the Generator Cabinet Cover to allow the Capacitor Bank to discharge. 5. Carefully slide the Generator Cabinet Cover up and away from the generator to prevent damaging the circuit boards on the generator front door. 6. Connect a DVM across the Capacitor Bank (C9-C11 on Models QG-20-SE, QG-32-SE, QG-40-SE and QG-50-SE; C9-C16 on all other models) to check that the capacitors are fully discharged. If they are fully discharged, it is safe to work on the generator. Generator Cabinet Cover Replacement 1. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 2. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

3. Carefully slide the Generator Cover down onto the Generator Chassis cover screws, taking care not to damage the circuit boards on the front door of the Generator. 4. Tighten the nine (9) cover screws to secure the Generator Cabinet Cover to the Generator Chassis.

Revision W

5-72



High Voltage (H.V.) A17 Tank Removal When removing H.V. Tank A17, keep tank upright at all times. Refer to Figure 2-11 and proceed as follows: 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Loosen nine (9) screws that secure the Generator Cabinet Cover to the Generator Chassis. 4. Wait two minutes before removing the Generator Cabinet Cover to allow the Capacitor Bank to discharge. 5. Carefully slide the Generator Cabinet Cover up and away from the generator to prevent damaging the circuit boards on the generator front door. 6. Connect a DVM across the positive and negative terminals of the DC Capacitor Bank(s) (C9-C11 on Models QG-20-SE, QG-32-SE, QG-40-SE and QG-50-SE; C9-C16 on all other models) to check that the capacitors are fully discharged. If they are fully discharged, it is safe to work on the generator. 7. When capacitors are fully discharged, remove the Plexiglas shield above the High Voltage Tank. 8. Loosen four (4) screws securing the clear plastic high-voltage acrylic protection panel from the generator chassis and remove panel. 9. Disconnect the anode and cathode high-voltage cables from the High Voltage Tank. 10. Disconnect the Feedback Connector A17P1 from High Voltage Tank connector A17J1. 11. Disconnect H.V. Tank cable PC1 from Power Module A19 lower right IGBT terminal. 12. Disconnect H.V. Tank cable PC2 from the right terminal on Capacitor C7. 13. Disconnect H.V. Tank cable PA1 from the left terminal on Capacitor C4. 14. Disconnect H.V. Tank cable PA2 from Power Module A18 lower left IGBT terminal. 15. Disconnect the yellow/green ground wires from the High Voltage Tank ground stud.


Revision W

5-73


16. Remove the four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/4" socket head cap screws, flat washers and lock washers securing the High Voltage Tank to Generator Chassis. 17. Carefully lift the High Voltage Tank out of the Generator Chassis. If the High Voltage Tank is to be shipped, be sure to tighten the vent screw in the front right corner of the tank. High Voltage (H.V.) Tank A17 Installation When installing H.V. Tank A17, keep tank upright at all times. Refer to Figure 2-10 and 2-11 and proceed as follows: WARNING! After completing the following procedure, double-check the H.V. Tank wiring connections to make sure they are correct. Incorrect wiring can cause damage to the generator. 1. Position H.V. Tanks on H.V. Tank Mounting Brackets so that mounting holes in H.V. Tank align with those in mounting brackets. Secure tank to brackets using four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/4" socket head cap screws, flat washers and lock washers. 2. Loosen the vent screw (located in the front right corner of the tank) two full turns. 3. Connect yellow/green ground wires to H.V. Tank ground stud (GND) using 8/32 kep nut and fasten securely. 4. Connect H.V. Tank cable PC1 to Power Module A19 lower right IGBT terminal. 5. Connect H.V. Tank cable PC2 to right terminal on Capacitor C7. 6. Connect H.V. Tank cable PA1 to the left terminal on Capacitor C4. 7. Connect H.V. Tank cable PA2 to Power Module A18 lower left IGBT terminal. 8. Plug Feedback connector A17P1 (16-pin connector on Cable Assembly AY51-017) into connector A17J1 on the H.V. Tank and tighten connector securely. 9. Connect the anode and cathode high-voltage cables to the High Voltage Tank. 10. Re-install the clear plastic high-voltage protection panel on the Generator Chassis and re-tighten four (4) mounting screws. 11. Carefully slide the Generator Cover down onto the Generator Chassis cover screws, taking care not to damage the circuit boards on the front door of the Generator. 12. Tighten the nine (9) cover screws to secure the Generator Cabinet Cover to the Generator Chassis.

Revision W

5-74



Power Modules A18 and A19 (P/N AY20-047) Removal

POWER MODULE A18

POWER MODULE A19

C7 C6

C3 C4

*C8

*C5

TERMINALS PC1, PC2

*NOTE: C5 AND C8 ONLY INSTALLED ON QG-65 AND QG-80 GENERATORS

TERMINALS PA1, PA2

H.V. TANK (TOP VIEW)

Figure 5-6. Power Module A18 and A19 Cable Connections 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Loosen nine (9) screws that secure the Generator Cabinet Cover to the Generator Chassis.


Revision W

5-75


4. Wait two minutes before removing the Generator Cover to allow the Capacitor Bank to discharge. 5. Carefully slide the Generator Cabinet Cover up and away from the generator to prevent damaging the circuit boards on the generator front door. 6. Connect a DVM across the DC Capacitor Bank (C9-C16) and verify the capacitors are fully discharged. 7. When capacitors are fully discharged, loosen four (4) screws securing the clear plastic high-voltage acrylic protection panel from the generator chassis and remove panel. 8. Disconnect anode and cathode high-voltage cables from High Voltage Tank. 9. To remove Power Module A18: a. Disconnect IGBT Driver Cable (P/N AY51-015) plug A18A3P5 from IGBT Drive Board A18A3 (P/N AY40-010T) connector J5. b. Disconnect H.V. Tank cable terminal PA2 from Power Module A18 IGBT lower left IGBT terminal. c.

Disconnect the two black jumper wires from Power Module A18 lower right IGBT terminal.

d. Tag and disconnect the red and black cables from Power Module A18 IGBT (+) and (-) bus bars. e. Remove the six (6) 8-32 x 1/4" screws that hold Power Module A18 to the rear wall of the Generator Chassis and remove Power Module. 10. To remove Power Module A19: a. Disconnect IGBT Driver Cable (P/N AY51-023) plug A19A3P5 from IGBT Drive Board A19A3 (P/N AY40-010T) connector J5. b. Disconnect H.V. Tank cable terminal PC1 from Power Module A19 lower right IGBT terminal. c.

Disconnect the two black jumper wires from Power Module A19 lower left IGBT terminal.

d. Tag and disconnect the red and black cables from Power Module A18 IGBT (+) and (-) bus bars. e. Remove the six (6) 8-32 x 1/4" screws that hold Power Module A19 to the back of the Generator Chassis and remove Power Module.

Revision W

5-76



Power Modules A18 and A19 (P/N AY20-047) Replacement 1. Replace Power Module A18 as follows: a. Install Power Module A18 by securing it to the back of the Generator Chassis using six (6) 8-32 x 1/4" screws. b. Remove tags and connect the red cable to IGBT (+) terminals and the black cable to IGBT (-) terminal on Power Module A18. c.

Connect two black jumper wires between Power Module A18 IGBT terminal and the left side lug of resonant capacitor C4.

d. Connect the IGBT Driver Cable (P/N AY51-015) plug A18A3P5 to IGBT Drive Board A18A3 (P/N AY40-010T) connector J5. e. Connect H.V. Tank cable terminal PA2 to Power Module A18 lower left IGBT terminal. 2. Replace Power Module A19 as follows: a. Install Power Module A19 by securing it to the back of the Generator Chassis using six (6) 8-32 x 1/4" screws. b. Remove tags and connect the red cable to IGBT (+) terminals and the black cable to IGBT (-) terminal on Power Module A19. c.

Connect two black jumper wires between Power Module A19 IGBT terminal and the right side lug of resonant capacitor C7.

d. Connect the IGBT Driver Cable (P/N AY51-023) plug A19A3P5 to IGBT Drive Board A19A3 (P/N AY40-010T) connector J5. e. Connect H.V. Tank cable terminal PC1 to Power Module A19 lower right IGBT terminal. 3. Re-install the clear plastic high-voltage protection panel on the Generator Chassis and re-tighten four (4) mounting screws. 4. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 5. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position. 6. Connect a DVM between the red and black cables on the IGBT and check that the voltage is between 380 VDC and 420 VDC. 7. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

8. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position.


Revision W

5-77


9. Carefully slide the Generator Cover down onto the Generator Chassis cover screws, taking care not to damage the circuit boards on the front door of the Generator. 10. Tighten the nine (9) cover screws to secure the Generator Cabinet Cover to the Generator Chassis. Logic Board A1 (P/N AY40-006S) Removal CAUTION! The Logic Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Logic Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Tag and remove all cables connected to Logic Board A1. 4. If the generator is equipped with Q-Connect option, perform the following additional steps: a. Tag and remove ethernet cables connected to OCP Interface Board A1A1 (AY40-073S) connectors J1 and J5. b. Remove one (1) screw and two (2) hex nuts securing the OCP Interface Board A1A1 to Logic Board A1 and remove OCP Interface Board. c.

Note the locations of three (3) OCP Interface Board A1A1 mounting standoffs on Logic Board A1, then remove standoffs from Logic Board A1. Retain standoffs for reassembly.

5. Carefully remove Logic Slave IC U14 and Logic Master IC U9 from Logic Board A1 using a chip puller. Retain IC’s for re-installation into replacement board. 6. Remove screws securing Logic Board A1 to the PCB Door and remove the Logic Board. Logic Board A1 (P/N AY40-006S) Replacement CAUTION! The Logic Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Logic Board or any other circuit board. 1. Place the new Logic Board A1 on standoffs in PCB Door and secure using four (4) screws. 2. If the generator is equipped with Q-Connect option, perform the following additional steps:

Revision W

5-78



a. Install three (3) OCP Interface Board A1A1 mounting standoffs on Logic Board A1 in same locations from which they were removed. b. Place the OCP Interface Board A1A1 on mounting standoffs and secure using one (1) screw and two (2) hex nuts. c.

Connect ethernet cables to the OCP Interface Board A1A1 connectors J1 and J5.

3. Connect all cables to Logic Board A1. Remove tags.

Note: When installing IC's, ensure that pin one on the chip is aligned correctly with pin 1 on the IC socket mounted on the board. Do not use software label to orient IC! 4. Insert Logic Master IC U9 (marked "QLBM") into U9 socket on Logic Board A1. 5. Insert the Logic Slave IC U14 (marked "QLBS") into U14 socket on Logic Board A1. 6. On Logic Boards revision G and higher, verify jumpers JP1, JP6, and JP7 are configured as follows: a. Jumper JP1 - must always be installed b. Jumper JP6 - installed only if system is equipped with highspeed starter (QG-HSS) option. Do not install on standard, single-speed rotor systems (i.e., systems equipped with Rotor Drive Board A10 AY40-013T). c.

Jumper JP7 - install jumper on pins 2-3

7. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 8. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position. 9. Verify generator passes startup self-tests. 10. Access Service Mode, Service Configuration and Settings screens, and verify generator configuration settings are correct. 11. Access Service Mode, AD Calibration screen. Verify all voltages are within tolerance. If not, calibrate in accordance with "A/D Calibration Procedure" in Chapter 3 (ODYSSEY) or Appendix B (DiRex Integration generators), or Appendix D (all other integrated generators). 12. Spot check kVp and mA calibration and, if needed, re-calibrate system.


Revision W

5-79


KVP Control Board A2 (P/N AY40-003S) Removal CAUTION! The KVP Control Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the KVP Control Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Tag and remove all cables connected to KVP Control Board A2. 4. Remove four (4) screws securing KVP Control Board A2 to the PCB Door and remove the KVP Control Board. KVP Control Board A2 (P/N AY40-003S) Replacement CAUTION! The KVP Control Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the KVP Control Board or any other circuit board. 1. Verify jumper JP1 on the new KVP Control Board A2 is configured correctly in accordance with the number of power modules used on the system. That is, for single power module systems, install a jumper between pins 2 and 3 of A2JP1 (or solder pins 2 and 3 together). For two power module systems, install a jumper between pins 1 and 2 on A2JP1 (or solder pins 1 and 2 together). 2. Place the new KVP Control Board A2 on standoffs in PCB Door and secure using four (4) screws. 3. Connect all cables to KVP Control Board A2. Remove tags. 4. Before closing the Operator Control Panel, verify that the OCP works properly. 5. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 6. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position. 7. Connect an oscilloscope probe to KVP Control Board A2TP21 and another probe to A2TP22. Set the oscilloscope time base to 5 µsec./div. and the vertical amplitude to 5V/div. 8. Remove plugs from connectors A2J7 (anode) and A2J8 (cathode) on KVP Control Board A2. Connect A2TP26 to ground.

Revision W

5-80



9. Press the EXPOSE key. Verify the pulses at each test point are 5.5 µsec. wide and the rising edges of the pulses at A2TP21 are 12 µsec. from the rising edges of the pulses at A2TP22 (see Figure 5-10 for correct waveforms).

APPROX. 1.2 MS DELAY

Figure 5-7. KVP Control Board A2TP21 and A2TP22/A2TP23 and A2TP24 Waveforms 10. If the time between the pulses is not 12 µsec., adjust the oscilloscope time base to 0.5 µsec./div. and adjust Anode Output Potentiometer A2R3 to obtain 12.0 ±0.1 µsec. 11. Move oscilloscope probes to A2TP23 and A2TP24. 12. Press the EXPOSE key. Verify the pulses at each test point are 5.5 µsec. wide and the rising edge of the pulses at A2TP23 are 12 µsec. from the rising edges of the pulses at A2TP24. 13. If the time between the pulses is not 12 µsec., adjust the oscilloscope time base to 0.5 µsec./div. and adjust Cathode Output Potentiometer A2R34 to obtain 12 µsec. ±0.1 µsec. 14. Re-insert plugs in connectors A2J7 (anode) and A2J8 (cathode) on KVP Control Board A2. 15. Perform KV, Filament and MA calibration procedures (refer to Chapter 3, Calibration (ODYSSEY) or Appendix B (DiRex Integration generators), or Appendix D (all other integrated generators).


Revision W

5-81


Filament Control Board A5 (P/N AY40-007T) Removal CAUTION! The Filament Control Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the KVP Control Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Tag and remove all cables connected to Filament Control Board A5. 4. Remove four (4) screws securing Filament Control Board A5 to the PCB Door and remove the Filament Control Board. Filament Control Board A5 (P/N AY40-007T) Replacement CAUTION! The Filament Control Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Filament Control Board or any other circuit board. 1. Place the new Filament Control Board A5 on standoffs in PCB Door and secure using four (4) screws. 2. Connect all cables to Filament Control Board A5. Remove tags. 3. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 4. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position. 5. Filament Control Board A5 contains one potentiometer (A5R25) that is pre-adjusted at the factory. No further adjustments are necessary for the replacement Filament Control Board, however, it is recommended the following voltages be checked to verify proper installation: a. Using a DMM, measure the voltage to ground on either side of fuse A5F1. The voltage should be +48 to +55 VDC. If not, refer to Power Supply Board A6 (AY40-005T) removal and replacement procedure for adjustment instructions. b. Connect a DMM between A5TP11 and A5J2-9. On the OCP, select Manual mode, 50 kV, 100L, 50 msec. Press the PREP key. Verify voltage at A5TP11 is +21.6 - 26.4 VDC. c.

Revision W

5-82

On the OCP, select Manual mode, 50 kV, 150S, 50 msec. Press the PREP key. Verify the voltage at A5TP11 is 1.0 VDC.



d. Perform Filament calibration procedure (refer to Chapter 3, Calibration (ODYSSEY) or Appendix B (DiRex Integration generators), or Appendix D (all other integrated generators)) and re-check mA calibration). Power Supply Board A6 (P/N AY40-005T) Removal CAUTION! The Power Supply Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Power Supply Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Tag and remove all cables connected to Power Supply Board A6. 4. Remove four (4) screws securing Power Supply Board A6 to the PCB Door and remove the Power Supply Board. Power Supply Board A6 (P/N AY40-005T) Replacement CAUTION! The Power Supply Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Power Supply Board or any other circuit board. 1. Place the new Power Supply Board A6 on standoffs in PCB Door and secure using four (4) screws. 2. Connect all cables to Power Supply Board A6. Remove tags. 3. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 4. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position. 5. Check for the following voltages at specified connector pins/test points: a. 24.55 to 27.15 VAC between A6J1-7 and A6J1-8. b. +14.25 to +15.75 VDC between A6TP10 and A6TP1. c.

-14.25 to -15.75 VDC between A6TP5 and A6TP1.

d. +22.8 to +25.2 VDC between A6TP8 and A6TP1. Note: The Power Supply Board’s +48 VDC output may be adjusted (using A6R17) up to +55 VDC (max.) in cases where long-length high tension cables are used and/or a heavy duty x-ray tube is


Revision W

5-83


installed. This can be determined by measuring the mA output (using a Dynalyzer or mAs meter), of an exposure taken at 40 kVp and the highest mA station available. The mA measured should be the same as the indicated mA (within specified tolerance). If mA output is too low, increase the +48 VDC voltage output as required, but do not exceed +55 VDC. Changing this setting will require verification of proper filament and mA calibration (refer to Chapter 3, CALIBRATION). e. +47.5 - +48.5 VDC between A6TP3 and A6TP1 (if necessary, adjust A6R17 to obtain this voltage). 6. Access Service Mode, AD Calibration menu. Verify +15 VDC, -15 VDC, +24 VDC, and +24V Brake voltages are within tolerance per Table 3-8. If not, calibrate in accordance with "A/D Calibration Procedure" in Chapter 3, Calibration (ODYSSEY) or Appendix B (DiRex Integration generators), or Appendix D (all other integrated generators. Line Monitor Board A8 Removal Line Monitor PCB Usage: AY40-022T1 - Used on Single-Phase Systems; AY40-022T2 - Used on 208-240 VAC Three Phase Systems w/AID High Speed Starter; AY40-022T3 - Used on 380-480 VAC Three-Phase Systems w/AID High Speed Starter; AY40-053S2 - Used on 208-240 VAC Three Phase Systems w/QMI High Speed Starter; AY40-053S3 - Used on 380480 VAC Three Phase Systems w/QMI High Speed Starter CAUTION! The Line Monitor Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Line Monitor Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Tag and remove all cables connected to Line Monitor Board A8. 4. Remove four (4) screws securing Line Monitor Board A8 to the PCB Door and remove the Line Monitor Board. Line Monitor Board A8 Replacement Line Monitor PCB Usage: AY40-022T1 - Used on Single-Phase Systems; AY40-022T2 - Used on 208-240 VAC Three Phase Systems w/AID High Speed Starter; AY40-022T3 - Used on 380-480 VAC Three-Phase Systems w/AID High Speed Starter; AY40-053S2 - Used on 208-240 VAC Three Phase Systems w/QMI High Speed Starter; AY40-053S3 - Used on 380-

Revision W

5-84



480 VAC Three Phase Systems w/QMI High Speed Starter CAUTION! The Line Monitor Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Line Monitor Board or any other circuit board. 1. On the replacement Line Monitor Board A8, verify all jumpers are set to same configuration as removed Line Monitor Board. 2. Place new Line Monitor Board A8 on standoffs in PCB Door and secure using four (4) screws. 3. Connect all cables (except A8J1) to Line Monitor Board. Remove tags. 4. Access Service Mode, AD Calibration menu. Verify +400V Cathode and +400V Anode voltages are within tolerance per Table 3-8. If not, calibrate in accordance with "A/D Calibration Procedure" in Chapter 3 (ODYSSEY) or Appendix B (DiRex Integration generators), or Appendix D (all other integrated generators). Stored Energy Systems Line Monitor/Charger Board A8 (AY40028T) Removal CAUTION! The Line Monitor/Charger Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Line Monitor/Charger Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Using a DVM, confirm the voltage across both DC Power Supply Capacitor Banks has been discharged to below 5VDC. This will take several minutes following shutdown. 4. Each battery tray has mounted on its front center, two cartridge fuses holders housing F1 and F2. Flip up the fuse holder release levers on top of each holder to open the four battery circuits. 5. Tag and remove cables connected to Line Monitor/Charger Board A8. 6. Remove four (4) hex nuts securing the Line Monitor/Charger Board to PCB Door and remove the Line Monitor/Charger Board.


Revision W

5-85


Stored Energy Systems Line Monitor/Charger Board (AY40028T) A8 Replacement CAUTION! The Line Monitor Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Line Monitor Board or any other circuit board. 1. On the replacement Line Monitor/Charger Board A8, verify all jumpers are set to same configuration as removed Line Monitor/ Charger Board. 2. Place new Line Monitor/Charger Board A8 on standoffs in PCB Door and secure using four (4) hex nuts. 3. Reinsert connectors A8P2 through A8P7 into their corresponding jacks A8P2 through A8P7, leaving A8P1 disconnected from A8J1. Remove tags. 4. Pre-adjust potentiometers A8R70 and A8R66 by rotating them fully counterclockwise. 5. Restore the battery circuits by closing the F1 and F2 fuse holders on the two battery trays. 6. Turn the generator ON. Verify that 220VAC (±10%) exists between A8P1-4 and A8J1-7. If these voltages are out of range, test the incoming AC line and confirm the correct taps have been selected at TB1. 7. Once correct, turn OFF the generator and re-attach A8P1 to A8J1. 8. Turn the generator ON. Measure the following A8 test points using a DVM and A8TP13 as ground. Verify these nominal values are within ±5%: • A8TP11 = +24VDC • A8TP12 = +15VDC • A8TP14 = -15VDC • A8TP15 = +283VDC • A8TP16 = -283VDC 9. Over-voltage Fault Threshold Calibration - Using A8TP13 as a ground: a. monitor A8TP21 and adjust A8R19 to measure +2.12VDC (±0.02 VDC). b. monitor A8TP20 and adjust A8R60 to measure +2.12VDC (±0.02 VDC). 10. Charger Voltage Limiter Calibration - Using A8TP13 as a ground:

Revision W

5-86



a. Monitor the charger output voltages at A8TP2 (positive supply) and A8TP3 (negative supply) while allowing the chargers to recharge the battery tray(s) until each test point rises to |205| ±1.0 VDC. Note: Charging to these levels may take up to 2 hours. If these levels cannot be achieved, check the integrity of the batteries in the affected side of each tray. b. Once this level has been achieved at A8TP2, adjust A8R70 to produce Output Limiting, which is indicated when yellow LED A8D7 begins to blink. 11. Similarly, once this level has been achieved at A8TP3, adjust A8R66 to produce Output Limiting, which is indicated when yellow LED A8D25 begins to blink. Rotor Drive Board A10 (P/N AY40-013T) Removal NOTE Rotor Drive Board A10 (AY40-013T) is not used on systems equipped with Dual (High) Speed Starter option (QG-HSS [external] or QHSS [internal]).

CAUTION! The Rotor Drive Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Rotor Drive Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Tag and disconnect Tube Rotor Cable (AY51-014T-XX) from terminal strip A10TB1-1 through A10TB1-7. 4. Tag and remove plugs connected to receptacles A10J1, A10J3, A10J4, and A10J5. 5. Remove four (4) hex nuts securing Rotor Drive Board A10 to the PCB Door and remove the Rotor Drive Board. Rotor Drive Board A10 (P/N AY40-013T) Replacement CAUTION! The Rotor Drive Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Rotor Drive Board or any other circuit board. 1. Place the new Rotor Drive Board A10 on the PCB Door and secure using four (4) hex nuts. 2. Re-connect plugs to receptacles A10J1, A10J3, A10J4, and A10J5 on Rotor Drive Board. 3. Re-connect Tube Rotor Cable (AY51-014T-XX) wires to terminal strip terminals A10TB1-1 through A10TB1-7. 4. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position.


Revision W

5-87


5. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position. 6. Perform Rotor Drive Board adjustments as described in the "Rotor Drive Board A10 (AY40-013T) Adjustment" procedure in Chapter 2, Assembly & Installation. Standard AEC Control Board A11 (P/N AY40-031S) Removal CAUTION! The AEC Control Drive Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the AEC Control Drive Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Tag and remove plugs connected to A11J1 and A11J4. 4. Disconnect any Wall and/or Table bucky cable(s) connected to A11J2, A11J3, and A11J5. 5. Remove four (4) hex nuts securing AEC Control Board A11 to the PCB Door and remove the AEC Control Board. Standard AEC Control Board A11 (P/N AY40-031S) Replacement CAUTION! The AEC Control Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the AEC Control Drive Board or any other circuit board. 1. Place the new AEC Control Board A10 on the PCB Door and secure using four (4) hex nuts. 2. Re-connect any Wall and/or Table bucky cable(s) to A11J2, A11J3 and A11J5 on AEC Control Board. 3. Re-connect plugs toA11J1 and A11J4 and remove tags. 4. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 5. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position. 6. Perform AEC calibration procedures (refer to Chapter 3, CALIBRATION (ODYSSEY) or Appendix B (DiRex Integration generators), or Appendix D (all other integrated generators).

Revision W

5-88



Universal AEC Control Board A11 (P/N AY40-027S) Removal CAUTION! The AEC Control Drive Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the AEC Control Drive Board or any other circuit board. 6. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

7. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 8. Tag and remove plugs connected to A11J1, A11J5, A11J6, A11J7, A11J9 and A11J11. 9. Disconnect any Wall and/or Table bucky cable(s) connected to A11J8, A11J10, A11J12 and A11J13. 10. If present, tag and remove wires connected to A11TB1 (used for Siemens ion chamber). 11. If present, tag and remove wires connected to A11TB10, A11TB12 and A11TB13 (used with Siemens tomography system). 12. Remove four (4) hex nuts securing AEC Control Board A11 to the PCB Door and remove the AEC Control Board. Universal AEC Control Board A11 (P/N AY40-027S) Replacement CAUTION! The AEC Control Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the AEC Control Drive Board or any other circuit board. 1. Place the new AEC Control Board A10 on the PCB Door and secure using four (4) hex nuts. 2. If applicable, re-connect wires to A11TB10, A11TB12 and A11TB13 (used with Siemens tomography system). Remove tags. 3. If present, re-connect wires to A11TB1 (used for Siemens ion chamber) and remove tags. 4. Re-connect any Wall and/or Table bucky cable(s) to A11J8, A11J10, A11J12 and A11J13 on AEC Control Board. 5. Re-connect plugs to A11J1, A11J5, A11J6, A11J7, A11J9 and A11J11 and remove tags. 6. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 7. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position. 8. Perform AEC calibration procedures (refer to Chapter 3, CALIBRATION).


Revision W

5-89


OCP Microprocessor Board A16 (P/N AY40-004S1) Removal (Not Applicable on Q-VISION or Integrated Generators) CAUTION! The OCP Microprocessor Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the OCP Microprocessor Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position.

NOTE The OCP Microprocessor Board A16 (AY40-004S1) is not used on integrated systems or systems equipped with a Q-VISION OCP.

3. Turn the Operator Control Panel upside down and remove the four (4) screws that secure the Operator Control Panel Bottom Cover to the Operator Control Panel housing, taking care not to scratch the front panel. 4. Tag and remove all cables connected to OCP Microprocessor Board A16A1. 5. Remove eight (8) screws securing OCP Microprocessor Board A16A1 to the front panel and remove OCP Microprocessor Board. 6. To remove the LCD Display (P/N EL31-005 on QUEST systems, EL31-004 on ODYSSEY systems), proceed as follows: a. Disconnect the flat cable from A16A1J5 on the OCP Microprocessor Board by pulling on the locking portion of A16A1J5 slightly in order to release the flat cable from the connector. b. Remove the four (4) screws that secure the LCD Display to the front panel and remove LCD Display. OCP Microprocessor Board A16 (P/N AY40-004S1) Replacement (Not Applicable on Q-VISION or Integrated Generators) CAUTION! The OCP Microprocessor Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the OCP Microprocessor Board or any other circuit board. 1. To install the LCD Display (P/N EL31-005 on QUEST systems, EL31-004 on ODYSSEY systems), proceed as follows: a. Verify board jumpers A16A1JP1, A16A1JP4, A16A1JP6, A16A1JP7, A16A1JP10, A16A1JP11 are installed; jumper A16A1JP12 is installed only if system has QUEST operator control panel. b. Secure the LCD Display to front panel using four (4) screws. c.

Revision W

5-90

Connect the flat cable from the OCP Display to A16A1J5. Check that the blue side of the flat cable faces the bottom



side of the connector. 2. Place the new OCP Microprocessor Board A16A1 on the OCP front panel and secure using eight (8) screws. 3. Connect all cables to OCP Microprocessor Board A16A1. 4. Re-install the Operator Control Panel Bottom Cover on the Operator Control Panel housing using four (4) screws. 5. Turn on system and verify the OCP works properly. Adjust A16A1R17 until the LCD display is a uniform blue color. Q-HSS Equipped Systems Only: High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1 (P/N AY40-035S) Removal CAUTION! The High-Speed Starter Control Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the High-Speed Starter Control Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Tag and remove all cables connected to High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1. 4. Remove four (4) hex nuts securing High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1 to the PCB Door and remove High-Speed Starter Control Board. Q-HSS Equipped Systems Only: High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1 (P/N AY40-035S) Replacement CAUTION! The High-Speed Starter Control Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the High-Speed Starter Control Board or any other circuit board. 1. Place the new High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1 on the PCB Door standoffs and secure using four (4) hex nuts. 2. Connect all cables to High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1. 3. Connect a DVM between A20A1U20-7 and GND. 4. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 5. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position.


Revision W

5-91


6. Adjust potentiometer A20R48 to 2.8 - 3.0 VDC for systems equipped with Toshiba E7183X and E7252X tubes, and 4.4 - 4.6 VDC for all other tube types. Q-HSS Equipped Systems Only: High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2 (P/N AY40-036S) Removal CAUTION! The High-Speed Starter Driver Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the High-Speed Starter Driver Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. WARNING! To prevent electrical shock hazards, make sure power is off and capacitors are discharged before proceeding with any removal/ replacement procedures. 3. Verify capacitors A20A2C4, A20A2C5, A20A2C8, and A20A2C9 are fully discharged - wait at least seven minutes, then measure the voltage across A20A1TP19 and A20A1TP20 and verify it is less than 30 VDC before proceeding. 4. Remove three (3) 6-32 hex nuts securing the clear plastic highvoltage shield to the PCB Door standoffs and remove shield. 5. Tag and remove all cables connected to High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2. 6. Remove four (4) screws securing High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2 to the front panel and carefully remove High-Speed Starter Driver Board. Q-HSS Equipped Systems Only: High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2 (P/N AY40-036S) Replacement CAUTION! The High-Speed Starter Driver Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the High-Speed Starter Driver Board or any other circuit board. CAUTION! To prevent damage, do not handle High-Speed Starter Driver Board by grasping or touching the heat sinks. 1. On replacement High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2, verify jumper JP1 is installed.

Revision W

5-92



2. Place the new High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2 on the PCB Door standoffs and secure using four (4) hex nuts. 3. Connect all cables to High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2. 4. Place clear plastic high-voltage shield on PCB Door standoffs and secure using three (3) 6-32 hex nuts. 5. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 6. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

Stored Energy System - Battery Tray Removal

FUSE HOLDER (2X ON 30/40 kW SYSTEMS)

BATTERY TRAY BRACKET (2X ON 30/40 kW SYSTEMS)

CONNECTOR A20TB1

CONNECTOR A21TB1

Figure 5-8. Battery Tray Component Location Caution! These batteries contain Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4) and Lead (Pb). Spent Lead-Acid batteries must never be disposed of indiscriminately. QMI requires its dealers to collect and send them to a secondary lead smelter for recycling. In the U.S., any reseller of automotive-type storage batteries is also required to accept spent cells at no cost to you. Avoid damage to the battery casing. Keep away from fire, flame, sparks, and heat. Use care in handling. Warning! Hazardous voltages (400 VDC) exist inside the Battery Tray Assembly even when power is disconnected from the generator. Use caution when handling; do not put hands/fingers inside Battery Tray Covers.


Revision W

5-93


1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Loosen nine (9) screws that secure the Generator Cabinet Cover to the Generator Chassis. 4. Wait two minutes before removing the Generator Cover to allow the Capacitor Bank to discharge. 5. Carefully slide the Generator Cabinet Cover up and away from the generator to prevent damaging the circuit boards on the generator front door. 6. Connect a DVM across the Capacitor Bank (C9, C10 and C11, C12) to check that the capacitors are fully discharged. 7. When capacitors are fully discharged, open fuse holders for fuses F1 through F4 (see Figure 5-8). 8. Tag and remove red, green/yellow, and black wires from terminal block A20TB1 and A21TB1 (32 and 40 kW systems only). 9. Remove four (4) screws securing left and right side Battery Tray Brackets to sides of Generator Cabinet. 10. Remove screws (two on 20 kW systems, four on 32, 40 and 50 kW systems) securing left and right side Battery Tray Brackets to the Battery Trays. Remove brackets from Generator Cabinet. 11. On 32, 40 and 50 kW systems only: Slide out the top Battery Tray by pulling it slowly towards you. Be careful not to pull out the Battery Tray too far as it may fall to the floor and cause injury. Once the back part of the Battery Tray is accessible, grasp it firmly and carefully lift out the Battery Tray using both hands. 12. Remove the bottom Battery Tray by holding it by the front handle, lifting up and pulling it towards you. Be careful not to catch your fingers between the Battery Tray and the front of the Generator Cabinet. Once the back part of the Battery Tray is accessible, grasp it firmly and carefully lift out the Battery Tray using both hands.

Revision W

5-94



Stored Energy System - Battery Tray Replacement 1. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 2. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (

) position.

3. Slide the bottom Battery Tray into the Generator, pushing it all the way towards the back of the Generator Cabinet. 4. On 32, 40 and 50 kW systems only: Slide the top Battery Tray onto the bottom Battery Tray, pushing it all the way towards the back of the Generator Cabinet. 5. Check that the Battery Tray(s) are properly seated inside the Generator. Attach the two brackets to the Battery Tray(s) and secure the brackets to the Generator. 6. Connect red, green/yellow, and black wires to terminal blocks A20TB1 and A21TB1 (32 and 40 kW systems only). Remove tags. 7. Close fuse holders for fuses F1 through F4. 8. Connect a DVM between the red and the green/yellow wires on A20TB1 and check that the voltage is between 185 VDC and 195 VDC. Connect a DVM between the black and the green/yellow wires on A20TB1 and check that the voltage is between 185 VDC and 195 VDC. If this is a 32 or 40 kW system, repeat this check at terminal block A21TB1. 9. Carefully slide the Generator Cabinet Cover down onto the Generator Chassis, taking care not to damage the circuit boards on the front door of the generator. 10. Tighten the nine (9) cover screws to secure the Generator Cabinet Cover to the Generator Chassis. 11. Verify the Line Monitor/Source Charger Board over-voltage fault threshold and charger voltage limiter are calibrated as described in "Stored Energy Systems Line Monitor/Charger Board (AY40028T) A8 Replacement" procedure contained in this chapter.


Revision W

5-95


REPLACEMENT PARTS AND ORDERING INFORMATION WARNING! If components that have a direct or indirect influence on safety or radiation protection are replaced, it is essential that only Quantum Medical Imaging specified replacement parts be used. WARNING! For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type and rating of fuse. Refer to Figures 6-1 through 6-5 in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS for a listing of replaceable parts for single phase, stored energy and three-phase X-ray generators and for the locations of the replaceable parts within the system. Use only original replacement parts as supplied or recommended by Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC. ORDERING INFORMATION To order replacement parts for the generator, contact the Service/Support Department at; Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC. 2002-B Orville Drive North Ronkonkoma, NY 11779-7661 USA Phone: (631) 567-5800 (x2) Fax: (631) 567-5074 email: [email protected] When ordering replacement parts, supply the following information: • Model and serial number of equipment • Part number • Part description • Quantity required • P.O. Number • Shipping Instructions When ordering components or parts not listed in the tables of Figures 6-1 through 6-5, a complete description of the part, including its function and location should be provided with the model number and serial number of the unit. Contact [email protected] for further information.

Revision W

5-96


Chapter

6

DIAGRAMS

6-1

6-2

Chapter 6 Diagrams

A11 AEC CONTROL BD. A2 KVP CONTROL BD. AY40-031S (STANDARD) AY40-027S (UNIVERSAL) AY40-003S

A5 FILAMENT CONTROL BD. AY40-007T

A1 LOGIC BD. AY40-006S

A1A1 OCP INTERFACE BD. AY40-073S

**A10 ***A8 ROTOR DRIVE BD. LINE MONITOR BD. AY40-013T AY40-022T1

DB2 RECTIFIER

*A9 INTERFACE BD. AY40-023T

C9-C12 CAPACITORS 2400uF/450VDC

A19 POWER MODULE AY20-047

A18A3/A19A3 IGBT DRIVE BD AY40-010T

A18 POWER MODULE AY20-047 CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER

*NOTE 1: **NOTE 2: ***NOTE 3: NOTE 4: NOTE 5:


AY40-034T USED WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR SYSTEMS NOT PROVIDED ON SYSTEMS EQUIPPED WITH HIGH-SPEED STARTER AY40-022T2 USED ON 380- 480 VAC 1-PHASE INPUT SYSTEMS CONTACTOR K3 USED ON 380- 480 VAC 1-PHASE INPUT SYSTEMS ONLY AY40-073S USED ON SYSTEMS EQUIPPED WITH Q-CONNECT OPTION ONLY

DB1 RECTIFIER

C3, C4, C6, C7 CAPACITORS 1500V

A6 POWER SUPPLY BD. AY40-005T

A17 HIGH-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (125 KV = AY20-031, 150 KV = AY20-032)

F1, F2 (3.15A) SLO-BLO FUSES R4A (50 ), R4B (50 ) RESISTORS

R3A (50 ), R3B (50 ) RESISTORS

C1 CAPACITOR

FL1 EMI FILTER

R1A (1.2K ), R1B (1.2K ) RESISTORS

R2A (1.2K ), R2B (1.2K ) RESISTORS

TB1 TERMINAL BLOCK

T1 TRANSFORMER

TB2 TERMINAL BLOCK

K3 CONTACTOR

K1, K2 CONTACTORS

T2 TRANSFORMER

GENERATOR CABINET (PCB DOOR CLOSED)


Figure 6-1. Single-Phase (Non-STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 25, 32 and 40 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)

HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC

Revision W

6-3

Chapter 6 Diagrams

SINGLE-PHASE (NON-SE) (MODELS QG-25, QG-32, QG-40) PARTS LIST A16 OCP CONTROL BD. AY40-004S1

LCD DISPLAY EL31-004

OCP CABLE (50 FT.) AY51-018

CABLE, OCP ON/OFF SWITCH AY51-026

AUX

ODYSSEY OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (AY10-005) A16 OCP CONTROL BD. AY40-004S1



CABLE, OCP ON/OFF SWITCH AY51-026

AEC FIELD

READY •

QUEST OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (AY10-004)

Figure 6-1. Single-Phase (Non-STORED ENERGY) Xray Generators, 25, 32 and 40 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)


Revision W

6-4

Chapter 6 Diagrams

***OPTIONAL*** A11 AEC CONTROL BD. A2 KVP CONTROL BD. AY40-031S (STANDARD) AY40-027S (UNIVERSAL) AY40-003S

A5 FILAMENT CONTROL BD. AY40-007S


***A1A1 OCP INTERFACE BD. AY40-073S

A10 ROTOR DRIVE BD. AY40-013T

A8 LINE MONITOR/ SOURCE CHARGER BD. AY40-028T

TB1 TERMINAL BLOCK

A9 INTERFACE BD. AY40-023T1

T1 TRANSFORMER



A18 POWER MODULE AY20-047 FL1 EMI FILTER

CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER C8-C15**** CAPACITORS 2400uF/450VDC K1 CONTACTOR

C7A** CAPACITOR


C7* CAPACITOR

BATTERY TRAY #2 (32, 40 & 50 KW UNITS ONLY)

A17 HIGH-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER AY20-031

C1 CAPACITOR (440V)

*NOTE 1:


**NOTE 2: ***NOTE 3:

****NOTE 4:

FUSE HOLDER 30A/600V (EACH WITH 30A/500VAC SLO-BLO FUSE)

C4A** CAPACITOR

BATTERY TRAY #1 R1A (1.2K ), R1B (1.2K ) R4A (1.2K ), R4B (1.2K ) RESISTORS

R2A, R2B, R3A, R3B (50 ) RESISTORS

C4 AND C7 VALUE IS DEPENDENT ON MODEL TYPE (0.5 uF ON 32KW, 1.0 uF ON 40KW & 50KW UNITS) C4A & C7A ONLY USED ON 50 KW UNITS AY40-073S USED ON SYSTEMS EQUIPPED WITH Q-CONNECT OPTION ONLY

C4* CAPACITOR C3, C6 CAPACITOR 1.0 uF/1500V LEAD ACID BATTERIES (30 PER TRAY)


C9-C12 ON 20 KW UNITS; C8 THRU C15 ON 32 & 40 KW UNITS

Figure 6-2. Single-Phase (STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 20, 32 40 and 50 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)


Revision W

6-5

Chapter 6 Diagrams

SINGLE-PHASE (STORED ENERGY) PARTS LIST

A16 OCP CONTROL BD. AY40-004S1



SWITCH, OCP ON/OFF EL50-007-1

AUX



AEC FIELD



READY •


Figure 6-2. Single-Phase (STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 20, 32, 40 and 50 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)


Revision W

6-6

Chapter 6 Diagrams





* A10 **A8 ROTOR DRIVE BD. LINE MONITOR BD. AY40-013T AY40-053S2

DB2 RECTIFIER

***A9 INTERFACE BD. AY40-023T




A18 POWER MODULE AY20-047 CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER C9-C11, C13-C15 CAPACITORS 2400uF/450VDC

DB1 RECTIFIER

C1 * CAPACITOR

C3, C4, C6, C7 CAPACITORS 1500V A17 HIGH-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (125 KV = AY20-031, 150 KV = AY20-032)


FL1 EMI FILTER F1, F2 SLO-BLO FUSES (3.15A)

T2 TRANSFORMER R4A, R4B RESISTORS (50 OHM)

R3A, R3B RESISTORS (50 OHM)

R1A, R2B R2A, R2B RESISTORS (1.2K )

TB2 TERMINAL BLOCK

T1A, T1B, T1C TRANSFORMER

*NOTE 1:


NOT PROVIDED ON SYSTEMS EQUIPPED WITH HIGH-SPEED STARTER **NOTE 2: AY40-053S3 PROVIDED ON MODEL QG-32-2 AND QG-40-2 ***NOTE 3: AY40-034T USED WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR SYSTEMS NOTE 4: AY40-073S USED ON SYSTEMS EQUIPPED WITH Q-CONNECT OPTION ONLY

TB1 TERMINAL BLOCK


K1 - K3 CONTACTOR

Figure 6-3. Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 32 and 40 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)


Revision W

6-7

Chapter 6 Diagrams

32, 40 kW THREE-PHASE (MODELS QG-32-2, QG-32-3, QG-40-2, QG-40-3) PARTS LIST





AUX



AEC FIELD



READY •


Figure 6-3. Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 32 and 40 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)


Revision W

6-8

Chapter 6 Diagrams





*A10 **A8 ROTOR DRIVE BD. LINE MONITOR BD. AY40-013T AY40-053S2

DB2 RECTIFIER





A18 POWER MODULE AY20-047 CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER C13-C16 CAPACITORS 2400uF/450VDC DB1 RECTIFIER

C1 * CAPACITOR

C3, C4, C6, C7 CAPACITORS 1 uF, 1500V C5, C8 CAPACITORS .5 uF 1500V A17 HIGH-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (125 KV = AY20-031, 150 KV = AY20-032)


FL1 EMI FILTER F1, F2 SLO-BLO FUSES (3.15A) R4A, R4B RESISTORS (50 OHM) R3A, R3B RESISTORS (50 OHM)

TB2 TERMINAL BLOCK

T2 TRANSFORMER R1A, R1B R2A, R2B RESISTORS (1.2 KOHM)

TB1 TERMINAL BLOCK


*NOTE 1:


NOT PROVIDED ON SYSTEMS EQUIPPED WITH HIGH-SPEED STARTER **NOTE 2: AY40-053S3 PROVIDED ON MODEL QG-50-2 ***NOTE 3: AY40-034T USED WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR SYSTEMS NOTE 4: C5 AND C8 NOT USED ON MODEL QG-50-2 NOTE 5: AY40-073S USED ON SYSTEMS EQUIPPED WITH Q-CONNECT OPTION ONLY


K1 - K3 CONTACTOR

Figure 6-4. Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 50, 65 and 80 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)


Revision W

6-9

Chapter 6 Diagrams

QG-50, QG-50-2, QG-65 AND QG-80 THREE-PHASE PARTS LIST





AUX



AEC FIELD



READY •


Figure 6-4. Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 50, 65 and 80 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)


Revision W

6-10

Chapter 6 Diagrams





A20A2 HSS DRIVER BD. AY40-036S

**A8 LINE MONITOR BD. AY40-053S2

DB2 RECTIFIER






***OPTIONAL*** +28 VDC POWER SUPPLY CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER C13-C16 CAPACITORS 2400uF/450VDC DB1 RECTIFIER

C1* CAPACITOR

C3, C4, C6, C7 CAPACITORS 1 uF, 1500V

C2A, C2B CAPACITOR (12 MFD)

C5, C8 CAPACITORS .5 uF 1500V

A20A1 HSS CONTROL BD. AY40-035S

A17 HIGH-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (125 KV = AY20-031, 150 KV = AY20-032)


FL1 EMI FILTER F1, F2 SLO-BLO FUSES (3.15A) R4A, R4B RESISTORS (50 OHM) R3A, R3B RESISTORS (50 OHM)

TB2 TERMINAL BLOCK

T2 TRANSFORMER R1A, R1B R2A, R2B RESISTORS (1.2 KOHM)

TB1 TERMINAL BLOCK


*NOTE 1:


C1 VALUE IS DEPENDENT ON TUBE TYPE (40 uF FOR E7813 & E7252 TUBES, 25 uF ALL OTHERS) **NOTE 2: AY40-053S3 USED ON MODEL QG-50-2 ***NOTE 3: AY40-062T USED WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR SYSTEMS NOTE 4: C5 AND C8 NOT USED ON MODEL QG-50-2 NOTE 5: AY40-073S USED ON SYSTEMS EQUIPPED WITH Q-CONNECT OPTION ONLY


K1 - K3 CONTACTOR

Figure 6-5. Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 50, 65 and 80 kW (with QMI-HSS) Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)


Revision W

6-11

Chapter 6 Diagrams QG-50, QG-50-2, QG-65 AND QG-80 (WITH QMI-HSS HIGH-SPEED STARTER OPTION) THREE-PHASE PARTS LIST





AUX



AEC FIELD



READY •


Figure 6-5. Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 50, 65 and 80 kW (with QMI-HSS) Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)


Revision W

6-12

Chapter 6 Diagrams

RED +24VDC BLACK - GND

L1 N 'X-RAY ON' LAMP

1 2

WALL STAND L2/N L1

TB1 AC Power 115/230 VAC

AC Power 115/230VAC 15A

WALL BUCKY ION CHAMBER

TB1

SW1 1

2

TABLE

DOOR INTERLOCKS

SW2 1

TABLE BUCKY

2

ION CHAMBER

RED +24 VDC BLACK - GND

QUANTUM Q-WARE

2 1

LAPTOP TOOL

2 1

TECHVISION OPTION

FIELD SERVICE

TB6

TB5 TB4

WALL BUCKY REMOTE EXPOSURE CONTROL

QUANTUM X-RAY GENERATOR

BUCKY READY +24 VDC 24V GND RTN GROUND

HANDSWITCH

TB3 TABLE BUCKY

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

TABLE J4

WALL J2

BUCKY READY N/A N/A GROUND

AEC PCB

J2

AY40-031S

N/A 115 VAC RTN BUCKY ON 115 VAC

STANDARD HANDGRIP ETHERNET RJ-45

TB2

GROUND COMMON EXPOSE PREP

12-PIN CIRCULAR

SHIELD GRN/BLK WHITE RED

TUBESTAND

COLLIMATOR

+24 VDC 24V GND RTN N/A EXPOSURE HOLD (COLLIMATOR READY)

COLLIMATOR

N/A N/A EXPOSURE HOLD COMMON

QMI - HSS OPTION *

TB1

4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

TB1

1 2 3

24 VAC 24 VAC RTN GROUND

AY40-036S

TB2

MAIN N/A PHASE N/A N/A COMMON

TB4 THERMAL SWITCH THERMAL SW GND

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

BLACK N/A RED N/A N/A WHITE

CATHODE(-)

ORANGE GREEN

VARIAN

RS-422 TECHVISION POWER/DATA

X-RAY TUBE MAIN PHASE COMMON

STANDARD LOGIC PCB

J4

OCP POWER/DATA/CONTROL

9-PIN SUB-D

J5

ROTOR PCB *

AY40-006S

OPERATOR'S CONSOLE

J8

N/A N/A THERMAL SWITCH THERMAL SW GND

TB1

AY40-013T

4

3

2

BLACK RED WHITE

MAIN PHASE COMMON THERMAL SWITCH THERMAL SW GND

N/A N/A GREEN ORANGE

4 3 5 2 1

CATHODE(-) AY51-017

L1 L2 L3 N 1

THREE PHASE OPTION

L2 2

GENERATOR GROUND

L1 1

SINGLE PHASE OPTION

TB1

TB1

TUBESTAND

N/A 115 VAC RTN BUCKY ON 115 VAC

INTERFACE PCB AY40-023T

RS-232 SERIAL COMM PORT

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2

TECHVISION AUXILIARY HANDGRIP M NON-INTEGRATED OPTION

UTILITY SOFTWARE

TB1

ANODE(+)

ANODE(+)

HIGH VOLTAGE

TOSHIBA

CATHODE(-)

DUNLEE X-RAY TUBES X-RAY TUBE NEUTRAL MAY BE OMITTED

NEUTRAL

QG - HSS

GND

AID - HSS

L2

EARTH GROUND

MAIN PHASE COMMON

OPTION *

L1

PHASE C

PHASE B

LOCAL ELECTRICAL CODE. PHASE A

<<<--- CONDUIT --->>>

GROUND

GROUND

PHASE B

PHASE A

IF NOT REQUIRED BY

THERMAL SWITCH THERMAL SWITCH

1300/1400

DA10

CENTER PIN INNER PIN OUTER PIN

WHITE-PIN 1 GREEN-PIN 2 BLACK-PIN 3

TS-2 PIN TS-1 PIN

GREEN-PIN 6 ORANGE-PIN 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

BLACK RED WHITE N/A N/A GREEN ORANGE

MAIN PHASE COMMON

THERMAL SWITCH THERMAL SW GND

3 2 1

5 6

*Note: The Standard Rotor PCB ANODE(+)

AY40-013T is removed when the

L1

L1

L3

L2

INCOMING AC POWER

L1

L2

L1

QG-HSS AID High Speed Starter or the QMI-HSS is present in the system.

50-60 Hz 208-260 VAC

208-240 VAC or

200-240VAC

380-480 VAC

20A

SC50-015T REV. M

Figure 6-6. Generator System Cabling Diagram (Internal High-Speed Starter)


Revision W

6-13

Chapter 6 Diagrams

Figure 6-7. Generator System Cabling Diagram (External High-Speed Starter Systems)


Revision W

6-14

Chapter 6 Diagrams

RED +24VDC BLACK - GND

L1 N 'X-RAY ON' LAMP

1 2

WALL STAND L2/N L1

TB1 AC Power 115/230 VAC

AC Power 115/230VAC 15A

WALL BUCKY ION CHAMBER

TB1

SW1 1

2

DOOR INTERLOCKS

SW2 1

TABLE BUCKY

TABLE

2

ION CHAMBER RED +24 VDC BLACK - GND

TB6

TECHVISION AUXILIARY HANDGRIP OPTION

QUANTUM X-RAY GENERATOR

WORKSTATION TB5

1 2

TB1 TUBESTAND

TB4 COMPUTER

DISPLAY

WALL BUCKY

INTERFACE PCB

WALL

TABLE

J2

J4

AY40-023T

AEC PCB

J2

TB3 AY40-031S

STANDARD

TABLE BUCKY HANDGRIP POWER

ETHERNET RJ-45

TUBESTAND COLLIMATOR

TB2 QMI - HSS

GENERATOR CONTROL BOX

COLLIMATOR

OPTION *

TB1

AY40-036S

Q-CONNECT OPTION

TB2 TB4

CATHODE(-)

VARIAN X-RAY TUBE J3 A1A1P5

AC POWER

ETHERNET SWITCH

LOGIC PCB AY40-006S/ OCP INTERFACE PCB AY40-073S

A1A1P1

STANDARD ROTOR PCB *

TB1

J8 AY40-013T

THREE PHASE OPTION

L3

CATHODE(-)

N 4

L2

3

1

L1

2

1

TB1

GENERATOR GROUND

L2

AY51-017

L1

2

SINGLE PHASE OPTION

TB1

ANODE(+)

ANODE(+)

HIGH VOLTAGE

TOSHIBA

CATHODE(-)

DUNLEE X-RAY TUBES X-RAY TUBE NEUTRAL MAY BE OMITTED

NEUTRAL

QG - HSS

GND

AID - HSS

L1

EARTH GROUND

MAIN PHASE COMMON

OPTION *

L2

PHASE C

LOCAL ELECTRICAL CODE. PHASE B

GROUND

<<<--- CONDUIT --->>>

PHASE A

GROUND

PHASE B

PHASE A

IF NOT REQUIRED BY

THERMAL SWITCH THERMAL SWITCH

*Note: The Standard Rotor PCB AY40-013T is removed when the

1300/1400

DA10

CENTER PIN INNER PIN OUTER PIN

WHITE-PIN 1 GREEN-PIN 2 BLACK-PIN 3

TS-2 PIN TS-1 PIN

GREEN-PIN 6 ORANGE-PIN 5

ANODE(+)

L1

L1

L3

L2

INCOMING AC POWER

L1

L2

L1

QG-HSS AID High Speed Starter or the QMI-HSS is present in the system.

SC50-094T REV. A 50-60 Hz 208-260 VAC

208-240 VAC or

200-240VAC

380-480 VAC

20A

Figure 6-8. System Cabling Diagram (with Q-Connect Option)


Revision W

6-15

Chapter 6 Diagrams

RS-580/QS-550/QV-800

TECH VISION HANDGRIP OPTION

D-Qix Mini Control

OCP ( Control Panel)

8 PIN CIRCULAR PLUG

OPTION

Serial Comm J1

TechVision Power/Control Cable

AY51-126

J4 CIRCULAR BLACK PLUG

J3 (9 PIN CONNECTOR)

5 PORT SWITCH BOX

REMOTE ON/OFF

J2 CAT 5 ETHERNET CABLE AY51-150

OPTION

(CXDI 50G Only) OCP Serial Cable

POWER BOX SPW CONTROL PC (CXDI-C3S)

CN4 AC 120V/230V INPUT POWER J004

CN2

J003

CAT 5 SERIAL

NETWORK LAN 1 Sensor Cable

HF GENERATOR

LOGIC

TOUCH SCREEN MONITOR

RS232

COM 1 VGA VGA

5 PORT CAT 5

SWITCH BOX CAT 5

BOARD

LAN 2

POWER SUPPLY

X-Ray I/F Receptor Cable

(J5) Interface Board

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Jumper

Jumper

TABLE TB3/ WALL TB4

KEYBOARD

MOUSE

A1 A2 B1 B2 AC120 +/- 10 60hZ 2A AC230 +/- 10 50/60Hz 1.5A INPUT POWER AEC Cable

AEC Control Board

CXDI 50G/40EG/31G IMAGING UNIT

SC50-081 REV. A

Figure 6-9. HF Generator to Canon/TechVision System Interconnection Diagram (Non-Widescreen)


Revision W

6-16

Chapter 6 Diagrams

RS-580/QS-550/QV-800

TechVision Power/Control Cable

TECH VISION HANDGRIP OPTION

5 PORT SWITCH BOX

REMOTE ON/OFF

J2 CAT 5 ETHERNET CABLE AY51-150

OPTION

(CXDI 50G Only)

POWER BOX SPW CONTROL PC

CN4 AC 120V/230V INPUT POWER

(CXDI-C3S) J004

CN2

J003

CAT 5

NETWORK

SERIAL LAN 1

P1

BOARD

P5

OCP INTERFACE BD

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Jumper

Jumper

TABLE TB3/ WALL TB4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

VGA CAT 5

SWITCH BOX CAT 5

CONTROL BOX

Interface Board

RS232

COM 1

VGA

5 PORT

GEN.

X-Ray I/F Receptor Cable

J3

LOGIC

Sensor Cable

HF GENERATOR

TOUCH SCREEN MONITOR

LAN 2

CXDI 50G/40EG/31G IMAGING UNIT

POWER SUPPLY

KEYBOARD

MOUSE

A1 A2 B1 B2 AC120 +/- 10 60hZ 2A AC230 +/- 10 50/60Hz 1.5A INPUT POWER

AEC Cable AEC Control Board

SC50-103 REV. A

Figure 6-10. HF Generator to Canon/TechVision System Interconnection Diagram (Widescreen)


Revision W

6-17

Chapter 6 Diagrams

NOTE: ON SYSTEMS USING FOUR (4) WIRE MULTI-CONDUCTOR BUCKY CABLE, CONNECT "BUCKY ON" SIGNAL (RED WIRE) TO LINE (B4) TERMINAL ON BUCKY. (THE 115VAC (BLACK WIRE) CONNECTION

Figure 6-11. 17 x 17 Midwest Bucky Interconnection Diagram


Revision W

6-18

Chapter 6 Diagrams

NOTE: ON SYSTEMS USING FOUR (4) WIRE MULTI-CONDUCTOR BUCKY CABLE, CONNECT "BUCKY ON" SIGNAL (RED WIRE) TO LINE (L) TERMINAL ON BUCKY. (THE 115VAC (BLACK WIRE) CONNECTION

Figure 6-12. 17 x 17 Progeny and L-F Bucky Interconnection Diagram


Revision W

6-19

Chapter 6 Diagrams

Figure 6-13. 14 x 36 Midwest Bucky Interconnection Diagram


Revision W

6-20

Chapter 6 Diagrams

GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG)

1 2

K1

D2

D1 1N4005

-

~

2

A19QA

~

A19R1 1

1

AY51-065

A18,A1P5

J4 J3 G2 E2

+

TUBE ROTOR CHART

2

CONNECTION)

+3

A18C1

A18C2

-

-

A18QB

2

A18QA

X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART

A+

1

1

AY51-065

DB1

DB2

AY20-047

A19

A18

POWER MODULE

AY20-047

POWER MODULE

AY51-128 (4X)

(SEE NOTE 2)

ANODE

CATHODE AY51-073

TOSHIBA

VARIAN

1- COMM.

5- COMM.

OUTER- COMM.

2- MAIN

4- MAIN

CENTER- MAIN

3- PHASE

3- PHASE

INNER- PHASE

5- T.S.

1- T.S.

T.S.-1

6- T.S.

2- T.S.

T.S.-2

DUNLEE

C-

A18R1

(SEE NOTE 1)

-

J7 J6

J9 J8 G2 E2 3

C16

A19C2

-

AY51-080

+

AY51-079

E1 G1

G2 E2

+

AY51-023

+

X-RAY TUBE (SEE FOR ROTOR

C15 +

J2 J1

J4 J3

J7 J6 2

~

+3

A19QB

(SEE NOTE 1)

-

~

+

A19C1

+

~

9

1N4005

9

1 2

10

7 8

5

3 6

4

C12 10

AY51-127 (4X)

K2

3

C14

1 2 3 4

ROTOR CABLE

+

C13

AY51-066

~

8 7

C11

J5 ANODE

IGBT DRIVE BD.

1 2 3 4

+

6 5

E1 G1

AY51-073 (2X)

3

AY51-088 (2X)

J9 J8

C10

G2 E2

4

L2

C9

R4 A,B 50 OHM 50W

J5 CATHODE

AY51-080

AY25-001

R3 A,B 50 OHM 50W

AY51-066

WHT BLK

440VAC

+

440VAC

+

3.15A SB

+

3.15A SB

F2 BLK WHT

LINE

L1

LOAD

LOAD

LINE

CB1 (SEE NOTE 6) YEL/GRN (10AWG)

F1

TB1

AY51-127 (4X)

AY40-010T AY40-010T IGBT DRIVE BD.

AY51-007

AY51-079

AY51-058 X2

A19,A1P5

E1 G1

WHT BLK RED BLUE

J2 J1

GROUND TO HV TANK

E1 G1

MAIN GROUND STUD

C7

C4

C6

C3

AY51-128 (4X)

2.4K VC-

J3

J2

A6P2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A6P3

A9P2

AY51-005 WHITE (16AWG) BLACK (16AWG) VIOLET BLUE RED BROWN/YELLOW BLUE/YELLOW BLACK/RED

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J4

1 2

TB6

A9P6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

J10

A1P4 RED GREEN/YELLOW BLACK GREEN/YELLOW BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE

24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BKY T. READY BKY W. READY DOOR SPARE TABLE RDY K2, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 0VAC 7.5VAC 15VDC 15VDC RTN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J2 V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN NOT USED FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED

A1P3 BLACK/RED WHT/BLK


16 14 15 FIL. SMALL

8

A17P1

J1

AY40-006S A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A1P10 A1P9 A2P8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J8 1 2 3 4 5

A1P5 OCP ON RS-485 RS-485 EXP. PREP 28VDC GND 28VDC GND J5

+18 VDC GROUND OUTPUT A OUTPUT B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A2P5


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

A2P6

J3

J5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A5P2

J2

AY40-007T A5, FILAMENT CONTROL BD.

A2P3 AY51-019-2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN AY40-003S A2, KVP BD.

GRN/YEL A1P1

J6

BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT BLK

48VDC 48VDCRTN

J7 1 2 3 4

J1

AY51-013 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

BLK, L RED, S WHT, C GROUND

A2P7

A11P2 J4

J2

AY40-031S A11, AEC BD. (OPTIONAL)

A11P1 A2P4

J4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

SC50-046T REV. R

A11P3 J3

J5

AY51-020

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

AEC TABLE GRN/YEL

A11P5

A16P1

(SEE NOTE 5)

AY51-018-XX

AY51-012 FILAMENT BOARD GROUND

30VDC 30VDC RTN

1 2 3 4

J3

STUD

SHIELD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

AY51-011

PCB DOOR GROUND

RS 232 MASTER PORT

AY51-008

A1P2

AY40-022T1 A8, LINE MONITOR BD.

RS 232 SLAVE PORT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J9

BROWN (22AWG) RED (22AWG) ORANGE (22AWG) YELLOW (22AWG) GREEN (22AWG) BLUE (22AWG) VIOLET (20AWG) GREY (20AWG) WHITE (22AWG) BLACK (22AWG) BLACK/ORANGE (22 AWG) WHITE/BROWN (22 AWG)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J11

DOOR INTERLOCK

J6

A8P4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2

DOOR INTERLOCK DOOR INTERLOCK RTN

AY40-023T A9, INTERFACE BD.

RED

X - RAY ON

TB5

A1P8

J8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TO WALLSTAND

J2 X-RAY IN USE X-RAY IN USE RTN

A5P1

AY51-021

BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY

VC+/2.4K

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

GROUND 24 VDC RTN 24 VDC BUCKY READY

GRN/YEL (16AWG) BLACK (16AWG) WHITE (16AWG)

AEC WALL 1

VA -

R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

7. ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE INPUT. AY51-017

AEC WALL 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2.4K

TO TABLE

6. 40KW SYSTEMS CB1 MUST BE 70 AMP. 32.5 AND 25 KW SYSTEMS CB1 MUST BE 50AMP.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A8P2

15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN

J2 VA+/2.4K

J3 C1 30UF/440VAC (SEE NOTE 3)

TB4 115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN

J5

220 VAC OUT T2 0 VAC OUT T2 120 VAC 0VAC

AY51-004

48VDC 48VDC 48VDCRTN 48VDCRTN 30VDC 30VDC 30VDCRTN 30VDCRTN 15VDC 15VDCRTN

BUCKY READY

A9P5

J1 32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN

J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)

A6P1 AY40-005T A6, POWER SUPPLY BD.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

WHITE(20AWG) BLACK(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG)

A8P1

INCOM. L 0VAC ICOM. L 220VAC OUTPUT 220VAC SW. OUTPUT 0VAC SW.

J6

A8P6

BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG)

10

A8P3 J3

1 2 3 4

BLUE(20AWG)

EMI FILTER

WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)

BRN/YEL ORN/BLK

5 3 6 1 2 7 4 9 8 10

AY20258 TMI

GROUND

HV MODULE

A11P4

11

LOAD LINE

220 VAC IN 220 VAC IN 60VAC ROTOR 0 VAC ROTOR

5. AY51-019-2 IS USED FOR AEC OPTION ONLY. NON AEC GENERATORS USE AY51-019-1.

1.5KE68CA A17 AY20-031

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

GND

ROTOR DRIVE BD. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6

17 18

TB3 115 VAC BUCKY T. ON 115 VAC RTN

J4

4

FIL.COMMON

19 20

LINE LOAD

GRN/YEL (16AWG)

A9P4

A10 AY40-013T

4. DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND 10 FROM GROUND AND CONNECT MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING A17P19 AND 10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR MAS METER.)

WHT RED

6

AY51-043

FIL. SHIELD BLK FIL. LARGE

4

TO TUBE STAND

SHIELD 7

220

15 7

5 2 1 3

A2P1

3

1 2 3

J1

1

3. C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE MANUFACTURER OR MODEL. (SEE TUBE DATA SHEET).

9

6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J5

A10P5

CATH. FDBK CATH. RTN MA FDBK MA RTN ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK

0 120

10

(SEE NOTE 4)

A10P4

AY51-017

60VAV

8

24 VDC 24 VDC RTN COLL. READY 15V RTN 15VDC GROUND

2. C3, C4, C6 AND C7 1µF 1500V. C5 AND C8 NOT USED.

A

A10TB1

TB1 J4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

NOTES: 1. C9 THRU C16 2400µF 450VDC.

PA2

C

TO COLLIMATOR

TB2

PA1

1 2 3 4 5 6

7

32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

PC2

MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK CATHODE RTN CATHODE FDBK

6

260VAC

8 16

BLK (16AWG) 32VAC BLK (16AWG) 0VAC 16VAC BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) 0VAC 11VAC BLK (16AWG) 0VAC BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) 28VAC 0VAC BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) 28VAC BLK (16AWG) 0VAC BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)

PC1

AY51-012

240VAC

9

T2

CHASSIS GRN TEMP. FAULT

1 2 3

24 VAC COLL. 24 VAC RTN GROUND

J1

1 BLK 2 RED 3 WHT 4 5 6 T.S. 7 T.S.

AY51-023 AY51-015

5 6

ROTOR MAIN ROTOR PHASE ROTOR COMMON

AY51-012

5

1 2 3 4

AY51-010

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

220VAC

1 2 3 4

BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE VIOLET GREY WHITE

200VAC

4

J3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3

2 3 4

7VAC 0VAC

0VAC

A9P1

280VAC

AY51-070 (2X)

1

2

RED YELLOW GREEN BROWN

AY51-022-1P

-10VAC

220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC

TB1

T1

TB2 1

J7

J1 220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC

AY51-018-XX

1 2 3 4

BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE

A10P1

AY51-019-2

A9P7

AY51-016

A9P3 BROWN (16 AWG) RED (16 AWG) ORANGE (16AWG)

A10P3

SEE NOTE 7

AY51-009-1P

BRN/YEL ORN/BLK

AY51-073

Figure 6-14. Single-Phase 208 - 260 VAC Input (NonSTORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 25, 32 and 40 kW Interconnection Diagram


Revision W

6-21

Chapter 6 Diagrams MAIN GROUND STUD

AY51-066

ROTOR CABLE

A18,A1P5

G2

J2 J1

J4 J3

J7 J6

J9 J8 G2 E2

+ +

AY51-023

E1 G1

E1 G1

+

AY51-080

J2 J1


POWER MODULE

ANODE

AY51-128 (4X)

C7

C4

C6

C3

16 14 15 8

A17P1

SHIELD 7

FIL. SHIELD BLK FIL. LARGE


FILAMENT BOARD GROUND

8

7

6

4

3

2

5

48VDC 48VDCRTN 16

15

14

13

12

11

J1

A11P1

J5

30VDC 30VDC RTN

A11P5 (SEE NOTE 5)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

GRN/YEL

A16P1

AEC TABLE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS

A11P3 J3

ODYSSEY. AY10-005-1 ODYSEY TECHVISION

AY51-020

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST, AY10-005



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

AEC WALL 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

AY51-019-2

AY51-012 PCB DOOR GROUND STUD

10

A2P4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

AY51-018-XX

AY40-003S A2,A KVP BD. (SEE NOTE 5)

SC50-047T REV. H J2

AEC WALL 2

GRN/YEL A1P1

A11P2 J4

9

J5

AY51-019-2

8



J2

A2P3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

J4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

A5P2

7

J3


1

A1P6

8

A2P5

J6

4

3

2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10


9

BLACK/RED WHT/BLK

1

J3 A1P3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J8 1 2 3 4 5

8

AY51-011

A2P8

7



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

6

BROWN (22AWG) RED (22AWG) ORANGE (22AWG) YELLOW (22AWG) GREEN (22AWG) BLUE (22AWG) VIOLET (20AWG) GREY (20AWG) WHITE (22AWG) BLACK (22AWG) BLACK/ORANGE (22 AWG) WHITE/BROWN (22 AWG)

J1

ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE INPUT.

6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J2 V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED

40 AND 32 KW SYSTEMS CB1 MUST BE 50 AMP/3 POLES 25 KW SYSTEMS CB1 MUST BE 30AMP/ 3 POLES

7.

J1

AY51-013 BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT BLK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A1P10 A1P9


AY51-019-2 IS USED FOR AEC OPTION ONLY. NON AEC GENERATORS USE AY51-019-1

6.

4

24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BKY T. READY BKY W. READY DOOR SPARE TABLE RDY K2, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 0VAC 7.5VAC 15VDC 15VDC RTN

J7 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A2P7

5

RED GREEN/YELLOW BLACK GREEN/YELLOW BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE

5.

6

5

A2P1

AY51-017

WHT FIL.COMMON FIL. SMALL RED

CATH. FDBK CATH. RTN MA FDBK MA RTN ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK AY51-012

AY51-023 AY51-015

9

SHIELD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4

A1P4

AY51-008

A1P2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND 10 FROM GROUND AND

5

AY40-023T A9, INTERFACE BD. A8P4

4.

4

RED

A6P3

J9 A9P6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE MANUFACTURER OR MODEL. (SEE TUBE DATA SHEET)

3

J3 A6P2

J10

1 2

J6

AY51-004

J2


10

9

8

7

6

5

15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN 1

J4

4

VC-

3

2.4K

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2

VC+/2.4K

A8P2

RS 232 MASTER PORT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

DOOR INTERLOCK

TB6 DOOR INTERLOCK DOOR INTERLOCK RTN

J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

X - RAY ON 1 2

X-RAY IN USE X-RAY IN USE RTN

C3,C4,C6 AND C7 1UF 1500V

3.

3

J2

TB5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A1P8

3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

C9 THRU C16 2400UF 450VDC

2

WHITE (16AWG) BLACK (16AWG) VIOLET BLUE RED BROWN/YELLOW BLUE/YELLOW BLACK/RED

RS 232 SLAVE PORT

T.S.-2

GRN/YEL (16AWG) BLACK (16AWG) WHITE (16AWG)

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A9P2

AY51-005

J11

2- T.S.

AY51-017

2


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

6- T.S.

A5P1

J8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

T.S.-1

2.

HV MODULE

AY51-021

TO WALLSTAND

1- T.S.

MAS METER)

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


INNER- PHASE

5- T.S.

A11P4

A6P1 32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN

J5

220 VAC OUT T2 0 VAC OUT T2 120 VAC 0VAC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3- PHASE

A17P1-9 AND 10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR 1.5KE68CA A17 AY20-031

2

1 2 3 4 5 6

115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN

CENTER- MAIN

3- PHASE

1.

J1

A9P5

J1

A8P1

TO TABLE

TB4

J3

AY40-005T A6, POWER SUPPLY BD.

C1

1

(16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG)

BUCKY READY

J3 30UF/440VAC (SEE NOTE 3)

4- MAIN

CONNECT MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING

1

A8P6

BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK

GROUND

4


10

220 VAC IN 220 VAC IN 60VAC ROTOR 0 VAC ROTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OUTER- COMM.

2- MAIN

C5 AND C8 NOT USED

9

5 2 1 3

AY51-012

EMI FILTER

ROTOR DRIVE BD.

115 VAC BUCKY T. ON 115 VAC RTN

J4

10

(SEE NOTE 4)

AY51-018-XX

AY51-009-3P

AY20258 TMI

A

A10P3

11

LINE

TB3

9

GND

A10 AY40-013T

8

1 2 3 4 5 6

17 18

1 2 3

7

A9P4

19 20

J5

AY51-043 TO TUBE STAND

DUNLEE

PA2

C

T.S. T.S.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

6

6

COLL. READY 15V RTN 15VDC GROUND

PA1

6 A10P5

5

4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8

220 LINE

24 VDC 24 VDC RTN

PC2

5- COMM.

NOTES:

A10P4

J4

TB2

7

3

PC1

VARIAN

1- COMM.

A10TB1

TB1

6

220V 60V

9

1

120

BLK RED WHT

TO COLLIMATOR

5

8


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7


1 2 3

4

480VAC

15 7


4

6

0

32VAC BLK (16AWG) 0VAC BLK (16AWG) 16VAC BLK (16AWG) 0VAC BLK (16AWG) 11VAC BLK (16AWG) 0VAC BLK (16AWG) 28VAC BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) 0VAC BLK (16AWG) 28VAC BLK (16AWG) 0VAC BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)

J1

3

440VAC

VA -


2

5

2.4K

AY51-010

J1 220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC

1

7

J2

1 2 3 4

4

J3

A10P1


1 2 3 4

3

220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC

2

J7

TOSHIBA

7

AY20-047

9

J9 J8

+

AY51-079

A18

POWER MODULE


6

415VAC

280VAC

380VAC

4

8 16

4

3

2

RED/GREEN YELLOW/WHT ORN/BLK BRN/YEL 1

1

(SEE NOTE 2)

3

9 3

3

BLUE

C-

A18R1

1

2

7VAC 0VAC

-20VAC

A9P1

T2

J6

GRN/YEL (10AWG)

A+

2

1

TB1

4 5

AY40-022T-2 A8, LINE MONITOR BD.

-

A18QA

AY51-065

-

2

(SEE NOTE 7)

1 2 3 4


1 0VAC

0VAC

R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W

-

5

D1

1N4005

A9P7

AY51-016

A8P3

AY51-022-3P

AY20-047

+3 A18C2

CATHODE

T1

2

VA+/2.4K

2

DB1

A19

+

A18QB

(SEE NOTE 1)

~

1

AY51-065

DB2

LOAD

WHITE(20AWG) BLACK(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG)

C16

~

2

A19QA

1

3

A18C1

AY51-073

GRN/YEL (16AWG)


-

A19QB

LOAD

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

C15

A19C2

A19R1

-

+

X-RAY TUBE (SEE TUBE ROTOR CHART FOR ROTOR CONNECTION)

6

3.3/50W ALUM.

2

~

1 2 3 4

AY51-073

TB2

3 10 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 1

+3

+

A19C1

(SEE NOTE 1)

~

1

AY51-079 X4

YELLOW RED

~

1 2

J5 ANODE

IGBT DRIVE BD.

AY51-128 (4X)

BRN BLU BRN BLU AY20-147 R5, R6 4

3

5 6

8

7

9 10

1

D1 1N4005

2

K3

9

K1

AY51-075 (3X)

5

3 4

6

7 8

10

1

D2 1N4005

2

9

K2

C12 10

C13

+

+

8 7

3

AY51-066

~

5

AY51-127 (4X)

C11 +

6

G2 E2

+

OHM 50W

AY51-073 (2X)

4

3

C10

R4 A,B 50

AY51-079

LOAD

TB1 AY51-127 (4X)

AY51-088 (2X)

+

OHM 50W

AY25-001

1 2 3 4

C14

AY51-080

440VAC WHT BLK

L2

BLK WHT

LINE

LINE

N/C N/C

LOAD

CB1 (SEE NOTE 6)

C9 R3 A,B 50

J4 J3

3.15A SB

L1

G2

F2

AY51-007

440VAC

E2

3.15A SB

IGBT DRIVE BD. J7 J6

F1

A19,A1P5

J5 CATHODE

AY40-010T A3,B

E1 G1

AY51-058 X2


AY40-010T A3,A

E1 G1

WHT BLK RED BLUE

E2

GROUND TO HV TANK


Figure 6-15. Single-Phase 380 - 480 VAC Input (NonSTORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 25, 32 and 40 kW Interconnection Diagram


Revision W

6-22

Chapter 6 Diagrams GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) BLACK (20AWG) WHT (20AWG) BLUE (20AWG)

V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN OVER VOLTAGE FAULT FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED

3

R2A, R2B 50/50W FILAMENT BD. GROUND

BLK/RED WHT/BLK

AY51-004

A1P3 BLK/RED WHT/BLK

1 2 3 4

J3 33VDC 33VDC RTN

CONNECTION)

FOR ROTOR

ROTOR CHART

(SEE TUBE

X-RAY TUBE

G1

E1

G2 E2

C-

AY51-015

J2 J1

J4 J3

J7 J6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

A2P1

FIL.COMMON FIL. SMALL

WHT RED

C3, C6, 1UF 1500V

3.

C4,C7 .5UF 1500V

4.

C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE MANUFACTURER OR MODEL.

5.

DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND10 MAS METER TO THESE WIRES BE CONNECTED TO GROUND

6.

AY51-019-2 IS USED FOR AEC OPTION ONLY. NON AEC GENERATORS USE AY51-019-1.

7.

ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE.

DEPENDING ON TUBE (SEE TUBE DATA SHEET) FROM GROUND AND CONNECT (WARNING A17P1-9 AND 10 OR TO THE MAS METER.)

7

48VDC 48VDCRTN

8

6

5

4

3

1


2

6

16

15

14

13

12

9

8

11

10

7

6

5

4

AEC WALL 1

5

4

3

1

T.S.-2

C9, THRU C12, 2400 UF/ 450VDC

16 14 15

A17P1 FIL. SHIELD

SHIELD 7

CATH. FDBK CATH. RTN MA FDBK MA RTN ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK AY51-017

AY51-015

AY51-012

J4

A1P1 J1

2- T.S.

A11P2 J2

A11P1 A2P4

J5 AY40-003S A2, KVP BD.

T.S.-1

6- T.S.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14


J5

AY51-020

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

SC50-048T REV. K

A11P3 J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

AEC TABLE GRN/YEL

A11P5 A16P1 AY51-19-2

(SEE NOTE 6)

BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG) AY51-018-XX

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1- T.S.

J4

AEC WALL 2

A1P2 BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLK/ORN (22 AWG) WHT/BRN (22 AWG)

A2P5


1

AY51-011

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

INNER- PHASE

5- T.S.

AY51-019-2

2

A8P6


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

J8 GROUND +18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B

3

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

1

AY40-023T1 A9, INTERFACE BD.

1 2 3 4 5

4

AY51-005 A6P3

A8P5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

32VAC 32VACRTN 15VAC 15VACRTN 11VAC 11VACRTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN

A2P8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

3- PHASE

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J2

A1P9

2

J3

A9P2 WHITE BLACK VIOLET BLUE RED BRN/YEL BLU/YEL BLK/RED

J9

15VDC 15VDC 15VDCRTN 15VDCRTN -15VDC -15VDCRTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDCRTN 24VDCRTN

CENTER- MAIN

3- PHASE

J2

3

A6P1

24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLL. READY BUCKY T. BUCKY W. DOOR SPARE TABLE RDY K2, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 0VAC 7.5VAC 15VDC GROUND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

4- MAIN

A5P2

A2P3

4

J2

J1 32VAC 32VACRTN 15VAC 15VACRTN 11VAC 11VACRTN 28VAC 28VACRTN

AY51-008



5

A9P6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

J3

J1

6

J10 J4


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

7

(LOGIC BD.)

1 2 3 4


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

8

A6P2


0 VAC 110 VAC

A1P4

A2P7

A2P6

5

RS 232 MASTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J6

6

AY40-006S A1, CPU BD.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

OUTER- COMM.

2- MAIN

GRN/YEL (16AWG) WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)

7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2 4 3 1 5 6

9

SLAVE

GRN/YEL

J5

8

J8

DUNLEE

A11P4

TO WALLSTAND

J11 RS 232

AY51-017

3

GROUND 24 VDC 24 VDC RTN BUCKY READY

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

5- COMM.

A17 AY20-031 HV MODULE

2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1.5KE68CA

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TB4

A1P8

VARIAN

1- COMM.

A5P1

J1 SHIELD

A1P8

9

EL28-002

(SEE NOTE 4)

115 VAC BUCKY W.ON 115 RTN

7

A10P3

8

GROUND BUCKY READY

TO TABLE

7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 1 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

TOSHIBA

2.

6 5

A10P4

9

A9P5


6

J5 1 2 3

5

A10P5

AY51-043

9

A10TB1


TO TUBE STAND

10

8

19

60 VAC 0VAC

J4

J3

J4 220 VAC

TB1

2

AY40-013T A10, ROTOR DRIVE BD.

1.

A (SEE NOTE 5)

4

+15VDC GROUND

C

FIL. LARGE

CHASSIS GND TEMP. FAULT

PC1

BLK

J1

PA2

1 BLK 2 RED 3 WHT 4 5 6 T.S. 7 T.S.

9

7



18

1 2 3 4 5 6

BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)

16 17

220VAC 60 VAC 0 VAC

AY51-023

BLK (16AWG)

6

3

9

6

A9P4

14 15

2

J7

J6

2

1 2 3 4

TO COLLIMATOR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

NOTES:

PC2

AY51-010

A9P3

1 2 3

J6

J5

1

BROWN (16 AWG) RED (16 AWG) ORANGE (16AWG)

1 2 3 4

AY51-012

9


110/220 0VAC 0VAC SW. 110/220VAC SW.

BATT + A VA+/1.2K VC+/1.2K BATT + C 1.2K/ A 1.2K/ C

J9 J8

4

220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC

6

8

0VAC 7VAC

5

13

PA1

SEE NOTE 7

A8P2

R1B 1.2K/50W

130VAC

240VAC

10

1

5

A8P7

AY51-022-SE YELLOW (20AWG/600V) RED (20AWG/600V) BROWN (20AWG/600V) GREEN (20AWG/600V) 3

7

2

8

J1

A8P8 R4B 1.2K/50W

1 2 3 4

220VAC

3

2

1

220VAC

PCB DOOR GROUND GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG) STUD

60VAV 110VAC

12

5 6

4

STUD

GRN/YEL

4

J2

J1 0VAC 32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12


C4

ANODE POWER MODULE

C7

3

LINE

10 AMP

LOAD WHT LINE

3

0VAC 220VAC

AY51-039-SE

-10VAC 0VAC

2

J4

RTN RTN J8

T1

TB1

LOAD

LOAD

EL70-004

LOAD CB1 LINE BLK

10

11

(16AWG)

GND LINE

EL99-001

EMI FLT

A9P1 (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)

C3

1

AY20-047

AY51-018-XX

GRN/YEL GRN/YEL

X - RAY ON

1

BATT- A BATT- C VAVC-

RTN

2

A18R1 1

C6

CATHODE POWER MODULE

23

AY51-012

BRN GRY WHT BLK

1 2 3 9 10 11 4 12 5 6 13 14 7 15 8 16

1 2

22

-

A18QA

ROTOR CABLE AY20-047

TB5 X-RAY ON X-RAY ON RTN TB2 24 VDC TB6 24 VDC RTN DOOR DOOR COLL. READY

1 2

21

AY40-028T A8, LINE MONITOR/CHARGER BD.

ORN RED BLU VIO RED BLU

1

A10P1

DOOR INTERLOCK

R3A, R3B A8P4 50/50W

MAIN GROUND

GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) 23 21 22 20 BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) A8P1

A19QA

TB1

20

BLK 0VAC 32VAC BLK 0VAC BLK BLK 16VAC 0VAC BLK 11VAC BLK 0VAC BLK 28VAC 0VAC 28VAC

2

A19R1

24VAC COLL. 24VAC RTN GROUND

0VAC

0VAC

A19QB 1

J3

220 VAC 220 VAC 0 VAC 0 VAC

110/220 VAC

-

C1, 30UF/440VAC

GROUND TO HV TANK BROWN BLACK WHITE BUE RED GREY VIOLET ORANGE

(16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG)

-

-

A18QB

AY51-077

5

J7

BLK BLK BLK BLK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2

(SEE NOTES 2-3)

(SEE NOTES 2-3)

8


AY51-077

ORANGE BROWN GREY VIOLET

GRN

BLU RED

2

A9P7 BLACK (10AWG)

AY51-085


R4A 1.2K/50W

RED (10AWG)

3

GRN/YEL

+ 3 A19C2

4

1 2 3

RED

BLACK

R1A 1.2K/50W

_

2

A20 AY20-044

_

_

F1,F2 500VAC

_

+

1

30A SB

_

+

+

3 + A19C1

+ 3 A18C2

_

_

AY51-016

_

VIOLET RED (10AWG) ORANGE BLACK (10AWG) BROWN GREY

_

+

+ _

_

_

_

3 + A18C1

A+

AY51-076

_

AY51-076

AY51-128 (4X)

(SEE NOTE 1)

K1

C12

SHIELD

+

+

3

+

AY51-128 (4X)

+

+

1

+

A18,A1P5

BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE VIOLET GREY WHITE AY51-021

+

A19.A1P5

A19

1 2 3 4

A18 E1 G1

C10

1 2

+

+

9

_

D1

+

+

GRN/YEL (10AWG) GRN/YEL (20AWG) GRN/YEL (20AWG)

+ _

_

J5 IGBT DRIVE BD

C11

+

+

+ _

10

1 2 3 4

2

+ _

IGBT DRIVE BD

2

+ _

BLK(10AWG) AY51-133 (2X)

J5

A3,B AY40-010T

C9

AY51-023

BLK(10AWG)

J2 J1

RED(10AWG)

8 7

1

+

_

_

G1

_

_

E1

+

_

E2

+

_

_

(SEE NOTE 1)

+


_

J4 J3

6 5

_

_

A3,A AY40-010T

RED (20AWG) BLK (10AWG) RED(10AWG)

3

+

G2

+

J7 J6

+

J9 J8

+

E1 G1

+

+

G2 E2

+

G2 E2

4

AY51-127 (2X)

+

AY51-132 X2 RED(10AWG)

Figure 6-16. Single-Phase (STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generator, 20 kW Interconnection Diagram


Revision W

6-23

Chapter 6 Diagrams GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) BLK (20AWG)

A19R1 1

BLK/RED WHT/BLK

1 2 3 4

J3 33VDC 33VDC RTN

CONNECTION)

A+

FOR ROTOR

ROTOR CHART

AY51-128 (4X)

(SEE TUBE

X-RAY TUBE

G1

E1

G2 E2

C-

AY51-015

J2 J1

J7 J6 E1 G1

16 14 15 FIL.COMMON FIL. SMALL

WHT RED

A17P1

FIL. LARGE FIL. SHIELD

SHIELD 7

A2P1

DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND #10 FROM GROUND AND CONNECT THE MAS METER ACROSS THESE WIRES (WARNING A17P1-9 AND 10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR TO THE MAS METER.)

4.

AY51-019-2 AND AY51-020 ARE USED FOR AEC OPTION ONLY. NON AEC GENERATORS AY51-020 IS NOT INSTALLED

7

48VDC 48VDCRTN

8

6

5

4

3

2

1


C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE MANUFACTURER OR MODEL. (SEE TUBE DATA SHEET)

3.

AND AY51-019-2 IS REPLACED WITH AY51-019-1. 5.

ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE VOLTAGE.

6.

CAPACITORS VALUES: C3,C4,C4A,C6,C7,C7A FOR THE FAMILY OF SE GEN.

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

SE 4

C3

C4

32KW

1uF

0.5uF

1uF

0.5uF

40KW

1uF

1uF

1uF

1uF

50KW

1uF

1uF

1uF

1uF

GEN.

C4A

C6

C7

C7A

A11P2 J4

AEC WALL 1

J2

A11P1

AY51-020

J1 AY40-031S A11, AEC BD. (OPTIONAL)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

SC50-049T REV. U

A11P5 GRN/YEL

A16P1 AY51-19-2

0.25uF

A11P3

AEC WALL 2

SEE NOTE 4

0.25uF

J3

J5

AEC TABLE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1

5

BLK

CATH. FDBK CATH. RTN MA FDBK MA RTN ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK 1

C8, THRU C15, 2400 UF/ 450VDC.

6

J2

(SEE NOTE 4) AY51-018-XX


1. 2.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


AY51-004

R2A, R2B 50/50W

FILAMENT BD. GROUND

A1P3 BLK/RED WHT/BLK

J1

J5 AY40-003S A2, KVP BD.

A1P1

NOTES:


AY51-019-2

A2P4

J4

GRN/YEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16


J1

A5P2

A2P3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

A2P5

J3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J2 V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN OVER VOLTAGE FAULT FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10


AY51-013

5

BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLK/ORN (22 AWG) WHT/BRN (22 AWG)


4

1

A1P2

AY51-011

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J6

A2P6

2

A8P6

A2P8

A1P9


1 2 3 4

GRN/YEL (16AWG) WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)

A5P1

3

AY40-023T1 A9, INTERFACE BD.

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

2

32VAC 32VACRTN 15VAC 15VACRTN 11VAC 11VACRTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN

A2P7

AY51-017

4

AY51-005

A6P3

A8P5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLL. READY BUCKY T. BUCKY W. DOOR SPARE TABLE RDY K2, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 0VAC 7.5VAC 15VDC GROUND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J4

J9

T.S.-2

5

J3

WHITE BLACK VIOLET BLUE RED BRN/YEL BLU/YEL BLK/RED

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J2

J10

AY51-008


A1P8

DUNLEE


6

32VAC 32VACRTN 15VAC 15VACRTN 11VAC 11VACRTN 28VAC 28VACRTN

A9P2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

(LOGIC BD.)

2- T.S.

1.5KE68CA

7

A6P1

0 VAC 110 VAC

A1P4

RS 232 MASTER


T.S.-1

6- T.S.

J1

J8

SLAVE

1- T.S.

8

A9P6

J11 RS 232

INNER- PHASE

5- T.S.

A11P4

J5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

CENTER- MAIN

3- PHASE

3


TO WALLSTAND

4- MAIN

3- PHASE

2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2- MAIN

6

J1

2 4 3 1 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TB4 115 VAC BUCKY W.ON 115 RTN

6 5 2 1 3 4

BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE VIOLET GREY WHITE AY51-021

A1P8

OUTER- COMM.

1


15VDC 15VDC 15VDCRTN 15VDCRTN -15VDC -15VDCRTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDCRTN 24VDCRTN J2

60 VAC 0VAC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

(SEE NOTE 2)

J4 220 VAC

A10P4

A10P3

EL28-002

5- COMM.

7

A6P2

BUCKY READY

J6


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

GROUND

TO TABLE

VARIAN

1- COMM.

9

9

A9P5

J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TOSHIBA

SEE NOTE 3

AY51-017

1 2 3

AY51-043


X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART 10

8

19

1 2 3 4 5 6

J4

C A

A10TB1


J5

A10P5

1

2


18

1

J2

BLK (16AWG)


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

TB1

TO TUBE STAND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

+15VDC GROUND

PA2 PC1

9

7

(16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)

A9P4

14 15

60VAV

AY51-022-SE

J6

BATT- A BATT- C VAVC-

0VAC 7VAC

9

16 17

240VAC

9

6

8

6

SEE NOTE 5

10

1

5

5

220VAC

6

A8P7 3

4

7

2

130VAC

13

5

110/220 0VAC 0VAC SW. 110/220VAC SW.

J7

110VAC

1 2 3 4

3

YELLOW (20AWG/600V) RED (20AWG/600V) BROWN (20AWG/600V) GREEN (20AWG/600V)

4

J5

3

J1

1 BLK 2 RED 3 WHT 4 5 6 T.S. 7 T.S.

3


1

LINE

10 AMP

LOAD WHT LINE

LOAD

LOAD

EL70-004

LOAD CB1 LINE BLK LINE

GRN/YEL 8

BATT + A VA+/1.2K VC+/1.2K BATT + C 1.2K/ A 1.2K/ C

A8P2

R1B 1.2K/50W

R4B 1.2K/50W

-10VAC 0VAC

3

J1

PCB DOOR GROUND STUD GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)

12

1

220VAC

11

TB1

J4

AY51-039-SE

BLK 0VAC 32VAC BLK 0VAC BLK 16VAC BLK 0VAC BLK BLK 11VAC 0VAC BLK 28VAC 0VAC 28VAC

10

T1

(16AWG)

GND

EL99-001

EMI FLT

A9P1

A8P8 R4A 1.2K/50W

J1 AY40-013T A10, ROTOR DRIVE BD.

23

0VAC 220VAC

RTN RTN J8

RTN

X - RAY ON

3

2

1 1 2 3 9 10 11 4 12 5 6 13 14 7 15 8 16

22

2

0VAC

1 2

21

AY51-012

GRN/YEL GRN/YEL

DOOR INTERLOCK

AY40-028T A8, LINE MONITOR/CHARGER BD.

BLU RED

BRN GRY WHT BLK

STUD

MAIN GROUND

GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) 23 21 22 20 BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) ORN RED BLU VIO RED BLU

TB5 X-RAY ON X-RAY ON RTN TB2 24 VDC TB6 24 VDC RTN DOOR DOOR COLL. READY

1 2

20

R3A, R3B A8P4 50/50W 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A8P1

R1A 1.2K/50W


TO COLLIMATOR

C1, 30UF/440VAC

GROUND TO HV TANK BROWN BLACK WHITE BLUE RED GREY VIOLET ORANGE

GRN


220VAC 60 VAC 0 VAC

2

1 2 3 4

A10P1

0VAC

ROTOR CABLE

PA1 PC2

AY51-010

A9P3

1 2 3

24VAC COLL. 24VAC RTN GROUND

110/220 VAC

C4A

C7A

TB1 220 VAC 220 VAC 0 VAC 0 VAC

C4

1

AY20-047 ANODE POWER MODULE

C7 AY20-047 CATHODE POWER MODULE

BROWN (16 AWG) RED (16 AWG) ORANGE (16AWG)

1 2 3 4

C3

A18R1 1


220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC J3

BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)

2

A18QA

SHIELD

BLK (10AWG) GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG)

1

SEE NOTE 1

C6

-

SEE NOTE 6

8

A9P7

J7 GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG)

C11

2

-

AY51-015

BLACK

-

A19QA

2

A18QB

SHIELD

GRN/YEL

-

C15 AY51-076

SEE NOTE 6

AY51-023

1 2 3

RED

2

A19QB

+ 3 A18C2

AY51-018-XX

RED

_

+ 3 A19C2

3 + A18C1

AY51-012

AY51-085

A21 AY20-044

+ _

3 + A19C1

+

+ _

SEE NOTE C10 1

AY51-077

+ _

_

AY51-016

+ _

_


_

C14

4

_

3

_

2

BLACK

+ _

1 2 3

GRN/YEL

_

1

AY51-085 RED

+ _

_

_

RED (6AWG) ORANGE RED (6AWG) BLACK (6AWG) BROWN GREY VIOLET BLACK (6AWG)

_

F1,F2 500VAC

A20 AY20-044

_

_

+

+

+ _

_

_

30A SB

_

+

+ _

_

30A SB

+

_

F1, F2 500VAC

_

_

+

AY51-076

_

G2 E2

A19,A1P5

A19

D1

A18

AY51-012

+

+

+

C9

1 2

1 2 3 4

A18,A1P5

C13

+

+

+

9

K1

_

J5 IGBT DRIVE BD

9

+

+

+

_

_

10

+

9

+

_

BLK(6AWG) AY51-133 (2X)

1 2 3 4

IGBT DRIVE BD

8

+

+

_

_

+

J5

A3,B AY40-010T

C8

+

RED(6AWG)

7

7

_

+

+

_

6

+

+

_

_

5

+

_

_

+

_

8

+

+

_

+

_

4

_

+

+

_

7

+

_

+

+

_

_

3

_

_

+

_

6

+

_

2

+

+

_

5

_

+

_

G2 E2

+

+

_

_

+


_

AY51-023

BLK(6AWG)

8

5

_

_

J9 J8

C12 6

4

+

+

3

+

2

+

+

AY51-128 (4X)

+

J2 J1

+

+

G1

+

J4 J3

+

E1

+

G2 E2

+

+

J7 J6

+

J9 J8

+

RED(6AWG)

3

E1 G1

+

A3,A AY40-010T

+

AY51-132 (2X) 4 RED(6AWG)

J4 J3

WHT (20AWG) BLK (6AWG) RED (20AWG)

BLU (20AWG)

Figure 6-17. Single-Phase (STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 32, 40 and 50 kW Interconnection Diagram


Revision W

6-24

Chapter 6 Diagrams

MAIN GROUND

STUD GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG)

GROUND TO HV TANK WHITE BLACK BLUE RED

AY51-011 BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLACK/ORANGE (22 AWG) WHITE/BROWN (22 AWG)

AY51-080

J2 J1

J4 J3 G2 E2

E1 G1

E1 G1

ROTOR CABLE

G2 E2

J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN MISSING PHASE FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED

AY51-023

16 14


15 8

FIL. LARGE

FIL.COMMON FIL. SMALL

7 SHIELD

WHT WHT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

A1P1

A2P5

J5

AY40-003S A2, KVP BD. J4

C3, C4 ,C6 AND C7 1UF/1500VAC C5 AND C8 ARE NOT INSTALLED.

3.

C9 THRU C16, 2400UF/450VDC

4.

DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND 10 FROM GROUND AND CONNECT THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING A17P1-9 AND 10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR MAS METER.)

5.

C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE MANUFACTURER OR MODEL (SEE TUBE DATA BASE)

6.

32 AND 40KW GENERATORS CB1 MUST BE 30 AMP. 50KW GENERATORS CB1 MUST BE 50 AMP.

7.

AY51-019-2 IS USED FOR AEC OPTION ONLY. NON AEC GENERATORS USE AY51-019-1.

8.


AEC WALL 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

A2P4

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

AY51-020


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

SC50-052T REV. T

A11P3 J3

J1

J5

AEC TABLE

A11P1

A11P5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

GRN/YEL

A16P1

AY51-019-2

TO OCP ASSEMBLY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

(SEE NOTE 7)

DOOR GROUND GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)

T.S.-2

2.

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1


48VDC 48VDCRTN

FIL. SHIELD BLK

6

5

J1

4

A2P1

AY51-017

3

2

1

AY51-012

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

9

AY51-021

9

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10


AEC WALL 2

A1P2

2- T.S.

1

AY51-012

T.S.-1

6- T.S.

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W

AY51-066

1 2 3 4

INNER- PHASE

1- T.S.

A11P2 J2

2

33VDC 33VDC RTN


3- PHASE

5- T.S.

J4

2

BLACK/RED WHT/BLK

J3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


3

A1P3

J7 1 2 3 4

A1P9 A1P5

OCP ON RS-485 RS-485 EXP. PREP 28VDC GND 28VDC GND J5

3- PHASE

A1P3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

3


A2P7

J3


4

X-RAY ON RTN X-RAY ON

J8 1 2 3 4 5

4

1 2

J9

CENTER- MAIN

J2

5

TB5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A5P2

5

X - RAY ON

DOOR DOOR RTN

A2P8

A1P10


A1P6

5

TB6 1 2

J10

J6

4

INTERLOCK

24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BUCKY T. READY BUCKY W. READY DOOR INTERLOCK SPARE TABLE RDY K2, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 0VAC 7.5VAC 15VDC GROUND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

6

DOOR


4- MAIN

1.

J1


7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

8

32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN

RS 232 MASTER PORT

OUTER- COMM.

2- MAIN

A11P4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


3

AY51-005

A1P4

A1P8

GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG) A5P1

2

AY51-008

AY51-017

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10


A9P6


J3

J8

DUNLEE

NOTES:

9

A6P2

J11

5- COMM.

1.5KE68CA

6

A6P3

J2

J6

J2

5 2 1 3

7

J3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10


TO WALLSTAND

VARIAN

1- COMM. 6

A10P3

C1, 30UF/440VAC (SEE NOTE 5)

TOSHIBA

9

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A9P2 1 WHITE (16AWG) 2 BLACK (16AWG) 3 VIOLET 4 BLUE 5 RED 6 BROWN/YELLOW 7 BLUE/YELLOW 8 BLACK/RED

220 VAC OUT 0 VAC OUT 120 VAC 0VAC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10

4

AY51-015


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

AY51-012

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J5


A

8

A8P4

ROTOR DRIVE BD.

A10

J1 J4

J7 J6

J9 J8 + +

AY51-079

J2 J1

J4 J3

J7 J6

+

AY40-013T

TO TABLE

PA2

9

VC-

AY40-53S2 A8, LINE MONITOR BD.


PA1

C

AY51-018-XX

2.4K

10

A8P2

9

J2

VC+/2.4K

8

VA -

1 2 3 4 5 6

AY51-004

7

2.4K

A8P5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

6

VA+/2.4K

BLK

5


RED(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG)

A8P1


J1


BLK BLK

4

J6 24VRTN K2 24V K2 24VRTN K3 24V K3

A9P5

A6P1

3

J5 4 3 2 1

BLK


PHASE C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2

PHASE B PHASE N.

A8P6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

PHASE A

1

INCOM. LINE INCOM. LINE WHITE(20AWG) BLACK(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG) RED/GREEN YELLOW/WHITE ORN/BLK BRN/YEL

J3 PHASE C,IN PHASE A,IN

(16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG)

PC2

A10P4

15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDCRTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN

TB4 BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK

A8P3 8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9

GROUND 220 VAC IN 220 VAC IN 60VAC ROTOR BUCKY READY 0 VAC ROTOR

10

GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


J5 1 2 3

8

LINE LOAD

GRN/YEL (16AWG)

+15VDC GROUND

A10P5

AY51-043

7

TB2

COLL. READY

6

12

11

LINE

C3

AY51-128 (4X)

PC1

TO TUBE STAND

GRN/YEL

AY20258 TMI

11

1 2 3 4 5 6

17 18

LOAD

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

5

EMI FLT

J4

C4

C6

A10TB1

J4

TB2 24 VDC 24 VDC RTN

4

220

10

A9P4

C7

(SEE NOTE 4)

TB3

6 19 20

TB1

3

4


2

7

9

J1

TO COLLIMATOR

1

6

480

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 BLK 2 RED 3 WHT 4 5 6 T.S. 7T.S.


440

8

1 AND 2)

9

7

0 60 120

15 7


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

A10P1

TB1 24 VAC COLL. 24 VAC .RTN GROUND

9

5

ANODE


8

415

4

0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC

(16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG)

AY51-010

8

6

8 16

BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK

220VAC 60 VAC 0 VAC

1 2 3 4

7

380

3

32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC

J3

1 2 3 4

6

2

1 2 3 4

5

4

T1 PHASE C

220

3

1 2 3 4

A9P1

1

0

POWER MODULE

1

T2

7

285

AY51-071 (3X)


9

2

220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC

J7

1

5 (SEE NOTE 8)

RED (20AWG) YELLOW (20AWG)

480


A9P7

AY51-016

4

6

(SEE NOTE

A18

7

440

1

BLK (10AWG) BLK (10AWG) BLK (8AWG)

3

5

1

6

415

C-

AY51-128 (4X)

5

4

CATHODE

4

3

380

POWER MODULE

3

285

(SEE NOTE 3)

2

2

A19

- 2

A18QA A18R1

RS 232 SLAVE PORT

220

+

1

1

A19R1

2

0

1

A18C2

A18QB

1

7

DB2

A19QA

A+

+ 3

2

-

1

480

(SEE NOTE 3)

3 A18C1

C16 AY51-065

6

A19QB


1 2 3 4

AY20-047

+

BLK(16AWG)

5

440

- 2

BLK(16AWG)

415

DB2

AY51-127 (4X)

~ -

A19C2

2

AY51-066

4

C12

J5

A18,A1P5

C14

C15

~

+ 3

A19C1

~ -

1 2

+

380

10 9

K1


3

T1 PHASE A

2

285

D3 1N4005

BRN BLU ORN 4

AY51-069 (3X)

3

5 6

7 8

10

9

1

D1 1N4005

2

K3

220

T1 PHASE B

3 4

6

8

5

7

9 10

1

2

D2 1N4005

AY20-146 R8 R9 R10 3.3/50W ALUM.

BRN BLU ORN

7

K2

3

+

+

~

A19,A1P5

~ +

C11

8

C13

E1 G1

5

NEUTRAL 0 1

IGBT DRIVE BD, ANODE

1 2 3 4

AY51-073 (2X)

AY20-047

G2 E2

~ +

6

C10

G2 E2

4 3

AY51-068 (3X)

J9 J8

50W

AY51-073 (2X)

J5

E1 G1

AY25-001

C9

AY51-080

440VAC

IGBT DRIVE BD,CATHODE +

3.15A SB

R3 A,B 50 OHM 50W R4 A,B 50 OHM

AY51-065

LOAD

LOAD

N N

440VAC

+

B L2

F2

3.15A SB

AY51-079

BLK16AWG WHT16AWG

LINE

LINE

LINE

CB1 (SEE NOTE 6)

TB1

C L3 LOAD

GRN/YEL (10AWG) GRN/YEL (16AWG)

F1

AY51-007 A L1

WHT BLK16AWG

AY51-074 (3X)

FILAMENT BD. GROUND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY AY10-005-1 ODYSEY TECHVISION AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS

AY51-018-XX

Figure 6-18. Three-Phase (380-480) Input (32, 40 and 50 kW without High Speed Starter) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram


Revision W

6-25



GROUND TO HV TANK WHT BLK BLUE RED

DOOR GROUND

BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLK/ORN (22 AWG) WHT/BRN (22 AWG)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON/OFF 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN MISSING PHASE FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED

J2 J1

J4 J3 G2 E2

E1 G1

ROTOR CABLE

8 15

WHT FIL.COMMON 16 14 RED FIL. SMALL

FIL. SHLD BLK FIL. L.

7 SHIELD


AY51-023

9

J1

A2P1 6

5

4

3

2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

A1P1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A2P5

15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN J5

AY40-003S A2, KVP BD.

J4

8

48VDC 48VDCRTN

7

6

5

4

3

2


1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

A2P4

16

15

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

J2


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

SC50-050T REV. N

A11P3 J3

J1

A11P1

J5

A11P5

AY51-019-2


6

A11P2 J4

AEC WALL 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


AY51-019-2

5

J7 1 2 3 4


1

AY51-017

AY51-021

AY51-012

A2P7


14

7

6

5

4

3

2

8 8

7

6

9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

GRN/YEL

AEC TABLE

(SEE NOTE 6)

FILAMENT BD. GROUND AY51-018-XX

A16P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

AY10-005-1 ODYSEY TECHVISION AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS


AY51-011

J2

AY51-019-2 IS USED FOR AEC OPTION ONLY. NON AEC GENERATORS USE AY51-019-1. ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE INPUT.

TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY.

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

A1P2

6.

J1

AEC WALL 2

2.4K

AY51-012

C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE MANUFACTURER OR MODEL (SEE TUBE DATA BASE)

9

A8P4


1 2 3 4 5

9

A6P2 VC+/2.4K


1 2 3 4

5.

J2

8

33VDC 33VDC RTN

J8

A1P9

A5P2 A1P3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

8

J3

A2P8

J9

A1P6

7

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

BLACK/RED WHT/BLK

AY51-004

VA -

VC-

E1 G1

G2 E2

AY51-066

+

A1P3

J3

7


J6

A1P10

6


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

6

1 2


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

J10 RS 232 MASTER PORT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

5

TB5

X - RAY ON

J4

J8


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

4

DOOR DOOR RTN

A1P4

FROM GROUND AND DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND 10 CONNECT THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING A17P1-9 AND 10 MUST CONNECTED TO GROUND OR MAS METER.)

GRN/YEL (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG)

AY51-017

4

TB6 1 2

AY51-008

RED GREEN/YELLOW BLACK GREEN/YELLOW BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GRAY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE


4.


5

A6P3

INTERLOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

C5 AND C8 ARE NOT INTALLED

3.

7.

3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J11

A9P6

J6


1.5KE68CA

2

J2

TO WALLSTAND

5


2.

A5P1 J1

A1P8 4

220 VAC OUT 0 VAC OUT 120 VAC 0VAC

C3, C4 ,C6 AND C7 1UF/1500VAC.

9

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J3

ROTOR DRIVE BD.

C1, 30UF/440VAC (SEE NOTE 5) 115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

10

6 5 2 1 3 4

A10P3

2.4K

J4

J7 J6

J9 J8

AY51-080

+ +

J2 J1

J4 J3 G2 E2

E1 G1

G2 E2

AY51-066

A10

1.

A11P4

A9P2 1 WHITE (16AWG) 2 BLACK (16AWG) 3 VIOLET 4 BLUE 5 RED 6 BROWN/YELLOW 7 BLUE/YELLOW 8 BLACK/RED

A

4

J2

AY40-013T

TO TABLE

PA2

3

AY51-005

PA1


1 2 3 4 5 6

PC2

3

R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W

J3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

T.S.-2

2

AY51-007

VA+/2.4K

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12



A8P2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

GROUND 220 VAC IN 220 VAC IN 60VAC ROTOR 0 VAC ROTOR BUCKY READY

DOOR 48VDC 48VDC 48VDCRTN 48VDCRTN 30VDC 30VDC 30VDCRTN 30VDCRTN 15VDC 15VDCRTN

2- T.S.

1

J2 A8P1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

T.S.-1

6- T.S.

2


1- T.S.

1

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

INNER- PHASE

5- T.S.

C3

AY51-020

AY51-009-3P

A8P5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3- PHASE

C4

C6

C

AY51-015



BLK


4 3 2 1

A6P1 32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN

CENTER- MAIN

3- PHASE

C7

AY51-128(4X)

PC1

AY51-012

J5

A8P6

A9P5

BLK

4- MAIN

NOTES:

AY51-018

PHASE C

J4

1 2 3

GRN/YEL

PHASE B

2- MAIN

A10P4

15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDCRTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN

TB4 (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG)

BLK BLK

5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8

AY51-043

J5

3

BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK

2

INCOM. LINE INCOM. LINE

AY51-022-3P

WHITE(20AWG) BLACK(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG) RED/GREEN YELLOW/WHITE ORN/BLK BRN/YEL

PHASE N. PHASE A

+15VDC GROUND

10

AY20-258 TMI


COLL. READY

A10P5

9

LINE LOAD GND

GRN/YEL (16AWG)

OUTER- COMM.

1 AND 2

TO TUBE STAND

2

11

LOAD LINE

12

1 2 3 4 5 6

17 18

EMI FLT

11

5- COMM.

(SEE NOTE 4) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

9

220

120 60

10

VARIAN

1- COMM.

A10TB1

J4


TB3

A9P4

19 20

TB1


6

4 280


DUNLEE

TOSHIBA SEE NOTE

1 BLK 2 RED 3 WHT 4 5 6 T.S. 7T.S.

J1

TO COLLIMATOR

8

7

9

15 7

1 2 3

220

240

8

0


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 3

8

4

5 5A 6


A10P1

TB1 24 VAC COLL. 24 VAC .RTN GROUND

7

220

ANODE


7

5

8 16


J3

220VAC 60 VAC 0 VAC

1 2 3 4

6

3


AY51-010

5

208

6 7

8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9



220 220 240 280

4

E1 G1

1 2 3 4


1 2 3 4

1

9

T1 PHASE C

SEE NOTE 7

AY51-078 X3

RED YELLOW

2

J7 J6

J9 J8

1 2 3 4

A9P1

1 198

POWER MODULE



T2

3

A18

1

AY51-016

0

2

220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC

J7

C-

1

AY51-128(4X)

A9P7

7

1

A+

2 BLK (10AWG) 2 BLK (10AWG) 2 BLK (8AWG)

6

TB2

1

4

5A

- 2

A18QA

(SEE NOTE 3)

CATHODE

POWER MODULE

FOR ROTOR CONNECTION)

A18R1

6

4 5

A19

A18C2

2

-

ROTOR CHART

+ 3

A18QB

3

220

A19R1

C16

3 A18C1

5

3

1

DB1

X-RAY TUBE (SEE TUBE

+

4

208

1 (SEE NOTE 3)

~

3

2

A19QA

A18,A1P5

RS 232 SLAVE PORT

198

-

- 2

A19QB

2

1

DB2

2

-

~

1

0

~

A19C2

A19C1

2

7

C12

-

AY51-127 (4X)

+

+ 3

1 2 3 4

AY20-047

C15

1

280

1 2

3

C14

BLK(16AWG)

220 4 220 5 220 5A 240 6

~

9

K1

+

~

BLK(16AWG)

3

D3 1N4005

2

T1 PHASE A

198 208

T1 PHASE B

BRN BLU ORN 4

AY20-146 R8 R9 R10 3.3/50W ALUM.

BRN BLU ORN

3 4 3 6

5

6

5

7 8

10 10

1

2

D1 1N4005

9

K3

7

1

2

D2 1N4005

8

9

K2

AY51-075 (3X)

RED YELLOW

10

C11

A19,A1P5

AY51-072 (2X)

AY20-047

J5


C13

+

+

7

1 2 3 4

AY51-065

8

NEUTRAL 1

+

0

C10

~

5

AY51-080

AY51-072 (2X)

6

J5

+

50W

4

3

AY51-088 (3X)

C9

50W R4 A,B 50 OHM

AY51-066

AY25-001

IGBT DRIVE BD,CATHODE

R3 A,B 50 OHM

+

440VAC

+

LOAD

LOAD

N L4

440VAC

3.15A SB

AY51-066

B L2

3.15A SB

AY51-065

BLK16AWG WHT16AWG

LINE

LINE

LINE

F2

C L3 LOAD

CB1

50 AMP/3P


F1

TB1

A L1

WHT BLK16AWG

AY51-007

AY51-058 (3X)

Figure 6-19. Three-Phase (208-240) Input (32, 40 and 50 kW without High Speed Starter) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram


Revision W

6-26


GROUND TO HV TANK

GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) WHT BLK BLUE RED

CONNECTION)

FOR ROTOR

ROTOR CHART

CA+

(SEE TUBE

G2 E2

E1 G1

E1 G1

2- T.S.

T.S.-2

ROTOR CABLE

WHT FIL.COMMON RED FIL. SMALL

H7 BLK

PHASE

MAIN

COMM

H8 RED

T.S. T.S.

H9 WHT

AY51-023

AY51-015

16 14 15

C5 AND C8, .5 UF/1500VAC.

3.


4.

DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND 10 AND CONNECT THE MAS METER TO THESE

5.

50 KW GENERATOR STANDARD HV MODULE

6.

AY51-019-2 IS USED FOR AEC OPTION ONLY, AY51-019-1

7.

DIGITAL GENERATOR, AY40-023T IS REPLACED WITH AY40-034T. AY51-089 CABLE IS USED WITH AY40-034T BD. ONLY FOR

8.


IS AY30-031 125 KV NON AEC GENERATORS USE

TO

AY51-033

GND

GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG)

AY51-017

A5P1

A2P1

J2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

A1P1

A2P5

J5


J4

8

48VDC 48VDCRTN

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

L BLK,

RED, S WHT, C GROUND

6

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

A11P4

5


AY51-019-2

J4

A11P2 J2


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

A2P4

A11P1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

SC50-054T REV. U

A11P3 J3

J1 J5

A11P5

AEC WALL 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

GROUND +18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

AEC WALL 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4

J8 1 2 3 4 5


J2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

GRN/YEL

AEC TABLE 9


3

MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK CATH RTN CATH FDBK

A2P8

A5P2 A2P3

8

A1P9

GROUND +18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B

J1

9


J7 1 2 3 4

A2P6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J3 A2P7

A1P5

J1 BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLACK/ORANGE (22 AWG) WHITE/BROWN (22 AWG)

J6


8

J9

SHIELD SHIELD

A1P10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2

1



SHLD

ORN 9

8

7

6

5

RED BRN GRN

J11

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

6

J3

J1

7

1 2 3 4

A1P8

A16P1

AY51-012


X-RAY TUBE

J2 J1

J4 J3

J7 J6

J9 J8

AY51-066

+

30VDC 30VDC RTN

A1P2 DOOR GROUND

T.S.-1

6- T.S.

DO NOT INSTALL C5 AND C8 IN 50KW GENERATORS.

200VAC

6


(SEE NOTE 5)

AY51-011

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1- T.S.

C3, C4, C6 AND C7 1UF/1500VAC

L2

5

J1

INNER- PHASE

5- T.S.

2.

L1

4

VC-

G2 E2

+

E1 G1

J4

A1P3 A8P4


RS 232 SLAVE PORT


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A6P2 J4

3- PHASE

240VAC

AID ROTOR CONTROLLER MODEL LC102

1.5KE68CA

J8

A1P4

RED GREEN/YELLOW BLACK GREEN/YELLOW BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GRAY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE

BLACK/RED WHT/BLK

3

3

(SEE NOTE 7) A9, INTERFACE BD.

AY40-023T

2

2


P/O TB2

4

9

1

5

1 2

7 8

TS2

4

TB5

CENTER- MAIN

3- PHASE

WALL

A9P6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

P/O TB1

3

X - RAY ON

DOOR DOOR RTN

AY51-017

J10

AY51-008

TB6 1 2

DIGITAL

AY40-034 D.R. CONFIGURATION (SEE NOTE 7)

VC+/2.4K 2.4K

AY51-080

+

J2 J1

J4 J3

J7 J6 J6

TO RECEPTOR

RED

1 2 3 4

2


4- MAIN

DIGITAL GENERATOR WITH STANDARD AEC.

2

10

9

8

7

6

5

VA -

4

2.4K

A6P3

DOOR INTERLOCK

J2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 9 6 9

GRN

1 2

1

J3 J2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A9P2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BLK

1 2

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

WHITE (16AWG) BLACK (16AWG) VIOLET BLUE RED BROWN/YELLOW BLUE/YELLOW BLACK/RED

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

5 9

1

R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W

A8P2


AY51-005

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN

BRN ORN

AY51-020

A8P1

J2

VA+/2.4K

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AY51-004

3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10


220V OUT 0 VAC OUT 120 VAC 0VAC

4

AY51-012

J6


2

A8P6

24VRTN K2 24V K2 24VRTN K3 24V K3

1

4 3 2 1

J1

A8P5

WALL 1 BUCKY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


5 2 1 3

TABLE

TB7

TO

J5

6

RECEPTOR

AY51-018-XX

J5


BLK

CH. GND GND BUCKY READY

BUCKY

DIGITAL

9

GRN/YEL

PHASE C

220V IN 220V IN 60V ROTOR 0V ROTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


A 10

(SEE NOTE 4)

4

1 2 3 4 5 6


PHASE B

TABLE

PA2

C

TO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

PA1

3

A9P5

BLK BLK

5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8

TO

TB4 BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)


PHASE C,IN PHASE A,IN

PHASE N. PHASE A

J4

10

LOAD

+15VDC GROUND

TB3 PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN

PC2

2

1 2 3 4 5 6

LINE

GND

COLL. READY

PC1 BLU VIO GRY WHT AY51-089

FIL. SHIELD 8 BLK FIL. LARGE

LINE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

OUTER- COMM.

2- MAIN

1.

YEL

1

A9P4

17 18

TO TUBE STAND


TB3

6

11

1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

BLK

4


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J3 8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9

G2 E2

+


19 20

BLK


AY51-022-3P

7

60 120

1 2 3

LOAD

AY51-007


0

BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)


15 7

EMI FLT

9

GRN/YEL (16AWG)


6

220

10

A8P3

9

8 16

8

12


T2

COLL.

TB1 24 VAC COLL. 24 VAC RTN GROUND

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TO

9

6 7

440

A9P1

J3

DUNLEE

TO MAS METER.)

C3

8

5


A9P8 BRN

9

4

415

AY51-016

A9J8

8

380

5

1 2 3 4

5- COMM.

WIRES. (WARNING A17P1-9 AND 10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR

C6

1 2 3 4

BLU VIO GRY WHT

4

AY51-128 (6X) C4

220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC

7

3

3

ANODE

C5

A9P7

7

2

285

POWER MODULE

C7 AND 2)

GRN

220

A18QA

C8 NOTE 1

AY51-128(6X)

6

2

11

AY51-009-3P

BLK (10AWG) BLK (10AWG) BLK (8AWG) J7

VARIAN

1- COMM.

NOTES:

1

A18

(SEE NOTE 3)

5

1

CATHODE

4

1

0

2

TOSHIBA

A18R1

6

7

-

-

1

5

6

480

2

A18QB

4

440

A18C2

C16

3

5

POWER MODULE

A18C1

RS 232 MASTER PORT

415

A19

+3

(SEE

T1 PHASE B

4

DB1

1

A19R1

(SEE NOTE 3)

3

380

A19QA

1


+

2

~

+

CATH. FDBK CATH. RTN MA FDBK MA RTN ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK SHIELD 7

220

A19QB

C12

2

AY51-089

1

-

BRN

7

0

DB2

-

3

480

~

2

C15

-

2

6

-

K1

A19C2

1 2 3 4

AY20-047

3

~

1

440

AY51-127 (4X)

A19C1

J5

A18,A1P5

+

2

5

1 2

+ 3

AY51-079

AY51-065

4

415

~

9

D3 1N4005

380

480

T1 PHASE A

3

C11

C14

~

1

AY51-071 X3 (SEE NOTE 8)

RED YELLOW

285

285

TB2

2

T1 PHASE C

AY20-146 R8,R9,R10 3.3/50W ALUM.

220

+

3

+

7

AY51-066

BRN BLU ORN 4

6

8

10

1

1N4005

2

D1

NEUTRAL 1

10

AY51-069 (3X)

3

BRN BLU ORN

4

3

5 5

6

7 7

9

K3

8

10

9

1

2

D2 1N4005

0

+

~

8


C13

AY20-047

+

AY51-068(3X)

AY51-079

1 2 3 4

AY51-073 (2X) G2 E2

3 5

K2

J9 J8

C10

6

J5

A19,A1P5

AY51-073 (2X)

4

N L4


C9

G1

AY25-001

R3 A,B 50 OHM 50W R4 A,B 50 OHM 50W

E1

440VAC

AY51-080

440VAC

3.15A SB 3.15A SB

AY51-065

LOAD

F2

+

BLK 16AWG WHT 16AWG

LINE

LINE

B L2 C L3

LOAD

CB1

50

AMP/3P LINE LOAD


F1

AY51-007

TB1

A L1

WHT BLK16AWG

AY51-074 X3

AY51-019-2

FILAMENT BD. GROUND

(SEE NOTE 6)

TO OCP ASSEMBLY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


AY51-018-XX

Figure 6-20. Three-Phase (50, 65 and 80 kW with AID High Speed Starter) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram


Revision W

6-27


GROUND TO HV TANK


J2 J1

J4 J3

J7 J6

J9 J8

+

J2 J1

J4 J3

J7 J6

AY51-080

G2 E2 2

A18QA

+

A18R1 1

+

1 ANODE POWER MODULE

(SEE NOTE 3)

A18

14 16 15 FIL. SHIELD 8 BLK FIL. LARGE

1- T.S.

T.S.-1

6- T.S.

2- T.S.

T.S.-2

C3, C4, C6 AND C7 1UF/1500VAC,

C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE MODEL (SEE TUBE DATA SHEET)

3.


4.

DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND 10 AND CONNECT (WARNING A17P1-9 AND 10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR TO MAS METER.)

5.

DIGITAL GENERATOR, AY40-023T IS REPLACED WITH AY40-034T.

6.

GENERATORS WITH TOMO OPTION, AY40-006S MUST BE REV F OR HIGHER

7.

GENERATOR WITHOUT DIGITAL RECEPTOR OPTION AY51-090 IS REPLACED WITH AY51-048.

8.

32 AND 40 KW GENERATORS MUST BE 30 AMP. 50 KW GENERATORS MUST BE 50 AMP.

9.


C5 AND C8 ARE NOT USED

9

7

6

5

8

8

7

9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TB10 AY40-027S A11, UNIVERSAL AEC BD.

WALL STAND

48VDC 48VDCRTN

TB1 300VDC

1 2 3 4 5 6

J7 TOMO SWEEP TIME

A11P1

J1

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

J5 1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

J6 1

1 2 3

24VDC RTN GROUND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

.4S .6S .8S 1.2S 2S

GRN/YEL

TO OCP ASSEMBLY

A16P1

GROUND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


A11P5

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

A11P6

AY51-049

SC50-053T REV. H

A11TB11

TB11 A11P7

AY40-007T A5 FILAMENT BD.

A11TB10 24VDC PREP EXPOSE BUCKY RDY

A11TB12 1 24VDC 2 PREP 3 EXPOSE 4 BUCKY RDY 5 24VDC RTN 6 GROUND

TB12

J9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TOMO TABLE

(OPTIONAL)

1 2 3 4

AY51-019-2

9

8

AY51-013

10

7

6

5

4

4

A11P8 2

1

3

3

2

8

7

6

5

9

1

9

8

7

6

5

4

A11P10

4

3

2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

AY51-062 AY51-090 OR AY51-048 (SEE NOTE 7)

AY51-048 BLACK (20AWG) WHITE (20AWG)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A11P13 J13

J11

AUX.

A2P3

A11P12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

AEC WALL 2

A5P1


THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES.

J12

AEC WALL 1

10

9

8

7

6

J8

AEC TABLE

A11TB1

J2

6

1

1

J10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

A11P9

J1

3

AY51-017

5

4

6

A11P11

2

CATH. FDBK CATH. RTN MA FDBK MA RTN ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK SHIELD 7 AY51-017 3

2

A2P1

1

J1

MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN CATH RTN ANODE FDBK CATH FDBK


A1P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

WHT FIL.COMMON RED FIL. SMALL

AY51-015

AY51-023

A1P8

9

8

7

6

4

3

5 5

4

3

2

1

A1P12

AY51-012

SHLD

AY51-021

AY51-012

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

A10P3


J12

FILAMENT BD. GROUND

INNER- PHASE

5- T.S.

2.


8


J1

J2

1.5KE68CA

A2P4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

J6

7

DOOR GROUND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J3

J5

6

A1P2 BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLACK/ORANGE (22 AWG) WHITE/BROWN (22 AWG)

AY40-006S A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.) (SEE NOTE 6)

1 2 3 4

AY51-047

A2P5

6

33VDC 33VDC RTN

J3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

5

BLACK/RED WHT/BLK

A1P3

A1P9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J8

GROUND 18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B

1 2 3 4 5


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

J4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J9

A2P8

5

AY51-062

AY51-011

R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W

3- PHASE

AY51-017

AY51-020

4

SEE NOTE 5 AY40-023T A9, INTERFACE BD.

J11


J7

3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A2P7

2

TB5

RS 232 SLAVE PORT


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1

DOOR DOOR RTN


A8P4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A B

5

J4

AY40-034 D.R. CONFIGURATION SEE NOTE 5

J8

GND 18VDC

1 2 3 4

4

A6P2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

TB6

VCJ1

J10

A1P4

X - RAY ON 1 2

RECEPTOR

4

J6


DIGITAL WALL

AY51-090

3

J2

2)

TO

SHLD

3

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

2.4K

A6P3

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

4

2

J3 J2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10


NOTE

9

5 2 1 3

A2P6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10


A9P6

1 WHITE (16AWG) 2 BLACK (16AWG) 3 VIOLET 4 BLUE 5 RED 6 BROWN/YELLOW 7 BLUE/YELLOW 8 BLACK/RED DOOR INTERLOCK

CENTER- MAIN

3- PHASE

1.

PA2

6



A9P2

AY51-005

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(SEE

10

(SEE NOTE 4)

2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


C1, 30 UF


A10P4

1

A8P2 VC+/2.4K


4- MAIN

A

A5P2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10


J2

1 2 3 4 5 6

J1

A8P5


A9P5


OUTER- COMM.

2- MAIN

PC2

L BLK S RED C WHT GROUND

BLK

5- COMM.

C3

C

1

PHASE C


BLK BLK

5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8

BUCKY


VARIAN

1- COMM.

NOTES:

C4

PA1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

GRN/YEL

PHASE B

WALL

10

WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (20AWG) WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (20AWG)

PHASE N. PHASE A

TO

J3

PC1


LINE LOAD GND

BUCKY READY

J5

2

11

CH. GND GND


TABLE

1

1 2 3 4 5 6

17 18

LOAD LINE

J4

DIGITAL RECEPTOR

9

A9P4

1 BUCKY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


6 19 20

TABLE

TB3


9

AY20258 TMI

TO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

3

4

+15VDC GROUND

J4

TO

TB3

8

220 EMI FLT

(SEE NOTE 1)

A10TB1


A9P8

A9J8

8

60 120

COLL. READY

2

7


15 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

TB1 AY40-013T A10 ROTOR DRIVE BD.

BLU VIO GRY WHT AY51-090

A10P5

480

1 2 3

TO TUBE STAND


CHASSIS GRD TEMP. FAULT

YEL

YEL

0

1 2 3

J1

BLU VIO GRY WHT

6



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 BLK 2 RED 3 WHT 4 5 6 T.S. 7 T.S.


A10P1

7

5

440


1 2 3 4

BRN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

6

415


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

5

8 16


TB1

TO COLL.

4

A9P1 9

1 2 3 4

J3

7

4

T2

DUNLEE

TOSHIBA

AY51-128(8X)

220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC

6

380


BROWN (16AWG) RED (16AWG) ORANGE (16AWG)

5

4

220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC

1 2 3 4

AY51-016

J5


ROTOR CABLE

AY51-065

E1 G1

E1 G1

G2 E2

G2 E2

E1 G1

+

AY51-066

-

C-

AY51-010 J7

BLK

INCOM. LINE INCOM. LINE BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG)

-


A+

C6 A9P7

A8P3

AY51-022-3P


2

C16

4

3

GRN/YEL (16AWG)


DB1

1 CATHODE POWER MODULE

A19

+3 A18C2


12

A8P1

G2 E2

(SEE NOTE 3)

+

A18C1

RS 232 SLAVE PORT

2

285

VA -

AY51-066

A19R1 1

C12


A18,A1P5

A18QB

1

220

3

2.4K

~ -

A19QA

AY51-043

6

2

VA+/2.4K

2

BRN

440

1

11

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

-

-

3

5

7

10

AY51-007

C15

2

4

415

0

AY51-009-3P

1 2 3 4

AY20-047

3

~

1

380

480


A19C2

3

3

9

4 3 2 1

~ +

2

2

T1 PHASE B

1

285

T1 PHASE C

0 220

8

A8P6

A19C1

A19QB

DB2

J5

C7

6 7

8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9

+ 3

2

~ -

7

1


J9 J8 + +

K1

6

480

1 2

D3 1N4005

5

T1 PHASE A

415

C11

~

9

AY51-127 (4X)

+

3

C14 AY51-079

1

RED YELLOW

4

440

5 (SEE NOTE 9)

3

380

AY51-069 (3X)

3 4

5 8

6

9 10

1

285

TB2

AY51-071 X3

D1 1N4005

2

K3

7

1N4005

AY20-146 R8 R9 R10 3.3/50W ALUM.

D2

2

AY51-073 (2X)

AY20-047

8 7 10

220


C13

+

BRN BLU ORN BRN BLU ORN

4

3

5 6

7

9 10

1

2

8

RED YELLOW

K2

NEUTRAL 1

1 2 3 4

A19,A1P5

C10

~ + AY51-079

5

0

J5

E1 G1

AY51-068 (3X)

AY51-073 (2X)

4 6


C9

AY51-080

AY25-001 3


440VAC

AY51-065

LOAD

N L4

440VAC

3.15A SB

WHT BLK16AWG

BLK16AWG WHT16AWG

C L3

3.15A SB

F2

+

F1

AY51-007

TB1

B L2

LINE

LINE

A L1

LOAD

LOAD

CB1

50 AMP/3P


LINE

AY51-074 (3X) (SEE NOTE 8)

AY51-018-XX

BLACK YELLOW/GREEN WHITE BROWN BLACK/RED YELLOW/WHITE

Figure 6-21. Three-Phase (32, 40 and 50 kW without High Speed Starter, with Universal AEC Board) Xray Generators Interconnection Diagram


Revision W

6-28

Chapter 6 Diagrams

GROUND TO HV TANK

TB5 1 2

X-RAY ON RTN X-RAY ON (SEE NOTE 6) AY40-023T A9, INTERFACE BD.

R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W


30VDC 30VDC RTN

(SEE NOTE 3)

ROTOR CABLE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

T.S.-2

1.

C3, C4, C6 AND C7 1UF/1500VAC,

2.

DO NOT INSTALL C5 AND C8 IN 50KW GENERATORS.

3.


4.

DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND 10 AND CONNECT (WARNING A17P1-9 AND 10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR TO MAS METER.)

5.

50 KW GENERATOR STANDARD HV MODULE

C5 AND C8 .5 UF/1500VAC

THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES

IS AY30-031, 125 KV

6.

DIGITAL GENERATOR, AY40-023T IS REPLACED WITH AY40-034T

7.


8.

GENERATOR WITH UNIVERSAL AEC AND DIGITAL RECEPTOR AY51-048

9.


H8 RED

H7 BLK MAIN

PHASE

H9 WHT

3

COMM

2

L1

200VAC TO

L2

240VAC

GND

J11

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


A1P9 A1P5

J1



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A2P5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J8


J3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

J5

J6

A2P4

J10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

A11P11

J8

AEC TABLE

AEC WALL 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A1P1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

(OPTIONAL)

J9

TOMO TABLE

1 2 3 4 5 6

TB12

TB1 300VDC

J7

1 2 3 4 5 6

TOMO SWEEP TIME

A11P1

J1

1 2 3

J6

A11TB10 24VDC PREP EXPOSE BUCKY READY 24VDC RTN GROUND A11TB12 24VDC PREP EXPOSE BUCKY READY 24VDC RTN GROUND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

SC50-055T REV. H

GRN/YEL

A11TB11

TB11

AY40-007T A5 FILAMENT.BD.

J1

WALL STAND

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


A11TB1

A11P7

J2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A11P13 J13

J11

AUX.

A2P3

A11P12

J12

AEC WALL 2

A11P9

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14


GRN/YEL

J2

J7

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A2P7 A2P8

GRN/YEL

J5

A B

J4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J9

GRD 18VDC

1 2 3 4

AY51-020

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A11P10

1 2 3 4 5 6

A1P8

A11P8

AY51-017 A2P1

AY51-017

.4S .6S .8S 1.2S 2S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

GROUND

J5

A5P1 AY51-049

A1P12

GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG) BLACK (20AWG) WHITE (20AWG)

AY51-012

2- T.S.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

SHLD

RS 232 SLAVE PORT

AY40-006S A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.) SEE NOTE 7

DOOR GROUND STUD FILAMENT BD. GROUND

TUBE ROTOR CHART FOR ROTOR CONNECTIONS.)

A+ T.S. T.S. SHLD

(SEE NOTE 5)

J12


C-

J2 J1

G2 E2

E1 G1


J3 1 2 3 4


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J4 J3

J7 J6 E1 G1

G2 E2

+

A1P3 BLACK/RED WHT/BLK

AY51-011

J1

J4

P/O TB2

1

AID ROTOR CONTROLLER MODEL LC102

1.5KE68CA

J8


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

AY51-047 A8P4

X-RAY TUBE ( SEE

AY51-079

A1P4

A6P2

VCJ4

J9 J8 AY51-080

+

J2 J1

J4 J3

J7 J6

DOOR DOOR RTN

X - RAY ON

T.S.-1

6- T.S.

A11P5

2.4K

A6P3

TB6

9

WALL

J10

RED GREEN/GREEN BLACK GREEN/YELLOW BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GRAY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE

1- T.S.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J2

1 2

RECEPTOR


A9P6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

INNER- PHASE

5- T.S.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J6


CENTER- MAIN

3- PHASE

A11P6

VC+/2.4K

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J2

DIGITAL

AY51-062 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4- MAIN

3- PHASE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A8P2

VA -



OUTER- COMM.

2- MAIN

IS REPLACED WITH AY51-090

AY51-062

J2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A9P2

AY51-005


TO

7 8

4

RED

TS2

AY51-019-2

2.4K

A8P5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

P/O TB1

AY51-013

A8P1

VA+/2.4K

J5


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

4 3 2 1


PHASE C

J1


WALL


1 2 3 4

48VDC 48VDCRTN

1 2 3 4 5 6

TB7

1 BUCKY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


J5

4

1 2

J1

A9P5

A6P1 BLK

BUCKY READY

TB4 BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)

BLK BLK

5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8

BLK

AY51-022-3P

PHASE B

A8P6

AY51-009-3P

PHASE N. PHASE A

CH. GND GND

TO

10

GRD

A8P3 J3 PHASE C,IN PHASE A,IN


5 2 1 3

TABLE

1 9 6 9

1 2


LINE LOAD

J4

BUCKY

DUNLEE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11

LINE

GRN/YEL (16AWG)

1 2 3 4 5 6

17 18

LOAD

12

A9P4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

6

RECEPTOR

BLK GRN

A2P6

FILTER

11

TB3

DIGITAL

9

5 9


EMI

9

TABLE


6 19 20

TO

10

(SEE NOTE 4)

BRN ORN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

4

+15VDC GROUND

A

TO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12


C

A5P2

8

1 2 3

COLL. READY

TB3

PA2


220

10


7

60 120

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

PA1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

480

6


15 7

TO TUBE STAND


PC1 PC2

AY51-023

AY51-071 X3 SEE NOTE 9

RED YELLOW

440

6 7

0


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

YEL BLU VIO GRY WHT AY51-090

AY51-015

5

8 16


TO COLL.

5- COMM.

C3

AY51-033

4

415


1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A9P8 BRN

AY51-090

380

5

9


J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

SHLD

4

A9P1

T2

J3

A9J8

ORN

3


C6

1 2 3 4

14

2

285

AY51-128 X6 C4

220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC

1 2 3 4

16

220

3

C5

C7 AND2)

15

2

C8 NOTE 1

AY51-128 X6

AY51-016

ANODE

POWER MODULE

(SEE

WHT FIL.COMMON FIL. SMALL RED

1

A18

RED BRN GRN

0

CATHODE

1

FIL. SHIELD 8 BLK FIL. LARGE

7

1

T1 PHASE B

6

480

POWER MODULE

VARIAN

1- COMM.

NOTES:

A18QA

1

TOSHIBA

2

A18R1

C16

A9P7

5

440

TB2

8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9

A19

-

A18QB

DB1


T1 PHASE C

415


(SEE NOTE 3)

-

BLK

4

1

A18C2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3

380

1

A18C1 2

BLU VIO GRY WHT

285

A19QA A19R1

DB2

~ -

+3


2

A19QB

2

YEL

220

-

+

RS 232 MASTER PORT

1

-

+

7

0

~

+

480

2

C12

~ -

A19C2

3

BRN

6

K1

A19C1


AY20-047

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

440

AY51-066

5

+

4

415

1 2

AY51-127 X4

+ 3

+

380

T1 PHASE A

3

+

C15

J7

4

6

8

2 1

10

K3 D1 1N4005

285

~

9

~ +

C14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3

5

7

9

AY51-069 X3

2

D3 1N4005

BRN BLU ORN

4

6

8

10

2 1

AY20-146 R8,R9, R10 3.3/50W ALUM.

BRN BLU ORN 3

5

7

9

YELLOW

K2


C11

10

D2 1N4005


3

7

AY51-073 X2

1 2 3 4

A3,A P5

AY51-066

8

RED 220

AY51-079

AY20-047

J5


C13

AY51-073 X2

~ +

5

NEUTRAL 0 1

AY51-068 X3

J9 J8

C10 AY51-073 X2

4 6

1 2 3 4

A3,B P5

G2 E2

3

J5

E1 G1

N L4


C9

G2 E2

AY25-001


E1 G1

440VAC

AY51-080

3.15A SB

AY51-065

LOAD

3.15A SB

F2

+

BLK16AWG WHT16AWG

LINE

LINE

LINE

LOAD

C L3 LOAD

CB1

50 AMP/3P


B L2

F1

+

AY51-007

TB1

A L1

WHT BLK16AWG

AY51-074 X3

GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) WHT BLK BLUE RED 440VAC

AY51-065

MAIN GROUND STUD

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY AY10-005-1 ODYSSEY TECHVISION AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS

A16P1

AY51-048 OR AY51-090 (SEE NOTE 8) AY51-018-XX


Figure 6-22. Three-Phase (65 and 80 kW with AID High Speed Starter, Universal AEC Board) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram


Revision W

6-29

Chapter 6 Diagrams

GROUND TO HV TANK


J2 J1

J4 J3

J7 J6

J9 J8

AY51-080

ROTOR CABLE

E1 G1

G2 E2

+

G2 E2

E1 G1

AY51-079

8 FIL. SHLD BLK FIL. L.

15 WHT FIL.COMMON RED FIL. SMALL


16 14

9

OUTER- COMM.

2- MAIN

4- MAIN

CENTER- MAIN

3- PHASE

3- PHASE

INNER- PHASE

5- T.S.

1- T.S.

T.S.-1

6- T.S.

2- T.S.

T.S.-2

DUNLEE


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

J5


C3, C4, C6 AND C7 1UF/1500VAC, C5 AND C8 ARE NOT USED

2.

C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE MODEL (SEE TUBE DATA SHEET)

3.


4.

DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND 10 AND CONNECT THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING A17P1-9 AND 10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR TO MAS METER.)

5.

DIGITAL GENERATOR, AY40-023T IS REPLACED WITH AY40-034T.

6.


7.

GENERATOR WITH UNIVERSAL AEC AND DIGITAL RECEPTOR, AY51-048 IS REPLACED WITH AY51-090.

8.


8

7

6

5

4

9 9

8

7

6

5

4

2

1

3

3

2

1

8

7

6

5

4

9 9

8

7

6

5

4

3

A11P10

3

2

A11P8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

AEC WALL 2

AY51-013

48VDC 48VDCRTN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A11P13 J13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J11

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

TOMO TABLE

(OPTIONAL)

J9

TB12

4 5 6

TB1 300VDC

J7 TOMO SWEEP TIME

A11P1

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

.4S .6S .8S 1.2S 2S

A16P1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY AY10-005-1 ODYSEY TECHVISION AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS

GROUND

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

GRN/YEL

A11P5

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

A5P1

A11P6

24VDC RTN GROUND

J5 1

8

7

6

5

4

3

J6 1

8

1 2 3

SC50-051T REV. G

24VDC RTN GROUND

A11TB11

TB11 1 2 3 4 5 6

A11TB10 24VDC PREP EXPOSE

A11TB12 1 24VDC 2 PREP 3 EXPOSE

WALL STAND

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


A11TB1


7

J12

AEC WALL 1

AUX.

A2P3

A11P7

J2

J1

J8

AEC TABLE

10

8

7

6

5

9 9

8

10

A1P1

1

1

A11P12 J10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

A11P9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

2

AY51-017 AY51-020

6

5

4

3

A2P1 2

J1

MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN CATH RTN ANODE FDBK CATH FDBK J3

A11P11

A2P4

AY51-048 BLACK (20AWG) WHITE (20AWG)

1.

1.5KE68CA

AY51-049


AY51-012

AY51-015

1

6

5

4

3

2

1

A1P12

FILAMENT BD. GROUND

AY51-023

AY51-012

8

9

A1P8

9

J1

A2P5

7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J2 V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN MISSING PHASE FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED

A1P5


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

4

AY40-006S A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.) (SEE NOTE 6)

J8


1 2 3 4 5

A1P9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A2P8

6

A1P2

8


J7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

J4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J9

J3 1 2 3 4

7


A2P7

3

33VDC 33VDC RTN

AY51-047

6

5

4

3

J11

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

6

A1P3

BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLACK/ORANGE (22 AWG) WHITE/BROWN (22 AWG)

7

AY51-021 BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE VIOLET GRAY WHITE 2

8

9

1

9

RS 232 SLAVE PORT


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A B

5

J4

J8

GRD 18VDC

1 2 3 4

2

J10

AY51-062

BLACK/RED WHT/BLK

6

5

4

3

1

A10P5

3

2

2

AY51-043

WALL

5

(SEE NOTE 5) AY40-023T A9, INTERFACE BD.

RECEPTOR

4


DIGITAL

4

TB5 1 2

AY51-090

2)

TO

3

DOOR DOOR RTN

X - RAY ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

10

AY51-017

J12


5- COMM.

NOTES:

SHLD

1

TB6

(SEE NOTE



A8P4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

VARIAN

1- COMM.

PA2

SHLD

3

A9P6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

C1, 30 UF

2

J6

J3

A2P6


J5

8


TABLE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10


1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 BUCKY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8



PA1

6 5 2 1 3 4

A10P4

2

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

A6P3



RECEPTOR

TB7 TO WALL


J5

DIGITAL

BLU VIO GRY WHT

BUCKY READY

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

7

CH. GND GND

TO

PC2

A10TB1

TB1 J4

7

J4 220V IN 220V IN 60V ROTOR 0V ROTOR

TABLE BUCKY

AY40-013T A10 ROTOR DRIVE BD.

BLU VIO GRY WHT

1

J3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

TOSHIBA

A

A5P2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A9P2

AY51-005

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AY51-128 (4X)

C



C4 C3

(SEE

(SEE NOTE 4)

1


J2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8



CHASSIS GRND TEMP. FAULT

1

TO

J1

YEL

YEL

+15VDC GROUND

A9P8 BRN

TB3

AY51-011

DOOR GROUND

C7 C6

1 BLK 2 RED 3 WHT 4 5 6 T.S. 7 T.S.


AY51-018-XX


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A6P2

R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W

+

J2 J1

J4 J3

J7 J6

COLL. READY

VCJ1

A8P1 J4

ANODE

PC1

GRN/YEL


2.4K

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

6

1 2 3 4 5 6



A8P5

VC+/2.4K


AY51-128 (4X)

220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC

1 2 3 4

6

A9P5

A6P1 BLK

1



BLK BLK

A8P2

TB2


GND

TO COLL.

TO TUBE STAND

24 VDC 24 VDC RTN

10

LOAD

BLK


AY51-022-3P

WHITE(20AWG) BLACK(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG) RED/GREEN YELLOW/WHITE ORN/BLK BRN/YEL RED(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG)

AY51-007

J2

C-

A10P1

5

1 2 3 4 5 6

17 18 11

1 2 3

TB3

A9P4

A8P3

VA -


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

LINE

2.4K

TB1

6

LOAD

GRN/YEL (16AWG)

J3 24 VAC COLL. 24 VAC RTN GROUND

J1

BROWN (16AWG) RED (16AWG) ORANGE (16AWG) A9J8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4

4


1 2 3 4

3

220

15 7

220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC

5

7

1 2 3

LINE

VA+/2.4K

A+

1

POWER MODULE

A18

4

280

12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

A18QA

CONNECTION)

(SEE NOTE 3)

3

240

0 60 120

EMI FLT

AY51-009-3P

CATHODE

FOR ROTOR

2

1

2

4 5 5A 6

8 16

BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK 28VAC BLK 0VAC BLK 7VAC BLK 0VAC BLK

32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC

19 20

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

-

RS 232 MASTER PORT

208

3

220

J5

2

AY51-090

2


AY51-066

+

A9P1

T2

T1 PHASE C

198


A18C2

A18R1

AY51-010 1 2 3 4


9

4 3 2 1

A18C1

-

ROTOR CHART

1)

AY51-016

10

A8P6

POWER MODULE

+3

A18QB

BRN

240 280

3

PHASE C

C16

DB1

1

(SEE NOTE 3)

J7

9

5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8

A19QA

1

-

~

2

220 220

SEE NOTE 8

RED YELLOW

AY51-078 X3

6 7

1

PHASE N. PHASE A

2

A9P7

0

PHASE B

A19QB

+

NOTE

2


-

-


4 5 5A

4

8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9

2

~

X-RAY TUBE (SEE TUBE

3

1

220

11

A19C2

AY20-047

C15

A19R1

3

8

A19C1

+

C14

1

208

6 7

+ 3

A19

2

5

1 2 3 4

1

198

1

C12

7

0

TB2

DB2

AY51-127 (4X)

J5

AY51-019-2

280

K1

~

+

AY51-065

6

1 2

D3 1N4005

4 5 5A

T1 PHASE A

3

220 220 220

T1 PHASE B

3.3/50W ALUM.

BRN BLU ORN

208

-

9

2

240

AY51-075 (3X)

AY20-146 R8 R9 R10

BRN BLU ORN

3 4 3 6

4

5 8

5

7 8

10

9

1

D1 1N4005

2

K3

6

7

9 10

1

2

YELLOW RED

D2 1N4005

C11

~

AY51-066

7

~

+

3

AY51-072 (2X)

+

8 10

198

AY20-047

G2 E2

5

NEUTRAL 1

0

+

~

C13

E1 G1

6


1 2 3 4

A19,A1P5

C10

G1

3

AY51-088 (3X)

K2

J9 J8

AY51-072 (2X)

G2 E2

4

E1

AY25-001

N L4

C9

AY51-080

440VAC

+

3.15A SB

A18,A1P5 J5



+

F2

440VAC

+

LOAD

3.15A SB

AY51-065

LINE

LINE

LINE

LOAD

CB1

C L3

50 AMP/3P LOAD


BLK16AWG WHT16AWG

TB1

B L2

F1

AY51-079

AY51-007 A L1

WHT BLK16AWG

AY51-058 (3X)

2

MAIN GROUND STUD

AY51-062 AY51-048 0R AY51-090 (SEE NOTE 7)


Figure 6-23. Three-Phase (208-240) Input (32, 40 and 50 kW without High Speed Starter, with Universal AEC Board) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram


Revision W

6-30

Chapter 6 Diagrams


XRAY ON

DOOR DOOR RTN

TB5 1 2

X-RAY ON X-RAY ON RTN (SEE NOTE 5) AY40-061T A9, INTERFACE BD.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

J4

J1 AY40-053S3 A8, LINE MONITOR BD.

A8P4

DOOR GROUND

5 380V BLK

ROTOR CABLE ORANGE BLACK

A20,A2TB4

1 2

WHITE

RED

BLACK

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

TEMP. TEMP.

MAIN

COMM.

G2 E2

E1 G1

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLACK AY51-131

BLACK

BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE VIOLET GREY WHITE BLK WHT/BRN WHT/RED WHT/ORN WHT/YEL AY51-130

1 2 3 4 5

RED

AY51-146

A20 A2TB3

G2 E2

AY51-066

E1 G1

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AY51-023

AY51-015

AY40-035S HSS CONTROL BD. A20, A1

6.

TO GROUND OR TO MAS METER) AY51-019-2 IS USED FOR AEC OPTION

Q-HSS DIGITAL GENERATOR ONLY, Q-HSS NON DIGITAL GENERATOR USE AY40-061T.

USE CABLE AY51-151 CABLE FOR INTERFACING TO RS-580 SYSTEM: - CONNECT WIRES FROM P81-7,-8 TO P2-1 - CONNECT WIRES FROM P81-4,-5 TO P2-2 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-4 TO GND - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-1 INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-2 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-2 TO INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-1 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-3 TO INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-3 FOR SYSTEMS OTHER THAN RS-580 CONSULT RESPECTIVE MANUALS

A20,A1P2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A17

A20 Q-HSS AY20-177

J2 A20,A1P1

8.


BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT

AY20-031 HV MODULE AY51-012-1

BLACK (16AWG) WHITE (16AWG)

AY51-145

1 2 3

J10

J8

RS 232 MASTER PORT

RS 232 SLAVE PORT 24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BUCKY T. READY BUCKY W. READY DOOR INTERLOCK SPARE TABLE RDY K1, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 7VAC RTN 7VAC 15VDC GROUND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

J11


J4

A1P4 A1P3 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J3 28VDC 28VDC RTN

AY40-006S A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.) J2 V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 28VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 28VDC MAG. 28VDC MAG. RTN MISSING PHASE FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED

J1

A2P7 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J9 OCP ON RS-485 RS-485 EXP. PREP 28VDC GND 28VDC GND J5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


J4 1 2 3 4 5

A2P5

A1P9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


J3

J5 15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A1P5

A1P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

A5P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J1 BLK L RED S WHT C GROUND

48VDC 48VDCRTN

A2P4

A11P1

A1P3

A11P4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

J6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

J5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J1

A11P3

J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

GRN/YEL

A16P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

P2-1

P2-2

(SEE NOTE 7)

J2

AY51-018-XX

1

EL68-007 OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY (28VDC/8 AMP)

A11P2 J2

J4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

AY40-003S A2, KVP BD. A2P8

1 2 3

A11P5 J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

P1-L

X - RAY ON

A2P1

SHIELD

SHIELD

P1-N

AY51-021

A1P8

BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG) GRN/YEL (16AWG)

FILAMENT BD. GROUND

C2B 12uF 440V

J1

AY51-012-1 GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)

PHASE

A18,A1P5

J2 J1

J4 J3

J7 J6

J9 J8 AY51-080

+ + +


AY40-062T INTERFACE BOARD IS USED ON

AY51-017

A1P2

AY51-011

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CONNECTED

5.

AY51-017

AY51-047-1

VC-

1.5KE68CA

J5

WALL

AY40-062T D.R. CONFIGURATION (SEE NOTE 5)

BLACK/RED WHT/BLK

A6P2

J4

RECEPTOR


AY51-008

DISCONNECT A17P1-9,-10 AND CONNECT THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING A17P1-9 AND -10 MUST BE

1

TB6 1 2

A9P6

TUBE DATA BASE)

4.

1

DOOR INTERLOCK

J6


DIGITAL

TUBE MANUFACTURER OR MODEL, (SEE

AY51-019-1.

A20,A1P5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

AY10-005 ODYSSEY, AY10-005-1 ODYSSEY TECHVISION, AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION, AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS

A6P3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TO

A20,A1P4

J3

9

J1

C2A 12uF 440V

TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST

J3 J2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J2

A9P2

AY51-005 WHITE (16AWG) BLACK (16AWG) BLUE VIOLET RED BROWN/YELLOW BLUE/YELLOW BLACK/RED

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TB5 X-RAY ON RTN X-RAY ON

A20,A1P3

TABLE 6 5 2 1 3 4

C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON

ONLY, NON AEC GENERATORS USE

AEC TABLE


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

10

(SEE NOTE 4)

C3, C6 1uF/1500V, C4,C7 .5uF/1500V C5 AND C8 ARE NOT INSTALLED

3.

7.

A

RECEPTOR

A20,A2P4

AEC WALL 1

1 BUCKY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


DIGITAL

J4

C9 THRU C16, 2400uF/450VDC

2.

C1 25uF/440V

AEC WALL 2

WALL

PA2

WHT/BLK BLACK/RED 1 (SEE NOTE 3) 2 3 4 5

TB3

AY51-020


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

3 2 1

J3



VC+/2.4K 2.4K

(SEE NOTE 1)

J2 J1

J4 J3 TO

PA1

C

TO

A20,A2P3

1 2 3 4 5 6

TB8

1 2 3 4

PC1 PC2

TB4


C3


A9TB8

TB4

(SEE NOTE 6)

A8P2

E1 G1

G2 E2

220V IN 0V IN

BUCKY

BLU VIO GRY WHT

NOTES: 1.

AY51-019-2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

VA -

BLUE

TABLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2)

A1P6

A8P5


2.4K

R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W

TO

C4

YEL

TB3


NOTE

A5P2

J2

+15VDC GROUND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

C6

A5, FILAMENT CONTROL BD. AY40-007T

VA+/2.4K

COLL. READY

TB4

WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) WHT (20AWG) BLK (20AWG)

AY51-009-3P


1 STAND 2 3 4 5 6 7

BUCKY READY





BLK BLK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

4 3 2 1

TUBE

TB7

1 2

TO COLL.

TO

TB3

A9TB7

11

BLK J5

A8P6

1 2 3

CH. GND GND

17 18

LINE LOAD

LOAD GND LINE

TB1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A9P8 BRN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

19 20

T.S.-2

A20,A2P2

A20,A2P1

(SEE


6

2- T.S.

J2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

5

0VAC


BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)

BLK

PHASE C

J1

AY51-012-1

380

6- T.S.

AY40-036S HSS DRIVER BD. A20, A2

AY51-018-XX

4

T.S.-1

TB2

ANODE

AY51-141 (2X)

GRN/YEL

220

7

J8 1 2 3


10

5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8

POWER MODULE

FIL.SHLD 8 BLK FIL.L. 15 WHT FIL.COM. 16 RED FIL.SMALL 14

3

1- T.S.

2

A18R1

A18

J3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

INNER- PHASE

5- T.S.

A+

1

CATHODE

RED BRN ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT

1 2 2A

120


3- PHASE

A20,A2TB2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

32VAC 32VAC RTN 16VAC 16VAC RTN 11VAC

EMI FLT

PHASE B

POWER MODULE

220VAC

J1

CENTER- MAIN

3- PHASE

A18QA

BLU FDBK GRN RTN RED FDBK BRN RTN ORN RTN YEL FDBK SHLD 7

0 60 80

7 285

PHASE N. PHASE A

A18QB 1


J7 J6

J9 J8 +

A9P1

15

12

8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9

DB1

-

4- MAIN

A20,A2TB1

A18C2

-

2- MAIN

C-

TB1 2

OUTER- COMM.

FOR ROTOR

1

J7

9

8 16

PHASE C

4 5 5A 6

+

PHASE A

T1 T1

T2

T1

198

AY51-078 (3X)

208 220 220 220 240

10 11 (SEE NOTE 8)

AY51-016 BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE

7

3

C16

DUNLEE

5- COMM.

SEE MANUAL

+3

A18C1

VARIAN

1- COMM.

CONNECTION

A19R1

A19

1 2 3 4

11VAC RTN 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC RTN 24VAC RTN 7VAC 7VAC RTN

285

6

9

AY51-022-3P

1

+

AY51-141(2X)

A9P7

2

8

~ -

A19QA

1 2 3 4

AY51-128(4X)

1

7

-

AY51-065

C7

5A

240

6

-

A19QB


BLK (8AWG)

GRN/YEL (16AWG)

RED

C12

2

BLU VIO GRY WHT

4

5

A19C2

J5

AY20-047

3

GRN

220

0

~

AY51-089

3

4

A8P1

AY51-065

C15

+3

+

A19C1 2

DB2

PHASE B

2

3

RED

~ -

K1

3

AY51-079

BRN

5 220

AY51-075 (6X)

5

0

208

2


AY51-127 (4X)

C14

~ +

1

198

TB2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2

1N4005

1

AY51-007

~

9

7

220

A8P3

C11

10

C13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

285

3 4

6

9

7 8

10

2 1

D1 1N4005

7

D3

1N4005 K3

4 5 5A 6

220 220 220 240

C10 AY51-079

A19,A1P5

AY51-072 (2X)

E1 G1

3

AY51-072 (2X)

~ +

8

G2 E2

208

6

AY51-080

4

SEE NOTE 1

2

AY51-066

1


AY20-047

+

0 198

C9

1 2 3 4

+

LOAD

BRN BRN BLU BLU ORN ORN AY20-146 R8, R9 R10 3.3/50W ALUM.

3 4

6

5

7 8

10

9

2 1

D2

BLUE

440VAC

3.15A SB

AY25-001

5

K2



3

N L4

AY51-088(3X)


F2

J5


+

BLK16AWG WHT16AWG

TB1

B L2 C L3

3.15A SB

WHT BLK

AY51-007 A L1

LINE

LINE

LINE LOAD

CB1

50 AMP/3P

LOAD


F1

TOSHIBA

CHART #1

SEE TUBE

+

AY51-058 (3X)

GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) WHITE BLACK BLUE RED 440VAC

X-RAY TUBE

_

GROUND TO HV TANK

1 0V BLK 2 60V BLK 2A 80V BLK 3 120V BLK 4 220V BLK

MAIN GROUND STUD

SC50-071T REV. C


1 2 3

NOT USED, TIE BACK

Figure 6-24. Three-Phase (208-240) Input (50 kW with QMI High Speed Starter) X-ray Generator Interconnection Diagram


Revision W

6-31

Chapter 6 Diagrams

X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART # 1 X-RAY TUBE

MAIN GROUND STUD

SEE TUBE

TB5 1 2


(SEE NOTE 5) AY40-061T A9, INTERFACE BD.

A6P2 J4



J3 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

ROTOR CABLE

5 380V BLK

ORANGE GREEN A20,A2TB4 1 2

WHITE

RED

BLACK

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

TEMP. TEMP.

C0MM.

MAIN

PHASE

A20 A2TB3

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5

J9




1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

BLACK


(LOGIC BD.)

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6



1

1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A11P8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A11P10

1 2 3 4 5 6

A2P1

GROUND 18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B J4 J3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A2P5

J5


A1P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

A2P4

A11P11

J12

AEC WALL 2

J11

AUX. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

TB10 AY40-027S A11, UNIVERSAL AEC BD. (OPTIONAL)

A11P9


48VDC 48VDCRTN J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TOMO TABLE

J9

TB12 WALL STAND

1 2 3 4

TB1 300VDC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6

A11P1 1 2 3

J7 TOMO SWEEP TIME

J1 J6

A11TB10 24VDC PREP EXPOSE BUCKY RDY

P2-1

A16P1

TO OCP ASSEMBLY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A11TB11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

P2-2

SEE NOTE 7

24VDCRTN GROUND

A11TB12 1 24VDC 2 PREP 3 EXPOSE 4 BUCKY RDY 5 24VDCRTN 6 GROUND

TB11 A11P7


A11P13 J13

A2P3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1

AEC WALL 1

P1-L

J8

AEC TABLE

P1-N

J10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

A11TB1

J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

AY51-020

A B

J8 1 2 3 4 5

A1P9

GND 18VDC

J7

A2P8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A2P7

A1P5


J2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A1P12

AY51-012-1

AY51-015

AY51-023

14 16 15

8


28VDC 28VDC RTN

DOOR GROUND

FILAMENT BD. GROUND

RED

AY51-146

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A1P3

J11

J12


1 0V BLK 2 60V BLK 2A 80V BLK 3 120V BLK 4 220V BLK

J2 J1

J4 J3

E1 G1

G2 E2

E1 G1

G2 E2 AY51-066 J4

A1P2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J7 J6

J9 J8

+

(SEE NOTE 1)

AY51-080

J2 J1 E1 G1

+

A1P4

AY51-047-1 AY51-011

R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W

SEE NOTE 6 BLACK/RED WHT/BLK

VC-

J1

AY51-062

FOR SYSTEMS OTHER THAN RS-580 CONSULT RESPECTIVE MANUALS

8.

1

DOOR DOOR RTN


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

NON DIGITAL GENERATOR WITH TOMO OPTION

USE CABLE AY51-151 CABLE FOR INTERFACING TO RS-580 SYSTEM: - CONNECT WIRES FROM P81-7,-8 TO P2-1 - CONNECT WIRES FROM P81-4,-5 TO P2-2 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-4 TO GND - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-1 INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-2 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-2 TO INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-1 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-3 TO INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-3

1

TB6

RED YELLOW/GREEN BLACK YELLOW/GREEN BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE

DIGITAL GENERATORS WITH NO TOMO OPTION

.4S .6S .8S 1.2S 2S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY, AY10-005-1 ODYSSEY TECHVISION, AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION, AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS

AY51-018-XX GRN/YEL

GROUND

J5 A11P5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2.4K

A6P3

1 2

X - RAY ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

6.

AY51-145

A11P6

J3 J2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


AY51-090 IS REPLACED WITH AY51-089.

A20 Q-HSS AY20-177

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A8P2

VC+/2.4K


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

RS 232 SLAVE PORT

5.

A11P12 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

AY51-019-2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10


SHLD

AY51-049

A8P5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AY40-062T D. R. CONFIGURATION (SEE NOTE 5)

J8

RS 232 MASTER PORT

DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND -10 AND CONNECT THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING A17P1-9 AND -10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR TO MAS METER.)

12uF 440V

A1P8

A5P2


AY51-005

AY51-012-1


J1

A9P6

J10

4.

A20,A1P2



J6


C1 COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE

NON DIGITAL GENERATOR USE AY40-061T.


AY51-021

3.

AY51-062 IS REPLACED WITH AY51-008 AND

A20,A1P5

AY51-017

1 2 3

C3, C6 1uF/1500V, C4,C7 .5uF/1500V C5 AND C8 ARE NOT INSTALLED

C2A

440V

AY51-017

X - RAY ON

TB5

C9 THRU C16, 2400uF/450VDC.

2.


J2 A20,A1P1

SHLD

J1

J2

WALL

1.5KE68CA


1.

Q-HSS DIGITAL GENERATOR ONLY, Q-HSS

J5

J1

J6

A6P1

RECEPTOR

T.S.-2

BASE)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J2

A9P2


DIGITAL

T.S.-1

2- T.S.

CONTROL BD. A20, A1


VA -


A20,A1P4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2.4K

BLUE

A8P1

VA+/2.4K


1 2 3 4

1 BUCKY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


TB8

BLK BLK

5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12


A9TB8

WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (20AWG) WHT (16AWG) BLK (20AWG) BLK (16AWG)

J5

4 3 2 1

RED

BLK BLK PHASE C

WALL

TO

INNER- PHASE

1- T.S.

6- T.S.

7.

AY40-035S HSS

A2P6

TO

TB4

10 BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)

J6

AY51-007

BLUE

PHASE B

A8P6

RED

PHASE N. PHASE A


J4 J3

220V IN 0V IN

1 2

6 5 2 1 3 4

3- PHASE

5- T.S.

C2B 12uF

9

AY51-013

11

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

AY51-022-3P

AY51-009-3P


J3

8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9

G2 E2

BUCKY READY

GRN/YEL (16AWG)

A8P3

J7 J6

TB7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

10

(SEE NOTE 4)

A5P1

A9TB7

TABLE


A20,A2P4

A

RECEPTOR

3- PHASE

1(SEE NOTE 3) 2 3 4 5

TB3

J4

J3

DIGITAL

CENTER- MAIN

WHT/BLK BLACK/RED

J4

A20,A2P2

A20,A1P3

PA2

GRN/YEL

TB2

1 BUCKY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CH. GND GND

17 18

LINE LOAD

LOAD GND LINE

FLT

TABLE


19 20

EMI

12

TO

PA1

C

WHT FIL.COM. RED FIL. SMALL

6

+15VDC GROUND

PC1 PC2

TO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12


5

COLL. READY

BLU VIO GRY WHT


4

STAND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

YEL

4- MAIN

MODEL AND MANUFACTURER. (SEE TUBE DATA

AY51-141 (2X)

C4 C3


(SEE NOTE 2)

C6

A1P10

220


A9P8 BRN

OUTER- COMM.

2- MAIN

C1 25uF/440V

J2

A20,A2P1

DUNLEE

A20,A2P3 3 2 1

ANODE

(4X)

5- COMM.

NOTES:

J3

DRIVER BD. A20, A2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3

15 7

TO TUBE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TB4

AY40-036S HSS

1

POWER MODULE


120

380

10 11

A18

YEL

7 285

9

60 80

1 2 2A

1 2 3



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

TO COLL.

TB1 J1

2

A18R1

BLU VIO GRY WHT

6

240

0


TB2

A18QA

1

AY51-090 SEE NOTE 6

T1

8 16

PHASE C

4 5 5A

8 (3X)

A9P1 32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 24VAC

-

C16

C7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3

0VAC

AY51-016

9

T1

7 AY51-078

T2

-

AY51-128

J3

220VAC

1 2 3 4

7

3

J7


2

VARIAN

1- COMM.

A20,A2TB2

A20,A2TB1

TB1

J1

A9J8


240 220 220 220 220

6


(SEE NOTE 8)

5


A9P7

2

4

CATHODE

AY51-141 (2X)

0 1 198 208

A19

+3 A18C2

A18QB

DB1

BRN

4

C15

~ -

1

POWER MODULE

+

A18C1

3

~

2

A19QA

1

SEE MANUAL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3

-

A18,A1P5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2

208

-

A19QB

C12

PHASE B

198

3

A19C2

2

1

220

2

A19C1

A+

AY20-047

~ +

A19R1

0

6

1

+3

AY51-065

AY51-072 (X2)

+

C14

AY51-079

+

DB2

D3 1N4005

AY51-127

220 220 5 220

(4X)

~ -

285

3

+

K1

C11

~

1 2

AY51-072 (2X)

C-

1 2 3 4

BD, ANODE

+

10 9

5A

1N4005

~ +

7

7

(6X)

4

6

8

6

PHASE A

4 5

C13

J5

CONNECTION

+

AY51-079 8

T1

3

220 5 5A

208

240

AY51-075

3

5

7 10

2 1

D1

9

K3

2

285

BRN BLU ORN

D2 1N4005

AY20-146 R8, R9 R10 3.3/50W ALUM.

BRN BLU ORN

5

3 4

6

7

9 10

2 1

8

RED YELLOW

K2

198

J9 J8

C10

5

(3X)

+

OHM 50W

E1 G1

440VAC

6

IGBT DRIVE

AY20-047

G2 E2

4

3

1 2 3 4

A19,A1P5

AY51-080

3.15A SB

NEUTRAL 0 1

AY51-065

N L4

C9

+

C L3

J5

BD,CATHODE R3 A,B 50 OHM 50W R4 A,B 50

F2 WHT BLK16AWG

B L2

AY51-088

RED YELLOW

IGBT DRIVE

440VAC

(SEE NOTE 1)

3.15A SB

AY51-066

F1 BLK16AWG WHT16AWG

LINE

LINE

AY51-007

A L1

LOAD

LINE

LOAD

CB1

50 AMP/3P

LOAD

GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG) GRN/YEL (10AWG) GRN/YEL (16AWG)

TB1

FOR ROTOR

TOSHIBA

+

WHITE BLACK BLUE RED

AY51-058 (3X)

CHART #1


_

GROUND TO HV TANK

AY51-090 (SEE NOTE 6)

AY51-062 (SEE NOTE 5) BLACK (20AWG) WHITE (20AWG) BLACK YELLOW/GREEN WHITE BROWN BLACK/RED YELLOW/WHITE

SC50-072T REV. C


Figure 6-25. Three-Phase (208-240) Input (50 kW with QMI High Speed Starter and Tomography Interface) X-ray Generator Interconnection Diagram


Revision W

6-32

Chapter 6 Diagrams

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A8P2

J3 J2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A6P3

INTERLOCK

TB6 1 2

DOOR DOOR RTN

X - RAY ON

TB5 1 2

X-RAY ON X-RAY ON RTN

AY40-061T

(SEE NOTE 5) A9, INTERFACE BD.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

J4

VC-


A8P4

ROTOR CABLE ORANGE GREEN 1 2 TEMP. TEMP.

MAIN

A20 A2TB3

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14


BLACK

A20,A2TB4

RED

WHITE

BLACK

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 RED

AY51-146

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AY51-015



AY51-145

1 2 3

J10

A1P4

J8

RS 232 MASTER PORT

24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BUCKY T. READY BUCKY W. READY DOOR INTERLOCK SPARE TABLE RDY K1, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 7VAC RTN 7VAC 15VDC GROUND


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


J1

A2P7 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J9 OCP ON RS-485 RS-485 EXP. PREP 28VDC GND 28VDC GND J5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J4 1 2 3 4 5

A2P5

A1P5


J3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

A2P4

A11P1

A1P3

A11P4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

J5 15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 1

1 2 3


AY40-003S A2, KVP BD. A2P8

A1P9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

J5


A11P2 J2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J1 J4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

P1-L

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

P1-N

A11P5 J1


J3 28VDC 28VDC RTN

J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J11

J4

1 2 3 4

SHIELD

A1P8

RS 232 SLAVE PORT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A2P1

SHIELD

A1P1

BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG) GRN/YEL (16AWG)

FILAMENT BD. GROUND

5 380V BLK

1 0V BLK 2 60V BLK 2A 80V BLK 3 120V BLK 4 220V BLK A18,A1P5

G2 E2

C4 C3

C5

1 2 3 4 5

X - RAY ON


DOOR GROUND

16 14

AY51-021

A1P3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12


AY51-017

BLACK/RED WHT/BLK

AY51-011


9.

AY51-017


AY51-012-1


A20,A1P2

(SEE NOTE 7)

WALL


AY51-008

50 KW GENERATOR STANDARD HV MODULE IS AY30-031 125 KV

RECEPTOR

AY51-047-1

2.4K


A9P6

C0MM.

J2 J1

J4 J3

J7 J6

J9 J8 G2 E2

E1 G1

E1 G1

+

AY51-080

(SEE NOTE 1)

+

J2 J1

J4 J3

E1 G1

G2 E2


A6P2

VC+/2.4K

R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W

J6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DOOR 48VDC 48VDC 48VDCRTN 48VDCRTN 28VDC 28VDC 28VDCRTN 28VDCRTN 15VDC 15VDCRTN

2.4K VA -

AY51-005 WHITE (16AWG) BLACK (16AWG) BLUE VIOLET RED BROWN/YELLOW BLUE/YELLOW BLACK/RED

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ONLY, NON AEC GENERATORS USE

A20 Q-HSS AY20-177

J2

A20,A1P1

AY51-019-2 IS USED FOR AEC OPTION AY51-019-1

A11P3

J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

P2-1

P2-2 1

A8P5


NON DIGITAL GENERATOR USE AY40-061T. TO GROUND OR TO MAS METER)

1




C2B 12uF 440V

AEC TABLE

BLK

J2

A9P2

5.

CONNECTED

(SEE NOTE 8)

A5P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J1 BLK L RED S WHT C GROUND

48VDC 48VDCRTN

J2

GRN/YEL

A16P1

AY51-018-XX

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TECHVISION, AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS

J2

A6P1

DISCONNECT A17P1-9,-10 AND CONNECT THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING A17P1-9 AND -10 MUST BE

6.

TECHVISION, AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS

VA+/2.4K

BLK BLK

5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8

TB5

AY20-032 HV MODULE

4.

C2A 12uF 440V

AY10-005 ODYSSEY, AY10-005-1 ODYSSEY


2 3 4 5 6 7 8


DIGITAL

C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON


TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST

J1

BLUE

RED


TO

3.

A20,A1P5

AEC WALL 1


AY51-009-3P

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 3 4


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

C3, C4, C6 AND C7 1uF/1500VAC C5 AND C8, .5 uF/1500V DO NOT INSTALL C4 AND C7 IN 50KW GENERATORS

8.

AEC WALL 2

J5

4 3 2 1

AY51-007

TB8

A9TB8

1 BUCKY


C9 THRU C16, 2400uF/450VDC

2.

J6

PHASE C

WALL

TB4



PHASE B

A8P6

A8P1

PHASE N. PHASE A

BLK

AY51-022-3P


TB4

TO

J3

8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9

CH. GND GND BUCKY READY

GND

EMI FLT

A8P3

220V IN 0V IN

11

LINE LOAD

GRN/YEL (16AWG)

1 2

17 18

A17

1.

7.

AY40-035S HSS CONTROL BD. A20, A1 J1

CENTER- MAIN

TUBE DATA BASE)

WHT/BLK BLACK/RED

1 2 3 4 5 6


LOAD LINE

12

1.5KE68CA

T.S.-2

J5


19 20

11

TB7

A9TB7

J1

2- T.S.

2 3 4 5

J4

J3

9

6 5 2 1 3 4

TABLE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

6

5

BUCKY

10

(SEE NOTE 4)

RECEPTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

380

TABLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DIGITAL

AY51-013 BRN 1 RED 2 ORN 3 YEL 4 GRN 5 BLU 6 VIO 7 GRY 8 WHT 9 BLK 10

480

10

285

TO


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

AY51-023

4

+15VDC GROUND


T.S.-1

C1 25uF/440V 1 (SEE NOTE 3)

A20,A2P4

A20,A1P4

A20,A1P3

A

AY51-012-1

3

220

2 3 4 5 6 7

COLL. READY

C

TO

TB3

GRN/YEL

120

24 VDC 24 VDC RTN

PA2

15

6 7

9

1 STAND

PA1


440

7

TUBE

PC1 PC2

8

5

1 2 2A

TO

TB2

BLU VIO GRY WHT


415

15 0 60 80


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

YEL

1- T.S.

TUBE MANUFACTURER OR MODEL, (SEE

3 2 1

J4

J2 A20,A2P2

A20,A2P1

RED BRN ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT

(SEE NOTE 9)

8

4


WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) WHT (20AWG) BLK (20AWG)


7

3

32VAC 32VAC RTN 16VAC 16VAC RTN 11VAC

1 2 3


J1

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

220 380

6

T1

4

A9P1 8 16

PHASE C

2

TB1

9

TO COLL.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2)

BLU FDBK GRN RTN RED FDBK BRN RTN ORN RTN GRN FDBK SHLD 7

1

J3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

NOTE

C6

BLU VIO GRY WHT

0

T2

0VAC

J8

GRN

7

1 2 3 4

AY51-016 BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE

1 2 3

C7

INNER- PHASE

5- T.S.

A20,A2P3

J3

TB3

AY51-141 (2X)

A9P8 BRN

AY51-089

3

6

480

220VAC

BRN

2

AY51-128(8X)

J7

TB4


ANODE

(SEE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

5

PHASE B

415 440

1

AY51-071 (3X)

4

5

BLUE

POWER MODULE

C8

A9P7

11VAC RTN 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC RTN 24VAC RTN 7VAC 7VAC RTN

TB2

380


BLK (10AWG)

T1

4

AY51-069 (3X)

3

5 8

6

7

9 10

2 1

K3


A18

CATHODE

AY51-141(2X)

1N4005

RED

1

A18R1

POWER MODULE

PHASE

+

A19

TB2

3- PHASE

1 2 3 4 5 6

3

1

A19R1

1N4005

TB1

4- MAIN

3- PHASE

NOTES:

A20,A2TB2

A20,A2TB1

2

A18QA

OUTER- COMM.

2- MAIN

6- T.S.


2

-

A18QB

1

1

+

A18C2

-

AY51-020

220 285

2

DUNLEE

5- COMM.

(SEE NOTE 6)

1

DB1

A19QA

+

A18C1

AY51-019-2

0

C16

VARIAN

1- COMM.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

7

A19QB

AY51-065

~ -

2

A1P6

480

D3

-

A5P2

6

C12

DB2

~

A19C2

-

2

SEE MANUAL

3

A5, FILAMENT CONTROL BD. AY40-007T

440

+

A19C1

3

A


5

K1

AY51-065

C15

C-

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

415

4

~ -

+

380

C11

~

1 2

AY51-079

AY51-066

10 9

AY51-127 (4X)

~ +

+3

1 2 3 4

AY20-047

+

3

C14

+

2

285

T1 PHASE A

D2

220

3 AY51-066

BRN BRN BLU BLU ORN ORN AY20-146 R8, R9 R10 3.3/50W ALUM.

5

3 4

6

7 8

2 1

10

9

K2

J7 J6

J9 J8

C10 AY51-079

7

J5


C13

AY51-073 (2X)

G2 E2

+

AY51-073 (2X)

~ +

8

1 2 3 4

AY20-047

E1 G1

6 5

1

(SEE NOTE 1)

3

N L4

AY51-068(3X) 0

C9

50W

AY51-080

440VAC

4

+

LOAD

3.15A SB

F2

AY25-001

J5


R3 A,B 50 OHM 50W R4 A,B 50 OHM

WHT BLK

BLK16AWG WHT16AWG

TB1

LINE

LINE

LINE LOAD

CB1

50 AMP/3P

LOAD


B L2 C L3

A19,A1P5

TOSHIBA

+

A L1

3.15A SB

F1

AY51-007

WHITE BLACK BLUE RED 440VAC

SEE TUBE CHART #1 FOR ROTOR CONNECTION

_

AY51-074 (3X)


+

GROUND TO HV TANK

D1 1N4005

X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART #1

X-RAY TUBE

MAIN GROUND STUD

SC50-057T REV. C


1 2 3

NOT USED TIE BACK

Figure 6-26. Three-Phase (65 and 80 kW with QMI High Speed Starter) X-ray Generator Interconnection Diagram


Revision W

6-33

Chapter 6 Diagrams

J1


A8P5

VA+/2.4K 2.4K VA -

J2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A8P2

VC+/2.4K


J3 J2

2.4K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A6P3

AY51-005


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2

TB6 DOOR DOOR RTN

X - RAY ON

TB5 1 2

X-RAY ON RTN X-RAY ON (SEE NOTE 5) AY40-061T A9, INTERFACE BD.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

RED YELLOW/GREEN BLACK YELLOW/GREEN BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE AY51-062 (SEE NOTE 6)

BLUE

BLUE

A8P4

MONITOR BD.




J1

1 2 3 4 5 6


A1P12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

A B J7

A2P8 1 2 3 4 5

A1P9

J8

ORANGE GREEN

A20,A2TB4

1 2

WHITE

RED

BLACK

TEMP. TEMP.

C0MM.

MAIN

PHASE

A20 A2TB3

1 2 3 4 5 6

BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLACK AY51-131 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

BLACK

RED

GROUND 18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B J4


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J3

A2P5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

GRN/YEL (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG)

AY51-012-1


1 2 3 4 5


GND 18VDC

A2P7

A1P5

J12

FILAMENT BD. GROUND

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

E1 G1


J5


A1P1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3

A11P8

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A2P4

J10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

A11P11

J8

AEC TABLE

AEC WALL 1

J12

AEC WALL 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J13

J11

AUX. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TB10 AY40-027S A11, UNIVERSAL AEC BD. (OPTIONAL)

A11P9

TOMO TABLE

1 2 3 4 5 6

TB12

J9

WALL STAND

A11TB1 1 2 3 4


48VDC 48VDCRTN J1

TB1 300VDC

1 2 3 4 5 6

A11P1 1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J7 TOMO SWEEP TIME

J1 J6

A11TB10 24VDC PREP EXPOSE BUCKY RDY 24VDCRTN GROUND A11TB12 24VDC PREP EXPOSE BUCKY RDY 24VDCRTN GROUND

.4S .6S .8S 1.2S 2S

P2-1

P2-2

(SEE NOTE 8)

A16P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A11TB11

TB11 A11P7


A11P13

A2P3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1

AY51-145

A11P12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

G2 E2

AY51-146 J2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J9

28VDC 28VDC RTN

DOOR GROUND


ROTOR CABLE

J2 J1

J4 J3

J7 J6

J9 J8

E1 G1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J11

J3 1 2 3 4

A1P2

AY51-011

AY40-053S2 A8, LINE

AY51-080

G2 E2

BLACK/RED WHT/BLK

SHLD

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


J4

A1P4

AY51-047-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A6P2

R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W

AY51-066

RS 232 SLAVE PORT



A1P8

J8

RS 232 MASTER PORT

A9P6

A1P3

VC-

J4

SEE NOTE 1

+ + +

J10


J6



AY51-012-1

AY51-017

AY51-021

50 KW GENERATOR STANDARD HV MODULE IS AY30-031, 125 KV.

8.

9.

AY51-017

1 2 3


P1-L

J2

TB5

NON DIGITAL GENERATOR WITH TOMO OPTION

P1-N

A9P2

2 3 4 5 6 7 8



1



A8P1


DIGITAL GENERATORS WITH NO TOMO OPTION AY51-062 IS REPLACED WITH AY51-008 AND

C2A 12uF 440V

1

BLK

A6P1

J6



TB8

1 2 3 4

NON DIGITAL GENERATOR USE AY40-061T.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY, AY10-005-1 ODYSSEY TECHVISION, AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION, AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS

AY51-018-XX GRN/YEL

GROUND

J5 A11P5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J5

A9TB8

1 BUCKY

(SEE NOTE 7)


6.

A20,A1P2

A11P6

PHASE C


WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (20AWG) WHT (16AWG) BLK (20AWG) BLK (20AWG)

PHASE B

TB4

BLK BLK

5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8

BLK

AY51-022-3P

PHASE N. PHASE A

WALL

WALL

A20,A1P1

A11P10

LOAD GND

GRN/YEL (16AWG)

RED

TO

LINE

RECEPTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TB2

DIGITAL


A20 Q-HSS AY20-177

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BUCKY READY


5.


CH. GND GND

220V IN 0V IN

TO

AY51-020

1 2

17 18

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

AY51-019-2

LOAD LINE


AY51-049

19 20

EMI FLT


TB7

A9TB7

DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND -10 AND CONNECT THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING A17P1-9 AND -10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR TO MAS METER.)

7.

J2

SHLD

4.

C2B 12uF 440V

J1 1.5KE68CA

A5P2

6

BUCKY


5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

5 2 1 3 4

2 3 4 5

AY40-035S HSS CONTROL BD. A20, A1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

380

TABLE

TB3

6

A2P1

4

TO

9

C1 COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE

J5

1 2 3 4 5 6

3

220

7

+15VDC GROUND

10

(SEE NOTE 4)

J1

1 2 2A

120

TABLE

3.

A20,A1P5

J4

J3

A

RECEPTOR

C1 25uF/440V 1 (SEE NOTE 3)

A20,A2P4

A20,A1P4


60 80

COLL. READY

DIGITAL

C9 THRU C16, 2400uF/450VDC. C3, C4, C6 AND C7 1uF/1500VAC, C5 AND C8 .5 uF/1500VAC. DO NOT INSTALL C4 AND C7 IN 50KW GENERATORS.

WHT/BLK BLACK/RED

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

A20,A1P3

C

TO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

PA2


5

440

15 7



PA1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

415

7

0

TO TUBE STAND

PC1 PC2

3 2 1

J4

A20,A2P2

AY51-015

6

4


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

BLU VIO GRY WHT

A2P6

380


YEL

1. 2.

BASE) A20,A2P3

J3

J2

A20,A2P1

AY51-013

5


TO COLL. 1 2 3

A9P8 BRN

J1

A5P1

280

3


AY51-141 (2X)

C4 C3

T.S.-2

MODEL AND MANUFACTURER. (SEE TUBE DATA

TB4

TB3

14

T1 PHASE C

220

2

480

2)

DUNLEE

NOTES:

A20,A2TB2

TB2

16

A9P1 8 16

0VAC

AY51-016

9

1 2 3

T.S.-1

2- T.S.

ANODE

15

1

NOTE


0

220VAC

1 2 3 4


T2

J3

1- T.S.

6- T.S.

A+


C5

GRN/YEL

2

(SEE

8

6 7

POWER MODULE


5

480

J3

A18 C8

YEL

415

T1 PHASE B

4

J7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

5- T.S.

A18QA

C6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

INNER- PHASE

A20,A2TB1

2

1

C7

A9P7

3- PHASE

C-

A18R1

(8X)

A9J8 380

-

-

1

BLU VIO GRY WHT

3

A18C2

2

A18QB

AY51-141 (2X) AY51-128

11

RED

+

CATHODE

CENTER- MAIN

3- PHASE

CONNECTION

SEE MANUAL

AY51-023

+

POWER MODULE

OUTER- COMM.

4- MAIN

FOR ROTOR

TB1

C16

AY51-090 SEE NOTE 6

280

440


DB1

1

C12

A19

A18C1


2

12

4 3 2 1

E1 G1

G2 E2

E1 G1

A19R1

BRN

220

10 11

A8P6

~ -

1

1


~

2

A19QA


9

8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9

J2 J1

J4 J3

J7 J6

J9 J8 AY51-066

+

-

+3


7

-

+

3

A1P10

6

4

A8P3

~ + C15

5- COMM.

2- MAIN

A18,A1P5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

440 480

DB2 AY51-073 (X2)

2

A19QB 1

AY51-065

5

D3 1N4005

415

C11

~

1 2

~ (4X)

4

9

K1 AY51-127

380

3

(SEE NOTE 9)

+3 A19C2

3

1 2 3 4

VARIAN

1- COMM.

CHART #1

AY20-047

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

(4X)

AY51-069

4

3

0

8


2 280


RED YELLOW

AY51-071 (3X)

1N4005

+

A19C1

C14

AY51-079

10

3

5 6

9

7 8

2 1

D1

10

K3

AY51-073 (2X)

J5


C13

AY20-047

~ +

7

1 2 3 4

AY51-065

AY51-079 8

NEUTRAL 1

T1 PHASE A

BRN BLU ORN BRN BLU ORN

D2

AY20-146 R8, R9 R10 3.3/50W ALUM.

3 4

6

5

7 8

10

2 1

K2

9

RED YELLOW

220

0

+

C10

5

1N4005

AY51-009-3P

440VAC

6

AY51-068


4

3

J5

A19,A1P5

G2 E2

3.15A SB

C9 (SEE NOTE 1)

N L4


AY51-080

C L3

F2 WHT BLK16AWG

B L2

(4X)

AY51-007


440VAC

3.15A SB

+

F1

BLK16AWG WHT16AWG

LINE

LINE

AY51-007

A L1

LOAD

LINE

LOAD

CB1

50 AMP/3P

LOAD


TB1

TOSHIBA

SEE TUBE

+

WHITE BLACK BLUE RED

AY51-074 (3X)

1 0 VAC BLK 2 60 VAC BLK 2A 80 VAC BLK 3 120 VAC BLK 4 220 VAC BLK


X-RAY TUBE

_

GROUND TO HV TANK

5 380 VAC BLK

X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART # 1 MAIN GROUND STUD


BLACK (20AWG) WHITE (20AWG) BLACK YELLOW/GREEN WHITE BROWN BLACK/RED YELLOW/WHITE


SC50-058T REV. C

Figure 6-27. Three-Phase (65 and 80 kW with QMI High Speed Starter and Tomography Interface) X-ray Generator Interconnection Diagram


Revision W

6-34

Chapter 6 Diagrams

AY10-004 OCP QUEST OR AY10-005 OCP ODYSSEY

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

A16,A1P7

AY51-025

A16,A1P1

RED

AY51-084

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

BLACK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

AY20-158 2

3

LCD DISPLAY (QUEST)

EL31-005

A16A2

J1

J2

A16,A1P2

2K 5

1

A16,R1

LCD DISPLAY ADJUSTMENT POT

J8

AY51-026 BRN (22AWG) ORN (22AWG) RED (22AWG) YEL (22AWG)

ON/OFF SWITCH ASSY.

A16,A1P4

1 2 3

RS 232

A16,A1P6 J4

1

AY51-042

J6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

1A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A16,A1P8

GENERATOR PROGRAM (Q-WANE)

RS 232

A16J2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

2

GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

AY40-004S1 OCP MICROPROCESSOR, A16A1

J3

A16,A1P3

A16J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J5

2A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

AY51-041

FROM GENERATOR

SERIAL COMM.

GRN/YEL

J7

1 2 3 4

EL31-004

LCD DISPLAY (ODYSSEY)

TB1 PREP EXPOSE COMM. GROUND

1 2 3 4

A16A2

A16

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

A16,A1P5

AY50-002 FRONT PANEL A16A3 (ODYSSEY) AY50-001 FRONT PANEL (QUEST)

SC50-070 REV. A

Figure 6-28. Operator Control Panel - ODYSSEY/ QUEST Wiring Diagram


Revision W

6-35

J8 RS 232 SLAVE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J3 28VDC 28VDC RTN 28VDC T.V. 28VDC RTN J2 V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 28VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 28VDC MAG. 28VDC MAG.RTN MISSING PHASE FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED

J11

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2 EXPOSE

1

RED

2

GREEN WHITE

HAND SWITCH ITE COMPUTER SYSTEM

A1P9

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

AY40-073S A1A1, OCP INTERFACE J2

J4

L-COM MODULAR 6 JACK P1 J1 1 2 3 4 5 6

A1P1

PREP BLUE EXPOSE YELLOW +28V GREEN Gnd RED GENERATOR ON BEEP/PWRSWITCH

1 2

SW1

DISPLAY

2.4k 1/2W R3

3 4

POWER SWITCH

R1 750 ohm 1W

R2 1.5k 0.5W

J5

P/O Q-CONNECT OPTION AY10-029

1 2 3 4 5 6

BLACK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

WHITE

15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN J9

Vz=13V Pz=5W D1

COMPUTER D2 POWER LED

ETHERNET

1 2 3 4

24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BUCKY T. READY BUCKY W. READY DOOR INTERLOCK SPARE TABLE RDY K1, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 7VAC RTN 7VAC 15VDC AY40-006S GROUND A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.)

PORT

PREP

BLACK

AY51-243-XXX

RS 232 MASTER PORT

J4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

SW 2 1

SEE NOTE 2

J10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Chapter 6 Diagrams

Vin+ GND

B1 AI-550AS/TRIP-80PS

TO HOSPITAL LAN

J1

AY20-271 P/O Q-CONNECT OPTION AY10-029

ETHERNET SWITCH

TECHVISION (OPTION) ETHERNET J2 EL75-058-XXX

EL75-058-XXX

J3

ETHERNET

SEE NOTE 2 AY51-244-XX SEE NOTE 2 PART OF GENERATOR SC50-090 REV. A NOTES: 1.

2.

THIS BLOCK DIAGRAM SHOWS ONLY CONNECTIONS OF AY40-006S FOR Q-CONNECT OPTION. THE REST OF THE CONNECTIONS OF AY40-006S ARE SHOWN IN GENERATORS BLOCK DIAGRAM. EMI SUPPRESSION FERRITE CABLE SNAP ITS (1) X EL54-012 + (1) X EL54-013

Figure 6-29. Q-Connect Interconnection Diagram


Option

System

Revision W

6-36

Chapter 6 Diagrams

Figure 6-30. Operator Control Panel Circuit Block Diagram (Non-Q-VISION OCP)


Revision W

6-37

Chapter 6 Diagrams

Figure 6-31. Generator Logic Circuit Block Diagram


Revision W

6-38

Chapter 6 Diagrams

Figure 6-32. Filament Regulator Control Circuit Block Diagram


Revision W

6-39

Chapter 6 Diagrams

Figure 6-33. KVP & Filament Control Circuit Block Diagram


Revision W

6-40

Chapter 6 Diagrams

Figure 6-34. Single-Phase (Non-STORED ENERGY) and Three-Phase Line Monitor Circuit Block Diagram


Revision W

6-41

Chapter 6 Diagrams

-15VDC

+15VDC

BATTERY+ VOLTAGE

AMPLIFIER

.

CHARGER .

200VAC IN

U1A

DIODE

.

.

ON

CHARGER (+) OUTPUT TRIAC

BRIDGE .

V SENSE (V+)

AMPLIFIER

BATTERY+ VOLTAGE RTN

FROM OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT

.

AMPLIFIER

.

.

.

U1B

.

RELAY .

OVERVOLT FAULT

FROM LOGIC CIRCUIT

TO LOGIC CIRCUIT

AMPLIFIER .

.

ON

CONTROL CIRCUIT . TURN-OFF

D12

.

+15VDC

DELAY CIRCUIT

1N4148 FROM CAPACITOR BANK

.

DELAY CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT .

U1C U1D

CHARGING TURN-ON

SYSTEM SYSTEM ON .

TO BATTERY PACK

ADJUSTABLE REF

-15VDC

D15 OVERVOLT FAULT . AMPLIFIER BATTERY- VOLTAGE

AMPLIFIER

.

.

TO LOGIC CIRCUIT

1N4148

U4D

U4A . AMPLIFIER

V SENSE (V-)

U4B

.

TO LOGIC CIRCUIT CHARGER 200VAC IN

BATTERY- VOLTAGE RTN

.

AMPLIFIER

.

DIODE

.

.

ON

CHARGER (-) OUTPUT TRIAC

BRIDGE RELAY .

U4C

.

+24VDC

CHARGING TURN-ON .

.

CONTROL

FROM LOGIC CIRCUIT

AUTO SHUTOFF

CIRCUIT .

CIRCUIT SHUTOFF

TURN-OFF .

RELAY . FROM OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT

.

DELAY

AUTO

.

SYSTEM ON/OFF

DELAY CIRCUIT

INRUSH SYSTEM ON/OFF

RESISTORS BYPASS

TO CONTACTOR K1

RELAY

RELAY .

+24VDC (P/S)

. CAPACITORS TO CAPACITOR BANK

DISCHARGE RELAY

110/220VAC IN .

110VAC/220VAC IN

20VAC OUT

24VDC .

DIODE

.

VOLTAGE

+24VDC

BRIDGE TRANSFORMER

+15VDC

-15VDC

+24VDC

DC RTN

+15VDC

-15VDC

+24VDC

REGULATOR

+15VDC

-15VDC

+24VDC (P/S)

DC RTN

Figure 6-35. Single-Phase STORED ENERGY Line Monitor Circuit Block Diagram


Revision W

6-42

Chapter 6 Diagrams SECONDARY AC INPUT F1 7A SB

J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J2 32_VAC 32_VAC_RTN 15_VAC 15_VAC_RTN 10.5_VAC 10.5_VAC_RTN 24_VAC 24_VAC_RTN

F2 2A SB

F3 6A SB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CON8 TO POWER SUPPLIES

F4 3A SB

CON12

TB1

ROTOR 220VAC F5 8A SB

J3

ROTOR 60VAC

S

1 2 3 4

TO ROTOR

F7

COLLIMETOR

F6 8 A SB

4A SB

24VAC 24VAC RTN F8 3A SB

CH GND

8_VAC

CON4 J4

TUBE STAND

1 2 3 4 5 6

FROM T1

TB2 F9

3 A F/A 24_VDC

1

24_VDC_RTN F17

CON6

2

10A SB JP4

2

1

3

R1 JUMPER

COLLIMATOR_READY

4

FOR T2 5

100 J5

8A SB 2

F10 220_VAC

TO T2

+15VF

JP1 110_VAC 0_VAC

7

JUMPER

24V

'

24V RTN

'

SPAER

'

COLL RDY

'

15V RTN

'

15V

'

GND

1

1 2 3 4 5 6

6

'

MANUAL COLLIMETOR

CON6 F11

TB7

2 A SB

TABLE TB3

220VAC

110VAC

ROTOR BOOST

1 2

115VAC RTN

3

100 2

R3

115VAC BUCKY ON

TO MICROCONTROLLER

INSTALL 5

JP2

JUMPER

115 VAC

1

J6

6

NON BUCKY TABLE 2 7

2

7

3 6

4 5

SW1

1 8

8

110VAC

'

BUCKY ON

'

115VAC RTN

' '

CH GND

'

GND

' '

BUCKY RDY

3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

4

'

0 VAC D1 SW SLIDE-SPDT

LS1 R4

1N4005 793-P-1CS-24VDC TB4

150 F12

115VAC

1

BUCKY ON

2

R5

+15V_RTN

115VAC RTN

150

3 4

CON20 R2 R6

5

115 VAC

0 VAC

R8

3

6

2

D2

N.I.

7

2

PREP

INSTALL

150

1N4005 D3

1

JUMPER NON BUCKY WALL

1N4005

+15VF

SW2 8

JP3

PREP

'

110VAC

'

BUCKY ON

'

115VAC RTN

'

100

10k

F13

WALL

2 A SB

2 7 4 5

SW SLIDE-SPDT

CH GND

'

24V RTN

'

24V

'

BUCKY RDY

3 6 1 8

LS3 2 7

D4 LS2 793-P-1CS-24VDC

'

1N4005 4 5

TB5

X-RAY ON

3 6 1 8

D5 793-P-1CS-24VDC

1N4005

TB6

DOOR

DOOR_INTERLOCK R10

PD4

100 R11

33 2W

R12 33 2W TO CONTACTORS J7 D6

F14 8A SB

PD7

1 2 3 4

1N4005

PD8

CON4

PD9

R7 0 PD1

SC40-023T REV. S

Figure 6-36. Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T/AY40-023T1) Schematic Diagram


Revision W

6-43

Chapter 6 Diagrams

Figure 6-37. Interface Board, Digital Receptor A9 (AY40-034T) Interface Diagram


Revision W

6-44

Chapter 6 Diagrams SECONDARY AC INPUT

F1 7A SB

J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J2 32_VAC 32_VAC_RTN 15_VAC 15_VAC_RTN 10.5_VAC 10.5_VAC_RTN 24_VAC 24_VAC_RTN

F2 2A SB

F3 6A SB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CON8 F4 3A SB

TO POWER SUPPLIES

CON12

TB1

COLLIMATOR

F6 8 A SB F5

J3

3A SB

24VAC

1 2 3

TO 28V POWER

24VAC RTN F8 3A SB

SUPPLY

F7

CON3

CH GND

8_VAC

3A SB

TUBE STAND TB7

TB2 F9

3 A F/A 24_VDC

1

24_VDC_RTN

FROM T1

F17

2

JP4

2

15A SB

1

3

R1 JUMPER

COLLIMATOR_READY

4

FOR T2

TB8

5

100 15A SB 2

F10 220_VAC

6

+15VF

JP1

7

TO/FROM T2

' '

24V 24V RTN SPARE

'

COLL RDY

'

15V RTN

'

15V

'

GND

1

JUMPER

'

110_VAC

MANUAL COLLIMETOR

0_VAC

F11

2 A SB

TABLE TB3 1 2

115VAC RTN

3

100 2

R3

115VAC BUCKY ON

TO MICROCONTROLLER

5

JP2

JUMPER

115 VAC

1

J6

6

NON BUCKY TABLE 2 7

2

7

3 6

4 5

SW1

1 8

8

110VAC

'

BUCKY ON

'

115VAC RTN

' '

CH GND

'

GND

' '

BUCKY RDY

3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

4 INSTALL

'

0 VAC

D1 LS1

SW SLIDE-SPDT

R4

1N4005 793-P-1CS-24VDC TB4

150 F12

115VAC

1

BUCKY ON

2

R5

+15V_RTN

150

115VAC RTN

3 4

CON20 R2 R6

5 115 VAC

3

6

2

N.I

0 VAC

R8

D2

7

2

PREP

150

1N4005 D3

8 1

JUMPER NON BUCKY WALL

1N4005

+15VF

SW2

INSTALL

JP3

PREP

'

110VAC

'

BUCKY ON

'

115VAC RTN

'

100

10k

F13

WALL

2 A SB

2 7 4 5

SW SLIDE-SPDT

CH GND

'

24V RTN

'

24V

'

BUCKY RDY

3 6 1 8

LS3 2 7

D4 LS2 793-P-1CS-24VDC

'

1N4005 4 5

TB5

X-RAY ON

3 6 1 8

D5 793-P-1CS-24VDC

1N4005

TB6

DOOR

DOOR_INTERLOCK

PD4

R10

PD5

100 R11

33 2W

R12 33 2W TO CONTACTORS

J7 F14

D6

F15

8A SB

3A SB

PD7

1N4005

PD8

1 2 3 4

CON4

PD9

R7 0 PD1

PD2

SC40-061T REV. C

Figure 6-38. Interface Board, Digital Receptor A9 (AY40-061T) Interface Diagram


Revision W

6-45

Chapter 6 Diagrams

Figure 6-39. Power Supply Board A6 (AY40-005T) Schematic Diagram


Revision W

6-46

Chapter 6 Diagrams

AC RTN TP3

60 VAC TP13

COM TP1

220 VAC TP12

K2 1

4 3

1

220VAC 60VAC

1 2 3 4

1

1

J1 1 2

COM

Q1

RTN

RELAY SPST

TB1

1

VA230LA20A

RELAY ON

ROTOR RUN TP7

J5

1

RELAY RTN ON

1

ROTOR ON TP5

. . . . . . .

MAIN PHASE COM


MAIN CURRENT SENSE

Q2 DRIVE SIGNAL

Q1 DRIVE SIGNAL

1

VA230LA20A

* *

MOV3 * *

MOV2

Q4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

2

2

MAIN

BOOST ON TP6

1 2 3

TP2 MAIN

P5 1 2 3

C1 SEE NOTE

1

1

TEMPERATURE SENSE J3

RUN ON ROTOR ROTATING TEMP. FAULT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PHASE TP4

CONTROL CIRCUITS

1

ROTOR ON BOOST ON

PHASE CURRENT SENSE SAMPLE OF MAIN CURRENT SAMPLE OF PHASE CURRENT

+15V TP10

SENSE CIRCUITS

NOTE: 1. THE VALUE OF THE CAPACITOR IS DEPENDENT ON TUBE TYPE.

1

+15V 100uf 25V

+

J4

C7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

TP11 1

GND

REV. B

Figure 6-40. Rotor Circuit Block Diagram


Revision W

6-47

Chapter 6 Diagrams

12uF 25uF

+15V TP2

TUBE DEPENDENT

CONTROL BOARD

+5V TP4

1

1

+15V C1

REGULATOR

12uF

5V

100uf 25V

+

J1

TB3

AY40-036S DRIVE BOARD

VOLTAGE

1 2 3 4 5

AY40-035S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

TB1 TP1

380VAC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1

GND -15V

FROM T2

TP3 -15V

1

FROM POWER SUPPLY

C6

F5

220VAC FUSE 0.1A 250V

INPUT VOLTAGE 80VAC 60VAC RTN

BRIDGE RECTIFIER AND FILTER

RELAYS F5

CONTROL

K1 4

IGBT H BRIDGE AND GATE DRIVERS

FUSE 15A 500V

CON7

3 A B

+

100uf 25V ROTOR ON D4 RUN ON TP4

P5

BOOST

LEVEL

RUN

J3 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SYNCRONIZING

CIRCUIT

CONTROL

CONVERSION

DRIVER

CIRCUITS

P3

COMM

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1

J1

DRIVE 1 DRIVE 2

TP16

P4

J4

TP19

+15V

CONTROL CIRCUITS

GENERTOR

1

TP10 GND

+15V

1

60/180 Hz

SPEED

-15V

V_FEEDBACK

ROTATING

RESET CURR_LIMIT C_FEEDBACK TUBE_TEMP

TIMING CONTROL & LIMITS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

P2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

TP18 18VDC

15V

TP7 -15V

ANALOG

TO TUBE ROTOR

FUSE FLQ15

P1

1

60 Hz/180 Hz

1 2 3 4 5 6

PHASE F4

HIGH/LOW SPEED TP8

CON9

TB2

MAIN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TP9 TP6 I feedback 2 1

1

RTN

ISOLATION &

DRIVE 1 TP6

1N4005

1 2 3 4 5 6

1

RUN ON ROTOR ROTATING TEMP. FAULT HIGH/LOW SPEED FAULT

DRIVE CONTROL

1

BOOST ON

FROM LOGIC BOARD

ROTOR ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

P5

1

J2 ROTOR ON

1 2 3 4 5 6

1

DRIVE 2 TP5

1

BOOST ON TP7

OUTPUT 1 -15V

PD7

PD6 TP2 I feedback 1 1

OUTPUT 2

F6

QUAD OUTPUT 14VDC

FUSE THERMAL 0.5A

J3 36VDC RTN

POWER SUPPLY

RESET

1 2 3

OUTPUT 3

FROM POWER SUPPLY

OUTPUT 4

TP14 V feedback

1

CURRENT SENSING

K3

TEMP.

VOLTAGE SENSING 2

& FUALT PROTECTION

DRIVE

3

FREQUENCY ROTOR ON BOOST

RELAYS CONTROL CIRCUITS

RUN SPEED HIGH/LOW

J5

P5

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

8 7

+15V

TP15 I feedback 2

D27 MBRS360TR

1

MONITOR

4 9

+15V

1 10

TQ2SA-12V R59

2

F5 TP11 OVERCURRENT 1

FUSE 0.1A 250V

TB4 1 2

100 2W

TO TUBE TEMP. SWITCH

D29

1

SMCG18

SC50-069 REV. A

Figure 6-41. QMI High-Speed Starter Circuit Block Diagram


Revision W

6-48

Chapter 6 Diagrams

CONNECTOR J8 (SEE TABLE FOR PIN OUT)

JUMPER JP6 (HSS)

TEST POINT 3

TEST POINT 9

JUMPER JP7

JUMPER CONFIGURATION

R26

TEST POINT 5 C36 C35

R39

TEST POINT 1

C20

C6

TEST POINT 10 1

Y2

R59 R60

16

15

TEST POINT 6

R23

R24

R53 R40

1C22

R19 C33

C32 R17 C34

R5

J1

TEST POINT 2

C39

R18

2

1

JP1 - ALWAYS INSTALLED JP6 - INSTALLED ONLY ON SYSTEMS USING AID HIGH SPEED STARTER, NOT INSTALLED ON NON-HIGH SPEED STARTER SYSTEMS JP7 - INSTALL ON PINS 2-3

TEST POINT DESCRIPTIONS

C23

R48

TP1 - +5 VDC TP2 - HIGH VOLTAGE ON

C37

1

R66

C9

TP6 - WALL BUCKY GRID MOVING

TEST POINT 4

TP10 - +4.8 VDC REF ON U14 (A-D)

C43

4

R21

J3

R63 R64

TP8 - OCP COMMUNICATION

CONNECTOR J8 PIN OUT

C28

NOTE: “

1

2

1

1

TEST POINT 8

1

1

C27

J9

C26

1

10

9

J6

3

JUMPER JP1 (RS-485)

TP5 - TABLE BUCKY GRID MOVING

S/N

J7

CNTRL LOGIC PCB REV. E ASSY AY40-006S REV.

R54 R65

TEST POINT 7

J8-1 J8-2 J8-3 J8-4 J8-5 J8-6 J8-7 J8-8

HSS ON BOOST ON RUN ON ROTATING TEMP FAULT HIGH/LOW SPEED OVER CURRENT HSS DETECT

” DENOTES JUMPER LOCATION AY40-006S REV. K

Figure 6-42. Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S) Test Point/ Jumper Location Diagram


Revision W

6-49

Chapter 6 Diagrams

TEST POINT 14

JP7 R110

C39

1

TEST POINT 6

R122

+

R108 +15V -15V

+

TEST POINT 5 -15V

U19

1

D13

1

JP11

R34

R92

+

TP5

D27 R52

R106

C81

R133

+

R134

C89

TP8

C27 R93

10

C72

R58

C68

R104

C41 U13

MA MON

MA CONT

+

2

+

1

R70 R135

R61+18V TP26 R131

TEST POINT 27

TEST POINT 3 +15V

+

CATHODE ADJ. POT. R34

TEST POINT 12

TEST POINT 7 MA FEEDBACK

TEST POINT 24 CATHODE DRIVE TEST POINT 18

15

16

R128 R109

C82

U21

C54

R7 TP25 Q4 TP1

C29 R67 JP3

R112

ERROR BYPASS

U1

+

R3

R21D7

C9 R54 R121R120

R60 R79 R4R126C6 TP18U17R3

SIZE

U9

R1

R2

D19 C56 D25

-

C11

D34 TP19 R56 R117 1

R33 FIL C4 R28

TEST POINT 23 CATHODE DRIVE

ERROR

R13 R27 TP2 C33 R49 C2 TP21 OUT B

C5

OUT B

5

ANODE ADJ. POT. R3

TP23

1

TEST POINT 22 ANODE DRIVE

+ R39C93C15R37OUT A C16

4

TEST POINT 21 ANODE DRIVE

R89

C95 C84 D26

R150 C12 R139 C24 R24 1 R29 TP22R18C1 R12OUT A C92

+

TEST POINT 1 ANODE FEEDBACK

TEST POINT 16 TEST POINT 17

D37

R143 R141 D36

TEST POINT 2 CATHODE FEEDBACK

DAC MODULE AY40-083S

Q1

TEST POINT 25

C23

TEST POINT 20

TEST POINT 13

TEST POINT 26

TEST POINT 9 +18V

TEST POINT 8 +5V

TEST POINT 10

TEST POINT 4

TEST POINT 11

Figure 6-43. KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S) Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram


Revision W

6-50

Chapter 6 Diagrams

TEST POINT 15

TEST POINT 13

TEST POINT 11 FILAMENT SWITCHING (LARGE 24 VDC/SMALL 0 VDC)

TEST POINT 14

TEST POINT 3

D4 Q5 TP14

TP15

J1

TP11

R35 R34 C18 K1

C16

R10

R21 +

C20

U5

D10

C15

D11

D6

U4

D7

R32 C17

FUSE F1 (+48 VDC INPUT)

R22

R33 R29

T2 R28

C24

D12

3 AMP SLO-BLO

C19 C22 D14 D13

J2

R27 C14

R30

C6

R19 C10

C23

TP13 R18

C27

R23

R31 U2 TP3

R9

R8 R26 R7 D8 + C21 R16

R17

D1

X5 R2

T1-8

R3 +

+

TEST POINT 5

C3

C9

28

R5

R6 C2

C12

R24

TP5

U1

R25 C11

T1-7

T1-3

T1-4

U3

TEST POINT 12

TP12 T1-5 +

T1-6

R13

T1-10

T1-9

R14

C1

C7 R15

TEST POINT 6

T1-2

TP6

C8

T1-1

R36

TP4

C26

R12

D2

C5

R11 D9

R1

C4

TP10

TEST POINT 4

D3

C13

D5 +

R20

TEST POINT 10

R4 C25

TP2

TP1

TP9

Q6 TP7

TEST POINT 2

TEST POINT 1

TEST POINT 9

TEST POINT 7

TP8

TEST POINT 8

Figure 6-44. Filament Control Board A5 (AY40-007T) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram


Revision W

6-51

Chapter 6 Diagrams

Figure 6-45. Power Supply Board A6 (AY40-005T) Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram


Revision W

6-52

Chapter 6 Diagrams

0 43

240 VAC

240 VAC

C VA

480 VAC

FUSE F2 3 AMPS

380 VAC 240 VAC

43 0

240 VAC

240 VAC

VA C

480 VAC

JUMPER

380 VAC 240 VAC

JUMPER

AC INPUT VOLTAGE JUMPER POSITIONS: LINE INPUT 200-260 VAC, 1PH

INSTALLED JUMPER 240 (3 PLACES SHOWN ABOVE)

FUSES F1, F3

FUSE

RATING

FUNCTION

FUSE F1

1/4A (FOR 480 VAC INPUT) 1/2A (FOR 240 VAC INPUT)

AC INPUT PROTECTION

FUSE F2

3A

FUSE F3


+30 VDC OUTPUT USED TO TURN ON GENERATOR AND FOR EXTERNAL TUBE STAND POWER SUPPLY) AC INPUT PROTECTION

Figure 6-46. Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-022T1), Single-Phase Systems - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram


Revision W

6-53

Chapter 6 Diagrams

FUSE F6 3 AMPS

FUSE

RATING

FUNCTION

F1, F3

4A (SLO-BLOW)

AC SUPPLY PROTECTION

F2, F4

3A (SLO-BLOW)

DC OUTPUT PROTECTION (FOR BATTERY CHARGING)

F5, F7

1A (FOR 230 VAC INPUT) 2A (FOR 115 VAC INPUT)

AC INPUT PROTECTION

F6

3A

USED TO ENERGIZE K4 AND K5 AND FOR EXTERNAL TUBE STAND POWER SUPPLY)

FUSE F5, F7 (SEE TABLE FOR VALUES)

JUMPER POSITIONS (115 VAC) IMPORTANT! JUMPERS MUST BE INSULATED TO PREVENT CONTACT WITH EACH OTHER

JUMPER POSITION (230 VAC)

TEST POINT TP13 (GND)

TEST POINT TP3 (-205 VDC)

TEST POINT TP20 (V LIMIT CATHODE) FUSE F1, F3 4 AMPS

POTENTIOMETER R60 CATHODE OVERVOLTAGE ADJUST (+2.12 ±0.02 VDC)

FUSE F2, F4 3 AMPS

POTENTIOMETER R70 POS. OUTPUT LIMIT (+205 VDC)

TEST POINT TP21 (V LIMIT ANODE)

POTENTIOMETER R19 ANODE OVERVOLTAGE ADJUST (-2.12 ±0.02 VDC)

TEST POINT TP2 (+205 VDC)

POTENTIOMETER R66 NEG. OUTPUT LIMIT (-205 VDC)

Figure 6-47. Line Monitor/Battery Charger Board A8 (AY40-028T), Stored-Energy Systems - Test Point/ Jumper Location Diagram


Revision W

6-54

Chapter 6 Diagrams

FUSE F2 3 AMPS

240 VAC

240 VAC

43 0 VA

480 VAC

JUMPER POSITIONS

C

COMMON

0 VA C

240 VAC

43

THREE-PHASE 208 VAC CONFIGURATION:

380 VAC 240 VAC

240 VAC

43 0 VA

480 VAC

240 VAC

480 VAC

FUSE F4 = PHASE A FUSE F5 = PHASE B FUSE F6 = PHASE C

240 VA C

380 VAC 240 VAC

C 380 VAC 240 VAC

F6

JUMPER F4

F5

JUMPER

FUSES F1, F3 FUSE

RATING

FUNCTION

F1


AC INPUT PROTECTION

F2

3A

F3



Figure 6-48. Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-022T2/T3), Three-Phase Systems - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram


Revision W

6-55

Chapter 6 Diagrams FUSE F2 3 AMPS

1 240 VAC

240 VAC

43 0V

480 VA C

JUMPER POSITIONS

AC 380 VAC 240 VAC

1 1

NOTE: AY40-053S2 USED ON 380 - 480 VAC INPUT MODELS 240 VAC 480 VAC

240 VAC

240 VAC

0V AC

480 VAC

THREE-PHASE 208 VAC CONFIGURATION:

43

D AN G ER H IG H VO LTAG E

.25 AM P 250 VAC

.25 AM P 250 VAC

.25 AM P 250 VAC

D ANG ER H IG H VO LTAG E

FUSE F4 = PHASE A FUSE F5 = PHASE B FUSE F6 = PHASE C

AY40-053S3 USED ON 208 - 240 VAC INPUT MODELS

COMMON

380 VAC 240 VAC

JUMPER JUMPER (0 OHM RESISTOR)

FUSES F1, F3 FUSE

RATING

FUNCTION

F1


AC INPUT PROTECTION

F2

3A

F3



Figure 6-49. Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-053S2/ AY40-053S3), Three-Phase QMI High-Speed Starter Systems - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram


Revision W

6-56

Chapter 6 Diagrams

TB1 COLLIMATOR INTERFACE

TB4 WALL BUCKY INTERFACE

NO WALL BUCKY JUMPER

MANUAL COLLIMATOR JUMPER

TB3 TABLE BUCKY INTERFACE

NO TABLE BUCKY JUMPER

24 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR +28 VDC)

F5

8A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO (REPLACE ONLY WITH BUSSMAN MDA-8)

LINE INPUT FOR OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY

F6

8A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

24 VAC TO COLLIMATOR LINE INPUT FOR OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY

F7 F8

3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

8 VAC TO LOGIC BD. (FOR +5 VDC)

F9

3A, 250 VAC FAST-ACT

+24 VDC TO TUBE STAND

24VDC

3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

SPARE

F4

24V RTN

10.5 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR +15 VDC)

COL RDY

6A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

15V RTN

F3

GND.

15 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR -15 VDC)

15 VDC

2A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

CHASSIS

F2

24VAC

7A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

F11

2A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

120 VAC FOR TABLE BUCKY

F12

2A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

120 VAC FOR WALL BUCKY

F14

15A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

SPARE

F15

3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

SPARE

110VAC

LINE INPUT FOR TRANSFORMER T2

F10

FUNCTION

TB7 ROTOR BOOST STATOR VOLTAGE 220VAC/110VAC

220VAC


F17

SETTING

JP1

MAN./AUTO COLL.

JP2

TABLE BUCKY

INSTALLED (NO TABLE BUCKY) NOT INSTALLED (TABLE BUCKY)

JP3

WALL BUCKY

INSTALLED (NO WALL BUCKY) NOT INSTALLED (WALL BUCKY)

TB7

TB5 X-RAY ON LIGHT INTERFACE

250 VAC SLO-BLO 8 AMP

F1

JUMPER DESIG.

TB6 DOOR INTERLOCK

FUNCTION 32 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR +48 VDC)

24 VAC

RATING

CHASSIS GND.

FUSE

TB2 TUBESTAND INTERFACE

INSTALLED (MANUAL) NOT INSTALLED (AUTO)

INSTALL ON 1 & 2 (TOSHIBA ROTOR BOOST E7242X, E7813X, E7252X, E7239X STATOR VOLTAGE TUBES) INSTALL ON 2 & 3 (ALL OTHER TUBE TYPES)

NOTE: “

” DENOTES JUMPER LOCATION

Figure 6-50. Interface Board (No HSS Non-Digital) A9 (AY40-023T) - Terminal Block/Jumper Location Diagram


Revision W

6-57

Chapter 6 Diagrams



3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO


8A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

220 VAC TO ROTOR DRIVE BD.

F5

(REPLACE ONLY WITH BUSSMAN MDA-8)

24 VAC TO COLLIMATOR

F7

3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

60 VAC TO ROTOR DRIVE BD.

D2


JUMPER ROTOR BOOST STATOR VOLTAGE 220VAC/110VAC

0 VAC SUPPLY FOR TRANSFORMER T2

D4


F17

F19

220 VAC SUPPLY FOR TRANSFORMER T2


F18

8A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

F10

D7


D13


R17

F9

D20

3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

D19

F8


F13


R16

8A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO


R19

F6


D8

F4


D12



24V

6A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

24V RTN

F3

SPARE

15 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR -15 VDC) COLL RDY

2A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

15V

F2

15V RTN


GND

7A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

24VAC

F1


FUNCTION

24VAC

RATING

CH GND

FUSE

TB6 DOOR INTERLOCK

D14 K3

JUMPER DESIG.

FUNCTION

SETTING

TABLE BUCKY


JP3

WALL BUCKY


JP4 - JP8

NOT USED

_

ROTOR BOOST STATOR VOLTAGE

TB5

JP2

TB5 X-RAY ON LIGHT INTERFACE 1

MAN./AUTO COLL.

R12

R11


JP1

NOT INSTALLED INSTALL ON 1 & 2 (TOSHIBA E7242X, E7813X, E7252X, E7239X TUBES) INSTALL ON 2 & 3 (ALL OTHER TUBE TYPES)

NOTE: “


Figure 6-51. Digital Interface Board (No HSS with Digital Receptor) A9 (AY40-034T) - Terminal Block/ Jumper Location Diagram


Revision W

6-58

Chapter 6 Diagrams

TB1 COLLIMATOR INTERFACE FUSE

RATING

TB6 DOOR INTERLOCK

TB5 X-RAY ON LIGHT INTERFACE






FUNCTION

7A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO


F2

2A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO


F3

6A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO


F4

3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO


F5



F6

8A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO


F7 F8

3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO


F9




F1


F10 F11

2A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

F12

2A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

120 VAC FOR WALL BUCKY

F14


SPARE

F15

3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

120 VAC FOR TABLE BUCKY


SPARE LINE INPUT FOR TRANSFORMER T2

F17

JUMPER DESIG.


FUNCTION

SETTING

JP1

MAN./AUTO COLL.

JP2

TABLE BUCKY


JP3

WALL BUCKY



NOTE: “


Figure 6-52. Interface Board (HSS Non-Digital) A9 (AY40-061T) Terminal Block/Jumper Location Diagram


Revision W

6-59

Chapter 6 Diagrams





F10



F17


LINE INPUT FOR TRANSFORMER T2 R12

R11

JUMPER DESIG.

SETTING

FUNCTION

JP1

MAN./AUTO COLL.

JP2

TABLE BUCKY


JP3

WALL BUCKY


F18

F9

D2


K3

3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

D4

F8

D14


R17

8A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

F19


F6 F7

D7


D8


R16

F5

D12



R19

3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO


24V

F4

SPARE


24V RTN

6A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

15V RTN

F3

COLL RDY


15V

2A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

GND

F2




D20

7A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO

24VAC

F1

24VAC

FUNCTION 32 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR +48 VDC)

D19

RATING

CH GND

FUSE

TB6 DOOR INTERLOCK

1

INSTALLED (MANUAL) NOT INSTALLED (AUTO) TB5

NOTE: “

TB5 X-RAY ON LIGHT INTERFACE (PIN 3 NOT USED)


Figure 6-53. Digital Interface Board (HSS with Digital Receptor) A9 (AY40-062T) Terminal Block/Jumper Location Diagram


Revision W

6-60

Chapter 6 Diagrams

2

TEST POINT 7 ROTOR RUN

10 1

PD1

U6

TP10 R45 R22

TP7

1

TP6

9

D17 + C7

C16

E

D11 D10

R41

R46

D15

TP15

C E

R11

B

C E

D1

C E

B

C

TP11 C4

R30

78

R33 R4 R5 R7 D2 R8

U1 C3

R3 D14

R27 R19

C

R6

TP8

U5

R17 R16 R32

TP9

R26 Q3

B

B

D3

R12

D6

Q5

R29 TP14

Q10 Q9

Q6

Q7

C E

TP5

D9

D7

Q8

+

TEST POINT 10 +15 VDC

B

PD4

R15

C1

D12 D8 C15

9

J3

J4

Q2

R9

E B

R10

R36 U3 U4

U2

R25 Q4

R20 D4

Q1

D5

R24

MOV4 T1

POTENTIOMETER R20 TUBE CURRENT ADJ. POTENTIOMETER R24 TUBE CURRENT ADJ.

G

T1

G

T2

T2

MOV1

TEST POINT 3 AC RETURN

TP4

J5 3

TP3

1

C2

C6

TEST POINT 4 PHASE

R2 10W

R14 10W

MOV3

J1 4

TP2

1

TP13

K2 R37

D18

TP12

C8

TERMINAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

SIGNAL MAIN PHASE COMMON NOT USED NOT USED GROUND


MOV2 R35 C14 1

PD3

PD2 TB1

TP1


7

TEMP

TERMINAL BLOCK TB1

TEST POINT 1 COMMON

TEST POINT 2 MAIN Figure 6-54. Rotor Drive Board A10 (AY40-013T) Terminal Block Location Diagram


Revision W

6-61

J5 R5

TABLE TP12C13

R20 R21 R15

2

INV dV/dT

R17R11

C16 R10 C14

1

J4

C15 C17

R34

C22 R19 TP13

1

1

R1 WALL#1

R16

1 2 3

C20 R14 0

INSTALL ON 2 & 3 (ALL OTHER CONFIGS.)

1

U8

1 2 3

JUMPER JP7 1 PANEL/2 PANEL SELECT

C21

INSTALL ON 1 & 2 (SINGLE CXDI-50G PANEL USED WITH TWO ION CHAMBERS)

C26

1 PANEL/2 PANEL SELECT

SETTING

J2 R33

JP7

FUNCTION

D7

JUMPER DESIG.

WALL 1

D1

WALL#2

R7

1

J3

WALL#1/WALL#2

D2

POT. R23 WALL#1

TP8

WALL 2

POT. R24 WALL#2

TABLE/WALLS

JP1

Chapter 6 Diagrams

REV. E

Figure 6-55. Standard AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S) Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram


Revision W

6-62

Chapter 6 Diagrams

Figure 6-56. Universal AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram


Revision W

6-63

Chapter 6 Diagrams

TEST POINT 5

1

TEST POINT 6

1

4

TP10 C43 R23

1

TP9

R37 JP12

R18C41

1

1

C27

U19 R34 R35

TEST POINT 10

TEST POINT 8 D16

A16A1JP8 A16A1JP9 A16A1JP10 A16A1JP11 INSTALLED A16A1JP12 INSTALLED A16A1JP16** INSTALL ON PINS 2 & 3

ODYSSEY INSTALLED INSTALLED INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED INSTALLED INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED INSTALL ON PINS 1 & 2

1

QUEST INSTALLED INSTALLED INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED INSTALLED

PD6 PD7

JUMPER A16A1JP1 A16A1JP6* A16A1JP7*

DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE

TEST POINT 9

RS-232

D19

D2 D3 D4

TEST POINT 2

TB1

COMM


EXPOSE PREP

NOTE: “

GND

1

11

JP6

R13 R12

R16 R11

JP7

1

TEST POINT 1

10

JP16 20

TP1

RESET

1

*NOTE 2: A16A1JP16 IS INSTALLED ON PINS 2 AND 3 ONLY IF OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL BOARD HAS AN ATTACHED "PIGTAIL" RIBBON CABLE AND CONNECTOR; OTHERWISE INSTALL ON PINS 1 AND 2.

U10

JP11

*NOTE 1: DO NOT INSTALL JP6 AND JP7 TO DISABLE OCP EXPOSE BUTTON (SUCH AS WHEN USING AN OPTIONAL REMOTE HAND SWITCH)

TEST POINT 7

TEST POINT 11

TEST TEST POINT 4 POINT 3

Figure 6-57. OCP Control Board A16A1 (AY40-004S1) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram


Revision W

6-64

Chapter 6 Diagrams

S1 (SEE NOTE 1)

J7

C3

R13

Y1

C16

R11 R12

C27

iBUTTON

Q3

J2

C25

R42

R15

R36

R34

R38

R16

TP2

J4

R35

D14

D4

1

R39

J5

C26

R50 R49

R1

C12 R4

C11

R45

R46

1

D7

C10

J1

R3 C1D12

C2

J1

R48

TP1

TP2

J3

TOP

BOTTOM REV. A

NOTE: IP ADDRESS RESET SWITCH - POWER OFF GENERATOR, THEN POWER ON WHILE HOLDING DOWN S1. RELEASE S1 WHEN YEL (D2), GRN (D1), & BLUE LEDS (D10) ARE ILLUMINATED. IP ADDRESS OF OCP INTERFACE BD. (Q-NODE) IS NOW 10.0.0.175.

Figure 6-58. OCP Interface Board A1A1 (AY40-073S) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram


Revision W

6-65

HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC C31

R78

R74

TP19

R13 R22

Q2

R81

C53

C48 C61 R76

C65 Q11R75 Q10 Q9

R73

R77

1

C51 C59

C56 C37 1

C50 TP15

Q8

R72

R67

TP2

C13

C55

U22

C46

C7

U26 C3

C22

1

C58

U10

C18

10

9

C5

C41

C25 U23 C45

1

C1

C11 C6 U18

1 2

C26 C62 TP1

D9

U20

R27

E

R55

R56

R80

TP10

R54

R62

R66

Q1

R41

C64 U31 C68

1

U24C69

C43 1

TP16 R79 C63

U13 R50

C29

1

TP11 TP18 C23 R20

U11

C30

TEST POINT 17

TP25

TP22

TP23

TP24

J5

S

Q6 D11

TP6 1 R57

D8

R30

C19

R28

R29

R47

C

R36

C

R37

R53 C35R49 R52C10

C8

C9

D3

R16

C21 C15

C14

D2 C16

R14

C17

Chapter 6 Diagrams

POTENTIOMETER R48

IC U17

TEST POINT 1

TEST POINT 3

TEST POINT 2

TEST POINT 4

Figure 6-59. QMI High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S) - Test Point/Potentiometer Location Diagram

Revision W

6-66

C49

C51

R47

R42

TP6

TP8 C29

C27

1 C30

20

C28

R43

TP10

C37

R50

JUMPER JP1 +15V DRIVE PULL-UP (MUST BE INSTALLED)

R26

R20

C6

R2

D11 TP1

HIGH VOLTAGE

DANGERC21

R17 R13

R15

DANGER

L4

L5B

R16

L4B

R11C17

TP2

TEST POINT 18

D6

R5

R68

C2

B

R71

E BE

R73 R72

R67

TEST POINT 17

HIGH VOLTAGE

D12

R18

BE

J1

D14

C7

C33

R64

R66

TEST POINT 15

TEST POINT 10

TEST POINT 16

D22

C47 U9

C42

R58

R54

J3

FUSE F5 0.125A 250V FAST-ACTING

R55 R60

R63

Chapter 6 Diagrams

L5A

TB1

L4A

D4

TEST POINT 14

D31

R28

L5

FUSE F3 (15A, 500V, SLO-BLOW)



Figure 6-60. QMI High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) - Test Point/Fuse Location Diagram


Revision W

6-67

Appendix

A

AEC CALIBRATION WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR OR CR FILM PLATE (NOT APPLICABLE ON GENERATORS EQUIPPED WITH Q-CONNECT OPTION)

A-1

A-2

Appendix A AEC Calibration with DR or CR Film Plate

OVERVIEW This appendix provides instructions for successful AEC calibration of the HF Series Xray generator when configured for operation with either: •

a digital receptor (DR) panel and the generator is not equipped with an ethernet adapter (i.e., no Q-Connect option)

•

any non-integrated computed radiography (CR) system.

For additional information, refer to the DR or CR system manufacturer’s installation and operation documentation.

If the HF Series X-ray generator is integrated with an Agfa CR System (i.e., DiRex System), refer to Appendix B, CALIBRATION (DiRex System) for generator configuration and calibration instructions. If the HF Series X-ray generator is integrated with an Agfa NX-DR SeriesDigital Imaging System, a QG-DIG-CXDI Canon/Quantum Integration or has a Q-VISION operator control panel, refer to Appendix D, CALIBRATION (Using Insight) for generator configuration and calibration instructions. CAUTION! Before calibrating unit, perform warmup procedures recommended by tube manufacturer or the warm-up procedure described in Chapter 3 of the Operator’s Manual. SPECIAL CANON DR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION INSTRUCTIONS When the HF Series X-ray generator is used with a fixed Canon CXDI-40G or portable CXDI-50G (or CXDI-50C) digital radiographic receptor, the generator configuration settings must be correct to ensure proper functionality of the associated ion chamber(s) used in the system. Prior to the performance of AEC calibration, it is assumed the Quantum/Canon Integration Software (QG-DIG-CXDI) has been installed and configured in accordance with the instructions provided in Quantum/ Canon Integration Guide DC30-058. Verify the following generator settings are correct for your configuration: 1. Locate jumper JP7 on AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S) on the generator PCB Door (refer to Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS for the PC board layout). 2. If a CXDI-50G (or CXDI-50C) portable DR receptor is used in the system and will be operated such that it can be located in more than one receptor containing an ion chamber (e.g., example, a table with ion chamber and a chest stand with ion chamber), verify Jumper JP7 is installed across pins 1 and 2. All other configurations require Jumper JP7 be installed across pins 2 and 3. 3. If a CXDI-50G (or CXDI-50C) portable DR receptor is used in the system, and will be operated such that it can be located in more than one receptor containing an ion chamber, the ion chamber signal cables must be connected to the WALL1 (A11J2) and WALL2 (A11J3) connectors on AEC Board A11. Do not connect either ion chamber cable to the TABLE (A11J5) connec-


Revision W

A-3


tor, even if it is from a chamber located in the table. 4. At the generator OCP, access the Edit Digital screen (shown below) from the Service Configuration Menu. PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT DIGITAL RECEPTOR PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT UNIVERSAL SYSTEM TYPE PRESS THIS KEY TO ENABLE OR DISABLE PREP HOLD FUNCTION

Figure A-1. Edit Digital Screen 5. Press the key located next to the Digital Receptor field until Canon is displayed. 6. If a CXDI-50G (or CXDI-50C) portable DR receptor is used in the system, and will be operated such that it can be located in more than one receptor containing an ion chamber, press the key next to the Universal setting until QV-800 is displayed. Otherwise, set to NONE. 7. Set the Prep Hold setting to ON (notifies the DR system that a Prep cycle has been initiated; the generator must receive a "Prep Hold Release" signal from the DR system to proceed with the Expose cycle). 8. If a CXDI-50G (or CXDI-50C) portable DR receptor is used in the system, at the Canon workstation computer, access the Quantum/Canon Integration Software (QG-DIG-CXDI) Service Menu. Press the Select Receptor Connection button and verify "50G Cassette" field is set to "WALL". (Refer to Quantum/Canon Integration Guide DC30-058.) AEC CALIBRATION WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR OR CR FILM PLATE INSTALLED WARNING! The following calibration procedures involve taking x-ray exposures. All personnel should be behind the protective barriers. X-rays can be dangerous unless proper precautions and procedures are adhered to. IMPORTANT! Before performing AEC calibration procedure, verify the correct Film/Screen is displayed on the calibration screen (shown in top left field). The Film/Screen setting is selected in the

Revision W

A-4



AEC Calibration Menu. In most DR or CR film plate systems, the entire imaging area of the digital receptor or CR film plate must be covered with acrylic in order to obtain accurate "S" or "REX" values used for the procedures that follow. Refer to the calibration instructions provided with digital or CR system for specific "S" or "REX" values required for AEC calibration. The paragraphs that follow describe AEC calibration procedures when a digital receptor or a CR film plate is installed in the generator system. Two separate calibration procedures are provided depending on the system configuration: •

The first procedure shall be performed when the generator is used with a single or dual receptor panel system, integrated or non-integrated with the generator, and each of the receptor panels is only used with one ion chamber. An example of this would be a table and wall stand system each equipped with a DR panel (or grid cabinet for CR) and ion chamber. Use this procedure for calibrating all CR Film Plate systems.

•

The second procedure is intended for use with a single receptor panel system (e.g., CXDI-50G or CXDI-50C portable receptor), integrated with the generator, where the single DR panel can be used with more than one ion chamber. An example of this would be a table (with ion chamber) and wall stand (with ion chamber) system, used with a single Canon CXDI-50G or CXDI-50C portable receptor.

Table A-1 shows a summarized presentation of the AEC calibration procedure. An AEC calibration Worksheet is provided in Table A-2 for recording calibration data. Table A-1. DR or CR System AEC Calibration Procedure Sequence FILM/SCREENS TO BE CALIBRATED

REQUIRED AEC CALIBRATION PROCEDURES/ SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS


1. Perform "Ion Chamber Balancing" procedure. 2. Perform "AEC MAS Balance" procedure for wall stand ion chamber. 3. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration": a. Set desired "base" optical density b. Set "AEC Ref" to 2000. c. Adjust ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until base optical density is achieved in developed films. 4. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".


Revision W

A-5


Table A-1. DR or CR System AEC Calibration Procedure Sequence

Revision W

A-6




1. Copy "Wall 72" film/screen to "Wall 40". 2. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration", however, DO NOT re-adjust the ion chamber MASTER GAIN potentiometer. Adjust "AEC Ref" to obtain desired (set) optical density. 3. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".


1. If system includes a wall stand, copy "Wall 40" film/screen to "Table 40". 2. Perform "Ion Chamber Balancing" procedure for table ion chamber. 3. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration": a. Set desired "base" optical density b. Set "AEC Ref" to 2000. c. Adjust ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until base optical density is achieved in developed films. 4. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".



Table A-2. AEC Calibration Worksheet Film/Screen Combination:

Table 40

Wall 40

Wall 72


50 kVp, 200L mA, 5 cm

Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value AEC Ref. AEC KV CALIBRATION Setting:


Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value Setting:

Step 2 - 60 kVp, 200L mA, 10 cm


Step 3 - 80 kVp, 200L mA, 15 cm


Step 4 - 100 kVp, 200L mA, 20 cm


Step 5 - 110 kVp, 200L mA, 25 cm


Step 6 - 120 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm


*Step 7 - 130 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm


*Step 8 - 140 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm

Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value * Only required on 150 kVp systems


Revision W

A-7


AEC Calibration Instructions - One Ion Chamber Per Panel The following procedure is used to perform AEC calibration of generators used with a single or dual receptor panel, integrated or non-integrated, and each of the receptor panels is only used with one ion chamber. Use this procedure for calibrating all CR Film Plate systems. 1. Verify system is configured correctly per "CANON DR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION INSTRUCTIONS" procedure provided in this appendix. 2. Place a CR film plate in the tray (if CR system) and collimate down to film size. 3. If not already done so, access the AEC Calibration Menu (refer to Chapter 3). 4. Press the key next to the Film/Screen Combination field (upper left field) to select a film/screen combination to calibrate (e.g., "TABLE 40"). 5. The FILM SPEED field shows the default film speed setting for the selected film/screen combination (400). If not, press the up or down keys next to the FILM SPEED field until 400 film speed setting is displayed. 6. When film/screen combination name and film speed settings are correct, press the key next to the AEC OD Calibration field to proceed with AEC Calibration. The AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen is displayed:

AEC REF ADJUSTMENT KEYS


Figure A-2. AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen 7. This screen is used to calibrate the digital receptor or CR film plate to a user defined optical density setting (e.g., 1.3). This is accomplished by comparing the digital receptor or CR film plate’s specified sensitivity values (refer to manufacturer’s installation and calibration documentation supplied with CR film plate) with the AEC REF value appearing on AEC Optical Density Calibration screen shown above.

Revision W

A-8



8. Set the ion chamber detector selection to middle detector and ensure x-ray tube is at correct SID. Ensure the ion chamber has been balanced. 9. Place 5 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam. 10. Verify the Optical Density field is set to the desired optical density (e.g., "1.30"). If not, press the up or down key located next to the Optical Density field until the "base" optical density setting is equal to the desired optical density (1.30 in this example). Do not change

the optical density setting at any time during this procedure.

11. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA). 12. Process the CR film plate (if CR system) to determine sensitivity value (sometimes referred to as the "REX" or "S" value, depending on CR or DR system manufacturer). a. If the sensitivity value is within acceptable range as defined by the digital receptor or CR film plate manufacturer, press the Next Calibrate key to save the setting and proceed to Reciprocity Calibration. b. If not within range, adjust ion chamber MASTER GAIN as described in the "AEC Optical Density Calibration" procedure in Chapter 3, CALIBRATION. Note that the MASTER GAIN adjustment procedure is different depending on the generator AEC configuration (standard AEC or universal AEC). IMPORTANT! Following a calibration procedure, unless the "Save Calibrate" or "Measure, Calibrate" key is pressed, no change is made to the currently saved calibration value(s). 13. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field to advance to Reciprocity Calibration. 14. The Reciprocity Calibration Screen is displayed; however, this calibration procedure is not necessary with systems equipped with digital receptor or CR film plate. 15. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field.


Revision W

A-9


16. The AEC KV Calibration screen is displayed. KVP MEASURE SELECT FIELD USE UP AND DOWN ARROW KEYS TO ADJUST TO CORRECT VALUE BASE OPTICAL DENSITY SETTING

Figure A-3. AEC KV Calibration Screen 17. There are a total of six kV calibration points for a 125 kV system (50, 60, 80, 100, 110, and 120 kV); 150 kV systems require an additional two kV calibration points (130 and 140 kV). The image receptor and chamber field settings remain the same as those used in the AEC Optical Density Calibration procedure. 18. Place indicated thickness of acrylic (5 CM for first calibration point) in the X-ray beam.

NOTE Calibration of the first step (50 kVp) is not required as long as AEC Optical Density Calibration procedure in the previous steps was performed prior to AEC KV Calibration. A verification that the "Measured OD" is the same as the "Optical Density" setting is only necessary.

19. Insert a CR film plate and collimate down to film size. 20. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA). 21. Process the CR film plate (if CR system) to determine sensitivity value. a. If the sensitivity value is within acceptable range as defined by manufacturer, press the Measured OD field up or down adjustment keys to set the Measured OD value to Base Optical Optical Density setting (1.3, see Figure A-2). Press the Measure OD key to save the setting and proceed to the next kV calibration point. b. If not within range, press Measured OD field up or down adjustment keys, to increase or decrease sensitivity value. (Note: this adjustment will not be immediately seen in the image until after all AEC KVP Calibration steps are performed.) DO NOT TAKE ANY FURTHER EXPOSURES AT THIS SETTING. 22. Press the key next to the Measure OD field to save the first kV calibration point entry (50 kV, 5 CM). The AEC KV Calibration screen is updated for the next kV calibration point (60 kV, 10 CM).

Revision W

A-10

NOTE Decreasing the Measured OD value below the "Base Optical Density setting" will result in a higher sensitivity value reading of the image. Conversely, increasing the Measured OD value above the "Base Optical Density setting" will result in lower sensitivity value reading of the image.



23. Repeat the previous steps for the 60, 80, 100, 110, 120, and, if 150 kV system, 130 and 140 kV calibration points, placing the specified thickness of acrylic in the x-ray beam as indicated on the AEC KV Calibration screen for each kV calibration point, and taking one exposure per kVp calibration point. 24. Upon completion of the final kV calibration point (i.e., 120 kV on 125 kV systems, 140 kV on 150 kV systems), press the key next to the Measure OD field. The field will now display Save Calibrate. Press this key once again to save the calibration data for the final kV calibration point. IMPORTANT! Unless the "Save Calibrate" key is pressed, the calibration data will not be saved. 25. Repeat AEC KVP Calibration procedure (steps 17 through 23) until all the measured sensitivity values are within required range. 26. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field to return to the AEC Calibration menu. 27. This completes AEC calibration for this particular film/screen combination. Repeat AEC calibration procedures for all additional film/ screen combinations that will be used with the system. 28. Verify AEC calibration by taking several exposures in AEC mode and checking the resulting "REX" or "S" value. If necessary, repeat AEC calibration procedure to further adjust AEC accuracy.


Revision W

A-11


Copy Film/Screen Utility On the AEC Calibration Menu (refer to Chapter 3, CALIBRATION), the AEC calibration data copy utility is provided (Copy Film/Screen key). Following calibration of the first film/screen combination, stored AEC calibration data, such as the kV curves and AEC reference data, can be copied from the first film/screen combination to other film/screen combinations used with the system to reduce calibration time. Although both the AEC Optical Density Calibration and AEC KV Calibration procedures must still be performed, this will set the calibration values for the copied film/ screen combinations to fairly accurate settings, thereby reducing the number of exposures required to calibrate. Proceed as follows: 1. If not displayed, access the AEC Calibration Menu. 2. Press the key next to the Film/Screen field (upper left field) until the the film/screen combination you want to copy calibration data to is displayed. 3. Press the key next to the Copy Film/Screen field. 4. The following screen appears: DISPLAYS DESTINATION FILM/SCREEN NAME PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT THE FILM/SCREEN TO COPY CALIBRATION DATA FROM

Figure A-4. Copy Film/Screen Screen 5. Copy Film/Screen Menu Screen 6. Press the key next to the "From" field until the name of the film/ screen combination from which calibration data will be copied appears. 7. Press the key next to the Copy Film/Screen field. All AEC calibration data is copied from Wall 40" film/screen combination to the Table 40" film/screen combination. To abort without copying, press the key next to the MAIN field. The AEC Calibration Menu is displayed. 8. Perform the AEC Optical Density and AEC KV Calibration procedures as described in the previous paragraphs for each copied film/screen combination.

Revision W

A-12



AEC Calibration Instructions - Single Panel, Dual Ion Chambers The following procedure is used to perform AEC calibration of generators used with a single receptor panel system (e.g., CXDI-50G or CXDI-50C portable receptor), integrated with the generator, where the single DR panel can be used with more than one ion chamber. Proceed as follows: 1. Verify system is configured correctly per "CANON DR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION INSTRUCTIONS" procedure provided in this appendix (in particular, "Universal" is set to "QV-800" as described in step 6). 2. Insert DR receptor in the most commonly used receptor cabinet (this cabinet’s ion chamber should be connected to WALL#1 connector A11J2 on AEC Control Board) and collimate down to proper image size. 3. If not already done so, access the AEC Calibration Menu (refer to Chapter 3). 4. Press the key next to the Film/Screen Combination field (upper left field) to select WALL 40" film/screen combination for calibration. 5. The FILM SPEED field shows the default film speed setting for the selected film/screen combination (400). If not, press the up or down keys next to the FILM SPEED field until 400 film speed setting is displayed. 6. When film/screen combination name and film speed settings are correct, press the key next to the AEC OD Calibration field to proceed with AEC Calibration. The AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen is displayed:

AEC REF ADJUSTMENT KEYS.

(ONLY ADJUST IF DENSITY CAN NOT BE ACHIEVED WITH MASTER GAIN POT. AT MAX. ADJUSTMENT)


Figure A-5. AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen 7. This screen is used to calibrate the digital receptor or CR film plate to a user defined optical density setting (e.g., 1.30). This is accomplished by comparing the digital receptor’s specified sensitivity values


Revision W

A-13


(refer to manufacturer’s installation and calibration documentation supplied with DR system) with the AEC REF value appearing in AEC Optical Density Calibration screen shown above. 8. Set the ion chamber detector selection to middle detector and ensure x-ray tube is at correct SID. Ensure the ion chamber has been balanced. 9. Verify the Optical Density field is set to the desired optical density (e.g., "1.30"). If not, press the up or down key located next to the Optical Density field until the "base" optical density setting is equal to the desired optical density (1.30 in this example). Do not change

the optical density setting at any time during this procedure.

10. Place 5 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam. 11. On AEC Control Board AY40-031S, adjust ion chamber MASTER GAIN potentiometer A11R22, A11R23, and A11R24 to midrange. 12. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA). 13. Determine the sensitivity value (sometimes referred to as the "REX" or "S" value, depending on DR system manufacturer). a. If the sensitivity value is within acceptable range as defined by the digital receptor manufacturer, continue at step 14. b. If not within range, adjust the associated ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer and repeat exposure. Continue until the sensitivity ("REX" or "S") value is acceptable. Note the sensitivity value as it will be needed in a later step. 14. Move the DR receptor to the other receptor cabinet (it’s ion chamber should be connected to WALL#2 connector A11J3 on AEC Control Board) and collimate down to proper image size. 15. With 5 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam, take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA). 16. Determine the sensitivity value (sometimes referred to as the "REX" or "S" value, depending on DR system manufacturer). 17. If necessary, adjust the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer and repeat exposure until the sensitivity ("REX" or "S") value is the same as the value obtained for the previously calibrated ion chamber in step 13b. Note: If later on it becomes necessary to adjust the optical density of either receptor’s ion chamber, this should be done by adjusting potentiometer A11R23 on the AEC Control Board, and if further adjustment is needed, increasing or

Revision W

A-14



decreasing the AEC REF value shown in the AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen (see Figure A-4). IMPORTANT! Following a calibration procedure, unless the "Save Calibrate" or "Measure, Calibrate" key is pressed, no change is made to the currently saved calibration value(s). 18. Re-locate the DR receptor to the most commonly used receptor cabinet (this cabinet’s ion chamber should be connected to WALL#1 connector A11J2 on AEC Control Board). 19. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field to advance to Reciprocity Calibration. 20. The Reciprocity Calibration Screen is displayed; however, this calibration procedure is not necessary with systems equipped with digital receptor. 21. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field. 22. The AEC KV Calibration screen is displayed. KVP MEASURE SELECT FIELD

NOTE Calibration of the first step (50 kVp) is not required as long as AEC Optical Density Calibration procedure in the previous steps was performed prior to AEC KV Calibration. A verification that the "Measured OD" is the same as the "Optical Density" setting is all that is required.

USE UP AND DOWN ARROW KEYS TO ADJUST TO CORRECT VALUE BASE OPTICAL DENSITY SETTING

Figure A-6. AEC KV Calibration Screen 23. There are a total of six kV calibration points for a 125 kV system (50, 60, 80, 100, 110, and 120 kV); 150 kV systems require an additional two kV calibration points (130 and 140 kV). The image receptor and chamber field settings remain the same as those used in the AEC Optical Density Calibration procedure. 24. Place indicated thickness of acrylic (5 CM for first calibration point) in the X-ray beam. 25. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA).


Revision W

A-15


26. Determine the sensitivity value. a. If the sensitivity value is within acceptable range as defined by manufacturer, press the Measured OD field up or down adjustment keys to set the Measured OD value to Base Optical Optical Density setting (1.3, see Figure A-2). Press the Measure OD key to save the setting and proceed to the next kV calibration point. b. If not within range, press Measured OD field up or down adjustment keys, to increase or decrease sensitivity value. (Note: this adjustment will not be immediately seen in the image until after all AEC KVP Calibration steps are performed.) DO NOT TAKE ANY FURTHER EXPOSURES AT THIS SETTING. 27. Press the key next to the Measure OD field to save the first kV calibration point entry (50 kV, 5 CM). The AEC KV Calibration screen is updated for the next kV calibration point (60 kV, 10 CM). 28. Repeat the previous steps for the 60, 80, 100, 110, 120, and, if 150 kV system, 130 and 140 kV calibration points, placing the specified thickness of acrylic in the x-ray beam as indicated on the AEC KV Calibration screen for each kV calibration point, and taking one exposure per kVp calibration point. 29. Upon completion of the final kV calibration point (i.e., 120 kV on 125 kV systems, 140 kV on 150 kV systems), press the key next to the Measure OD field. The field will now display Save Calibrate. Press this key once again to save the calibration data for the final kV calibration point. IMPORTANT! Unless the "Save Calibrate" key is pressed, the calibration data will not be saved. 30. Repeat AEC KVP Calibration procedure (steps 17 through 23) until all the measured sensitivity values are within required range. 31. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field to return to the AEC Calibration menu.

NOTE Decreasing the Measured OD value below the "Base Optical Density setting" will result in a higher sensitivity value reading of the image. Conversely, increasing the Measured OD value above the "Base Optical Density setting" will result in lower sensitivity value reading of the image.

32. This completes AEC calibration for this particular film/screen combination. Repeat AEC calibration procedures for all additional film/ screen combinations that will be used with the system. 33. Verify AEC calibration by taking several exposures in AEC mode and checking the resulting "REX" or "S" value. If necessary, repeat AEC calibration procedure to further adjust AEC accuracy.

Revision W

A-16


Appendix

B

CALIBRATION (Agfa DiRex)

B-1

B-2

Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)

THIS SECTION NOT APPLICABLE TO QUEST, E-ZVET, Q-VISION, & TOSHIBA HF SERIES GENERATORS


Revision W

B-3


OVERVIEW This appendix provides instructions for configuring and calibrating the HF Series X-ray generator using DiRex interface program installed on the Agfa CR system’s workstation computer (refer to DiRex Service Manual DC30-088 for system interconnection and software OCP installation instructions). With DiRex, the workstation computer functions as the generator operator control panel (OCP). The X-ray generator must be equipped with the "Q-Connect option" (i.e., CR/DR system integration) to enable DiRex functionality. NEMA Standards Publication/No. XR8-1979(R1994), Test Methods for Diagnostic X-ray Machines for Use During Initial Installation is recommended as a reference. REQUIRED TOOLS AND MATERIALS The following lists the tools and materials required to perform the procedures contained in this chapter: •


•

Non-invasive kV, mAs, mR meter or Radcal Dynalyzer III (or equivalent)

•


•


SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CALIBRATION The HF Series x-ray generator has been factory configured and calibrated. It is necessary, however, to perform the following procedures to verify system performance. Perform the procedures in the sequence presented, unless otherwise instructed. ACCESSING SERVICE MODE Calibration and configuration can only be performed by accessing the X-ray generator’s Service Mode. To gain access to the Service Mode, password entry is required. This is to prevent unintended and/or unauthorized changes to system settings. To access the Service Options Menu, proceed as follows: 1. Ensure the DR or CR system’s Computer Workstation is properly connected to the generator, and the DiRex System (i.e., Quantum/Agfa Integration) software is installed and configured in accordance with the instructions provided in DiRex Service Manual DC30-088. 2. Ensure the Power/Expose Control Box (AY20-265) is properly connected to the generator as described in Chapter 2, ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION. 3. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 4. Set the power on/standby switch on the Power/Expose Control Box to the standby ( ) position, then to the on ( lamp should illuminate.

Revision W

B-4

) position. The green power LED



5. From the Main OCP Overlay Menu, double click the generator status icon. The "Enter Password" screen appears (see Figure 3-1.).

READY INDICATOR

Figure B-1. Enter Password Screen 6. In the Enter Password screen, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the keypad, then press Enter. This password enables access to Service Mode for modification of system configuration, calibration and settings.


Revision W

B-5


7. Upon validation of the password, the Service Options Menu displays:

Figure B-2. Service Options Menu The Service Options Menu offers the following selections:

Revision W

B-6

•

Generator Service - Accesses the generator configuration, generator calibration, Factory Reset, and Statistics utilities.

•

Remoting Service - Accesses the Device Settings and System Settings utilities. (These utilities are described in detail in the DiRex Service Manual DC30-088.)

•

Exit Application - Exits the Quantum generator OCP software application (the Main OCP Overlay Menu will no longer appear on the Workstation Computer)



Press the Generator Service button to continue with generator configuration and calibration. The Generator Service Menu appears:

Figure B-3. Generator Service Menu The Generator Service Menu offers the following selections: •

Configuration - The Configuration utility provides access to configuration settings, such as AEC type, rotor drive settings, tube type, etc.

•

Calibration - The Calibration utility provides access to filament, mA, kVp and AEC calibrations (when equipped).

•

Factory Reset - Accesses the Factory Reset function, which provides a list of resettable system calibration and configuration parameters including: Tube curves, AEC (AEC calibration values), History (Error Log), kV, mA, and filament calibration values.

•

Statistics - Provides access to generator and tube usage data, and error and warning reports (refer to Chapter 5, SERVICE MAINTENANCE for more details).

Selecting the Minimize button reduces the Generator Service menu to a button (labelled "Service") visible next to the Generator Control Panel Overlay. Pressing the Service button re-opens the Generator Service menu.


Revision W

B-7


FACTORY RESET The Factory Reset Menu provides Calibrations and AEC Calibrations reset functions as well as the Backup Configuration utility. Factory Reset may be necessary following tube replacement or when troubleshooting abnormal system behavior.

Figure B-4. Factory Reset Menu Factory Reset The Calibrations Reset function resets the currently saved kV, mA, and filament calibration constants to factory default settings; the AEC Calibrations Reset function resets the currently saved AEC Optical Density and AEC kV calibration constants for all previously calibrated film screens to factory default settings. To perform factory reset, proceed as follows: 1. Press the Reset button corresponding with either "Calibrations" or "AEC Calibrations" shown in Figure 3-4. The Reset Calibrations Screen will display:

Revision W

B-8



Note: The Reset Generator Calibrations pop-up screen is shown in the sample screen below. The Reset AEC calibrations pop-up screen (not shown) is similar in operation.

Figure B-5. Reset Calibrations Screen (Typical) NOTE

Following a Factory Reset, the KV, filament, mA and AEC (if equipped) Calibration procedures, described in this chapter, must be performed.

2. Press Yes to continue with reset, press No to cancel reset. The system returns to the Factory Reset Menu (Figure 3-4). Backup Configuration Utility The Backup Configuration utility saves the current configuration settings and calibration data in a "backup file". This data can later be restored back to the generator following factory reset, thereby eliminating the need to re-calibrate the generator. However, re-verification of calibration is required. To create a backup configuration file, press the Save button corresponding with "Backup Configuration" shown in Figure 3-4. The system overwrites existing backup data with current system data and updates the backup date and time fields appearing on the Factory Reset Menu.


Revision W

B-9


GENERATOR CONFIGURATION Press the Configuration button to access the generator configuration utility. The Load Configuration From menu displays:

Figure B-6. Load Configuration From Menu The Load Configuration From menu offers three choices:

Revision W

B-10

•

Active - Select to load the currently active configuration (This option should be selected under normal circumstances; only when a problem occurs with the system should the Backup or Last options be selected)

•

Backup - Select to load the last backed up configuration. (Refer to Factory Reset description in this chapter for instructions on creating a backup file of the generator calibration data.)

•

Last - Select to load the last automatically-saved generator configuration (Note: The configuration file is automatically backed up every time the Workstation Computer establishes a connection to the generator.)



It should be noted that changes made to any of the generator configuration parameters, as described in the following paragraphs, will not be saved until confirmation is made in the Activate Configuration screen shown below:

Figure B-7. Activate Configuration Screen


Revision W

B-11


In the Load Configuration From menu, select Active. The Configuration Menu displays:

Figure B-8. Configuration Menu The Configuration Menu provides access to the system's configuration settings. For proper operation of the generator, the settings must accurately reflect the actual configuration of both the generator and the components to which it is interfaced. Typically, these settings are made at the factory in accordance with sales order specifications. However, it is recommended that you review the current configuration settings for accuracy. The following briefly describes the various Configuration Menu selections:

Revision W

B-12

•

Generator Settings: Accesses the Generator Settings screen, which contains Derating, Timeout, AEC Board Type, and Backup mAs settings

•

Tube Settings: Accesses the Tube Type Setting screen, for selection of x-ray tube model used with system

•

Ion Chamber Settings: Accesses the Ion Chamber Configuration screen, which is used to configure each ion chamber interfaced with the system (two separate ion chambers, of either slope or level type, can be interfaced to the generator)

•

Copy Film Screen: Accesses the Copy Film/Screen Menu. The Copy Film/Screen Menu is a utility that enables AEC calibration data to be



copied from one calibrated film/screen combination setting to another (for example, it is useful for copying "Wall 40" to "Table 40 " film/screen combination on systems configured with both a wall stand and table). To change a configuration setting, press the button next to the configuration selection to be changed. The following paragraphs provide specific instructions for setting each of the available configuration selections. Generator Settings The Generator Settings Screen, shown below, displays the generator model, power output derating (presented as a percentage of total power output (kW) capacity), Timeout (sleep mode), AEC Board Type, Backup MAS, and Digital Receptor On/Off settings.

PRESS TO SCROLL DOWN LIST FOR ADDITIONAL SETTINGS

Figure B-9. Generator Settings Screen 1. Derating - The derating function is used to limit the output of the system to a percentage of the maximum energy capacity. To derate the energy output, press the Modify button adjacent to the Derating field to choose a derating percentage (choices are 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% [i.e., no derating]).


Revision W

B-13


2. Generator Timeout: The "timeout" period selected represents the amount of delay time, after which if no user activity is detected, the system automatically enters Automatic Power Stand By mode. This mode is entered to help reduce power consumption while protecting system electronics. The timeout period is selectable in 30 minute increments between 0 minutes up to 180 minutes. If "Infinity" is selected, the generator will not timeout, however, the filament will turn off if one hour of inactivity. 3. AEC Board Type: Displays the optional AEC Board type a. Select "Standard" if generator is equipped with standard type AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S) b. Select "Universal" if generator is equipped with universal type AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) c.

Select "None" if generator is not equipped with optional AEC

4. Backup MAS: Displays the current system-wide backup mAs setting effective on all AEC exposures. The maximum back up mAs setting is 600; note that on certain model generators, such as the Stored Energy models, the maximum mAs capability of the generator is less than 600 mAs. Therefore, the backup mAs setting should not exceed the maximum MAS output of the generator. Refer to Chapter 1, SPECIFICATIONS for a list of the mAs ratings by model number. 5. Digital Receptor: Accesses the digital receptor "PREP HOLD" setting (On or Off). Setting the Prep Hold setting to On configures the generator to send a "Prep Hold" signal to the DR system (notifies the DR system that a Prep cycle has been initiated; the generator must receive a "Prep Hold Release" signal from the DR system to proceed with the Expose cycle). Setting the Prep Hold setting to Off configures the generator for "normal" operation (i.e., non-interrupted Prep cycle). 6. Press the Back button on the lower left side of the screen. The system returns to the Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-8).

Revision W

B-14



Tube Settings The Tube Settings Screen, shown below, displays the current tube model and rotor settings. Also provided are the Tube Derating (Tube%) and Heat Warning (Heat% Limit) settings. The tube model and rotor settings are preset at the factory and normally should not be changed, except after replacing the existing tube with a different type tube. (Note: Consult Quantum Service

Department before attempting to re-configure the generator with a tube type that is different than the factory-configured tube type.)

Figure B-10. Tube Settings Screen 1. To change the tube model setting, press the Modify button adjacent to the Model field. The Model sub-menu will display; find the correct tube model (use the Next button to display additional tube models), then select the button with the correct model number appearing on it. 2. To change the tube rotor setting, press the Modify button adjacent to the Rotor field. Scroll through the available rotor drive settings: 50 Hz (no high speed starter), 60 Hz (no high speed starter), AID external highspeed starter (AID HSS), or Quantum internal high-speed starter (QMI HSS).


Revision W

B-15


NOTE: On systems equipped with high-speed starter option (HSS), tube "high-speed" mode will only be activated when selected exposure factors exceed the limits used for low-speed operation. 3. The Tube Derating setting provides derating of the tube’s maximum mAs output in percentages of 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% (i.e., no derating). For example, if at a particular kV and mA the tube normally allows a 10 mAs exposure, then at 80% derating, the tube would permit only an 8 mAs exposure. Derating the tube can extend the life of the tube. Press the button adjacent to the Derating field to choose a derating percentage. 4. The Heat Warning (heat%) provides a heat protection function for the xray tube. For example, setting the Heat Warning for 80% will cause the generator to produce an audible alarm and a visual "Heat Alarm" indication on the OCP when the tube has reached 80% of its total heat unit capacity. The total tube heat unit capacity is dependant upon the tube type. The Heat Warning setting has an adjustment range of anywhere between 50% up to 100% in 10% increments. Note: At 100% setting, the heat alarm is effectively disabled. Press the button next to the Heat Warning field to select the percentage of the total tube heat capacity at which alarm activation will occur. 5. Press the Back button on the lower left side of the screen. The system returns to the Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-8).

Revision W

B-16



Ion Chamber Configuration The Select Ion Chamber Menu, shown below, displays available ion chambers that can be interfaced to the HF Series X-ray generator. This screen also provides relay on/off settings for activating either the table and/or wall receptor when the receptor buttons on the OCP are pressed. Note: On systems equipped with a "Standard" type AEC Board (AY40-031S), the "Wall 2" and "Aux" selections are not used. These choices are only effective if the generator is configured with "Universal" type AEC Board (AY40-027S).

Figure B-11. Select Ion Chamber Menu 1. Press the button corresponding with the ion chamber you want to configure: Wall, Table, Wall 2, or Aux (Wall 2 and Aux only used on systems equipped with AEC Board A11, AY40-027S). Be sure that the selected ion chamber is properly interfaced to AEC Board A11 as described in Chapter 2, ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION.


Revision W

B-17


2. The system displays the ION CHAMBER Configuration Screen, as shown in the example below:

PRESS THESE BUTTONS TO MODIFY A DETECTOR

PRESS TO SCROLL DOWN LIST FOR ADDITIONAL SETTINGS

NOTE: AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 RIGHT LOAD USES THIS CONFIGURATION. FOR AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 LEFT LOAD, SET A=3 AND C=2. Figure B-12. Ion Chamber Settings Screen The Ion Chamber Settings Screen displays the assignment of ion chamber detectors (detector A, B, and C) with respect to the generator’s ion chamber detector select signals (i.e., FIELD SELECT 1, FIELD SELECT 2 and FIELD SELECT 3) generated by AEC Control Board A11. That is, assigning "2" to Field "A" enables detector "2" when the UPPER LEFT chamber detector field is selected at the Operator Control Panel. The Ion Chamber Settings Screen also provides settings that facilitate proper compatibility of the generator with ion chambers that operate differently. These include Ion Chamber Type (Slope/Level), Polarity (+/-), Output (Normal/Inverted), and Relay On/Off o settings. 3. Press the Modify button adjacent to the ion chamber detector (Field A, Field B or Field C) and choose the desired detector setting (1, 2, 3 or Off).

Revision W

B-18



4. The "Type" setting determines if the ion chamber connected to the selected receptor AEC output is of the "slope/ramp" (Slope) or a DC Level (Level) type. This setting is ignored unless the "Universal AEC" selection is chosen. The "Standard AEC" board should always be set to Slope. 5. The "Polarity" setting (+ or -) should correspond with the polarity of the ion chamber on the selected receptor port (i.e., a (+) positive logic [active high] or (-) negative logic [active low] model). The positive logic model presents a DC voltage or ramp ranging from 0 to some positive voltage to indicate exposure value. The negative logic model presents a DC voltage or ramp ranging from 0 to a negative voltage. This setting is ignored unless the "Universal AEC" selection is chosen. The "Standard AEC" board is always +. 6. The "Output" setting determines the sense of the signals that select the individual field for the chamber. If "Output" is set to Normal, the idle (non-PREP/EXPOSE) state of the individual field selection is "1" and the state during PREP/EXPOSE is "0" if the field is selected (called "Low Active"). If "Output" is set to Inverted the idle (non-PREP/EXPOSE) state of the field selection is "0" and the state during PREP/EXPOSE is "1" if the field is selected (called "High Active"). This setting is ignored unless the "Universal AEC" selection is chosen. The "Standard AEC" board is should always be set to Normal. 7.

The "Wall Relay" setting controls whether or not the "Wall Relay" on the Universal AEC Board A11 AY40-027S is energized. Similarly, the "Table Relay" setting controls whether or not the "Table Relay" on the Universal AEC Board A11 AY40-027S is energized. These settings provide +28 VDC output for operation of a Siemens bucky. If this field is set to On, the relay is asserted when: • The WALL or TABLE receptor button that selects this receptor is depressed on the OCP or • When a pre-programmed (APR) technique requests this receptor The wall or table relay will remain energized until a receptor with "Wall Relay Off" or "Table Relay Off", respectively, is selected. Depending on the configuration of the generator, set the receptor relays as indicated in Table 3-2 or 3-3.

8. Press the Back button on the lower left side of the screen. The system returns to the Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-8). IMPORTANT: The AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 ion chamber, which is the default chamber type shipped with standard AEC type generators, requires that detector "A" = 2, "B" = 1, and "C" = 3. The factory default orientation of the ion chamber mounting in the bucky is with the front side toward the tube. However, it may be necessary to mount the chamber with the back side forward (e.g., for left side loading wall stands). In this case, in the Ion Chamber Settings screen, simply switch assignment of cham-


Revision W

B-19


ber detector A to "3" and detector C to "2". No wiring modifications are necessary. Table B-1. Ion Chamber Settings for Generator with Standard AEC (AEC Board AY40-031S) Standard AEC Systems Setting



Polarity

+

+

Wall Relay

Off

Off

Table Relay

Off

Off

Invert

No

No

Slope/Lvl

Slope

Slope

Table B-2. Ion Chamber Settings for Generator with Universal AEC Option (AEC Board AY40-027S) Universal AEC Systems Ion Chamber Type Siemens (Level)

AID (Slope) Tomo Systems

AID (Slope) Non-Tomo Systems

Setting







Polarity

+

+

+

+

+

+

Wall Relay

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

Table Relay

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Invert

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

Slope/Lvl

Level

Level

Slope

Slope

Slope

Slope

Table 3-2 shows the ion chamber and receptor settings for the generator when equipped with standard AEC (i.e., Standard AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S) is installed). Table 3-3 shows the ion chamber and receptor settings for the generator when equipped with universal AEC (i.e., Universal AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) is installed).

Revision W

B-20



Film/Screen Default Settings The Film/Screen Default Settings Screen (see below) is used to configure the default film/screens associated with the various image receptors used with the generator. These settings apply only during AEC mode exposures. Note

that the film/screen(s) selected for use must be calibrated according to the AEC Calibration procedures described in this chapter, otherwise, AEC operation will likely not operate optimally.

The generator has been pre-configured with nine different film/screen combination selections designated "Wall40", "Wall72", "Table40", "100 Speed", "200 Speed", "800 Speed", "Canon", "Agfa", and "Digital" to choose from. The Film/Screen Default Settings screen, shown below, displays the current film/screen combination settings. To change the default film/screen settings, proceed as follows

THESE FILM/ SCREENS ARE USED ONLY ON UNIVERSAL TYPE AEC SYSTEMS

Figure B-13. Film Screen Default Settings Screen 1. Wall40 setting: Press the MODIFY button adjacent to the Wall40 field. The Select Film Screen sub-menu will display; press the button with the appropriate film/screen name appearing on it (use the Next button to


Revision W

B-21


display additional choices). The chosen film/screen combination is now the default film/screen combination used when the "WALL 40" image receptor is selected for exposures during AEC exposure mode. 2. Wall72 setting: Press the MODIFY button adjacent to the Wall72 field. The Select Film Screen sub-menu will display; press the button with the appropriate film/screen name appearing on it (use the Next button to display additional choices). The chosen film/screen combination is now the default film/screen combination used when the "WALL 72" image receptor is selected for exposures during AEC exposure mode. 3. Table40 setting: Press the MODIFY button adjacent to the Table40 field. The Select Film Screen sub-menu will display; press the button with the appropriate film/screen name appearing on it (use the Next button to display additional choices). The chosen film/screen combination is now the default film/screen combination used when the "TABLE" image receptor is selected for exposures during AEC exposure mode. 4. Aux setting (enabled only on generators equipped with "Universal" type AEC [i.e., AEC Board A11 AY40-027S is installed]): Press the MODIFY button adjacent to the Aux field. The Select Film Screen sub-menu will display; press the button with the appropriate film/screen name appearing on it (use the Next button to display additional choices). The chosen film/screen combination is now the default film/screen combination used when the "AUX" image receptor is selected for exposures during AEC exposure mode.

NOTE

The "default" film/screen combination settings automatically link specific calibrated film/ screen combinations used in non-APR and APR exposures using AEC. However, the operator may choose any available calibrated film/ screen combination using the Film/Screen selection buttons provided in the AEC and APR mode screens.

5. Wall2 setting (enabled only on generators equipped with "Universal" type AEC [i.e., AEC Board A11 AY40-027S is installed]): Press the MODIFY button adjacent to the Wall2 field. The Select Film Screen sub-menu will display; press the button with the appropriate film/screen name appearing on it (use the Next button to display additional choices). The chosen film/screen combination is now the default film/screen combination used when the "WALL2" image receptor is selected for exposures during AEC exposure mode. 6. Press the Back button on the lower left side of the screen. The system returns to the Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-8).

Revision W

B-22



Copy Film Screen Utility The Copy Film Screen utility enables stored AEC calibration data (kV curves, AEC reference data) to be copied from a calibrated film/screen combination to another film/screen combination in order to reduce overall calibration time. For example, if calibration was completed for the wall stand 40 inch SID film/ screen combination (i.e., Wall40), its calibration data can be copied to the uncalibrated table 40 inch SID film/screen combination (i.e., Table40) film/ screen using this utility. Although all required AEC Calibration procedures must still be performed, this will set the calibration values for the Table40 film/screen combination to fairly accurate settings, thereby reducing the number of exposures required for calibration. The Copy Film/Screen utility is most beneficial when the film screen combination being copied to has the same cassette screen, film speed, ion chamber and grid as the film/screen combination it is being copied from. Nevertheless, calibration time is likely to be reduced even if one or more of these elements differ. Proceed as follows: 1. On the Configuration Menu, press Copy Film Screen button (see Figure 3-8). The Selected Calibrated Film Screen menu appears:

Figure B-14. Select Calibrated Film Screen Menu 2. Select a previously calibrated Film/Screen combination to copy calibration data from (use the Next button to display additional choices).


Revision W

B-23


3. The Select Destination Film Screen menu appears:

Figure B-15. Select Destination Film Screen Menu CAUTION! Before proceeding, verify the "from" and "to" film screen copy selections are correct. Selecting Copy Film Screen as directed in the next step will cause calibration data for the film screen being copied "to" to be overwritten with the calibration data of the "from" film/screen. 4. Select the film/screen combination to copy the calibration data to (use the Next button to display additional choices). A copy confirmation pop-up will appear. To continue with copying, select Yes; to cancel without copying select No. 5. The system returns to the Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-8). If Yes was selected, all AEC calibration data has been copied from the previously calibrated film/screen combination to the destination film/ screen combination. If No was selected, the operation was aborted without copying. 6. Press the Back button on the lower left side of the Configuration screen. The system returns to the Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-8).

Revision W

B-24



GENERATOR CALIBRATION CAUTION! Before calibrating unit, perform warm-up procedures recommended by tube manufacturer or the warm-up procedure described in Chapter 3 of the Operator’s Manual. WARNING! The following calibration procedures involve taking x-ray exposures. All personnel should be behind protective barriers during exposure. X-rays can be dangerous unless proper precautions and procedures are adhered to. To access the generator calibration functions, press the button next to the Calibration field in the Service Options Menu (see Figure 3-3). The Calibration menu displays, shown below:

Figure B-16. Calibration Menu The Calibration menu provides access to the system's various calibration functions. The generator was pre-calibrated at the factory, however, the system will need to be re-calibrated to assure proper operation, verify compliance and set


Revision W

B-25


AEC optical density (on systems equipped with AEC option). These procedures should be performed in the order presented in this chapter. The following is a brief description of each of the Calibration Menu selections: •

A/D: Accesses the analog-to-digital (A-D) converters calibration function

•

KV: Accesses KV calibration function

•

Filament: Accesses tube filament offset calibration function

•

MA: Accesses mA calibration function

•

AEC: Accesses the AEC optical density and AEC kVp calibration functions (active on systems equipped with AEC option only). Note that all of the AEC Calibrations must be performed for each table and/or film/screen combination used with the x-ray system. Selection of each film/screen type used with the system is explained in "CONFIGURATION SETTINGS" paragraph described previously in this chapter.

•

Back: Returns to the Generator Service Menu. This function is also provided in each of the above calibration screens, from which you are returned to the main Calibration Menu

The paragraphs that follow describe the procedures for performing each of the above calibration functions. Following initial system installation, these procedures should be performed in the order presented in this chapter. General Calibration Procedure Notes The following notes apply in general to all calibration procedures, including AEC calibration procedures. Please review these notes prior to performing calibration.

Revision W

B-26

•

Press the Next button to advance to the next calibration procedure.

•

Press the Back button to return to the previous calibration procedure.

•

Each calibration screen displays the correct KV, MA, time and thickness (in CM) value required for performing a particular calibration procedural step. However, always ensure the correct values are set prior to performing each procedural step.



A/D Calibration The A/D (analog/digital converter) calibration utility is used to calibrate, against a traceable calibrated voltage measurement instrument (such as a DMM), various essential supply voltages utilized by the x-ray generator. After A/D calibration has been performed, the A/D calibration utility may then be used as a diagnostic tool allowing the technician to "read out" these voltage measurements without having to remove the cover from the generator cabinet and without connecting a meter. Table B-3 shows the various voltage levels (with tolerances) that can be calibrated using this utility, and it provides the location of the test point at which a calibrated voltmeter must be connected for measuring the actual voltage level: Table B-3. A/D Calibration Voltages Voltage Level



Cathode

±8 VDC


Anode

±8 VDC


+5VDC

±0.1 VDC


+15VDC

±0.2 VDC


-15VDC

±0.2 VDC


Regulated +24

±0.3 VDC


Unreg. +24V

±0.3 VDC


WARNING! The following procedure requires that power be applied to the generator. Extreme care must be exercised to ensure the safety of service or other personnel in the area. The following procedure calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of the above operating voltages. The same procedure applies to any of the voltage levels available for selection. Voltage measurement accuracy is verified using your pre-calibrated voltmeter (traceable to NIST standard) as the benchmark. Once calibrated, the generator’s CPU continuously monitors these internal voltages and will terminate or not allow exposure if specified tolerances are exceeded. Proceed as follows:


Revision W

B-27


1. In the Calibration Menu, press AD button (see Figure B-16). The AD Calibration Menu appears:

VOLTAGE SELECTIONS

PRESS TO SCROLL UP/ DOWN LIST FOR ADDITIONAL SETTINGS

Figure B-17. AD Calibration Menu 2. Refer to Table B-3 and connect a voltmeter to the test point corresponding with the voltage level selected for calibration. 3. Select a voltage level to calibrate by pressing its corresponding Calibrate button (choices are Cathode (400V), Anode (400V), +15 VDC, -15 VDC, Regulated +24 VDC, Unregulated +24 VDC, and +5 VDC). For this example, "Cathode" is selected.

Revision W

B-28



4. A keypad will display enabling input of the actual (measured) voltage level, such as the sample Cathode voltage input screen shown below: ENTER VOLTAGE READING FROM METER

Figure B-18. Sample AD Voltage Input Screen (Cathode is shown) 5. On the voltmeter, observe the measured voltage value. Ideally, the value appearing in the AD Voltage Input Screen (below "Cathode") will match the reading on the voltmeter. If not, enter the measured value using the keypad. 6. Press Enter button to save the calibration entry. 7.

Repeat above steps for each of the other AD voltage levels.

8. Press the Back button on the lower left side of the AD Calibration screen. The system returns to the Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-16).


Revision W

B-29


kV Calibration This procedure calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of peak tube potential (kVp). The generator’s ability to measure peak tube potential accurately is verified using a pre-calibrated kVp meter (Dynalyzer or equivalent) as a benchmark. Proceed as follows: 1. In the Calibration Menu, press KV button (see Figure B-16). The KV Calibration screen appears:

KV INCREASE/ DECREASE BUTTONS

Figure B-19. KV Calibration Screen WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure that system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 2. Connect a kVp bleeder tank in series between X-ray tube and the generator’s H.V. Transformer (A17), or use a non-invasive kVp meter. 3. Verify 50 KVP appears in the KV Calibration Screen and "Next Measure" appears on the top right button as shown in Figure B-19.

Revision W

B-30



4. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the KV Calibration Screen (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, 100 mS). 5. On the kVp meter, observe the measured kV value. (Ideally, this value should be 50 kVp.) 6. If not 50 kVp, press the 50 kVp adjustment button (located directly below "Measured KVP#1" label). Find the measured KVP value in the scrollable list, select it then press Enter. The values appearing in the list are in onetenth increments. 7.

Press Next Measure button to proceed to 100 kV calibration setting.

8. Verify 100 KVP appears on the KV Calibration Screen and "Save Calibration" now appears on the top right button. 9. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the KV Calibration Screen (i.e., 100 kVp, 200L mA, 100 mS). 10. On the kVp meter, observe the measured kV value. (Ideally, this value should be 100 kVp.) 11. If not 100 kVp, press the 100 kVp adjustment button (located directly below "Measured KVP#2" label). Find the measured KVP value in the scrollable list, select it then press Enter. 12. Press Save Calibration button. The KV Calibration Screen (First Measure) should be displayed. 13. Repeat KV calibration for both 50 and 100 kVp until indicated and measured kVp values agree to within 4% tolerance. 14. To proceed to filament calibration, press the Next button.


Revision W

B-31


Filament Offset Calibration This procedure establishes the filament current offset and gain corrections. Filament current measurement accuracy is verified using a pre-calibrated Dynalyzer (or equivalent), non-invasive kV meter, or mAs meter as a benchmark. Ensure precision of the measurement instrument is sufficient enough to assure generator accuracy requirements can be met. The Filament Offset Calibration procedure may be performed using an oscilloscope, however, it is not the preferred method. Using this method, the objective is to achieve the "flattest" possible large and small filament waveforms, with no spikes or peaks as shown in Figure B-20 below.


After



After


Figure B-20. Filament Offset Current Measurement (Using an Oscilloscope)

Revision W

B-32



Access the Filament Calibration Menu (shown below) and proceed as follows:

FILAMENT OFFSET INCREASE/ DECREASE BUTTONS

Figure B-21. Filament Calibration Screen WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 1. If using a Dynalyzer, a kVp bleeder tank should be connected in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17.


Revision W

B-33


2. If using a mAs meter, remove two (2) green/yellow wires marked "MAS METER", connected to A17P1-9 and A17P1-10, from the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure B-22). Connect the mAs meter in series between removed wires. (Important: These wires must be re-connected when finished calibration.)

MAS METER CONNECTION


MAS METER

GROUND STUD

MAS METER LEADS





Figure B-22. MAS Meter Connection

Revision W

B-34



3. If using an oscilloscope, connect the scope leads between test point TP7 on KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S) and ground. Set scope for 1.0 volt/ division, and 50 ms/division time base. This will give a 100 mA/volt equivalent for mA measurement as shown in the sample waveforms in Figure B-20. 4. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the Filament Calibration Screen (i.e., 70 kVp, 75s mA, 15 msec). If using an oscilloscope, set time to 50 msec. 5. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. (Ideally, this value should be 75 mA or 1.125 mAs.) If using an oscilloscope, observe the small filament current pulse waveform for "flatness" (see Figure B-20). 6. If not 75 mA, or if waveform is not flat, press the small filament offset value button (located directly below "Filament Small" label). The filament offset amperage values (in hundredth increments as shown in the sample screen below) range from +10.00 down to -10.00, with 0.00 equating to no offset applied to the tube’s default filament curve. To increase mA, raise the filament offset value; to decrease mA, lower the filament offset value.

Figure B-23. Sample Filament Offset Values Screen 7.

Re-take exposure at same settings and adjust small filament offset value if necessary. Repeat this step until measured mA equals 75 or when waveform is sufficiently flat. Press the Small Filament button to proceed.


Revision W

B-35


8. The large filament calibration screen is displayed. Note the "Filament Small" button is now yellow to indicate small filament calibration is complete. 9. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the Filament Calibration Screen (i.e., 70 kVp, 300L mA, 15 msec). If using an oscilloscope, set time to 50 msec. 10. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, observe the measured current value. (Ideally, this value should be 300 mA or 4.5 mAs.) 11. If not 300 mA, or if waveform is not flat, press the large filament offset value button (located directly below "Filament Large" label). To increase mA, raise the filament offset value; to decrease mA, lower the filament offset value. 12. Re-take exposure at same settings and adjust large filament offset value if necessary. Repeat this step until measured mA is 300 or when waveform is sufficiently flat. If so, filament calibration is complete. 13. To proceed to mA calibration, press the Next button. Note: An error message appears if the filament current is set too low, which indicates the filament offset value for the filament being calibrated is set too low or high. If this occurs, increase or decrease the filament current.

Revision W

B-36



MA Calibration This procedure calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of tube current (mA). Current measurement accuracy is verified using a pre-calibrated mAs meter (Dynalyzer or equivalent) as a benchmark. Ensure precision of the measurement instrument is sufficient enough to assure generator accuracy requirements can be met. An oscilloscope may be used for mA measurement, however, it likely will not be precise enough to assure generator mA accuracy. To use an oscilloscope for mA measurement, connect scope leads between test point TP7 on KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S1) and ground. Set scope for 1.0 volt/division, and 50 ms/division time base. This will give a 100 mA/volt equivalent for mA measurement (see Figure B-23a for sample mA measurements using scope).

Figure B-23a. MA Measurement Using an Oscilloscope Proceed as follows: WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure that system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 1. If not already done so, a kVp bleeder tank should be connected in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. This connection is made by removing the two green/yellow wires connecting A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure B-22) and connecting the removed wires to the mAs meter. (Note: The MAS meter should remain connected throughout calibration. These wires must be re-connected when finished calibration.)


Revision W

B-37


MA INCREASE/ DECREASE BUTTONS

Figure B-24. MA Calibration Screen 2. Verify 75s mA appears in the MA Calibration Screen and "Next Measure" appears on the top right button as shown in Figure B-24. 3. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the MA Calibration Screen (i.e., 60 kVp, 75s mA, 100 mS). 4. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. (Ideally, this value should be 75 or 7.5 mAs.) 5. If not 75 mA, press the 75 mA adjustment button (located directly below "Measured MA#1" label). Find the measured mA value in the scrollable list, select it then press Enter. The values appearing in the list are in onetenth increments. Repeat mA calibration for 75s until indicated and measured mA values agree to within 5%+1 mA. 6. Press Next Measure button to proceed to 400L mA calibration setting. 7.

Revision W

B-38

Verify 400L mA appears in the MA Calibration Screen and "Save Calibration" now appears on the top right button.



8. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the MA Calibration Screen (i.e., 60 kVp, 400L mA, 100.0 mS). 9. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or on mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. (Ideally, this value should be 400 mA or 40 mAs.) 10. If not 400 mA, press the 400 mA adjustment (located directly below "Measured MA#2" label). Find the measured mA value in the scrollable list, select it then press Enter. The values appearing in the list are in one-tenth increments. 11. Press Save Calibration button. 12. Repeat mA calibration for 400L mA until indicated and measured mA values agree to within 5%+1 mA. Note: The Power Supply Board’s +48 VDC output may require adjusting (using potentiometer A6R17) up to +55 VDC (max.) in cases where long-length high tension cables are used and/or a heavy duty x-ray tube is installed. This can be determined by measuring the mA output (using a Dynalyzer or mAs meter) of an exposure taken at 40 to 50 kVp and the highest mA station available. The mA measured should be the same as the indicated mA (within specified tolerance). If mA output is too low, increase the +48 VDC voltage output as required, but do not exceed +55 VDC. 13. To return to the main calibration screen, press the Back button. If the system is equipped with QG-AEC option, perform AEC calibration. Otherwise, calibration is complete. CAUTION! If using a mAs meter, re-connect the green/yellow wire marked "MAS METER" to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure B-22).


Revision W

B-39


AEC CALIBRATION CAUTION! Before calibrating unit, perform warmup procedures recommended by tube manufacturer or the warm-up procedure described in Chapter 3 of the Operator’s Manual. IMPORTANT! Before performing each AEC calibration procedure, verify the correct Film/Screen is displayed on the calibration screen (shown in top left field). In most DR or CR Film Plate systems, the entire imaging area of the digital receptor or CR Film Plate must be covered with acrylic in order to obtain accurate "S" or "REX" values used for the procedures that follow. Refer to the calibration instructions provided with digital or CR system for specific "S" or "REX" values required for AEC calibration. IMPORTANT! Always place a CR film plate in the cassette holder when taking any measurements or when calibrating, even if the calibration step does not require a film to be exposed. The following procedures must be performed to ensure successful AEC calibration of the HF Series X-ray generator when configured as part of the DiRex System (i.e., integration to Agfa Computed Radiography (CR) Film Plate). Table B-4 shows a summarized presentation of the AEC calibration procedure. An AEC calibration Worksheet is provided in Table B-5 for recording calibration data. Table B-4. CR System AEC Calibration Procedure Sequence

Revision W

B-40




1. Perform "Ion Chamber Balancing" procedure. 2. Perform "AEC MAS Balance" procedure for wall stand ion chamber. 3. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration": a. Set desired "base" optical density b. Set "AEC Ref" to 1200. c. Adjust ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until base density is achieved in acquired images. 4. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".



Table B-4. CR System AEC Calibration Procedure Sequence FILM/SCREENS TO BE CALIBRATED



1. Copy "Wall 72" film/screen to "Wall 40". 2. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration", however, DO NOT re-adjust the ion chamber MASTER GAIN potentiometer. Adjust "AEC Ref" to obtain desired (set) density. 3. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".


1. If system includes a wall stand, copy "Wall 40" film/screen to "Table 40". 2. Perform "Ion Chamber Balancing" procedure for table ion chamber. 3. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration": a. Set desired "base" optical density b. Set "AEC Ref" to 1200. c. Adjust ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until base density is achieved in acquired images. 4. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".


Revision W

B-41


Table B-5. AEC Calibration Worksheet Film/Screen Combination:

Table 40

Wall 40

Wall 72


50 kVp, 200L mA, 5 cm

Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value AEC Ref. AEC KV CALIBRATION Setting:



Step 2 - 60 kVp, 200L mA, 10 cm


Step 3 - 80 kVp, 200L mA, 15 cm


Step 4 - 100 kVp, 200L mA, 20 cm


Step 5 - 110 kVp, 200L mA, 25 cm


Step 6 - 120 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm


*Step 7 - 130 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm


*Step 8 - 140 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm

Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value * Only required on 150 kVp systems

Revision W

B-42



Ion Chamber Balancing (Three-field Chambers) On systems using a three-field ion chamber, the chamber detectors must be balanced prior to performing AEC calibration (refer to the ion chamber manufacturer’s instruction manual). When balanced, the mAs will be approximately the same (±5%) for exposures taken using any of the three chambers, or with two or more chambers selected simultaneously. This procedure must be performed on each ion chamber used in the system (for example, both table and wall ion chambers when equipped with two). Before proceeding, check that the ion chamber detectors have been correctly configured so when the chamber select buttons on the operator control panel are pressed, the appropriate ion chamber detector is enabled. If not, refer to "Table/Wall Ion Chamber Configuration Screens" procedure described previously in this chapter and re-configure. Proceed as follows: 1. If not already done so, a kVp bleeder tank should be connected in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. 2. Access Generator Settings Screen (see Figure B-9). Make a note of the Backup MAS setting, then change the Backup MAS to "40". 3. Press the Manual/AEC Mode button on the operator control panel and select AEC mode. 4. Using a lead sheet, cover the UPPER RIGHT and CENTER ion chamber detectors. 5. Place 20 CM acrylic over UPPER LEFT ion chamber detector. 6. Set operator control panel for 100 KV, 200L MA, select the UPPER LEFT ion chamber detector and take an exposure. Note the measured mAs reading. 7.

Repeat above steps with the CENTER ion chamber detector selected and UPPER LEFT and UPPER RIGHT detectors covered with lead. The measured mAs reading should be within 5% of the mAs reading noted in the previous step. If not, adjust the CENTER detector gain potentiometer located on the ion chamber amplifier (refer to ion chamber manufacturer’s documentation for details), then re-take exposure and verify it is within tolerance. Repeat as necessary.


Revision W

B-43


NOTE: If the system is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "level" type (i.e., Siemens), adjust the appropriate detector gain potentiometer on AY40-027S in accordance with the table below: Table B-6. Universal AEC Board A11 Detector Gain Adjustment Potentiometers (Siemens Ion Chamber Only) ION CHAMBER

DETECTOR


TABLE

1

R61

TABLE

2

R63

TABLE

3

R66

WALL#1

1

R54

WALL#1

2

R55

WALL#1

3

R56

WALL#2

1

R53

WALL#2

2

R58

WALL#2

3

R57

8. Repeat above steps with UPPER RIGHT ion chamber detector selected and UPPER LEFT and UPPER CENTER detectors covered with lead. The measured mAs reading should be within 5% of the mAs reading noted in the previous step. If not, adjust the UPPER RIGHT detector gain potentiometer, re-take exposure and verify it is within tolerance. Repeat as necessary. 9. Access the Generator Settings Screen and reset Backup MAS to original setting noted previously.

Revision W

B-44



AEC MAS Balance Verification The generator AEC mAs balance was pre-calibrated at the factory. However, verification of AEC mAs balance assures AEC calibration accuracy. When balanced, the mAs at the specified exposures will be approximately the same (±6%). This procedure only needs to be performed once prior to AEC calibration of the film/screen combination(s) used with the system. Proceed as follows: 1. If not already done so, connect a kVp bleeder tank in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. This connection is made by removing the two green/ yellow wires connecting A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure B-22) and connecting the removed wires to the mAs meter. (Note: These wires must be re-connected when finished calibration.) 2. Place 20 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam. (Where practical, adjust acrylic thickness to obtain approximately 100 millisecond exposures.) 3. If calibrating a" level" type ion chamber, ensure all three ion chamber detectors are selected. 4. Press the Manual/AEC Mode button on the operator control panel and select enter AEC mode. 5. Set the operator control panel for 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber - requires AY40-027S AEC board), 75S mA and take an exposure. 6. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, note the measured mAs value. 7.

Set the operator control panel for 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber - requires AY40-027S AEC board) and the highest available mA station. Take an exposure.

8. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, note the measured mAs value. 9. The mAs values noted must be within ±5%. If not, adjustment of the dV/dt potentiometer on AEC Board A11 is necessary: •

If the generator is equipped with "standard" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-031S), adjust potentiometer A11R12 to increase or decrease the mAs value.


Revision W

B-45


•

If the generator is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "level" type (i.e., Siemens), adjust potentiometer A11R82 to increase or decrease the mAs value.

•

If the generator is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "slope" type (i.e., AID), adjust potentiometer A11R87 to increase or decrease the mAs value.

10. Re-take exposure at the above settings. Repeat until the two measured values are within range. 11. Take an exposure at 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber), 75S mA, 10 cm. Verify mAs value is within ±5% of previous measurements. 12. Take an exposure at 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber), a mid-range mA value, 10 cm. Verify mAs value is within ±5% of previous measurements. CAUTION! If using a mAs meter, re-connect the green/yellow wire marked "MAS METER" to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure B-22).

Revision W

B-46



Film Screen Selection Calibration of film/screen combinations should be performed in the following sequence, assuming a typical radiographic system having one ion chamber in the wall stand (72" and 40" SID), and a second ion chamber used in the radiographic table (40" SID). If the system is using a wall stand and 200 and 400 speed films, calibrate the Wall 72" film screen combination using 200 speed film first, followed by Wall 72" using 400 speed film. If the system only has a table receptor, perform all AEC calibrations (i.e., ion chamber balance, AEC MAS balance, AEC optical density, and AEC KVP procedures). IMPORTANT NOTE: Typically, the AEC calibration parameters for each of the various receptors used with the generator are quite similar. Therefore, the HF Series generator’s calibration data "Copy Film Screen" function can be used to copy the calibration parameters from one receptor (i.e., a calibrated receptor) to the other receptors. For example, after completing AEC calibration of 72" Wall film/screen, the Copy Film Screen function can be used to copy the 72" film/screen calibration data to 40" Wall film/screen. After copying AEC data, the only further AEC calibration usually required for the 40" film/screen is performing AEC OD Calibration to set the "AEC Ref" value. Similarly, the 40" Wall film/screen calibration data can be copied to the 40" Table, however, the table ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer must be adjusted as required. Be sure to verify the AEC films for each SID/receptor meet applicable regulatory agency requirements. If required, further optical density accuracy can be attained by performing the "AEC KV Calibration" procedure.


Revision W

B-47


1. From the Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-16), press the AEC button. The Select Film Screen Menu is displayed:

Figure B-25. Select Film Screen Menu 2. Select the film/screen combination to calibrate (use the Next button to display additional choices). The HF Series X-ray generator provides for calibration of up to nine different film/screen combinations. Note that each image receptor used with the generator is configurable for use with a particular film/screen combination using the Film Screen Default Settings Screen described previously in the Configuration section of this chapter (see Figure 3-13). For example, when the operator presses the WALL button on the operator control panel and selects the WALL 72" receptor, the system can be programmed to use the "Wall 72"" designated film/screen combination (i.e., the film/screen type used with the wall stand at 72" SID). On the same system, a different film/screen type, designated as "Table 40" for example, could be configured for use with the TABLE receptor. Typically, on a system using a wall stand and radiographic table, three separate film/screen combinations are used: •

Revision W

B-48

Wall 72" - Used when the operator selects wall receptor at 72 inch source-to-image distance (SID)



•

Wall 40" - Used when the operator selects wall receptor at 40 inch source-to-image distance (SID)

•

Table 40" - Used when the operator selects table receptor at 40 inch source-to-image distance (SID)

On generators equipped with "Universal" type AEC (AEC Board A11 AY40027S installed), two additional image receptors and their corresponding film/ screens (default names are "WALL2" and "AUX") may also be configured similar to those listed above. It is important to note that each different type of film/screen combination used with the receptors be calibrated in accordance with the AEC Calibration procedures described in this chapter. Throughout AEC calibration, the film/screen being calibrated is displayed on every AEC calibration screen at the end of the top field. Note that the sample AEC calibration screens show "Wall40" in the instructions that follow; this is because the "Wall40" film screen was selected. The screens will actually reflect whichever of the available nine film screens you choose. When calibrating AEC using a wall stand mounted receptor, ensure that the xray beam is perpendicular to image receptor and that the correct ion chamber detector(s) is selected. IMPORTANT! Use the same configuration of bucky, grid, ion chamber and film cassette/screen that will be used with the "Film/Screen" being calibrated.


Revision W

B-49


The AEC Calibration Menu WARNING! The following calibration procedures involve taking x-ray exposures. All personnel should be behind the protective barriers. X-rays can be dangerous unless proper precautions and procedures are adhered to. Following selection of a film/screen to calibrate, the AEC Calibration Menu displays:

Figure B-26. AEC Calibration Menu NOTE: In normal AEC mode, select the appropriate receptor (Wall 72", Wall 40", or Table 40") prior to selection of a film/screen combination for AEC calibration. The AEC Calibration menu provides access to the system's various AEC calibration functions, briefly described as follows: •

Revision W

B-50

Optical Density - Calibrates the optical density for the currently selected film/screen and ion chamber combination



•

KV - Calibrates the tube voltage settings used in conjunction with the currently selected film/screen and ion chamber combination

•

Change Film Screen - Accesses the Select Film Screen Menu (see Figure 3-23) for selection of a film screen to calibrate.

•

Back - Returns to the Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-16)

Optical Density Calibration This procedure calibrates the generator’s AEC system to a user-selectable, dose calculation (density) setting (e.g., 2.1). This setting determines the basic "brightness" quality of images acquired in AEC mode using the CR system. This is accomplished by comparing the CR Film Plate’s actual Logarithmic Median (LGM) value with the Target Level selected using the AEC Optical Density Calibration screen (see Figure B-27). When calibrating the first film/screen combination, which should be the slowest speed film and/or the largest SID receptor, set the "AEC Base" value to 2000, and adjust the MASTER GAIN potentiometer on the ion chamber until the desired target density is obtained. Proceed as follows:


Revision W

B-51


AEC Optical Density Calibration 1. In the AEC Calibration Menu, press Optical Density button (see Figure 3-26). The AEC Optical Density Calibration screen appears:

TARGET DENSITY LEVEL

Figure B-27. AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen 2. If the selected film/screen combination is the first one to be calibrated with the system, perform the following steps: a. Set the ion chamber detector selection to middle detector and ensure x-ray tube is at correct SID. Ensure the ion chamber has been balanced. b. Place 5 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam. c.

Set the "Target Level" to the desired level (e.g., "1.30" as shown in the figure above). To do so, press the Target Level value button (located directly below "Target Level" label), use the keypad to input the desired value, then press Enter. Do not change the Target Level

setting at any time during this procedure.

Revision W

B-52



d. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, normal density). e. Process the CR Film Plate to determine density level (referred to as the "LGM" value). f.

If the LGM value is within acceptable range of the Target Level as defined by the CR Film Plate manufacturer, press the Next button to save the setting and proceed to AEC KV Calibration.

g. If not within range, perform the following adjustments: NOTE


Note: If the system is equipped with "standard type" AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S), the "Table Gain Adj. Potentiometer" is A11R22 and the "Wall Gain Adj. Potentiometer" is A11R23. If the system is equipped with "Universal type" AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S), the "Table Gain Adj. Potentiometer" is A11R77 and the "Wall Gain Adj. Potentiometer" is A11R79. i. Adjust Table Gain Adj. potentiometer (if calibrating the table receptor) or Wall Gain Adj. potentiometer (if calibrating the wall receptor), and repeat exposure. Continue until the measured LGM value equals the Target Level setting to within CR System manufacturer’s specification. ii. If you still cannot achieve the Target Level setting, set Table Gain Adj. potentiometer (if calibrating the table receptor) or Wall Gain Adj. potentiometer (if calibrating the wall receptor) to mid-range, then adjust the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until roughly the desired LGM is obtained. Further fine-tuning can then be achieved by adjusting the Table or Wall Gain Adj. potentiometer as described in the previous step. iii. If the measured LGM value still does not equal the Target Level setting even with the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer set to maximum gain position, increase each chamber detector gain and perform the "AEC MAS Balance Verification" procedure. Repeat AEC Optical Density calibration. iv. If the measured LGM value still does not equal the Target Level setting after adjusting the MASTER GAIN and gain of individual detectors, reduce the AEC Reference until you obtain the desired LGM value. 3. If the selected film/screen combination is not the first one to be calibrated with the system, perform the following steps:


Revision W

B-53


i. Set the "Target Level" to the desired level (e.g., "1.30" as shown in Figure 3-27). To do so, press the Target Level value button (located directly below "Target Level" label), use the keypad to input the desired value, then press Enter. Do not

change the Target Level setting at any time during this procedure.

ii. Place 5 CM of acrylic in the X-ray beam. iii. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, normal density). iv. Process the CR Film Plate to determine density level (referred to as the "LGM" value). v. If the LGM value is within acceptable range of the Target Level as defined by the CR Film Plate manufacturer, press the Next button to save the setting and proceed to AEC KV Calibration. vi. If LGM value is too low, press the AEC Base value button (located directly below "AEC Base" label). Increase the AEC Base value, press Enter, then repeat exposure. If density is too high, press the AEC Base value button, decrease the AEC Base value, then repeat exposure. Continue until the measured LGM value equals the Target Level setting to within CR System manufacturer’s specification. 4. Press the Next button to advance to AEC KV Calibration. IMPORTANT! To ensure AEC density is correctly calibrated to the desired "target" density setting, either the AEC Base value must be adjusted to obtain the target density level (verified using the processed CR Film Plate) or the target density level shown on the AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen must be set to the actual LGM value obtained from the processed CR Film. For example, the calibrator would like the system AEC density to be "2.10". The calibrator must adjust the "AEC Base" value until the actual measured LGM value of the CR Film Plate is 2.10. However, if the actual measured LGM value of the CR Film Plate is 2.20 and you decide not to continue to adjust the AEC Base to achieve exactly 2.10 density, then change the Target Level setting shown on the AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen to "2.20".

Revision W

B-54



AEC KV Calibration Procedure The AEC KV Calibration screen (shown below) is used to calibrate the tube voltage to the "Target Level" density setting. There are a total of six kV calibration points for a 125 kV system (50, 60, 80, 100, 110, and 120 kV); 150 kV systems require an additional two kV calibration points (130 and 140 kV). The image receptor and chamber field settings remain the same as those used in the AEC Optical Density Calibration procedure. 1. Access the AEC KV Calibration Screen (shown below) and proceed as follows.

TARGET DENSITY LEVEL NOTE Calibration of the first step (50 kVp) is not required as long as AEC Optical Density Calibration procedure in the previous steps was performed prior to AEC KV Calibration. A verification that the "Measured LGM" is the same as the "Target Level" setting is all that is required.

Figure B-28. AEC KV Calibration Screen 2. Place indicated thickness of acrylic (5 CM for first calibration point) in the X-ray beam. 3. Insert a CR Film Plate and collimate down to film size. 4. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the AEC KV Calibration Screen (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, normal density).


Revision W

B-55


5. Process the CR Film Plate to determine the density level (referred to as the "LGM" value). a. If the sensitivity value is within acceptable range as defined by manufacturer, press the First Point button to proceed to the next AEC kV calibration point. a. If not within range, press the Measured Level value button (located directly below "Measured Level" label), and enter the measured LGM value using the keypad, then press Enter. Press First Point button to proceed to the next AEC kV calibration point. DO NOT TAKE ANY

FURTHER EXPOSURES AT THIS SETTING.

6. Repeat the previous steps for the 60, 80, 100, 110, 120, and, if 150 kV system, 130 and 140 kV calibration points, placing the specified thickness of acrylic in the x-ray beam as indicated on the AEC KV Calibration screen for each kV calibration point, and taking one exposure per kVp calibration point until all the measured density (LGM) values are within required range. 7.

Press the Back button to return to the AEC Calibration menu.

8. This completes AEC calibration for this particular film/screen combination. Repeat AEC calibration procedures for all additional film/screen combinations that will be used with the system. 9. Verify AEC calibration by taking several exposures in AEC mode and checking the resulting "LGM" value. If necessary, repeat AEC calibration procedure to further adjust AEC accuracy.

Revision W

B-56


Appendix

C

Log4View Error Logger

C-1

C-2

QUANTUM LOGGING VIEWER (LOG4VIEW) USER INSTRUCTIONS GENERAL DESCRIPTION The log viewing program, Log4View, is used to view errors, warnings and other informational events that have occurred with your integrated system. Every time any of the Quantum Programs that form the integrated system make a significant action, it is recorded in a log file. This includes normal operations because all may be useful in both viewing normal customer operation as well as error conditions. These events will help diagnose the state of equipment in the field. The Log4View program is installed along with the Integration System software installation. It is a separate program that is accessible outside of the digital operations. It creates an icon on the desktop that will allow the log to be viewed at any time. The following instructions for use are separated into two sections: 

Agfa (DiRex) Integration Log4View User Instructions



Canon (QG-DIG-CXDI) Integration Log4View User Instructions

Refer to the appropriate section corresponding with the type integration utilized with this HF Series X-ray Generator. Note: The Quantum logging facility is only for events within Quantum’s Integration System – The associated CR or DR system workstation has its own logging system and viewer.

Document No.

Revision

Title

Page No.

DC30-090

B

Quantum Logging Viewer Instructions

2 of 7

AGFA (DIREX) INTEGRATION LOG4VIEW INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE 1. From within the NX Program select Main Menu (A) and Desktop (B) (Figure 1).

B A Figure 1. AGFA NX Program 2. The Windows desktop will appear: Click on the Windows “Start” button. 3. Position the mouse pointer over the “Quantum” shortcut, then select “Logs” which allows you to choose from one of five logs configured during software install (refer to the following figure).

Figure 2. Quantum Logs Document No.

Revision

Title

Page No.

DC30-090

B


3 of 7

4. At this point a log would be chosen based on the type of information being sought. 

All Logs: All messages



Quantum.Generator Log: All generator related messages



Quantum.Generator(Error) Log: All generator error messages (In Red)



Quantum.Integration.Agfa Log: Communication debugging between



Quantum.Integration.Agfa.Overlay Log: Communication Debugging

the Agfa software and the Quantum Overlay

between the Quantum Overlay, Quantum Generator and Agfa software.

5. The display is of events that have occurred during the operation of the generator. The date and time stamp lets you determine what occurred and when. Refer to the following figure which shows an example of “Quantum.Integration.Agfa.Overlay” log.

Figure 3. Sample Quantum Integration Agfa Overlay Log 6. If you need to look either at other events in the system and / or non-error events, you can select another log per step three (3) to view the events of that log.

Document No.

Revision

Title

Page No.

DC30-090

B


4 of 7

Note: If Log4View logs are requested by Quantum Medical Imaging’s Service or Engineering departments for analysis, they are located in: Note: If Log4View logs are requested by Quantum Medical Imaging’s Service or Engineering departments for analysis, they are located in “C:\Agfa\Healthcare\Nx\Bin\Quantum\Logs”. Best practice would be to email the entire “Quantum” folder to avoid multiple file requests.

Document No.

Revision

Title

Page No.

DC30-090

B


5 of 7

CANON (QG-DIG-CXDI) INTEGRATION LOG4VIEW INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE 1. Press the Windows key () on the Canon Workstation keyboard. The Windows taskbar will appear: Click on the Windows “Start” button. 2. Select Programs. 3. Select Quantum Logs. 4. Choose from one of two logs (Quantum Log.l4v or Quantum Generator Error.l4v) configured during software install as shown in the sample screen below:

Figure 4. Accessing Quantum Logs The Quantum logs available 

Quantum Log.l4v: All messages



Quantum.Generator(Error) Log: All generator error messages (In Red)

5. The logs contain a list of events that have occurred during the operation of the generator. The date and time stamp lets you determine what occurred and when. Refer to the following figure which shows an example of “Quantum Log.l4v” log.

Document No.

Revision

Title

Page No.

DC30-090

B


6 of 7

Figure 5. Sample Quantum/Canon Integration Generator Log (Quantum Log.l4v) 6. If you need to look either at other events in the system and / or non-error events, you can select another log per step four (4) to view the events of that log. Note: If Log4View logs are requested by Quantum Medical Imaging’s Service or Engineering departments for analysis, they are located in: Canon Integration (QG-DIG-CXDI) Quantum.Generator.Log – “C:\Program Files\Quantum\Quantum Generator Service\Quantum\Logs” Quantum.Integration.Canon.Log – “D:\ccr\Quantum\Logs” Best practice would be to email the entire “Quantum” folder to avoid multiple file requests.

Document No.

Revision

Title

Page No.

DC30-090

B


7 of 7

Appendix

D

CALIBRATION

(Using Generator Service Tools

D-1

D-2

Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)

THIS SECTION ONLY APPLICABLE ON HF SERIES GENERATORS EQUIPPED WITH Q-CONNECT (ETHERNET) OPTION (EXCEPT DIREX - SEE APPENDIX B)


Revision W

D-3


OVERVIEW This appendix provides instructions for configuring and calibrating the HF Series X-ray generator on systems equipped with the Q-Connect option (ethernet adapter), with the exception of Agfa DiRex Integration Systems (covered in Appendix B). Generator Configuration and Calibration can only be performed using the generator’s "Insight", Generator Configuration, and Calibration Wizard service tools installed on the computer serving as the generator operator control panel (i.e., Q-VISION all-in-one PC or digital imaging system workstation computer). If this is a Quantum/Canon Integration (QG-DIG-CXDI Integration System), refer to Model QG-DIG-CXDI Canon/Quantum Integration Service Manual DC30-094 for system interconnection and integration software installation instructions. NEMA Standards Publication/No. XR8-1979(R1994), Test Methods for Diagnostic X-ray Machines for Use During Initial Installation is recommended as a reference. REQUIRED TOOLS AND MATERIALS The following lists the tools and materials required to perform the procedures contained in this chapter: •


•

Non-invasive kV, mAs, mR meter or Radcal Dynalyzer III (or equivalent)

•


•


ACCESSING GENERATOR SERVICE TOOLS The way in which the generator’s service tools are accessed differs depending on the operator control panel configuration of the HF Series X-ray generator (i.e., if it is equipped with either a Q-VISION operator control panel or a Workstation-based operator control panel). However, once the service tools have been accessed, the configuration and calibration screens are identical. Refer to the appropriate section that follows depending on the type operator control panel your system uses. Before starting, be sure the following steps have been performed: 1. If this is an integration system (i.e., generator is integrated with a workstation computer for use as the operator control panel), ensure the DR system’s Computer Workstation is properly connected to the generator, and the integration system software is installed and configured in accordance with the instructions provided in the Integration Service Manual. 2. Ensure the Power/Expose Control Box (AY20-265) is properly connected to the generator as described in Chapter 2, ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION. 3. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position.

Revision W

D-4



4. Set the power on/standby switch on the Power/Expose Control Box to the standby ( ) position, then to the on ( lamp should illuminate.

) position. The green power LED

Accessing Generator Service Tools - Q-VISION Operator Control Panel The following instructions apply to generators utilizing a Q-VISION operator control panel (OCP). 1. To gain access to the Generator Service programs, touch the Help button located on the lower right corner of the Q-VISION screen (shown on right). The Generator Help Services Screen (Figure D-1a) appears:

Figure D-1a. Generator Help Services Screen


Revision W

D-5


2. Touch the Login button at the lower left corner of the screen. A password entry keypad displays.

Figure D-1b. Enter Password Screen 3. In the Enter Password screen, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the keypad, then select Enter. The word "Login" is replaced with "FieldTech" on the Generator Help Services screen to indicate successful login. 4. On the Generator Help Services screen, select Service option. The General Service Options Menu appears:

Figure D-1c. General Service Options Menu

Revision W

D-6



5. Select Generator Service. The following screen appears:


Figure D-1d. Generator Service Options Menu 6. Proceed to SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CALIBRATION section. Accessing Generator Service Tools - Workstation-Based Operator Control Panel The following instructions apply to generators utilizing a workstation-based operator control panel (OCP) such as Quantum/Canon Integration (QG-DIGCXDI Integration System). 1. Right mouse click on the Generator Service Monitor icon "Q" (left), which is displayed in the MS Windows Task Bar located in the lower right side of the screen (see Figure D-1e).


Revision W

D-7


Figure D-1e. Sample Screen - Generator Service Monitor Icon ("Q") As shown above, right mouse clicking on the Service Monitor icon will present four service tool choices: •

Insight - Provides information regarding current Generator configuration settings.

•

Calibration - An interactive program that facilitates calibration of Generators compatible with Model QG-DIG-CXDI, Quantum/Canon Integration System.

•

Generator Configuration - Provides access to all Generator, Receptor, Ion Chamber, and X-ray Tube settings.

•

Service Configuration - Provides the Technician with access to the Service Configuration Menu for the purpose of identifying the IP Address of the Generator, and commanding the System to automatically upload all necessary identification data required by the interface software. Details regarding this feature are provided in Model QG-DIG-CXDI Integration System Service Manual DC30-094.

2. Select Generator Configuration.

Revision W

D-8



3. The "Enter Password" screen appears (see Figure D-2.).

Figure D-2. Enter Password Screen 4. In the Enter Password screen, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the keypad, then press Enter. This password enables access to the Generator Configuration program. 5. Upon validation of the password, the Load Configuration menu displays:

Figure D-3. Load Configuration Menu The Load Configuration menu offers two choices: •

Load From File - Opens a browser window to load a previously saved configuration file stored on the Workstation Computer (refer to Factory Reset description in this chapter for instructions on creating a configuration file of the generator).


Revision W

D-9


•

Load From Generator - Select to load the last automatically-saved generator configuration (Note: The configuration file is automatically backed up every time the Workstation Computer establishes a connection to the generator.) the currently active configuration (This option should be selected under normal circumstances; only when a problem occurs with the system should the Load From File option be selected).

6. Select Load From Generator. The Configuration Menu displays:

Figure D-4. Configuration Menu - Generator Settings Tab

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CALIBRATION The HF Series x-ray generator has been factory configured and calibrated. It is necessary, however, to perform the following procedures to verify system configuration and performance (calibration). Perform the procedures in the sequence presented, unless otherwise instructed. The Configuration Menu provides access to all of the generator’s configurable settings organized into seven functional groups, as represented by the following tabs: • Generator Settings - Includes generator power derating, Timeout (sleep), AEC Board Type, and AEC Backup mAs settings • Generator Calibrations - Dates and times when kVp, mA, Filament, and A-D Voltage calibrations were last performed • Tube Settings - Tube Type, Rotor Type, Tube Power Output Derating, and Tube Temperature (Heat Warning) alert settings

Revision W

D-10



• Physical Receptors - Defines number, type and identification of connected receptors (contains only factory-authorized settings, not field

configurable)

• Receptors - Enables the creation and identification of AEC calibration profiles associated with each physical receptor (e.g., wall or table) utilized in the system. • Ion Chambers - Defines ion chamber type associated with each of the physical receptors above, and includes relevant configuration settings for each (i.e., detector assignments, polarity, output, etc.) • Licensing - Provides Generator License validation and updating utilities (intended for use only under the direction of Quantum Technical Support) For proper operation of the generator, the settings must accurately reflect the actual configuration of the generator. Typically, these settings are made at the factory in accordance with customer sales order specifications. However, it is recommended that you review the current configuration settings for accuracy. The following paragraphs provide specific instructions for setting each of the available configuration selections.


Revision W

D-11


GENERATOR CONFIGURATION The Generator Configuration program is run first - to verify all settings are correct, followed by Calibration - to ensure optimal generator performance. To gain access to either of these utilities, password entry is required. This is to prevent unintended and/or unauthorized changes to system settings. Generator Settings Tab If not already done so, select the Generator Settings tab on the Configuration Menu. The Generator Settings, shown in Figure D-4, includes controls for setting the generator power output derating (presented as a percentage of total power output (kW)), sleep mode timer, AEC Board Type, and AEC Backup mAs settings. 1. DeratingPercentage - The derating function is used to limit the output of the system to a percentage of the maximum energy capacity. To derate the energy output, move the slide control adjacent to the DeratingPercentage field to the desired derating percentage (choices are 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% [i.e., no derating]). 2. Timeout: The "timeout" period selected represents the amount of delay time after which, if no user activity is detected, the system automatically enters Power Stand By mode. This mode is entered to help reduce power consumption while protecting system electronics. The timeout period is selectable in 30 minute increments between 0 minutes up to 180 minutes. If "Infinity" is selected, the generator will not timeout, however, the filament will turn off if one hour of inactivity. 3. AECBoardType: Displays the AEC Board type installed in the generator (when equipped with AEC option): a. Select "Standard" if generator is equipped with standard type AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S) b. Select "Universal" if generator is equipped with universal type AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) c.

Select "None" if generator is not equipped with optional AEC

4. AECBackUp Mas: Sets the current system-wide backup mAs setting effective on all AEC exposures. The maximum back up mAs setting is 600; note that on certain model generators, such as the Stored Energy models, the maximum mAs capability of the generator is less than 600 mAs. Therefore, the backup mAs setting should not exceed the maximum MAS output of the generator. Refer to Chapter 1, SPECIFICATIONS for a list of the mAs ratings by model number.

Revision W

D-12



Generator Calibrations Tab Selecting the Generator Calibrations tab on the Configuration Menu displays the following screen:

Figure D-5. Configuration Menu - Generator Calibration Tab This screen displays the dates and times when kVp, mA, Filament, and A-D Voltage calibrations were last performed. This screen is provided for informational purposes only; there are no settings required. Tube Settings Tab The Tube Settings Tab Screen, shown below, displays the current tube type (model) and rotor settings. Also provided are the Tube Derating (Tube%) and Heat Warning (Heat% Limit) settings. The tube model and rotor settings are preset at the factory and normally should not be changed, except after replacing the existing tube with a different type tube. (Note: Consult Quan-


Revision W

D-13


tum Service Department before attempting to re-configure the generator with a tube type that is different than the factory-configured tube type.)

Figure D-6. Configuration Menu - Tube Settings Tab 1. To change the tube model setting, touch or mouse click on the Tube field. A drop down list box will open. Scroll through the available tube types and select the desired model. 2. To change the tube rotor setting, touch or mouse click on the Rotor Type field. A drop down list box will open. Scroll through the available rotor drive settings: 50 Hz (no high speed starter), 60 Hz (no high speed starter), AID external high-speed starter (AID HSS), or Quantum internal high-speed starter (QMI HSS). Note: On systems equipped with high-speed starter option (HSS), tube "high-speed" mode will only be activated when selected exposure factors exceed the limits used for low-speed operation. 3. The Tube Derating setting provides derating of the tube’s maximum mAs output in percentages of 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% (i.e., no derating). For example, if at a particular kV and mA the tube normally allows a 10 mAs exposure, then at 80% derating, the tube would permit only an 8 mAs exposure. Derating the tube can extend the life of the tube. Move the slide control adjacent to the Derating field to choose a derating percentage. 4. The Heat Warning (heat%) provides a heat protection function for the xray tube. For example, setting the Heat Warning for 80% will cause the generator to produce an audible alarm and a visual "Heat Alarm" indication on the OCP when the tube has reached 80% of its total heat unit capacity. The total tube heat unit capacity is dependant upon the tube type. The Heat Warning setting has an adjustment range of anywhere

Revision W

D-14



between 50% up to 100% in 10% increments. Note: At 100% setting, the heat alarm is effectively disabled. Move the slide control adjacent to the Heat Warning field to select the percentage of the total tube heat capacity at which alarm activation will occur. Physical Receptors Tab The Physical Receptors Tab (see below) is used to configure the number, type and identification of connected receptors (contains only factory-authorized settings, not field configurable).

Figure D-7. Configuration Menu - Physical Receptors Tab


Revision W

D-15


Receptors Tab The generator has been pre-configured with six "logical" receptor selections designated "None", "Table", "Wall", "Wall72", "Wall2", and "Aux" to choose from as shown below (at left side of screen) in the Receptors Tab Screen.

RECEPTORS LIST

Figure D-8. Configuration Menu - Receptors Tab Logical receptors are created in order to store AEC calibration profiles, following execution of the AEC Calibration function. For example, when a portable receptor (e.g., Canon CXDI-50G) is used on a system equipped with AEC, the default "Wall" receptor might be renamed "50G" as shown in Figure D-8 above. Following this, AEC Calibration would need to be performed with Canon portable receptor inserted in the wall stand, which in this case, is the physical receptor as defined in the PhysicalReceptor field shown in the Configuration menu above. In another case, where a system is equipped with two fixed receptors, such as one in the wall stand and one in the table, there would need to be two logical receptors created (for example - "Canon Table" and "CanonWall"), and each would require independent AEC Calibrations be performed since each location would have its own ion chamber. The Configuration Menu - Receptors Tab displays the system default receptors and settings. The system default receptors shown in the list can be renamed and deleted, or new receptors added as necessary to suit your particular facility requirements. To change the default receptor settings, proceed as follows:

Revision W

D-16



1. In the receptors window, select a receptor in the list to modify. 2. To rename the receptor, select the Name field (touch the field or left mouse click on the three dots at the right end of field). A data entry keyboard will display. Using the keyboard, edit the receptor name as required, then press the Enter key. 3. The Group field setting identifies which of the four Receptor buttons on the operator control panel (Wall, None, Table, or Aux) will be linked with this particular receptor. To change the "Group" setting, touch or mouse click on the Group field. A drop down list box of the receptor buttons will open. Select the desired receptor button. (Note: The Aux button is

only functional on generators equipped with "Universal" type AEC.)

4. The PhysicalReceptor field setting identifies the receptor location where the ion chamber is physically located (Table, Wall, Wall2, or Aux). Wall and Wall2 are generally used for separate calibrations of 40 and 72 SID locations of a wall cassette holder. To change the "PhysicalReceptor" setting, touch or mouse click on the PhysicalReceptor field. A drop down list box containing the physical receptors will open. Select the desired receptor. (Note: The Aux and Wall2 receptors are only functional

on generators equipped with "Universal" type AEC.)

5. Aec Enabled Check box: Select "Aec Enabled" to enable AEC operation with this receptor. The only receptor not enabled for AEC is "None". 6. The Target Level, BaseCalibration and KvCalibration are display only fields. Target Level is this desired optical density value selected during AEC calibration; Base and kV calibration dates and times indicate the last time AEC calibration was performed. 7.

The Add, Delete and Duplicate buttons below the receptors window provide the ability to add new receptors and delete existing receptors from the list, and duplicate existing receptors for the purpose of creating copies for modification.


Revision W

D-17


Ion Chambers Tab The Ion Chambers Tab (see Figure D-9), displays available ion chambers interfaced to the HF Series X-ray generator, including configuration settings for each.

PRESS THESE BUTTONS TO CONFIGURE DETECTORS AS SHOWN BELOW

A 2

C 3

A 3

C 2

B 1

B 1

DEFAULT RIGHT LOAD DETECTOR ASSIGNMENTS

DEFAULT LEFT LOAD DETECTOR ASSIGNMENTS

Figure D-9. Configuration Menu - Ion Chambers Tab

Revision W

D-18



Note: On systems equipped with a "Standard" type AEC Board (AY40-031S), the "Wall2" and "Aux" selections are not used. These choices are only effective if the generator is configured with "Universal" type AEC Board (AY40-027S). Be sure that the selected ion chamber is properly interfaced to AEC Board A11 as described in Chapter 2, ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION. Initially, the Ion Chambers Tab screen will include system default ion chambers and settings as shown in Figure D-9. The only field configurable parameters are the assignment of ion chamber detectors (detector 1, 2, and 3) with respect to the generator’s ion chamber detector select signals (i.e., FIELD SELECT 1, FIELD SELECT 2 and FIELD SELECT 3) generated by AEC Control Board A11. For example, assigning "2" to Field "A" enables detector "A" when the UPPER LEFT chamber detector field is selected at the Operator Control Panel. The Ion Chamber Settings Screen also provides factory-configurable settings that facilitate proper compatibility of the generator with specific types of ion chambers. These settings include Ion Chamber Type (Slope/Level), Polarity (+/-), Output (Normal/Inverted), and Relay On/Off settings. Consult Quantum Technical Support for instructions on re-configuring these settings. To change the default ion chamber detector settings, proceed as follows: 7.

In the ion chambers window, select an ion chamber in the list to modify.

8. Press the ion chamber detector (Field 1, Field 2 or Field 3) and choose the desired detector setting (1, 2, 3 or Off). IMPORTANT: The AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 ion chamber, which is the default chamber type shipped with standard AEC type generators, requires that detector "A" = 2, "B" = 1, and "C" = 3. The factory default orientation of the ion chamber mounting in the bucky is with the front side toward the tube. However, it may be necessary to mount the chamber with the back side forward (e.g., for left side loading wall stands). In this case, in the Ion Chamber Settings screen, simply switch assignment of chamber detector "A" to 3 and detector "C" to 2. No wiring modifications are necessary.


Revision W

D-19


Licensing Tab The Licensing Tab Screen (see below) is used to validate and add new licenses associated with the generator. These operations should only be performed under the direction of Quantum’s Technical Support staff.

Figure D-10. Configuration Menu - Licensing Tab

Revision W

D-20



GENERATOR CALIBRATION CAUTION! Before calibrating unit, perform warm-up procedures recommended by tube manufacturer or the warm-up procedure described in Chapter 3 of the Operator’s Manual. WARNING! The following calibration procedures involve taking x-ray exposures. All personnel should be behind protective barriers during exposure. X-rays can be dangerous unless proper precautions and procedures are adhered to. The generator was pre-calibrated at the factory, however, the system will need to be re-calibrated to assure proper operation, verify compliance and set AEC optical density (on systems equipped with AEC option). Prior to performing Generator Calibration, the Generator Configuration program must be run first as described in the preceding paragraphs. To gain access to the Generator Calibration utility, password entry is required. This is to prevent unintended and/or unauthorized changes to system settings. 1. Right mouse click on the Generator Service Monitor icon "Q" located in the lower right side of the screen. 2. Select Generator Configuration.


Revision W

D-21


3. The "Enter Password" screen appears (see Figure D-11.).

Figure D-11. Enter Password Screen 4. In the Enter Password screen, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the keypad, then press Enter. This password enables access to the Generator Calibration program. 4. Upon validation of the password, the Load Configuration menu displays:

Figure D-12. Load Configuration Menu The Load Configuration menu offers two choices: •

Revision W

D-22

Load From File - Opens a browser window to load a previously saved configuration file stored on the Workstation Computer (refer to Factory Reset description in this chapter for instructions on creating a configuration file of the generator).



•

Load From Generator - Select to load the last automatically-saved generator configuration (Note: The configuration file is automatically backed up every time the Workstation Computer establishes a connection to the generator.) the currently active configuration (This option should be selected under normal circumstances; only when a problem occurs with the system should the Load From File option be selected).

5. Select Load From Generator. The Calibration Wizard - Overview tab displays:

CHECKED = DONE UNCHECKED = NOT DONE

CALIBRATION SELECTION PANE CHECK MARK = PERFORM NO CHECK MARK = DO NOT PERFORM

Figure D-13. Calibration Wizard - Overview Tab The Calibration Wizard provides a sequence of dialog boxes that leads the calibrator through a series of generator calibration steps, performed in a specific sequence. This wizard may be helpful especially to those who may be unfamiliar with this equipment. The "Calibration Selection" pane, shown in the sample screen above, identifies the calibration procedures to be performed as indicated by a check mark next to each procedure. The check mark is an active field; removing a check mark will eliminate that procedure from the performance sequence, adding a check mark includes it.


Revision W

D-23


The Calibration Wizard is organized into six groups, as represented by the following tabs: • Overview - Provides brief description of calibration Wizard and includes an activate/deactivate function to determine which generator calibrations to perform • A/D - Accesses the analog-to-digital (A-D) converters calibration function • kVp - Accesses KV calibration function • Filament Offset - Accesses tube filament offset calibration function • mA - Accesses mA calibration function • AEC - Accesses the AEC optical density and AEC kVp calibration functions (active on systems equipped with AEC option only). Note that all of the AEC Calibrations must be performed for each table and/or film/screen combination used with the x-ray system. Selection of each film/screen type used with the system is explained in "CONFIGURATION SETTINGS" paragraph described previously in this chapter. The paragraphs that follow describe the procedures for performing each of the above calibration functions. These procedures should be performed in the order presented. Note that any of the six calibration procedures may be directly accessed and performed by simply selecting the corresponding tab in the Calibration Wizard - Overview screen. A/D Tab The A/D (analog/digital converter) calibration utility is used to calibrate various essential supply voltages utilized by the x-ray generator against a pre-calibrated NIST-traceable voltage measurement instrument (such as a DMM). After A/D calibration has been performed, the generator continuously monitors the critical internal voltages, and will not allow an exposure if certain tolerances are exceeded. Table 3-3 shows the various voltage levels (with tolerances) that can be calibrated using this utility, and it provides the location of the test point at which a calibrated voltmeter must be connected for measuring the actual voltage level: Table D-1. A/D Calibration Voltages Voltage Level



Cathode

±8 VDC


Anode

±8 VDC


+5VDC

±0.1 VDC

Revision W

D-24




Table D-1. A/D Calibration Voltages Voltage Level


+15VDC

±0.2 VDC


-15VDC

±0.2 VDC


+24VDC

±0.3 VDC


Unreg. +24V (Brake)

±0.3 VDC



WARNING! The following procedure requires that power be applied to the generator. Extreme care must be exercised to ensure the safety of service or other personnel in the area. The following procedure calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of the above operating voltages. The same procedure applies to any of the voltage levels available for selection. Voltage measurement accuracy is verified using your pre-calibrated voltmeter (traceable to NIST standard) as a benchmark. Once calibrated, the generator’s CPU continuously monitors these internal voltages and will terminate or not allow exposure if specified tolerances are exceeded. Proceed as follows:


Revision W

D-25


1. In the Calibration Wizard - Overview tab, select the A/D tab (see Figure D-14). The AD Calibration Menu appears:

VOLTAGE SELECTION TABS SHADING INDICATES: BRIGHT = CURRENT SELECTION MEDIUM = NOT YET DONE DARK = DONE

Figure D-14. Calibration Wizard - A/D Calibration Tab 2. Factory Reset check box - when selected, will reset all A/D Calibration values to factory default settings. This normally should not be selected; it should only be selected when calibration values are extraordinarily outof-range (usually signifying a hardware or software abnormality).

Revision W

D-26



3. Select Next to proceed with the first voltage calibration, or you may select a particular voltage level to calibrate by touching its corresponding tab (choices are Cathode, Anode, +5 VDC, +15 VDC, -15 VDC, +24 VDC (Regulated), and Brake (unregulated +24 VDC). For this example, "Cathode" is selected, as shown below.

ENTER VOLTAGE READING FROM METER

Figure D-15. Sample A/D Voltage Calibration Screen (400V Cathode is shown) 4. Refer to Table D-1 and connect a voltmeter to the test point corresponding with the voltage level selected for calibration. 5. On the voltmeter, observe the measured voltage value. Enter the actual (measured) value by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundredths decimal place. Press Calibrate button. 6. Ideally, the value appearing in the 400V Cathode Calibration Screen (Step 1.) will match the reading on the voltmeter within its allowable tolerance. If so, press the Confirm button. The Calibration value is saved and the system advances to the next uncalibrated A/D voltage. If not the same, press Repeat and re-enter the measured voltage value.


Revision W

D-27


7.

Repeat above steps for each of the other A/D voltage levels. Following the last A/D Calibration, the system advances to the Calibration Wizard kVp Calibration tab.

kVp Calibration Tab The KV Calibration procedure calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of peak tube potential (kVp). The generator’s ability to measure peak tube potential accurately is verified using a pre-calibrated kVp meter (Dynalyzer or equivalent) as a benchmark. Proceed as follows: 1. If not already done so, access the Calibration Wizard - kVp Calibration tab (see Figure D-16).

Figure D-16. Calibration Wizard - kVp Calibration Tab WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure that system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 2. Factory Reset check box - when selected, will reset kVp Calibration values to factory default settings. This normally should not be selected; it should only be selected when calibration values are extraordinarily out-ofrange (usually signifying a hardware or software abnormality).

Revision W

D-28



3. Select Next to proceed with the first (50) kVp calibration, or you may select a particular kVp Calibration to perform by selecting its corresponding tab (choices are 50 kVp and 100 kVp). For this example, "50 kVp" is selected, as shown below:

ENTER KVP READING FROM METER EXPOSURE SETTINGS

Figure D-17. Sample kVp Calibration Screen (50 kVp is shown) 4. Connect a kVp bleeder tank in series between X-ray tube and the generator’s H.V. Transformer (A17), or use a non-invasive kVp meter. 5. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the 50kVp Calibration Screen (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, 100 msec). 6. On the kVp meter, observe the measured kVp value. Enter the actual (measured) value by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundredths decimal place. Press Calibrate button. 7.

Ideally, the value appearing in the 50 kVp Calibration Screen (Step 1.) will match the reading on the kVp meter within allowable tolerance. If so, press the Confirm button. The calibration value is saved and the system advances to the 100 kVp Calibration setting.


Revision W

D-29


8. If not within tolerance, press Repeat button, re-take the exposure at same settings and adjust kVp value as necessary. Repeat this step until indicated and measured kVp values agree to within tolerance. Press the Confirm button to proceed to next calibration. 9. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the 100kVp Calibration Screen (i.e., 100 kVp, 200L mA, 100 msec). 10. On the kVp meter, observe the measured kVp value. Enter the actual (measured) value by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundredths decimal place. Press Calibrate button. 11. Ideally, the value appearing in the 100 kVp Calibration Screen (Step 1.) will match the reading on the kVp meter within its allowable tolerance. If so, press the Confirm button. The calibration value is saved and the system advances to the next calibration procedure. 12. If not the same, press Repeat to re-take exposure and re-enter the measured kVp value. 13. Repeat kVp calibration for 100 kVp until indicated and measured kVp values agree to within tolerance. Press Confirm to save calibration value and to advance to next calibration procedure.

Revision W

D-30



Filament Offset Calibration This procedure establishes the filament current offset and gain corrections. Filament current measurement accuracy is verified using a pre-calibrated Dynalyzer (or equivalent), non-invasive kV meter, or mAs meter as a benchmark. Ensure precision of the measurement instrument is sufficient enough to assure generator accuracy requirements can be met. The Filament Offset Calibration procedure may be performed using an oscilloscope, however, it is not the preferred method. Using this method, the objective is to achieve the "flattest" possible large and small filament waveforms, with no spikes or peaks as shown in Figure D-18 below.


After



After


Figure D-18. Filament Offset Current Measurement (Using an Oscilloscope) Additionally, an "Advanced Filament Calibration" wizard is provided in the Calibration Wizard program as a supplement to the standard Filament Offset Calibration. Advanced Filament Calibration is used to correct for slight


Revision W

D-31


inconsistencies at specific techniques due to variations in tubes, cables, and other factors. A technique is defined as a specific combination of kVp, mA, and filament size. Advanced Filament Calibration is not required to achieve satisfactory generator performance. It should only be performed on techniques where mA accuracy improvement is required, or where mA waveform optimization is desired. This tool is discussed immediately following the standard Filament Offset calibration procedure. Access the Filament Calibration Menu (shown below) and proceed as follows:

Figure D-19. Calibration Wizard - Filament Offset Intro 1 Tab WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 1. Factory Reset check box - when selected, will reset Filament Offset Calibration values to factory default settings. This normally should not be selected; it should only be selected when calibration values are extraordinarily out-of-range (usually signifying a hardware or software abnormality).

Revision W

D-32



2. Select Next to proceed to Filament Offset Calibration Intro 2 screen, or you may select a particular Filament Offset Calibration to perform by selecting its corresponding tab (choices are Small and Large). For this example, "Small" is selected, as shown below:

EXPOSURE SETTINGS

ENTER PREHEAT ADJUSTMENT VALUE (BETWEEN -2.00 AND +2.00)

Figure D-20. Sample Filament Offset Calibration Screen (Small is shown) 3. If using an oscilloscope, select Scope radio button (Step 1.) on the Small Filament Offset calibration screen. Connect the scope leads between test point TP7 on KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S) and ground. Set scope for 1.0 volt/division, and 50 ms/division time base. This will give a 100 mA/volt equivalent for mA measurement as shown in the sample waveforms in Figure B-20. 4. If using a mAs meter, select Mas Meter radio button (Step 1.) on the Small Filament Offset calibration screen. Remove two (2) green/yellow wires marked "MAS METER", connected to A17P1-9 and A17P1-10, from


Revision W

D-33


the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure D-21). Connect the mAs meter in series between removed wires. (Important: These wires must be re-connected when finished calibration.)

MAS METER CONNECTION


MAS METER

GROUND STUD

MAS METER LEADS





Figure D-21. MAS Meter Connection 5. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the Small Filament Offset Calibration Screen (i.e., 70 kVp, 75s mA, 15 msec). If using an oscilloscope, set time to 125 msec.

Revision W

D-34



6. If using an oscilloscope, observe the small filament current pulse waveform for "flatness" (see Figure D-18). If using a mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. Ideally, the mA value appearing in the Small Filament Calibration Screen (Step 1.) will match the reading on the mAs meter within allowable tolerance. 7.

Press the Calibrate button.

8. If waveform is acceptable or if mA reading is within tolerance, press the Confirm button. The calibration value is saved and the system advances to the Large Filament Offset Calibration setting. 9. If mA is not within tolerance or if waveform is not flat, press the Repeat button. 10. Increase or decrease the preheat value displayed on the Small Filament Calibration screen (Step 2.) by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundredths decimal place. The preheat value adjustment range is from +2.00 down to -2.00, with 0.00 equating to no offset applied to the tube’s default filament curve. To increase mA, raise the filament offset value; to decrease mA, lower the filament offset value. Note: An error message appears if the filament current is set too low, which indicates the filament offset value for the filament being calibrated is set too low or high. If this occurs, increase or decrease the filament current. 11. Re-take the exposure at same settings and adjust preheat value as necessary. Repeat this step until measured mA is within tolerance, or if using an oscilloscope, when waveform is sufficiently flat. Press the Confirm button to proceed to Large Filament Offset Calibration.


Revision W

D-35


12. The Large Filament Offset Calibration screen is displayed:

EXPOSURE SETTINGS

ENTER PREHEAT ADJUSTMENT VALUE (BETWEEN -2.00 AND +2.00)

Figure D-22. Sample Filament Offset Calibration Screen (Large is shown) 13. If using an oscilloscope, select Scope radio button (Step 1.); if using a mAs meter, select Mas Meter. 14. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the Filament Calibration Screen (i.e., 70 kVp, 300L mA (250 mA if Model QG-200-SE generator), 15 msec). If using an oscilloscope, set time to 125 msec. 15. If using an oscilloscope, observe the large filament current pulse waveform for "flatness" (see Figure D-18). If using a mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. Ideally, the mA value appearing in the Large Filament Calibration Screen (Step 1.) will match the reading on the mAs meter within allowable tolerance. 16. Press the Calibrate button. 17. If waveform is acceptable or if mA reading is within tolerance, press the Confirm button. The calibration value is saved and the system advances to the next calibration procedure.

Revision W

D-36



18. If mA is not within tolerance or if waveform is not flat, press the Repeat button. 19. Increase or decrease the preheat value displayed on the Large Filament Calibration screen (Step 2.) by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundredths decimal place. The preheat value adjustment range is from +2.00 down to -2.00, with 0.00 equating to no offset applied to the tube’s default filament curve. To increase mA, raise the filament offset value; to decrease mA, lower the filament offset value. 20. Re-take the exposure at same settings and adjust preheat value as necessary. Repeat this step until measured mA is within tolerance, or if using an oscilloscope, when waveform is sufficiently flat. Press the Confirm button to proceed to next calibration procedure.


Revision W

D-37


Advanced Filament Calibration Wizard The "Advanced Filament Calibration" wizard is provided to improve system accuracy at a selectable technique (i.e., kVp, mA and filament size). Note that Advanced Filament Calibration is not required in order to achieve satisfactory generator performance. It should only be performed on techniques where mA accuracy or filament offset waveform optimization is desired. To access the Advanced Filament Calibration wizard, proceed as follows: 1. From the Calibration Wizard screen, select Tools>Advanced>Filament. The Calibration Wizard - Advanced Filament Calibration Wizard Intro 1 Tab is displayed:

Figure D-23. Calibration Wizard - Advanced Filament Calibration Wizard Intro 1 Tab 2. Factory Reset check box - When selected, will reset Filament Offset Calibration values to factory default settings. This normally should not be selected; it should only be selected when calibration values are extraordinarily out-of-range (usually signifying a hardware or software abnormality).

Revision W

D-38



3. Select Next to proceed to Advanced Filament Calibration Intro 2 Tab. Per the instructions provided on this screen, connect a Digital Oscilloscope (Tektronix Model TDS2024 or equivalent) to test points TP1 (channel 1), TP7 (channel 2), and TP4 (grounds) on KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S) located on the generator PCB Door. Adjust the Oscilloscope settings according to the screen instructions. 4. Select Next to proceed to Advanced Filament Calibration Intro 3 (Waveforms) Tab. The sample filament offset waveforms illustrate three scenarios; filament offset adjusted too high, filament offset adjusted too low, and correct filament offset adjustment. Keep these in mind as you proceed through the Advanced Filament Calibration process. 5. Select Next to proceed to Adjustment Point Selection Tab:

Figure D-24. Advanced Filament Calibration - Adjustment Point Selection Tab 6. If using an oscilloscope, select Scope radio button (Step 1.); if using a mAs meter, select Mas Meter.


Revision W

D-39


7. Set the kVp and mA techniques to the desired values using the up/ down arrow buttons, then press the Proceed button. The Filament Point Adjustment Tab displays:

Figure D-25. Advanced Filament Calibration - Filament Point Adjustment Tab 8. Take an exposure. 9. Press the Calibrate button. 10. Observe the filament offset waveform captured on the oscilloscope. It should look similar to waveforms shown on the Advanced Filament Calibration Intro 3 (Waveforms) Tab. 11. If the waveform is correct, either press the Next Point button to select another technique to calibrate, or press the Complete button to exit Advanced Filament Calibration. 12. If the waveform is not correct (i.e., Too High or Too Low as shown on Advanced Filament Calibration Intro 3 (Waveforms) Tab), the filament preheat value must be adjusted using the slider control shown in Step 1 of the Filament Point Adjustment screen (see Figure D-25). If waveform is Too Low, increase the filament preheat value by mov-

Revision W

D-40



ing slider to the right; if waveform is Too High, decrease the filament preheat value by moving slider to the left. Note: Only a small amount of adjustment may be necessary, make all adjustments in small increments at a time. 13. Press the Repeat button. 14. Re-take the exposure and adjust preheat value if necessary. Repeat this step until mA preheat is optimized. Press Complete button when finished. Confirm optimization using a secondary calibrated mA measurement instrument such as Dynalyzer or mAs meter. MA Calibration Tab This procedure calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of tube current (mA). Current measurement accuracy is verified using a pre-calibrated mAs meter (Dynalyzer or equivalent) as a benchmark. Ensure precision of the measurement instrument is sufficient enough to assure generator accuracy requirements can be met. An oscilloscope may be used for mA measurement, however, it likely will not be precise enough to assure generator mA accuracy. To use an oscilloscope for mA measurement, connect scope leads between test point TP7 on KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S1) and ground. Set scope for 1.0 volt/division, and 50 ms/division time base. This will give a 100 mA/volt equivalent for mA measurement (see Figure D-26 for sample mA measurements using scope).

Figure D-26. MA Measurement Using an Oscilloscope


Revision W

D-41


1. Access the mA Calibration Menu (shown below) and proceed as follows:

Figure D-27. Calibration Wizard - mA Calibration Intro 1 Tab WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure that system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 2. Factory Reset check box - when selected, will reset mA Calibration values to factory default settings. This normally should not be selected; it should only be selected when calibration values are extraordinarily out-ofrange (usually signifying a hardware or software abnormality).

Revision W

D-42



3. Select Next to proceed to mA Calibration Intro 2 screen, or you may select a particular mA Calibration to perform by selecting its corresponding tab (choices are Low mA and High mA). For this example, "Low mA" is selected, as shown below:

ENTER MA READING FROM METER

Figure D-28. Sample mA Calibration Screen (Low mA is shown) 4. If not already done so, a kVp bleeder tank should be connected in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. This connection is made by removing the two green/yellow wires connecting A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure D-21) and connecting the removed wires to the mAs meter. (Note: The MAS meter should remain connected throughout calibration. These wires must be re-connected when finished calibration.) 5. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the Low mA Calibration Screen (i.e., 60 kVp, 75s mA, 100 msec).


Revision W

D-43


6. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. Enter the actual (measured) value into the mA field on the Low mA Calibration screen by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundredths decimal place. Press Calibrate button. 7.

Ideally, the value appearing in the Low mA Calibration Screen (Step 1.) will match the reading on the mAs meter within allowable tolerance. If so, press the Confirm button. The calibration value is saved and the system advances to the High mA Calibration setting.

8. If mA is not within tolerance, press Repeat button, re-take the exposure at same settings and re-enter the measured mA value. Repeat this step until indicated and measured mA values agree to within tolerance. Press the Confirm button to proceed to High mA Calibration. 9. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the High mA Calibration Screen (i.e., 60 kVp, 400L mA (250 mA if Model QG-200-SE generator), 100 msec). 10. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. Enter the actual (measured) value into the mA field on the High mA Calibration screen by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundredths decimal place. Press Calibrate button. 11. Ideally, the value appearing in the High mA Calibration Screen (Step 1.) will match the reading on the mAs meter within its allowable tolerance. If so, press the Confirm button. The calibration value is saved and the system advances to the next calibration procedure. 12. If mA is not within tolerance, press Repeat button, re-take the exposure at same settings and re-enter the measured mA value. Repeat this step until indicated and measured mA values agree to within tolerance. Press Confirm to save calibration value and to advance to next calibration procedure. Note: The Power Supply Board’s +48 VDC output may require adjusting (at potentiometer A6R17) up to +55 VDC (max.) in cases where long-length high tension cables are used and/or a heavy duty x-ray tube is installed. This can be determined by measuring the mA output (using a Dynalyzer or mAs meter) of an exposure taken at 40 to 50 kVp and the highest mA station available. The mA measured should be the same as the indicated mA (within tolerance). If mA output is low, increase the +48 VDC voltage output as required, but do not exceed +55 VDC. CAUTION! If using a mAs meter, re-connect the green/ yellow wire marked "MAS METER" to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure D-21).

Revision W

D-44



AEC CALIBRATION CAUTION! Before calibrating unit, perform warmup procedures recommended by tube manufacturer or the warm-up procedure described in Chapter 3 of the Operator’s Manual. IMPORTANT! Before performing each AEC calibration procedure, verify the correct Film/Screen is displayed on the calibration screen (shown in top left field). Note: In most DR or CR Film Plate systems, the entire imaging area of the digital receptor or CR Film Plate must be covered with acrylic in order to obtain accurate "S" or "REX" values used for the procedures that follow. Refer to the calibration instructions provided with digital or CR system for specific "S" or "REX" values required for AEC calibration. The following procedures must be performed to ensure successful AEC calibration of the HF Series X-ray generator when configured as part of the QG-DIG-CXDI Integration System (i.e., integration to Canon Digital Radiography (DR) System). Table D-2 shows a summarized presentation of the AEC calibration procedure. An AEC calibration Worksheet is provided in Table D-3 for recording calibration data. Table D-2. DR System AEC Calibration Procedure Sequence FILM/SCREENS TO BE CALIBRATED


WALL72 RECEPTOR/ FILM SCREEN

1. Perform "Ion Chamber Balancing" procedure. 2. Perform "AEC MAS Balance" procedure for wall stand ion chamber. 3. Perform "Base Optical Density (OD) Calibration": a. Set desired optical density b. Set "Offset" to 1200. c. Adjust ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until base density is achieved in acquired images. 4. Perform "AEC kVp Calibration".

WALL RECEPTOR/FILM SCREEN

1. Perform "Base Optical Density (OD) Calibration", however, DO NOT re-adjust the ion chamber MASTER GAIN potentiometer. Adjust "Offset" to obtain desired (set) density. 3. Perform "AEC kVp Calibration". 1. Copy "Wall72" Receptor/ Film Screen to "Wall".


Revision W

D-45


Table D-2. DR System AEC Calibration Procedure Sequence

Revision W

D-46



TABLE RECEPTOR/FILM SCREEN

1. Perform "Ion Chamber Balancing" procedure for table ion chamber. 2. Perform "Base Optical Density (OD) Calibration": a. Set desired optical density b. Set "Offset" to 1200. c. Adjust ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until base density is achieved in acquired images. 4. Perform "AEC kVp Calibration".



Table D-3. AEC Calibration Worksheet Film/Screen Combination:

Table 40

Wall 40

Wall 72

BASE OD CALIBRATION Setting:

50 kVp, 200L mA, 5 cm

Optical Density: Offset AEC kVp CALIBRATION Setting:



Step 2 - 60 kVp, 200L mA, 10 cm


Step 3 - 80 kVp, 200L mA, 15 cm


Step 4 - 100 kVp, 200L mA, 20 cm


Step 5 - 110 kVp, 200L mA, 25 cm


Step 6 - 120 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm


*Step 7 - 130 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm


*Step 8 - 140 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm

Optical Density: * Only required on 150 kVp systems Ion Chamber Balancing (Three-field Chambers) On systems using a three-field ion chamber, the chamber detectors must be balanced prior to performing AEC calibration (refer to the ion chamber manufacturer’s instruction manual). When balanced, the mAs will be approximately the same (±5%) for exposures taken using any of the three chambers, or with two or more chambers selected simultaneously. This procedure must be performed on each ion chamber used in the system (for example, both table and wall ion chambers when equipped with two). Before proceeding, check that the ion chamber detectors have been correctly configured so when the chamber select buttons on the operator control panel are pressed, the appropriate ion chamber detector is enabled. If not, refer to


Revision W

D-47


"Ion Chamber Tab" configuration procedure described previously in this appendix and re-configure. Proceed as follows: 1. If not already done so, a kVp bleeder tank should be connected in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. 2. Access Generator Settings Screen (see Figure D-4). Make a note of the Backup MAS setting, then change the Backup MAS to "40". 3. Press the Manual/AEC Mode button on the operator control panel and select AEC mode. 4. Using a lead sheet, cover the UPPER RIGHT and CENTER ion chamber detectors. 5. Place 20 CM acrylic over UPPER LEFT ion chamber detector. 6. Set operator control panel for 100 KV, 200L MA, select the UPPER LEFT ion chamber detector and take an exposure. Note the measured mAs reading. 7.

Revision W

D-48

Repeat above steps with the CENTER ion chamber detector selected and UPPER LEFT and UPPER RIGHT detectors covered with lead. The measured mAs reading should be within 5% of the mAs reading noted in the previous step. If not, adjust the CENTER detector gain potentiometer located on the ion chamber amplifier (refer to ion chamber manufacturer’s documentation for details), then re-take exposure and verify it is within tolerance. Repeat as necessary.



Note: If the system is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "level" type (i.e., Siemens), adjust the appropriate detector gain potentiometer on AY40-027S in accordance with the table below: Table D-4. Universal AEC Board A11 Detector Gain Adjustment Potentiometers (Siemens Ion Chamber Only) ION CHAMBER

DETECTOR


TABLE

1

R61

TABLE

2

R63

TABLE

3

R66

WALL#1

1

R54

WALL#1

2

R55

WALL#1

3

R56

WALL#2

1

R53

WALL#2

2

R58

WALL#2

3

R57

8. Repeat above steps with UPPER RIGHT ion chamber detector selected and UPPER LEFT and UPPER CENTER detectors covered with lead. The measured mAs reading should be within 5% of the mAs reading noted in the previous step. If not, adjust the UPPER RIGHT detector gain potentiometer, re-take exposure and verify it is within tolerance. Repeat as necessary. 9. Access the Generator Settings Screen and reset Backup MAS to original setting noted previously.


Revision W

D-49


AEC MAS Balance Verification The generator AEC mAs balance was pre-calibrated at the factory. However, verification of AEC mAs balance assures AEC calibration accuracy. When balanced, the mAs at the specified exposures will be approximately the same (±6%). This procedure only needs to be performed once prior to AEC calibration of the film/screen combination(s) used with the system. Proceed as follows: 1. If not already done so, connect a kVp bleeder tank in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. This connection is made by removing the two green/ yellow wires connecting A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure D-21) and connecting the removed wires to the mAs meter. (Note: These wires must be re-connected when finished calibration.) 2. Place 20 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam. (Where practical, adjust acrylic thickness to obtain approximately 100 millisecond exposures.) 3. If calibrating a" level" type ion chamber, ensure all three ion chamber detectors are selected. 4. Press the Manual/AEC Mode button on the operator control panel and select enter AEC mode. 5. Set the operator control panel for 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber - requires AY40-027S AEC board), 75S mA and take an exposure. 6. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, note the measured mAs value. 7.

Set the operator control panel for 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber - requires AY40-027S AEC board) and the highest available mA station. Take an exposure.

8. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, note the measured mAs value. 9. The mAs values noted must be within ±5%. If not, adjustment of the dV/dt potentiometer on AEC Board A11 is necessary: •

Revision W

D-50

If the generator is equipped with "standard" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-031S), adjust potentiometer A11R12 to increase or decrease the mAs value.



•

If the generator is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "level" type (i.e., Siemens), adjust potentiometer A11R82 to increase or decrease the mAs value.

•

If the generator is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "slope" type (i.e., AID), adjust potentiometer A11R87 to increase or decrease the mAs value.

10. Re-take exposure at the above settings. Repeat until the two measured values are within range. 11. Take an exposure at 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber), 75S mA, 10 cm. Verify mAs value is within ±5% of previous measurements. 12. Take an exposure at 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber), a mid-range mA value, 10 cm. Verify mAs value is within ±5% of previous measurements. CAUTION! If using a mAs meter, re-connect the green/yellow wire marked "MAS METER" to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure D-21).


Revision W

D-51


The AEC Calibration Tab WARNING! The following calibration procedures involve taking x-ray exposures. All personnel should be behind the protective barriers. X-rays can be dangerous unless proper precautions and procedures are adhered to. Access the AEC Calibration menu (shown below) and proceed as follows:

Figure D-29. Calibration Wizard - AEC Calibration Intro 1 Tab The AEC Calibration menu provides access to the system's various AEC calibration functions, briefly described as follows:

Revision W

D-52

•

Receptor - Provides for selection of a Receptor/Film Screen for AEC calibration

•

Optical Density - Calibrates the currently selected Receptor/Film Screen and ion chamber combination to a user-selectable, base optical density (gray level) setting. This target level, referred to as the "Base OD setting", determines the basic "gray-level" quality of images acquired in AEC mode



•

KV - Calibrates the tube voltage settings used in conjunction with a particular Receptor/Film Screen and ion chamber combination

•

Copy - The Copy Receptor Calibration utility enables stored AEC calibration data (kV curves, AEC offset data) to be copied from a calibrated receptor/film screen to another receptor/film screen in order to reduce overall calibration time. IMPORTANT! When calibrating AEC using a wall stand mounted receptor, ensure that the x-ray beam is perpendicular to image receptor and that the correct ion chamber detector(s) is selected.

Proceed as follows: 1. Factory Reset check box - when selected, will reset AEC Calibration values to factory default settings. This normally should not be selected; it should only be selected when calibration values are extraordinarily outof-range (usually signifying a hardware or software abnormality).


Revision W

D-53


2. Select Next to proceed to AEC Calibration Intro 2 screen, or you may select a particular AEC Calibration to perform by selecting its corresponding tab (choices are Receptor, OD, kVp Intro and kVp calibration steps 1 through 8, and Copy). For this example, "Receptor" is selected, as shown below:

Figure D-30. Calibration Wizard - AEC Calibration Intro 1 Tab Note: Each physical receptor used with the generator is configurable for use with a particular Receptor/Film Screen using the Receptors Configuration utility described previously in the Configuration section of this appendix (see Figure D-8). 3. Select a Receptor/Film Screen to calibrate (touch or click on the down arrow at the right end of receptor field to display additional choices). For this example, "Wall72" is selected. Press Next button.

Revision W

D-54



4. The Calibration Wizard - Base Optical Density (OD) Calibration screen appears:

Figure D-31. Calibration Wizard - Base OD Tab


Revision W

D-55


Base OD Calibration Procedure Note: When calibrating the first Receptor/Film Screen, set the "Offset" value to 1200, and adjust the MASTER GAIN potentiometer on the ion chamber until the desired target density is obtained. Note: If the system is equipped with "standard type" AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S), the "Table Gain Adj. Potentiometer" is A11R22 and the "Wall Gain Adj. Potentiometer" is A11R23. If the system is equipped with "Universal type" AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S), the "Table Gain Adj. Potentiometer" is A11R77 and the "Wall Gain Adj. Potentiometer" is A11R79. If the selected film/screen combination is the first one to be calibrated with the system, perform the following steps: 1. Set the ion chamber detector selection to middle detector and ensure xray tube is at correct SID. Ensure the ion chamber has been balanced. 2. Set the Optical Density to the desired target level (e.g., "650.00" as shown in Figure D-31). To do so, set the OD range (located directly below "Optical Density" field) for 10-1000. Enter the Optical Density value by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundreths decimal place. Do not change the Target Level setting at

any time during this procedure.

3. Set the Offset value displayed on the Base OD Calibration screen (Step 2.) to "1200" by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The Offset value adjustment range is from 500 to 4000.

NOTE


4. Place 5 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam completely covering the ion chamber detectors. 5. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the Base OD Calibration Screen (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, normal density). 6. On film systems, develop the film and then measure its optical density. On CR or DR systems, observe the density level displayed on the integrated system’s workstation computer. 7.

Press the Calibrate button.

8. If the density value is within acceptable range of the Target Level (on CR or DR systems, refer to manufacturer’s specifications), press the Confirm button to save the setting and proceed to AEC kVp Calibration.

Revision W

D-56



9. If not within range, press Repeat button and perform the following adjustments: a. Adjust Table Gain Adj. potentiometer (if calibrating the table receptor) or Wall Gain Adj. potentiometer (if calibrating the wall receptor), and re-take exposure. Continue until the measured density value equals the Target Level setting to within DR System manufacturer’s specification. b. If you still cannot achieve the Target Level setting, set Table Gain Adj. potentiometer (if calibrating the table receptor) or Wall Gain Adj. potentiometer (if calibrating the wall receptor) to mid-range, then adjust the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until roughly the desired density is obtained. Further fine-tuning can then be achieved by adjusting the Table or Wall Gain Adj. potentiometer as described in the previous step. c.

If the measured density value still does not equal the Target Level setting even with the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer set to maximum gain position, increase gain of each chamber detector and perform the "AEC MAS Balance Verification" procedure. Repeat Base OD calibration.

d. If the measured density value still does not equal the Target Level setting after adjusting the MASTER GAIN and gain of individual detectors, reduce the Offset value until the desired density value is obtained. If the selected Receptor/Film Screen is not the first one to be calibrated with the system, perform the following steps: 1. Set the "Target Level" to the desired level (e.g., "650.00" as shown in Figure D-31). To do so, set the OD range (located directly below "Optical Density" field) for 10-1000. Enter the Optical Density value by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundreths decimal place. Do not change the Target Level setting at any time during this

procedure.

2. Place 5 CM of acrylic in the X-ray beam completely covering the ion chamber detectors. 3. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the Base OD Calibration Screen (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, normal density). 4. On film systems, develop the film and then measure its optical density. On CR or DR systems, observe the density level displayed on the integrated system’s workstation computer. 5. If the density value is within acceptable range of the Target Level (on CR or DR systems, refer to manufacturer’s specifications), press the Calibrate button to save the setting and proceed to AEC kVp Calibration.


Revision W

D-57


6. If density value is too low, decrease the Offset value displayed on the Base OD Calibration screen (Step 2.) by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The Offset value adjustment range is from 500 to 4000. Increase or decrease the Offset value as required, then press Calibrate. 7.

Press Repeat button to re-take exposure.

8. Continue until the measured density value equals the Target Level optical density setting to within DR System manufacturer’s specification. When it does, press Confirm button. The system advances to AEC kVp Calibration. AEC kVp Calibration Procedure The AEC KV Calibration screen (shown below) is used to calibrate the tube voltage to the Base (Target Level) optical density setting. There are a total of six kV calibration points for a 125 kV system (50, 60, 80, 100, 110, and 120 kV); 150 kV systems require an additional two kV calibration points (130 and 140 kV). The image receptor and chamber field settings remain the same as those used in the Base OD Calibration procedure described previously.

Revision W

D-58



1. Access the AEC kVp Calibration Tab (shown below) and proceed as follows.


Figure D-32. Calibration Wizard - AEC kVp Calibration Tab


Revision W

D-59


2. Press the Next button to proceed. The Calibration Wizard - 50 kVp 5cm Calibration screen displays:


Figure D-33. Calibration Wizard - 50 kVp 5cm Calibration 3. Place indicated thickness of acrylic (5 CM for first calibration point) in the X-ray beam. 4. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the Calibration Wizard - 50 kVp 5cm Calibration screen (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, normal density). 5. On film systems, develop the film and then measure its optical density. On CR or DR systems, observe the density level displayed on the integrated system’s workstation computer. 6. Enter the observed density value in the 50 kVp 5cm Calibration screen (Step 1.) by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundreths decimal place. Press the Calibrate button. a. If the density value is within acceptable range of the Target Level (on CR or DR systems, refer to manufacturer’s specifications), press the Confirm button to proceed to the next AEC kVp calibration point. b. If not within range, press the Repeat button to re-take the exposure

Revision W

D-60



and re-enter the observed density value. Continue until the measured density value equals the Target Gray Level setting to within acceptable limits. When it does, press Confirm button. c. 7.

The system advances to Calibration Wizard - 60kVp 10cm Calibration screen.

Repeat the previous steps for the 60, 80, 100, 110, 120, and, if 150 kV system, 130 and 140 kVp calibration points, placing the specified thickness of acrylic in the x-ray beam as indicated on the Calibration Wizard AEC kVp Calibration screen for each kV calibration point, until all the observed density values are within required range.

8. This completes AEC calibration for this particular Receptor/Film Screen. Repeat AEC calibration procedures for all additional Receptor/Film Screens that will be used with the system. 9. Verify AEC calibration by taking several exposures in AEC mode and checking the resulting density value. If necessary, repeat AEC calibration procedure to further adjust AEC accuracy.

Revision W

D-61



Copy Receptor Calibration Tab Typically, the AEC calibration parameters for each of the various Receptors/ Film Screens used with the generator are quite similar. Therefore, the "Copy" function (shown below) can be used to copy calibration parameters from one Receptor/Film Screen to another. For example, after completing AEC calibration of "Wall72" Receptor/Film Screen, the Copy Receptor Calibration function can be used to copy its AEC calibration data to the "Table" receptor.

Figure D-34. Calibration Wizard - Copy Receptor Calibration After copying the "Wall72" AEC Calibration data to "Wall", the only further AEC calibration usually required is performing Base OD Calibration to set the "Offset" value. Similarly, the "Wall" Receptor/Film Screen calibration data can be copied to the "Table", however, the table ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer must be adjusted as required. Be sure to verify the AEC images for each SID/receptor meet applicable regulatory agency requirements. If required, further optical density accuracy can be attained by performing the "AEC kVp Calibration" procedure for each copied receptor. Proceed as follows:

Revision W

D-62



1. On the Calibration wizard - Copy Receptor Calibration screen (Step 1.), select a previously calibrated Receptor/Film Screen to copy calibration data from (touch or click on the down arrow at the right end of source field to display additional choices). For this example, "Wall72" is selected. 2. On the Calibration wizard - Copy Receptor Calibration screen (Step 2.), select the Destination Receptor/Film Screen(s) to copy the calibration data to. CAUTION! Before proceeding, verify the "SOURCE" and "DESTINATION" copy selections are correct. Selecting Copy as directed in the next step will cause calibration data for the destination Receptor/Film Screen to overwrite existing calibration Receptor/ Film Screen data. 3. Press the Copy button. 4. A Copy Results dialogue box will appear to confirm the copy function was executed successfully. Press Ok.

Revision W

D-63



5. The Calibration wizard - Copy Receptor Calibration screen (Step 3.) is displayed (see below). To perform another copy operation, press Yes button and repeat steps above. To exit the copy utility, press No button.

Figure D-35. Calibration Wizard - Copy Receptor Calibration (Step 3)

Revision W

D-64



6. The system displays the Calibration Report screen as in the example shown in Figure D-36.

Figure D-36. Calibration Wizard - Copy Receptor Calibration (Step 3) 7.

The Calibration Report screen should state "All selected calibrations complete", as shown in the sample screen above. If so, press the Exit button to close the calibration wizard.

8. If all selected calibration procedures were not completed, the Calibration report screen will state "Incomplete" and list the procedures not performed. Select Perform another calibration to perform the calibrations, or select Exit to close the calibration wizard.

Revision W

D-65



THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Revision W

D-66


DC30-011 Odyssey_Q-Vision HF Generator Service Manual_Rev W

Recommend Documents